# Handbok för Gnumeric, version 1.12

2012 2010 2009 Andreas J. Guelzow.
2007 2006 2005 2004 Adrian Custer, Ray Dassen, Jody Goldberg, Andreas J. Guelzow, Louis Luangkesorn.
2003 Kevin Breit, Adrian Custer, Ray Dassen, Jody Goldberg, Andreas J. Guelzow, Jon K. Hellan, Jukka-Pekka Iivonen, Alexander Kirillov, Charles Twardy, Sebastian Klost, Thomas Miesbauer.
2002 Jody Goldberg, Andreas J. Guelzow, Wayne Schuller, Adrian Custer, Kevin Breit, Aaron Weber, Alexander Kirillov, Eric Baudais, Gregory Leblanc.
1998 1999 2000 2001 Miguel de Icaza, Thomas Canty, Jukka-Pekka Iivonen, Almer S. Tigelaar, Morten Welinder.
Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Tillstånd att kopiera, distribuera och/eller modifiera detta dokument ges under villkoren i GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), version 1.1 eller senare, utgivet av Free Software Foundation utan standardavsnitt och omslagstexter. En kopia av GFDL finns att hämta på denna länk eller i filen COPYING-DOCS som medföljer denna handbok.

Denna handbok utgör en av flera GNOME-handböcker som distribueras under villkoren i GFDL. Om du vill distribuera denna handbok separat från övriga handböcker kan du göra detta genom att lägga till en kopia av licensavtalet i handboken enligt instruktionerna i avsnitt 6 i licensavtalet.

Många av namnen som används av företag för att särskilja deras produkter och tjänster är registrerade varumärken. I de fall dessa namn förekommer i GNOME-dokumentation - och medlemmarna i GNOME-dokumentationsprojektet är medvetna om dessa varumärken - är de skrivna med versaler eller med inledande versal.

DOKUMENTET OCH MODIFIERADE VERSIONER AV DOKUMENTET TILLHANDAHÅLLS UNDER VILLKOREN I GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE ENDAST UNDER FÖLJANDE FÖRUTSÄTTNINGAR:

1. DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND

2. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Eric Baudais
Kevin Breit
Thomas Canty
Adrian Custer
Ray Dassen
Jody Goldberg
Andreas J. Guelzow
Jon K. Hellan
Miguel de Icaza
Jukka-Pekka Iivonen
Alexander Kirillov
Sebastian Klost
Gregory Leblanc
Louis Luangkesorn
Thomas Miesbauer
Wayne Schuller
Almer S. Tigelaar
Charles Twardy
Aaron Weber
Morten Welinder
Handbok för Gnumeric: Version 1.12
Juli 2012

Gnumeric-utvecklarna

Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Handbok för Gnumeric: Version 1.8
November 2007

Gnumeric-utvecklarna

Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Handbok för Gnumeric: Version 1.4
November 2004

Gnumeric-utvecklarna

Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Handbok för Gnumeric: Version 1.2
September 2002

Gnumeric-utvecklarna

Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Handbok för Gnumeric: Version 1.0
Januari 2002

Gnumeric-utvecklarna

Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Handbok för Gnumeric: Tidigare versioner
1998-2001

Gnumeric-utvecklarna

Dokumentationsprojekt för GNOME

Denna handbok beskriver version 1.12 av Gnumeric

Återkoppling

To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Gnumeric application or this manual, follow the directions in .

Anders Jonsson anders.jonsson@norsjovallen.se
2019 Anders Jonsson

## Välkommen!

Gnumeric is a spreadsheet, a computer program used to manipulate and analyze numeric data. Gnumeric can help you keep track of information in lists, organize numeric values in columns and rows, perform and update complex calculations by defining each step of the calculation and modifying particular steps subsequently, create and display or print graphical plots of data using bar plots, line graphs, pie charts or radar charts, implement complex optimization modeling or perform many other tasks involving numbers, dates, times, names or other data.

The features of Gnumeric make it versatile and powerful. The screenshot (picture) of Gnumeric shown in demonstrates the main program window and some of the features currently available.

An example of what Gnumeric can do.

An image of Gnumeric showing the use of complex formatting and several graphical plots.

An example of Gnumeric, shrunk to fit in this document.

Gnumeric currently supports a full complement of calculation functions, formatting options, graph types and drawing options.

Gnumeric aims to be the best spreadsheet available. It has been developed over many years to become mature and mathematically correct. Gnumeric was created and is maintained by the GNOME project. This manual describes version 1.12 of Gnumeric.

Releases of Gnumeric in the 1.12 series have numbers starting with 1.12 but with extra numbers afterwards, such as 1.12.0 or 1.12.3. These are stable releases which are only changed with minor improvements and fixes for problems (bugs) in the program. These releases can be considered safe for use in a production environment.

The 1.13 series of releases are unstable releases meant for developer testing. If you want a stable release get the most recent release from the 1.12 series.

Goals of Gnumeric

Gnumeric is developed with a specific set of goals in mind.

- Stability

  Gnumeric has undergone significant amounts of testing. A diverse group of users evaluates Gnumeric in a wide variety of environments. Testing workbooks are used to assess the mathematical correctness of the calculations and to validate the quality of the file importers.

- Accuracy

  Calculating the correct answer is important, and Gnumeric has worked hard to surpass the competition. Recent reports indicate that it has done so.

- File compatibility

  Transparent access and manipulation of files from other applications is vital in a modern office. The Gnumeric file format is simply compressed XML which can be decompressed using gunzip, the GNU gzip program's decompression utility, into text. Gnumeric can open files from several well known proprietary and free spreadsheets including MS Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Applix, OpenOffice.org, Psion, Sylk, XBase, Oleo, PlanPerfect, Quattro Pro and HTML. Gnumeric can save files to several versions of the MS Excel file format and can save tables into LaTeX \longtable, HTML, and roff files. Gnumeric also benefits from a highly configurable text importer and exporter which ensures that data can be transferred smoothly, and allows new formats to be added easily as plug-in software routines.

- Minimal cost of transition

  Learning new and unfamiliar interfaces is an expensive and frustrating process. Gnumeric attempts to present itself so that a user's familiarity with other applications will still apply and to offer new features in an intuitive manner.

- Extensive feature set

  Gnumeric now has enough of the features that users expect in a spreadsheet to provide for the vast majority of user needs. However, new features are constantly being added. People often quote the statistic that most users only need 20% of the features of the software they use. This statistic does not mean that only 20% of the features are needed but, rather, that most users share a common need for 10% of the features and require distinct features for the rest of their work. Gnumeric attempts to provide full implementations of the features it offers, leaving features unimplemented until a robust and complete implementation exists.

- Internationalization

  Gnumeric has been translated into 46 languages, and is being used by people around the globe with the symbols and date/monetary conventions appropriate for their local setting.

- Scalability

  The core architecture is designed to ensure that Gnumeric can comfortably scale to moderately large loads (1 million cells) while remaining usable on older hardware.

- Openness

  Gnumeric is free software in the sense of giving its users several freedoms related to the program including the freedoms to use, modify and redistribute the program. These freedoms are explained at the Free Software Foundation web site page on the philosophy of free software. In order to maintain these freedoms for everyone, certain restrictions are required which prevent anyone limiting these freedom for others. Gnumeric is therefore released under a particular license agreement; Gnumeric is licensed under the terms of the GNU GPL.

  One of the consequences of these freedoms, is that everyone can have access to the source code used to create Gnumeric. This code is explicitly maintained and documented to make it easy for anyone to modify in any way they choose. This makes it possible to modify the spreadsheet, write custom routines or extend Gnumeric for special needs.

The Gnumeric 1.13 Series of Releases for Developers

The Gnumeric 1.13 series of releases are developer releases. These releases are kept as stable as possible. However, each release in this series includes changes and improvements some of which may be quite large. These new changes may cause the program to crash and lose data. Do not use these releases if you cannot afford to lose any data or work. However, these releases include many new features that can be helpful. If you use this series, backup your data often, not just by saving files but by renaming them and checking that they can be reopened. If you experience mistakes or crashes while you are using this version, please report these using the GNOME project's bug reporting interface as detailed in .

New features introduced in the Gnumeric 1.12 release series:

The 1.12 series of Gnumeric is primarily a port of Gnumeric to version 3 of the GTK library. It alos includes some other improvements over the versions in the 1.10 series.

- Improved OpenDocument Format (ODF) support

  Both ODF import and export have been improved.

New features introduced in the Gnumeric 1.10 release series:

The 1.10 series of Gnumeric includes numerous improvements over the versions in the 1.8 series.

- Adjustable Sheet Size

  Sheets are no longer restricted to 256 columns of 65536 rows.

- Improved OpenDocument Format Import and Export

  Basic import and export support for the OpenDocument Format ("ODF") format was added, focussing on standard spreadsheet content and charts. Gnumeric also supports nearly all functions in the large group of functions in the current OpenFormula Draft.

- Improved Microsoft OfficeOpenXML import and export

  Import and export of Office Open XML ("OOXML") format files was significantly improved.

- New and Improved Graphs

  New plot types for surfaces and probability plots have been added. Moreover, when an axis is a date or time axis, reasonable places for tick marks will now be picked. Trend lines have also been improved

- Conditional Formatting

  Gnumeric now supports conditional formatting of cells. Gnumeric's conditional formatting supports an arbitrary number of conditions.

- Faster Evaluation

  Evaluation of some fairly common sheets with large numbers of calls to HLOOKUP, or similar functions, over the same database have been improved from “rather slow” to “instant”. Similar improvements have been implemented for farms of RANK or PERCENTILE calls.

- Reduced Memory Usage

  The memory usage for large sheets has been decreased significantly.

- Added Statistical Analysis Tools

  The statistical analysis tools have been improved and there are quite a few new ones, for example Kaplan Meier Estimates, Normality Tests, Principal Component Analysis, Sign Tests, improved Exponential Smoothing, various basic non-parametric tests, etc.

- Improved Sheet Objects

  Support for sheet objects (lines, arrows, widgets, …) has been improved.

New features introduced in the Gnumeric 1.8 release series:

The 1.8 series of Gnumeric includes numerous improvements over the versions in the 1.6 series.

- Improved .gnumeric and export

  Gnumeric now uses the faster SAX based parser by default for parsing `.gnumeric` files. The schema was improved and additional features were added.

- Microsoft OfficeOpenXML import and export

  Basic import and export support for the Office Open XML ("OOXML") format was added, focussing on standard spreadsheet content. Charts and embedded objects are not yet supported.

- New value formatting engine

  Improved compatibility and performance.

- Use new Gtk based Printing

  The printing infrastructure was changed to use Gtk based printing instead of the deprecated libgnomeprint libraries.

- Improved in-cell drop downs

  In cell validation lists, and improved finger feel for autofilters.

New features introduced in the Gnumeric 1.6 release series:

The 1.6 series of Gnumeric included numerous improvements over the versions in the 1.4 series.

- Better Charting:

  Several new types of charts have been added, and many features, such as regression lines, have been added.

- Improved Accuracy:

  While Gnumeric 1.4 was already the best available source for accuracy in statistical calculations, Gnumeric 1.6 is even better. We are continuing our behind-the-scenes cooperation with The R Project to make this happen. We have also added a new plugin supplying consistently named probability density, cumulative density, and reverse cumulative density functions to Gnumeric. The new function names mirror their R counterparts.

- The Port to Microsoft Operating Systems

  Our "Windows" port is now mature enough for everyday use. We have improved the theming support of our custom widgets, so Gnumeric now looks and feels slightly more like a native application. The build might still have a few rough edges, but those are being worked on.

- Right-to-Left Support:

  We now support right-to-left orientation of the sheets as well as for text within cells.

New features introduced in the Gnumeric 1.4 release series:

The 1.4 series of Gnumeric included numerous improvements over the versions in the 1.2 series.

- The Port to Microsoft Operating Systems

  The port of the core of Gnumeric to the GTK+ libraries will enable the application to be run on the series of operating systems sold by Microsoft and colloquially known as "Windows".

- Improved Analytics

  The analytical correctness of Gnumeric is a primary concern of the team. The precision and correctness of the analytics are constantly being evaluated and improved. Updated versions of the solver libraries (lp_solve and GLPK) were added.

- Improved Charting

  The graphical system is improving rapidly with new types of graphs, such as radar plots. There is now support for error bars and additional styles. The plots also look significantly sharper on screen, and off thanks to some pixel tuning. The axes now support various mappings (logarithmic, inverse), and there are a wider selection of markers. There is also support for formatting individual points in a plot.

- Rich Text In Cells

  The ability to use Rich Text has been added in this version. This allows a single cell to contain text with mixed formatting including bold, italic and other formats.

- Improved Microsoft Excel Compatibility

  The file format used by the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet is commonly used to exchange spreadsheet documents. The Gnumeric team spends a considerable effort reverse engineering that file format to ensure that Gnumeric can read and write files in that format. This release now supports all forms of 'array formula' and adds export support for charts, rich text, and images. More compatibility accelerator keys were added to simplify transition, and improve the finger feel. There is better support for hyperlinks.

- Printing

  Using Pango throughout the printing subsystem improves the consistency between on screen and resulting paper.

- Improved Analytics:

  This version of Gnumeric includes 470 sheet functions including all of the functions from the North American edition of Microsoft Excel 2000 (TM). This version also includes numerous new functions and statistical routines imported from the R statistical language, from the GNU Scientific Library, and from other sources. The random number generation has been updated to include Beta, Cauchy, Chi-Squared, Exponential power F, Gamma, Geometric, Laplace, Levy alpha-Stable Logarithmic, Logistic, Log-normal, Pareto, Rayleigh Rayleigh tail, T, Type I Gumbel, Type II Gumbel, Weibull Gaussian Tail, Landau, and Uniform integer distributions. The derivative valuation routines have been expanded to include Black-Scholes (and sensitivities), Garman Kohlhagen, Merton Jump Diffusion process, Bjerksund and Stensland (American options), Forward Starts, Simple and Complex Choosers, Exchange Options, options on future spreads, and most favourable state payouts. The solver has been improved with new linear and quadratic programming routines. There were improvements in the T-Test, Z-Test, and F-Test. More accuracy for GEOMDIST, BINOMDIST, BETADIST, BETAINV, FINV, CAUCHY, FDIST, FTEST, HYPGEOMDIST, ERF, FISHER, EFFECT, NOMINAL, MIRR, IRR, XNPV, NPV, PMT, RATE, PV, FV, IPMT, PPMT, ZTEST, EXPM1, LN1P.

- Import/Export

  The xml exporter is now much faster and lighter for `.gnumeric` files, and the GNOME enabled Gnumeric supports gnome-vfs and drag-n-drop images and files.

- GTK+ Port

  One of the principal aims of this developers series is to make Gnumeric work using only the GTK+ libraries. These libraries, following their 2.4.0 release, have all the functionality needed for the core of Gnumeric. This work will remove all dependencies in the core code on GNOME libraries although a version with the more complete features included in GNOME will still exist.

The 1.4.x release is dedicated to the memory of lost colleagues, Chema (Grandma) Celorio who helped make Gnumeric as stable as it is, and Mel Seder who kept us smiling. They'll be missed.

For more details on the changes in Gnumeric, refer to the file; named NEWS in the source code distribution.

Known Issues in Gnumeric:

The current list of all known and reported problems with Gnumeric is maintained in the GNOME bugzilla database. This list can be accessed using this bugzilla query.

## How to Use This Manual

There are several ways to use this manual depending on what kind of user you are.

- New users

  If you are new to computers or to spreadsheets consider reading , titled "A Quick Introduction", which explains the basics of spreadsheets in general and Gnumeric in particular.

- Users who want specific help

  Quickly finding help for a particular question can be quite hard. We suggest first reading the explanations of the contents of each chapter which are given below to try to figure out where your question might be answered, and then go directly to that section.

The chapters of this version of the Gnumeric manual are organized as follows:

- : A Quick Introduction

  The best way to learn how to use Gnumeric is to begin exploring the program yourself. This chapter will help you get started trying new things and seeing what happens. The chapter explains the fundamentals of spreadsheets in general and of Gnumeric in particular. The chapter attempts to help new users get started with Gnumeric and provides background for the more detailed explanations given in the rest of the manual.

- : Gnumeric Elements

  This chapter describes all of the pieces of Gnumeric which a user can manipulate. The chapter provides explanations for each of the menus, menu entries, toolbar buttons and other elements of the graphical user interface.

- : Working with Data

  This chapter explains the core functionality of Gnumeric including the basic types of data manipulated by Gnumeric, the methods of entering, altering and formatting data, and the basic tools for analysis of these data. More advanced analysis is described in .

- : Advanced Analysis

  This chapter explains the advanced analytic tools available in Gnumeric including linear algebra calculations, the goal seek tool, simulation analysis, and scenarios.

- : The Solver

  This chapter explains how to use Gnumeric's linear programming Solver.

- : Statistical Analysis

  This chapter explains the various statistical analysis tools available in Gnumeric including tools to create descriptive statistics, as well as parametric and non-parametric hypotheses tests.

- : Graphics: Images, Widgets, and Drawings

  This chapter explains how to add graphical elements to a Gnumeric worksheet, including images from external files, graphical user interface widgets which interact with worksheet data, and simple drawing elements.

- : Graphs

  This chapter explains how to add data graphs to a Gnumeric worksheet, that can be used to plot worksheet data.

- : Using Worksheets

  This chapter explains the use and manipulation of worksheets in Gnumeric. The chapter explains how to move around a worksheet, how to alter the appearance and display organization of the worksheet contents, how to manipulate entire worksheets and how to protect worksheet contents.

- : Workbook Settings

  This chapter explains the contents of a Gnumeric workbook which are not part of the worksheets. This includes several settings which apply to the workbook and are saved in the Gnumeric file. Settings which apply to the Gnumeric program itself are called `preferences' and are explained in .

- : Configuring Gnumeric

  This chapter explains how to change the default behaviour of Gnumeric including the startup behaviour and default locale (language and number display).

- : Working with Files

  This chapter explains how to use files in Gnumeric. The chapter provides an extensive description of the file formats used by Gnumeric. The chapter also explains how to open files, import data from text files, save files, export data to text files, send data to others via electronic mail, and convert files from one format to another.

- : Printing

  This chapter explains how to print spreadsheets, tables and plots from Gnumeric to a printer directly or into PostScript or PDF (both are page description languages).

- : Getting More Help

  This chapter describes other sources of help which are available to users including the Gnumeric web site, the mailing list, and the internet relay chat (IRC) discussion channel. The chapter also explains how to tell the project about a problem with the program.

- : Reporting a Problem

  This chapter explains how to report a problem with Gnumeric so that the problem can be fixed. The same procedure can be used to file a report requesting an enhancement or a new feature.

- : Extending Gnumeric

  This chapter explains how to go about extending Gnumeric to provide extra functionality. Because Gnumeric is Free Software this is quite easy to do.

- : Function Reference

  This appendix provides a list of all the functions which are currently defined in Gnumeric.

- : Keybinding Reference

  This appendix lists the keyboard shortcuts which are defined by default in Gnumeric.

## A Quick Introduction

The best way to learn how to use Gnumeric is to begin exploring the program yourself. This chapter will help you get started trying new things and seeing what happens. The chapter explains the fundamentals of spreadsheets in general and of Gnumeric in particular. The chapter attempts to help new users get started with Gnumeric and provides background for the more detailed explanations given in the rest of the manual.

Getting started with computers

Unfortunately, this manual cannot teach you the very basics of interacting with a modern computer. If you have never used computers, don't know the names of the hardware components (the pieces you can touch) or don't know the names of the elements you see on the screen (like windows or the mouse pointer), you will probably want to get some basic advice from someone you know or read the manuals which came with your machine or your operating system. It's all pretty easy but, in order to understand this manual, you will need to know some basic terminology and have some basic computing skills.

If you are using the GNOME desktop environment, you can read the the GNOME Desktop User Guide for help in getting started with computers.

If you are using the another desktop environment such as KDE or another operating system, please see the instructions from the web site linked with either your desktop environment, your operating system, your software distribution source or the people who provided you with your computer. There are also many books providing good introduction to computers.

### Working with Gnumeric

Using a spreadsheet generally involves several steps. First the application is started to obtain an empty workbook, which generally has several empty worksheets. Next, data and formulas are entered into one or several sheets. The data may be entered by hand or imported from external files. The formulas are generally entered by hand, possibly with the help of various tools. The data may be formatted to appear in particular ways and to clarify the structure of the data in the worksheet. A user may also create several graphical plots. Certain parts of the spreadsheets may be printed out as tables. The work is then usually saved into a file which can be re-opened later to add or modify the contents of the workbook.

A spreadsheet file contains a workbook and possibly some other information about the file. Because a spreadsheet file contains exactly one workbook, the files themselves are often called workbooks. A workbook contains one or more worksheets. A worksheet consists of a number of cells, usually arranged in a two dimensional grid made up of columns and rows. We introduce the names of the parts of Gnumeric in and explain the parts further in .

### Starting Gnumeric the First Time

Gnumeric can be started in several ways, depending on your computer operating system and desktop environment. The approaches described below are equivalent; they result in a Gnumeric window appearing on your monitor as shown below.

The Gnumeric spreadsheet when first opened

This screenshot depicts Gnumeric when first opened.

We assume that Gnumeric is already installed on your machine. Installing Gnumeric depends on the particular operating system and distribution used on your machine and is therefore beyond the scope of this manual. If Gnumeric is not already installed on your machine, read the manuals that came with your distribution or look at your distribution vendor's web site.

#### Starting Gnumeric from the GNOME desktop

If you are a GNOME user, you should have a ‘panel’ somewhere on your desktop. This panel contains icons and at least two menus. One of these menus is called Applications and has an icon which looks like the outline of a foot. If you click on this menu name, a menu will appear. Drag the cursor down to the Office sub-menu name, and a sub-menu will appear. Drag the cursor into the sub-menu and then release the mouse button when the cursor is on the entry which reads "Gnumeric Spreadsheet." This will start the program and the main window of Gnumeric will appear as shown in .

#### Starting Gnumeric from another *NIX desktop

If you run a UNIX-like operating system (called *NIX in this manual) such as GNU/Linux, GNU on some other kernel, or a commercial UNIX (TM) system, or if you use a commercially distributed version of GNOME, KDE (K Desktop Environment), or a similar desktop system, you will have to find a way to launch Gnumeric yourself. Hunt around the menus until you find something named "Gnumeric", possibly with the

This image depicts the menu icon of Gnumeric.

icon, and then click on that menu entry.

On UNIX-like operating systems, Gnumeric requires the X window system to run.

#### Starting Gnumeric from a *NIX terminal

You can also start Gnumeric from the command line in an xterm window or equivalent terminal emulator. Open a terminal. At the shell prompt type:

    gnumeric &

This will start the program and send it into the background, which means that you can run other commands in the terminal window or close it while Gnumeric runs in its own window.

On UNIX-like operating systems, you must be running the X window system to run Gnumeric.

#### Starting Gnumeric from a Microsoft desktop

Gnumeric, starting with the 1.4 series, can be run as a native application on the Microsoft Windows operating systems. On those operating systems, The Start menu should contain an entry which will launch Gnumeric. The actual location of the menu item depends on the choices made during installation.

##### Starting Gnumeric from a Microsoft command prompt

You can also start Gnumeric from a shell window by finding the directory with the program itself which will be called `gnumeric.exe`. You can either move to that directory and type:

    gnumeric

or you can type the whole name of the path and file, which will be something like:

    c:\Program Files\Gnome-Office\gnumeric

either of which should start the program.

#### Starting from a Spreadsheet file

Gnumeric can also be opened using a spreadsheet file directly. If there is a spreadsheet file on the desktop or in a file manager like Nautilus, it may be possible to click or double-click with the mouse pointer on the file and have Gnumeric open the file automatically. Alternatively, you may be able to right click on the file and get a pop-up menu that will allow you to select Gnumeric as the application to use to open the file.

#### Other sources of help

If you are still stuck, ask a friend or someone who knows your machine. Unfortunately, getting started is often the hardest part of learning to use a new program but it is also the one place a manual such as this one cannot really help.

### The Parts of Gnumeric

After opening, Gnumeric appears as was shown in but is shown below with the major components labeled. The open application contains a menubar at the top, two toolbars below the menu bar, and below these, on the left, the object toolbar, and, on the right, the data entry area above the cell grid area which itself is above the list of worksheets and the information area.

The parts of Gnumeric

The part names are listed below along with a reference to the section that discusses that element. If you are reading this document on a computer, you may be able to click on a reference to jump to that section of the manual.

1 The menubar

  The menubar provides access to the core functions of GNOME. Almost everything that you can do in Gnumeric you can do through the menus. We discuss the menus and menubar in .

2 The standard toolbar

  The standard toolbar provides shortcuts for the most used items in the menus. We discuss the toolbars in and this toolbar in particular in .

3 The format toolbar

  The format toolbar changes the display properties of data in the workbook. We present it in , part of the general discussion of toolbars in .

4 The object toolbar

  This toolbar enables you to draw graphic elements on the sheet, such as text labels, big red circles or thin green arrows. You can use these to bring attention to a particular part of a worksheet. We explain the object toolbar in in the portion of this manual.

5 The data entry area

  The data entry area is useful for the modification of complex formulas. We discuss it in .

6 The cell grid area

  The cell area lies in the middle of all the rest. The cell area includes the row and column labels, the scrollbars and the tabs below. We explain the use of these elements in .

7 The information area

  This area is used by Gnumeric to give you feedback on the status of certain operations. We explain this information in .

For a detailed explanation of each of these elements, see .

By default, Gnumeric opens a workbook with three worksheets and a file name of `Book1.gnumeric`.

### Using Commands

You can access the commands provided by Gnumeric using several methods. These methods are explained here. The most important commands are explained in the rest of this chapter. We explain all of the commands in later chapters of this manual.

#### Using Menu Commands

The menus provide the simplest way for you to get to all of the commands provided by Gnumeric. These menus work like those in any GNOME application: you click on the menu to open it, you drag the mouse cursor onto the menu and then release the mouse button (or click again) while the cursor is above a menu entry to execute that command. For further information, see .

#### Using Toolbar Button Commands

The buttons on the toolbars are quite simple to use. You simply place the mouse cursor above one of the buttons and press the left mouse button to perform the command and it will either execute immediately or open a dialog window to obtain further information first. For further information on the toolbar button commands, see .

#### Using Context Menu Commands

In many situations, Gnumeric provides a menu right under the mouse cursor if the right hand mouse button is clicked. This menu contains different entries depending on where the mouse cursor is when you click the right hand mouse button. For further information, see .

#### Using Keyboard Shortcut Commands

You can trigger certain common commands by using a combination of keys. The menu entries are often followed by a combination of keys which you can use to trigger that command. For instance, to save the file which you are currently using, you can jointly type the control key and the s key (i.e. Ctrl S). For further information, see .

### Data in Gnumeric

The main purpose of spreadsheets like Gnumeric is to collect information in a coherent manner, perform calculations on the information and then be able to update those calculations easily if the original numbers change. The use of a spreadsheet therefore requires a substantial understanding of the types of information which can be entered into the spreadsheet and the methods which can be used to manipulate that information. This section explains how you can use data in Gnumeric.

#### The Types of Data in a Spreadsheet

Spreadsheets like Gnumeric treat information by separating the data into separate cells and considering the data in each cell to be separate elements. Each cell in the spreadsheet has both a value, which is what Gnumeric manipulates, and a representation, which is what is actually shown. Understanding this distinction is complicated and make take some time if you are new to spreadsheets. This distinction between value and representation is one of the reasons spreadsheets are so useful.

The cells of the spreadsheet are contained in the cell grid area. The cell grid area is the area with a white background and grey grid lines. The grid lines separate this area into separate cells. Each cell has a unique reference name which is the combination of the letters of the name of the column and the number of the row. For instance, the top, leftmost cell is the cell named "A1" and the cell two over to the right and four rows down is named "C4" because it is in the column labelled "C" and in the fourth row. Each of these cells can contain only one single datum.

The datum contained in any cell will have one of five types: a text string type, a number type, a formula type, a boolean type or an error type. These five types of data values can then have various display formats so that, for instance, a number value can be displayed as a number, a monetary amount, a date or a time. Text strings are sequences of characters and punctuation marks and could, for example, contain textual information such as people's names. Number values are simply numbers but may be input and displayed in various formats including decimal numbers, dates, times, and numbers in scientific notation. Formulas are instructions to Gnumeric to calculate a result. The power of spreadsheets comes from these formulas because the results of the calculation can depend on the contents of other cells. Boolean values are either TRUE or FALSE and can be used in logical statements. Error values are usually the result of mistakes or impossible calculations.

For more advanced information on the types of data usable in Gnumeric, see .

#### Putting Data into the Spreadsheet

In order to enter data into the spreadsheet, you must first select a cell in which to place the information and then actually type the information on the keyboard. Once you have entered the information, Gnumeric attempts to figure out both the appropriate data value type to assign to the cell and the appropriate data format in which to display this data value. Because this process is quite complex, you may occasionally need to actively select these parameters of the cells, which we explain in below. The next two sections explain how to get data into a cell, by first moving the selection box to a desired cell and then typing the data.

##### Moving the selection box

In order to enter data into Gnumeric you must place the selection box over the appropriate cell. The selection box appears on the cell grid as a double lined rectangle with a small grey square in the lower right corner of the box. By default the selection box surrounds the top, leftmost cell in the cell grid area.

The simplest way to move the selection box is to use the mouse. If the mouse cursor is placed over the cell "C3" (the cursor will be represented as a thick white cross) and the left mouse button then clicked, the selection box will move to cell "C3". Note that the selection box can cover more than one cell if the mouse is dragged while being clicked. The use of these larger selections is explained below in .

The location of the selection box also causes the column and row headers to change slightly. The letters and numbers turn bold, and colors of the headers (the text color and the header background color) change in ways that depend on the version of Gnumeric. This helps indicate what is currently selected.

You can also move the selection box with the keyboard arrow keys. For instance, typing the right arrow twice and the down arrow once will move the selection box from the cell "C3" to the cell "E4".

The selection box can be moved in other ways and will move in response to certain actions. These movements become intuitive after using Gnumeric for a little while.

##### Data input

To enter data into a selected cell, you can simply start typing. The characters will then become part of the spreadsheet when you change the selection either by pressing the Enter key, which moves the selection down one cell, by pressing the Tab key, which moves the selection one cell to the right, or by selecting any other cell with the mouse. If the cursor is in the cell and not in the data entry area, pressing any of the cursor movement keys also causes Gnumeric to record the data in the cell and select another cell.

For example, you could use the mouse to select the cell four columns over (Column D) and three rows down (Row 3). Then you could type "Hello, this is a line of text." and then press the Enter key. The text would then appear in cell "D3" and, if the cells to the right are empty, would span into those cells so that the whole entry is visible. The selection box moves to cell “D4” when you press Enter, ready for the input of more data.

Note that as the data text is entered it appears in both the cell and the data entry area (the area below the toolbars and to the right of the equals (=) sign).

You can correct mistakes you make during data entry by using the Backspace key or the Delete key. Finer control can be obtained if the cursor is moved to the data entry area by clicking with the mouse in the box to the right of the equals (=) sign. Editing in the data entry area lets you use the arrow keys to move backward and forward in the text. You can also use the mouse to move the cursor.

To change the contents of a cell, select the cell again and either type the new contents or edit the existing contents of the cell in the data entry area.

If the content of the cell is too large for the size of the cell, the entry may span over the edge of the cell into the empty cells to the right. If the cell is a number, the cell grid area may display hash marks (######) to indicate the cell has content which is too large to display in the given cell width.

##### Automatic data recognition

As you enter data into the spreadsheet, Gnumeric interprets the information in order, first, to assign it to a data category and, second, to give it an appropriate data display format. The entry will be assigned to one of the basic data types and possibly to a sub-type. Entries which start with an apostrophe (') are considered to be text no matter what the rest of the contents. Entries which start with an equals sign (=) are automatically considered to be a formula. Entries which are single numbers or which fall into commonly used patterns for dates or times will be considered to be numbers.

Gnumeric usually figures out correctly both the type and the appropriate display format for the data being entered. Occasionally, you will have to force Gnumeric to consider the data to be a different data type than Gnumeric would guess by default. We explain the details of this process in greater detail in the extended chapter on data, .

##### Entering text

To enter text, select the appropriate cell, type the text, and then press the Enter key. If the text is too large to fit in its own cell, and the cell to its right is empty, the text will span into the cell on the right. By default, Gnumeric uses a display format for text in which the contents are shown left justified.

For more information about text elements, see .

##### Entering numbers

To enter a number, select the appropriate cell, type in the number and then press the Enter key. Gnumeric recognizes several types of information to be numbers.

The simplest kind of input which Gnumeric recognizes as numbers are standard numeric values. Technically, these are contiguous sequences of digits which may have a separator symbol between the thousands and another symbol indicating the decimal separator. These symbols follow the English convention by default (comma as thousand separator, period as decimal symbol) but will adopt the symbols appropriate for a different locality if Gnumeric is launched in a particular way (see ). For instance, in a French setting the period is the thousand separator symbol and the comma the decimal separator symbol. By default, Gnumeric displays numeric values lined up against the right side of the cell.

Several other types of input are recognized as numeric values which means that calculations can be performed on the values in the cells.

- Dates in the standard format of the locale (see ) are recognized as numbers. By default, 11/21/1970 will be recognized as the twenty-first of November of the year nineteen seventy. Gnumeric stores the value as the number of days since the first day of January in 1900.

- Time values, such as 10:34 or 11:23:45 PM, are recognized as number values. These values are stored in Gnumeric as fractions of the whole day.

- You can input percentage values simply by appending the percent symbol (%) to the value.

- Fractions and mixed numbers are recognized as numbers. For example, “1 1/2” is equivalent to 1.5. Note that a simple fraction, such as “3/12”, may be interpreted by Gnumeric as a date. You can prevent that by including a sign (for example, “+3/12”) or by entering the fraction as a formula (“=3/12”).

- You can also input numeric values using scientific notation. For instance, 1.003e+6 will be recognized as the value one million three thousand.

For more information on numbers, see .

##### Entering a Boolean

To enter a boolean value, select the appropriate cell, type in either "TRUE" or "FALSE" and then press the Enter key.

##### Entering a formula

To enter a formula, select a cell and type the equals sign (=) followed by a valid formula. If Gnumeric cannot understand the formula which is entered, it will open a dialog box which may have an explanation and gives you a chance either to re-edit the expression or to accept the entry as a text entry instead of a formula. The second choice makes it easy to re-edit the entry into a valid formula simply by fixing the formula and removing the leading apostrophe (') before the equals sign.

Formulas can be quite complex since the power of spreadsheets comes from these formulas. A simple example of the use of a formula is as follows: first, select cell B2 and input the value "3" into that cell. Second, select cell D4 and input (without the quotes) "=B2+2" and then type the Enter key. Cell D4 should display the value "5". If the value of cell B2 is changed from "3" to "100", Gnumeric will automatically update the value of cell D4 to "102".

A valid formula can be a simple arithmetic expression such as

    =3+4-1

which uses a formula to make the cell equal to the value 6.

Formulas may include calls to functions. These are statements which indicate that more complex operations should be performed. For instance, a formula could be "=EXP(24)" which would give the value of e (the base of the natural logarithm) raised to the 24th power. The cell would then display "2.6489e+10".

Certain functions return not just a single value but an array of values. To enter such a function, first select a range of cells to receive the result, then enter the formula to generate the array, and then press the key combination Ctrl Shift Enter rather than just the Enter key. For more details see .

As was shown in the example above, formulas may contain references to the contents of another cell. In the example given above, the contents of the cell in the second column and the second row was used in a calculation by using the cell name "B2". These references mean that complex calculations can be automatically updated when one of the original values change.

You can make references to the cells in other worksheets and even to those in other workbooks (files). The basic format of a complete reference is made of the name of the file the reference is in, enclosed by square brackets, followed by the name of the sheet, followed by an exclamation point, followed by the letter(s) of the column name, followed by the number of the row. For example, a complete reference could be "[my_file.gnumeric]Sheet3!C3". These complete references can be shortened if the filename or sheet names are the same as that of the reference. "AE34" would refer to the cell in the current file, in the current worksheet which is in column "AE" and in row "34".

References can identify a contiguous range of cells. For instance, the reference "A1:E5" refers to all the cells from the top left corner of the current sheet to the cell five rows down and five rows over. This can be useful in a formula which uses a function such as MAX(). The formula "=MAX(A1:E5)" would display the value of the largest number value in this range of cells.

For more information on references see the complete discussion in later on in this manual.

For more on the use of formulas see later in this manual. For a list of the functions available, see the function reference appendix, , or click on the toolbar button with the symbol "f(x)" on it for an organized list of functions.

##### Entering an error value

Error values are almost never entered into the spreadsheet directly but generally arise when formulas cannot calculate valid results. The only error value occasionally entered is "#N/A". It can be either typed in directly or created via "=na()".

### Cell Formats

The data in Gnumeric are stored in the cells of the spreadsheet, each of which has a cell format which dictates how the data will be displayed, whether the cell will have borders and other information. Cell formatting can be quite confusing at first because it combines simple changes, such as the colour of the characters being displayed, with more complex ideas, such as how future changes to the cell will be interpreted.

All of the cell formatting commands can be reached through a context menu by right clicking on a cell and selecting the Format Cells... menu entry. This will open a dialog window with tabs which group together similar types of formatting. Clicking on the Font tab allows you to change the font family, style, size and colour. For instance, if the cell B2 contained the text "Hello, this is my first spreadsheet" then you can make this text bigger by selecting a larger font size.

#### Simple Cell Formatting

Simple changes to the format of a cell include changing the alignment of the characters, changing the font type or colour, changing the border, and changing the colour or pattern of the background.

The Alignment, Font, Border, and Background tabs are simple to understand simply by playing around with the settings and looking at the effect on a cell which contains text.

The Protection and Validation tabs are advanced functionality which you can ignore at the beginning. For explanations of these tabs, see the advanced description in .

#### Formatting the Display and Entry Data Types

Cell formats are most difficult to understand when they address the type of data stored and the visual display of that data. This only arises with the options selected in the Number tab of the Format Cells dialog. While these ideas are complex, you need to understand them early on as they are fundamental to spreadsheet use.

When you enter data into Gnumeric, the spreadsheet interprets the entry based on the input format of the cell. The default format of empty cells is the General format which instructs Gnumeric to guess both the type of the data being entered and a suitable display format for that data type. However, you can change the General format to a specific format in order to alter both the way Gnumeric interprets any future data input to the cell and the way data in the cell are displayed.

Changing the format does not alter the data type of data already in a cell but does alter the display format of that data. This means that the input format will only affect future input whereas the display format will affect both the data currently in the cell and any data placed later into the cell.

For example, if you enter "12/25/2000" (without the quotes), Gnumeric guesses that this is a date and stores the value (serial number) 36885. (Usually, the value Gnumeric uses for dates is the number of days since January 1st, 1900.)

For the sake of compatibility with Excel, Gnumeric also assigns a serial number to February 29th, 1900 as if 1900 had been a leap year even though it was not. So February 28th, 1900 has the serial number 59 and March 1st, 1900 the serial number 61. If you try to format the serial number 60 as a date, Gnumeric recognizes that that date does not exist and shows a sequence of # symbols.

At the same time, Gnumeric changes the display format to display this number as a date, with a numeric month, day and year, separated by slashes.

The order in which the formatting operations occur is critical. It is not possible to alter the type of a datum currently in a cell by formatting. To alter the interpretation of the data type in a cell, formatting must occur prior to the entry of the data.

It sometimes becomes necessary to override the "General" type if Gnumeric is making an incorrect assessment of the data being entered. Postal Zip Codes in the United States, for instance, are incorrectly interpreted to be numbers. Some of these Zip Codes start with a leading zero which the "General" format type drops so the user must intervene to keep that zero displayed. In order to input these Zip Codes, the following steps must be performed. First, the cell must be selected. Next, the cell must be formatted to hold a "Text" value. This formatting changes both the interpretation of any future data entry into this cell and alters the display formatting of the cell. Finally, the Zip Code can be entered. Following these steps, the data value will be considered to be a "Text" value, any leading zeros will be retained and the data will be left justified since this is the default display format for "Text" values.

If you need to alter the data type of a whole column prior to data entry, you can do this in one formatting operation. You can click the right mouse button on the column header (the letters at the top) and select Format 1 Column from the context menu, or you can first select the whole column by clicking on the column header, then selecting the Format menu and the Cells... menu entry. This quick approach to pre-formatting cells can be done for any group of selected cells.

### Complex Cell Selections

Selections can be more complex than a single cell at a time. Selections may describe a continuous rectangular block of cells, an arbitrary shaped group of cells or even a discontinuous group of cells.

The most common way to select a continuous rectangular block of cells uses a click and drag mouse motion. You can select the cells in this continuous block by clicking and holding the left mouse button down on one of the corner cells (for instance, the top, leftmost cell) and dragging the mouse cursor to the opposite corner (for instance, the bottom, rightmost cell) before releasing. The selection box will expand to include all of the cells in this range.

The most common way to select an arbitrary shaped or discontinuous group of cells is to hold down the Ctrl key while using the mouse to select cells. If the cell containing the mouse cursor when you click is not part of the selection, it is added, as are any other cells enclosed in the selection box when the mouse button is released. If the cell initially containing the mouse cursor is already selected, the click or click-and-drag action instead removes all the enclosed cells from the selection. As long as you hold the Ctrl key down, all of the cells included by a click or a click and drag motion will be added to or removed from the selection.

For example, to perform an operation on all the cells in a square area except those on its diagonal, begin by clicking and dragging to select the square area. Next press and hold the Ctrl key and click on each of the cells on the diagonal, removing them from the selection. You could now use Format ▶ Cells ▶ Format... to apply a format change to all but the diagonal elements of the square area.

There are several operations which cannot be performed with odd shaped or discontinuous groups of cells.

For more information and other ways to select multiple cells, see the complete discussion in .

### Moving Cell Contents, Inserting New Cells or Deleting Cells

The contents of cells, both data values and formatting, can be moved from one part of a spreadsheet to another so that data do not have to be re-entered if the spreadsheet is reorganized. New cells can be added to a spreadsheet and old cells removed but these latter operations cause the layout of the spreadsheet to be altered.

#### Moving Cell Contents

The simplest way to move cell contents around a spreadsheet involves selecting a block of cells containing the contents to be moved, either "cutting" or "copying" those cells, selecting the location where these contents are to be moved and then pasting the data.

Moving data can only be performed with a single selection of cells which means that only continuous rectangular blocks of cells can be moved. This does mean, however, that columns or rows can be moved as a unit. By default, Gnumeric moves the entire contents of the cells including both the data values and the formatting of the cells.

Once you have selected a group of cells, they can be "cut" or "copied" either using the Edit menu, the toolbar buttons (a pair of scissors or two pieces of paper, respectively), the right mouse button context menu or keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl X or Ctrl C respectively). If cells are "cut" the contents will be removed from the current location. If cells are "copied", the contents will be duplicated in the new location. These two operations treat cell references in formulas slightly differently. If cells are "cut", any references in the cells in the new location will remain pointed at the original cells. If cells are "copied", the references in the cells in the new location will point to cells in the same relative position.

You can select the new location for the cells in two ways. The simplest is to select the top, left cell of the new location. Alternatively, you can select the whole new range of cells but the shape of this new range must match exactly the dimensions of the original range which is more difficult.

Finally you can "paste" the cell contents in the new location using either the Edit menu Paste menu entry, the toolbar button with a clipboard, the context menu Paste menu entry or the Ctrl V keyboard shortcut.

An alternative way to move cells in a current worksheet involves dragging and dropping the original selection. You select the cells to be moved as above. You then place the mouse cursor on the thick white selection border. If you click and hold the left hand button, you can drag the selected cells to a new location resulting in the same operation as a "cut" and a "paste". If you hold down the Ctrl key during the click and drag of the mouse, the result is the same as a "copy" and "paste" operation and can be repeated several times.

Both the Edit menu and the context menu have an extra menu entry called Paste Special... which can be used during a cut and paste operation to selectively transfer some of the original cell contents or to alter the contents in specific ways. This option allows the transfer of only the cell contents, only the cell formats or only the calculated values of the cells. The transferred contents can also be mathematically combined with the current contents of cells in the new location. Alternatively, the selection can be transposed. See for more information on the Paste Special... command.

#### Inserting and Deleting Cells

A worksheet can also be altered by inserting or by deleting cells. These operations actually alter the locations of cells in a workbook.

Inserting and deleting columns and rows are easy to understand. If you select a group of columns or rows, selecting the Column or Row menu entries in the Insert menu will add the same number of columns to the left of the selected columns or of rows above the selected rows. You can also use the context menu for the insert operation. The context menu can be used to delete the currently selected columns or rows.

Insert operations can result in the loss of data if the last columns or rows currently contain information.

Individual cells or contiguous rectangular blocks of cells can also be inserted and deleted. During this operation, you are asked which way to shift the current cells to allow the insertion or deletion of the selected cells. The movement can be along the rows or along the columns and will result in the relative movement of cells which were previously contiguous. This shift is the fundamental difference between insert and delete operations compared to cut or copy and paste operations.

### Sheets

The worksheets in a workbook can be altered in several ways. The name of a particular worksheet can be altered. New sheets can be added. A current sheet can be duplicated or removed. The sheets can be reordered. Other sheets operations can alter the colour of the tabs or change the "protection" status of a worksheet to allow cells to be locked or hidden.

To change the name of a worksheet, right-click on its tab to access the Worksheets context menu and select Rename. Edit the New Name field and click on OK to set the new worksheet name.

You can insert a new empty sheet after the current sheet through the Sheet menu entry in the Insert menu or through the context menu which appears when you click the right mouse button on a tab.

Instead of an empty sheet, you can add a copy of the current worksheet to the workbook after the current sheet by selecting the Duplicate menu entry from the context menu.

You can remove the current sheet using the Remove menu entry from the context menu.

You can re-order worksheets from the Manage Sheets dialog.

Many of these operations can be performed at once from the Manage Sheets dialog which can be opened through the Manage Sheets... menu entry in either the Sheet submenu in the Edit menu or in the sheet tab's context menu.

### Graphing

A major function of moderns spreadsheets is to provide a quick and easy way to plot numerical data in graphical charts of various kinds. The use of graphs provides users a way to explore data to discover relationships and trends in the data values. Graphs also provide an effective way to present data so as to demonstrate relationships in the data and summarize large amounts of data in an effective image. In Gnumeric, both of these can be done easily and efficiently. Information on the creation of graphical displays of data is presented in greater detail in .

When graphs are used to explore data, the aim is usually to produce a plot quickly with a minimum of effort. These plots are not designed to look polished but must present the required information as quickly as possible. To produce these graphs, users must learn a simple series of operations which will produce the desired plots. For speed, the most critical operation involves selecting the cells on the spreadsheet which will be used as data before starting the graphing process.

Graphs which are used to present data must be carefully crafted to communicate effectively. Clarity of communication is the critical factor and the plot may include a large amount of work to ensure that the visual result of the plot helps to communicate the desired result.

The use of a graph may not be the best way to communicate information. A verbal explanation or a simple table are often sufficient and, because they are more compact, may be more effective ways to communicate.

Gnumeric includes a large number of features which allow users to craft the look of a particular graph to maximize the effectiveness of the presentation. In Gnumeric, it is possible to change the fonts, modify the borders of each element, add patterns and images to backgrounds, add patterns to plot elements and configure the graph in multiple ways. These features will be explained in detail below.

Graphs which use a large number of the graphical features available in Gnumeric often appear cluttered. The visual richness of such images can often obscure the message contained in the presentation of the data. Sparse, elegant and direct graphs will communicate results most effectively.

#### A Simple Graphing Example

This section will introduce the process of creating a graph by presenting an example of a side-by-side column plot.

##### Data for the examples.

Because a graph requires data, it is first necessary to create some simple data to use in these examples. First we have to input these data into a worksheet. The data used are shown in . For clarity in this discussion, the word "Interval" should be in cell A1.

Gnumeric with the data used in this example.

This screenshot depicts Gnumeric with the data used in the two example graphs.

##### Making the Column Plot

A column plot presents a series of data points as columns whose height depends on the value of each datum. This is a useful type of plot to show the number of eggs produced in each interval.

Making a Column Plot

- The quickest way to make a plot starts with the selection of the data. Using the mouse, first select the range A1:C5 which includes the data both for the number of Eggs and for the number of Females.

- Next, click on the graphing toolbar button

  This image shows the toolbar graphing button.

  which looks like three colored pillars. This launches a new window called the graph guru.

- Next, click on the word "Column" next to the icon with vertical colored bars

  This image shows the "column" plot type after it has been selected.

  which will move the selection to that row.

- Click on the "Insert" button. This will make the druid disappear and leave the mouse cursor as a thin cross hair.

- Finally, we will place and size the graph on a sheet. Click on the sheet and drag downward and to the right. As the mouse is dragged, a rectangle will expand. When the mouse button is released, a simple column chart should appear.

The simple graph should look like .

The Simple Graph with a Column Plot.

This screenshot depicts the simple graph with a single chart containing a column plot.

##### Modifying the Simple Graph

The graph can be customized with titles, extra charts, overlaid plots, label boxes and lots of extra information. To customize the graph, right click on the plot to open the graph custom menu. The graph context menu will appear as shown in .

The context menu which appears on a graph object.

This screenshot depicts the context menu applicable to graphs.

This menu provides access to several functions. Users can customize the appearance of graphs by selecting the Properties menu item, can save the graph into PNG or SVG formats using the Save as image menu item, can reorder the various graphical elements displayed in the worksheet using the Top, Up, Down, and Bottom menu items or can delete graphical elements with the Delete menu item.

If we wanted to add a title and a legend to the graph, we could use the Properties menu item to open the graph editor and customize the graph as follows:

Adding a title and legend to the simple graph

- Right click on the graph to open the context menu and select the Properties menu item. This will open the graph editor.

- The graph editor opens with the top-level "Graph" entry selected in the element tree displayed in the top left pane of the editor. The top right pane of the editor displays a preview of the eventual graph. The bottom pane of the editor has a single or several tabs presenting the elements which can be modified for the particular item selected in the element tree. Click and hold on the Add button

  This image shows the Add button in the graph editor.

  to open the menu of elements addable to a graph. Note that this menu changes depending on the element selected in the element tree when the Add is clicked. Drag the mouse cursor down until the selection highlights the "Title" entry and release the mouse button. This will add a "Title" node in the graph element tree and change the selection to this "Title" node. The bottom pane of the graph editor will also change to display the modifiable characteristics of the "Title" element.

- In the text field of the tab displayed in the bottom pane of the graph editor, add a title such as "Egg Production and Female Productivity" and type the Enter key. Note that the title appears at the top of the graph in the preview pane.

- In the graph tree, select the node labelled "Chart1". Next, click and hold on the add button, drag down to the Legend menu item and release. Note that this adds a legend on the right of the graph in the preview pane.

- Click on the "Apply" button. The plot should now have a title and a legend. Note that Gnumeric has used the words in the column headers automatically to label the two data series in the legend.

The modified graph should look like .

The Modified Column Graph.

This screenshot depicts the example column graph with a title and a legend.

### Printing

Printing in Gnumeric is quite simple and similar to other GNOME applications. Printing can be done using the toolbar buttons or can be accessed through the File menu. Printing usually involves configuring the page properties (like the paper type and margins), then previewing the document to be printed and finally actually printing the document.

In order to configure a worksheet for printing several parameters must be set such as the correct size of the paper sheet, the layout of the spreadsheet, headers and footers and such information. These parameters can be set once for all of the worksheets in a file or separately for each worksheet. The Page Setup... menu entry invokes a dialog through which to alter the printing parameters.

The Print Preview... menu item or toolbar button will open a window which shows what will be printed with the current configuration. By default, printing only applies to the current worksheet but this can be changed in the print dialog explained next.

The Print... menu item or toolbar button will open a dialog which allows the user to select whether to print to a printer or to a PostScript or PDF file. Various printers can be selected and the parameters of the job, such as whether to print all the worksheets or only the currently selected worksheet, can be altered. Clicking on the Print button will perform the printing task.

Printing is explained in greater detail in .

### File Opening and Saving

When you first start Gnumeric a new workbook will be opened. To save this workbook into a file, click on File Save As … . This brings up the file dialog where you can pick the filename and format for the book you are saving. It is best to save the book in the Gnumeric XML file format the first time. This allows you to easily edit the file without worrying about changes in the format and look of the book.

Once the file has a name and a file format, saving subsequent changes can be done easily either through the File menu, through the toolbar or through a keyboard shortcut. Saving with the menu requires selecting the File and then the Save menu item. Saving with the toolbar simply requires clicking on

The "Save File" button
in the tool bar. Finally saving with a keyboard shortcut simply requires typing Ctrl S.

Sometimes you want your book to be saved often so you do not lose any work. To save the book at intervals click on Tools Auto Save …. The Auto Save dialog appears.

Auto Save dialog

The autosave dialog box.
Click on the Automatic Save Every button and enter the number of minutes will pass between each save. When the interval is shorter more of your work will be potentially saved, but Gnumeric might appear sluggish. If Gnumeric is sluggish increase the time between saves. The button Prompt Before Saving brings up a dialog to ask if you want to save the book.

Using the automatic saving feature of Gnumeric can save time but is dangerous. Gnumeric does not create a new file each time a file is saved but instead Gnumeric modifies the existing file which destroys the previous work. In certain situations, this feature can lead to the loss of possibly important work. Users are highly recommended to backup their work by copying the original file to a new name or by saving files to newly named files.

An existing spreadsheet file can be opened in several ways. If the file has an icon on the desktop, this icon can be clicked or double-clicked with the mouse button. Similarly, if a file manager, such as the Nautilus file manager, lists the file, then the file name can be clicked and opened. If Gnumeric is already opened, a file can be opened by clicking on the File and selecting the Open menu item. Alternatively, the "Open file" button on the toolbar,

An image of the "Open File" button.
, can be used or the F3 key clicked. All three of these open the Open File dialog. You can then select the spreadsheet file you wish to open. Gnumeric can open many different types of spreadsheet file formats.

If the file has recently been opened in Gnumeric, the file name will appear in the File menu and can simply be clicked to re-open the file.

### Closing Gnumeric

There are several ways to close Gnumeric. The simplest is to select the File menu and then the Quit menu option at the bottom of the File.

Gnumeric can also be closed through the window manager by clicking on a close box in the window frame or through a pop-up menu. The placement of the box and the invocation of the menu depend on the particular window manager and the theme being used. If the GNOME panel is running the window list applet, clicking with the right mouse button opens a context menu with a Close which can be used to close Gnumeric.

If any changes have been made to the workbook since the last time it was saved, a dialog will open to ask what is supposed to happen to the contents of the workbook. At this point the contents of the workbook can be saved (Save), the request to close gnumeric can be cancelled (Don't Quit) or the most recent changes can be discarded (Discard). If the user decides to save the content, a second dialog may open requesting a file name, location and type for the saved workbook.

To delete files that were created by Gnumeric any graphical file manager (such as the GNOME file manager Nautilus) or the shell command `rm` can be used.

## Gnumeric Elements

This chapter describes all of the pieces of Gnumeric which a user can manipulate. The chapter provides explanations for each of the menus, menu entries, toolbar buttons and other elements of the graphical user interface.

### Overview

This part of the Gnumeric manual explains the pieces of the software that users can manipulate. The menus, the toolbars and the cell grid area comprise what is called the graphical user interface of an application because it is an interface --- a way to interact with Gnumeric --- which is made of graphical elements --- pictures --- designed to be used by human users.

Gnumeric opens by default with a view of an empty workbook which is called "Book 1" and which contains three worksheets: "Sheet1", "Sheet2", and "Sheet3" as can be seen in . The outermost portion of the window is not actually part of Gnumeric and may look different on different machines. Gnumeric attempts to place its name and the name of the workbook on this outer portion.

The majority of spreadsheet work is done while interacting with this view of Gnumeric. All of the functions which Gnumeric provides can be accessed quickly from here. The graphic elements of Gnumeric are made of several independent pieces. shows a newly opened, empty Gnumeric with the principle elements labelled.

The Gnumeric worksheet elements

The elements names are listed below along with a reference to the section that discusses that element. Those reading this document on their computers may be able to click on the references to jump to that section of the manual.

1 The menubar

  The menubar provides access to the core functions of GNOME. Almost everything that can be done in Gnumeric can be done through the menus. The menus and menubar are discussed in .

2 The standard toolbar

  The standard toolbar provides shortcuts for the most used items in the menus. The toolbars are discussed in and this toolbar in particular in .

3 The format toolbar

  The format toolbar changes the display properties of data in the workbook. It is presented in , part of the general discussion of toolbars of .

4 The object toolbar

  This toolbar enables the user to draw graphic elements on the sheet, such as text labels, big red circles or thin green arrows. These can be used to bring attention to a particular part of a worksheet. The object toolbar is explained in in the portion of the manual.

5 The data entry area

  The data entry area is useful for the modification of complex formulas. It is discussed in .

6 The cell grid area

  The cell area lies in the middle of all the rest. The cell area includes the row and column labels, the scrollbars and the tabs below. The use of these elements is explained in .

7 The information area

  This area is used by Gnumeric to give feedback on the status of certain operations. This information is explained in .

The next chapters will explain each of these elements. will explain the menus, will explain the toolbars, will explain the data entry area, will explain the cell grid area, and will explain the information area.

### Menus

This section of the manual describes the use of the menubar and the menus themselves. It then explains each entry in every Gnumeric menu, submenu or context menu.

#### Using Menus

A menu is a graphical element within a program which appears with a list of options. For instance, almost all applications have a File menu through which the user can access the computer's filesystem to open or save their work. The main menus are on the menubar. The use of these menus is discussed in .

Gnumeric also uses context menus to give users a quick way to access certain commands. The context menu will open up right under the mouse pointer when one of the secondary mouse buttons, usually the rightmost, is clicked. This menu is called a context menu because the entries in the menu are different depending on the location of the mouse pointer. The context menus are discussed in .

Both the main menus, on the menubar, and context menus may have submenus. A submenu is indicated by a small right-pointing arrow. To access a submenu, move the pointer down to the submenu entry. When the submenu opens, move the pointer directly across into the submenu. When there is not enough room to the right of the currently open menu, submenus may open to the left. Note that the submenu will close if the mouse pointer moves into any other menu entry.

You can also use the keyboard to navigate menus and submenus. See to access the main menus using the keyboard. Once a menu is displayed, menu entries can be highlighted by pressing the down and up arrow keys. When a submenu opens, pressing the right arrow key moves the highlight to the first entry of the submenu. When a submenu entry is highlighted, pressing the left arrow key removes the highlight from the submenu. Pressing the space bar or the Enter key activates the highlighted menu entry.

Menu entries ending with an ellipsis (three dots) open a dialog window which asks for more choices.

#### Menubar

The default location of the menubar is at the top of the application window. The menus provide quick and organized access to all major commands such as opening files, saving files, printing and quitting the application.

The Gnumeric menubar.

An image of the Gnumeric menubar.

To open a Gnumeric menu, click on the name of the menu in the menu bar. Once clicked, the menu will stay open. If the mouse pointer is moved to the name of another menu on the menubar, the first menu will close and the new menu open up. This is a useful way to look in each menu to hunt for a commands. Menus can also be opened through the keyboard. Pressing and holding the Alt key causes one of the letters in each menu name to be underlined. Press-and-hold Alt and press the underlined letter to open the associated menu. Using the keyboard for menu activation or navigation causes a letter of each menu or submenu item label to be underlined. Press that letter key to activate the menu item. Once a menu is open, the arrow keys can be used to move between menus or select an entry in a particular menu. To close an open menu, click over any other area of the application or of the desktop or press the Escape key, Esc.

Many menu entries are followed by a series of key names. These keys can be used to perform the menu action without having to open the menu. These are often combinations of keys involving the control key which is labeled as Ctrl, the shift key which is labeled Shift and the function keys which are labeled with an F and then a number. For example, to quickly cut a selection (accessible through the Edit menu), the user can make a selection and then type the control key and the "x" key at the same time.

#### File Menu

The File menu is the most important menu in Gnumeric because it gives the user the ability to interact with the computer operating system. This menu allows the user to create files containing all the work they have done. It also enables users to print the results of their work. Finally, the File menu is the best way to close Gnumeric.

The File menu.

An image of the File menu.

The menu choices are grouped into the following groups:

1 Workbook creation operations.

  These menu items perform operations on files. Each item is presented below. File operations are critical and are therefore discussed in their own section latter in this manual in .

  - New — Create a new workbook. This opens a new workbook in a new window. By default the workbook will be named "Book1" or another number if there is already a worksheet with that name open. Note that the opened file has not yet been saved.

  - New From Template — This menu item brings up a submenu from which a template can be selected. Rather than creating a new empty workbook, the template specifies some standard content. The new workbook is opened in a new window. The name named of the workbook is determined by the name of the template. Note that the opened file has not yet been saved.

  - Open — The Open menu item opens the file chooser dialog to allow the user to pick an existing workbook for Gnumeric to open. Files in many different spreadsheet formats can be opened. To open files in a non-spreadsheet format, use the Data menu described in . See for details. The Open menu item creates a new window containing the selected file. A more extensive discussion is presented in .

2 File creation operations.

  - Save — The Save menu item saves the current worksheet. If the file has been named and saved before, this will silently save the file to the current filename. If it has not been saved before, this will act as if the Save As... menu item had been called and prompt the user for a filename.

  - Save As... — The Save As... menu item allows users to save a file which has not yet been named to a named file. This is always used when a user saves a file which Gnumeric has named by default. This menu item can also be used to save a newly created file or to save an existing file to a new and different name. To export data from Gnumeric to a non-spreadsheet format, use the Data menu described in . For an explanation of the file formats which Gnumeric supports see .

3 Printing operations.

  These menu items enable Gnumeric to print. Each item is presented below and printing issues are discussed fully in .

  - Page Setup... — The Page Setup... menu item call the Page Setup dialog. This dialog allows the user to set various printing options such as paper type, margin sizes and running header and footer formats. This dialog is explained in detail in .

  - Print Area — The Print Area menu item opens the submenu shown in . The items in this submenu allow the print area to be set, shown or cleared; and manual page breaks to be set or cleared. The print area of a sheet is that range of the sheet that should be printed. Items outside of the print area are usually omitted when printing. When printing Gnumeric will usually choose the appropriate page breaks. Manual page breaks can be used to force Gnumeric to insert a page break prematurely.

    The Print Area submenu.

    An image of the Print Area submenu.

  - Print... — The Print... menu item allows a user to print one or all of the worksheets in a workbook. Gnumeric can send files directly to a printer or can print to PostScript or portable document format files. The Print dialog is explained further in .

  - Print Preview... — The Print Preview... menu item calls a dialog which presents the current workbook as it would be printed with the current Page Setup settings. The dialog also permits the user to print. This dialog is explained in .

4 Miscellaneous Operations.

  - Send To... — The Send To... menu item call the Send To dialog. This dialog allows the user to send a Gnumeric workbook as an attachment to an email message. This dialog is explained in detail in .

  - Document Properties... — The Document Properties... menu item calls the Document Properties dialog, a dialog with several tabs that allow many document specific settings to be adjusted. The dialog is described in detail in .

5 Recently used files.

  - The first three menu entries in this section are shortcuts to re-open recently used files. The list will change dynamically as new workbooks are opened and created. Clicking on a file name listed here is the same as using the Open menu entry and finding the file in the Find File dialog. Note that if the file has been moved since Gnumeric last saved it, Gnumeric will not find the file. To access any recent file not listed, one can use the Full History... menu item below.

  - Full History... — The Full History... menu item opens a dialog that shows all recently used files.

6 The Close and Quit operations.

  These menu items either close the current worksheet, Close, or close all open worksheets, Quit. Gnumeric will prompt the user with a Save Workbook.. dialog for any workbooks that have been changed since the last time they were opened or saved.

  - Close — The Close menu item allows the user to close the current workbook. If this is the only workbook which this instance of Gnumeric has open, the close operation will also quit Gnumeric. If other workbooks are open, this workbook will close without affecting the others. If the workbook has unsaved changes, Gnumeric will ask the user if he wants to save the file.

  - Quit — The Quit menu item will close all the workbooks currently being used by Gnumeric and quit the program. Gnumeric will prompt the user asking if he wants to save any workbooks which has changes which have not been saved.

#### Edit Menu

The Edit menu is mostly used for operations on a worksheet or between worksheets. This menu gives users powerful editing operations such as the ability to undo recent changes, the ability to cut and paste selections of cells and the ability to search for specific cell contents.

The Edit menu.

An image of the Edit menu.

The menu choices are grouped into the following groups:

1 Change History.

  These menu items allow the user to remove recent changes to a worksheet or re-introduce changes which have been undone. These options give the user control over recent edits. This functionality is often called the "change history" of an application.

  The type of edit has no importance. An edit which deletes the contents of a cell is treated in the same way as an edit which adds contents to a cell. The change history is session specific. The user will not be able to undo changes through the change history if the file is saved and then re-opened. Note also that the list only covers the last few dozen operations. The number of operations which Gnumeric tracks in its history depends on the size and complexity of those operations. You can customize this number using the preference facility described in . There are a few unusual operations which are not yet tracked in this way.

  - Undo — The Undo menu item is used to remove the last few edits from a workbook. The edits must be undone in order. This menu item removes only the last edit from the workbook. The user can also access the undo list through one of the toolbar buttons and its associated menu. With this menu, the user can undo several operations at once. This is explained in section .

  - Redo — The Redo menu item is used after an undo operation to restore the change that was undone. The menu item only restores the last undone operation. Users can also restore edit using a button on the standard toolbar and through the associated menu. The menu allows several operations to be redone at once. It is explained in .

2 Operations on selected areas.

  These menu items enable selected cell contents to be moved around a spreadsheet, moved between worksheets or between workbooks. Selections are areas of the spreadsheet that have been chosen, usually with the mouse, and are usually colored pale blue. Selections are explained in greater detail in . Gnumeric currently only allows single range selections for these operations.

  To use these menu items, the user must first select the range of the cut or copy area. When the user then picks these menu items, the contents of the selected areas will be entered into the Gnumeric clipboard and into the X clipboard. The contents of the Gnumeric clipboard can then be inserted into a new region of the spreadsheet, into another worksheet or into a new workbook. The X clipboard holds the space delimited results of each cell: either the text or the result of any calculation. The X clipboard can be pasted into any text area.

  - Cut — The Cut menu item is used to remove a selection from the selected area of a currently open workbook. When the menu item is chosen, the selected area will be outlined with a moving dotted line. This is the area which will be moved. The selection will only be removed after it is moved to the new location. Until then cut has not had an effect on the worksheet.

  - Copy — The Copy menu item allows a user to duplicate a selection. The original data remains where it was and the Gnumeric clipboard (and the X clipboard) has a copy which can be inserted elsewhere.

  - Paste — The Paste menu item is used to paste the contents of a selection which has been cut or copied. If the selection was cut, it is pasted into the new location unchanged. Cell references will not change in that they will still point to the same cells.

  - Paste Special... — The Paste Special... is used to paste a selection while altering certain characteristics. The Paste Special... menu item opens a dialog with three categories. The defaults make Paste Special... act as if it were the Paste menu item.

    The Paste Special Dialog

    An image of the Paste Special Dialog.

    The first set of choices allow the user to control the data pasted.The user can chose to limit the pasting to only the cell contents (no cell formatting is copied) or --- the opposite --- only cell formats copied (no contents). Furthermore, the user can insert the selection while transforming all the contents into values only. In this case, formulae will not be copied, only the results will be.

    A second set of choices allows the user to perform simple mathematical transformations during the paste. The data in the cells being pasted into are modified by the cell contents. For instance, using the divide operation will result in each cell in the zone pasted into being divided by the equivalent cell which was copied originally.

    The third set of choices allow the transposition or flip of the original selection. The transpose choice will change the selection by flipping it about the diagonal from top left to bottom right. Similarly, flip horizontally and flip vertically paste the selection accordingly.

    The skip blanks check box prevents Gnumeric from taking any action for the cells in the selection that are blank. Normally Gnumeric will modify formulae that use relative addressing to cells outside the selection. The do not change formulae checkbox suppresses this change. (Note that references to cells within the selection are always preserved.)

3 Data entry and removal operations.

  These operations add or remove data from the worksheet. They differ in the type of data modified or removed and the possible re-arrangement of remaining data, as explained below. With one exception noted below, these operations are like the previous group in acting based on the selected cells.

  - Clear opens a submenu with eight choices, organized into two sets of four. The first group affects all cells in the selection. The second group applies the same actions to just the selected cells that are in rows selected by the filter. See for details of setting up a filter.

    Choose All to clear all the elements of the cells in the selection: the formats and hyperlinks, the comments, and the contents. Choose Formats & Hyperlinks to clear the formats and hyperlinks while leaving the data or formula in the cell intact. This removes any borders, re-sets the cell alignments, changes the background colour to white and the text colour to black, resets the number format to General, and removes the hyperlink associated with each cell, if any. Choose Comments to delete the comments for the cells in the selection. Choose Contents to leave the cell's formatting in place but remove the formula or data contents of the cell.

  - Delete opens a submenu with five choices. They permit deleting a range of rows or columns, deleting just the selected cells, or deleting just the comments or hyperlinks associated with the selected cells.

    Choose Columns or Rows to delete the columns or rows, respectively, that cover the cells in the selection. Selecting Rows when the selection is one or more columns or Columns when the selection is one or more rows deletes all cells in the worksheet. The space left by deleted rows is filled by moving lower rows up. The space left by deleted columns is filled by moving to the left columns which were right of the selection. For example, if columns D and E are deleted, Gnumeric will move the contents of all columns from F onwards two columns to the left.

    Cells...: If the selection is one or more columns or one or more rows, Cells... deletes the selected columns or rows as described above. If the selection is a block of cells, Cells... opens a dialog asking how to fill in the deleted cells. Blocks of cells can be filled in by the columns of cells below the block selection or by the rows on the right of the block.

    The Delete Cells Dialog

    An image of the Delete Cells Dialog.

    For example, if the block of cells from E6:G8 is deleted, those cells would be filled in by the cells below E8, F8 and G8 if the Shift cells up option were chosen. The cells to the right of G6, G7 and G8 would fill in the space from the right if the Shift cells left option were chosen. The two Delete choices are the same as Edit ▶ Delete ▶ Rows and Edit ▶ Delete ▶ Columns.

    Comments: This is the same as Edit ▶ Clear ▶ Comments, described above.

    Hyperlinks: This is similar to Edit ▶ Clear ▶ Formats & Hyperlinks, as described above, except that existing cell formats are not disturbed.

  - Modify opens a submenu with three choices:

    - Comment... opens the Edit Cell Comment dialog. This is the same as the dialog for Comment... on the . See for more information.

    - Hyperlink... opens the Hyperlink dialog. This is the same as the dialog for Hyperlink... on the . See for more information.

    - Names... opens the Define Names dialog. explains names and describes the dialog.

4 Search and replace operations.

  - Search... — The Search... menu item opens a dialog to search for cells with particular content. The dialog has three tabs. In the first the user can enter the information the user wants to find and some constraints on the search. The second tab gives some extra choices for the search. When the user has picked the options they prefer, pushing the search button on the first tab will run the search. The third tab will show which cells match the search.

  - Search & Replace... — The Search & Replace.. menu item will launch a dialog to find cells with particular characteristics and replace them all with a common content. This dialog is similar to the Search dialog.

5 Other operations on worksheets.

  - Sheet — From the Sheet submenu you can perform operations on the worksheet as a whole. These functions are also available from the worksheet tab context menu. You can create, duplicate, rename, re-order, or delete worksheets. These functions are described in detail in .

  - Select — The Select menu item allows the user to select various portions of the worksheet. When selected it opens a submenu.

    The Select Submenu

    An image of the Select Submenu.

    - The All item provides a quick way to select the entire worksheet.

    - The Row and Column items allow the user to select all the rows or columns spanned by the current selection.

    - The Array menu item allows a user to select all the cells which are part of the same array as the current cell.

    - The Depends menu item selects all the cells which contain formula that reference data in the current cell.

    - Similarly, the Inputs menu item selects all the cells whose data is referenced by the formula in the current cell.

    - The Next Object menu item selects the next sheet object on the current sheet. If no object is selected it will select the object locate at the front.

    - The Go to Top, Go to Bottom, Go to the First, Go to the Last, menu items move the selection within a rectangular block of data cells. the front.

    - Goto cell... — The Goto cell... menu item opens up a dialog which allows the user to type the name or address of a cell in the worksheet. The current view will then change to ensure that the selected cell is in the current view and the selection will cover that cell.

  - Recalculate — The Recalculate menu item forces the workbook to recalculate its results. This is useful if a formula in the current worksheet depends on a cell in a different workbook. Gnumeric will not necessarily know when that data has been updated so a user can force Gnumeric to recalculate all the cells in the current workbook.

6 General Configuration of Gnumeric.

  Preferences... — The Preference... menu item calls the Gnumeric Preferences dialog explained in detail in

#### View Menu

The View menu is

The View menu.

An image of the View menu.

The menu choices are grouped into the following groups:

1 Alternative views of the current document.

  These menu items allow the user to open multiple views of the same document.

  - New View... — The New View... menu item opens up a new window with the current workbook visible. and where both windows are open to the same section of the workbook. If the user starts editing a different part of the sheet in one view, the other view moves automatically to that portion of the worksheet. Similarly, if the user changes to a different worksheet in one view, the other view changes also.

  - Freeze Panes — The Freeze Panes menu item is used to freeze the top-most and leftmost visible portion of the worksheet. This is useful to be able to line up portions of the worksheet which are not usually together. For instance, if a user had a very large table with the titles of each column of data on row 12, the user could select row 13 and select this menu item. If the user scrolled through each data row, the data would line up underneath each header.

    There are 3 ways to determine which rows and/or columns should be frozen.

    - If the selection is at least partially visible and does not include the cell A1, Gnumeric freezes the portion of the worksheet above or to the left of the current selection.

    - If the selection is at least partially visible, includes cell A1, and does not consist of whole rows or columns, Gnumeric freezes all rows or columns intersecting the selection.

    - If the selection is at least partially visible, includes cell A1, and consists of whole rows or columns, Gnumeric freezes those rows or columns.

    - If the selection is not visible at all, then Gnumeric freezes those rows and columns to the left or above the sixth visible column and tenth visible row.

    In all cases, the region of the worksheet above or to the left of the currently visible region will become inaccessible until the view is unfrozen.

  - Windows — The Windows menu item provides access to a submenu which lists all of the windows which are currently open. This provides an easy way to jump between all the different instances and views of Gnumeric documents.

2 Changes to the current view.

  These menu items alter the display of the current view.

  - Toolbars — The Toolbars menu item provides a submenu which lists each Gnumeric toolbar. The toolbars in this submenu which have a check mark in front of their name will be shown. The display status of each toolbar can be changed by selecting the menu item with that toolbar's name.

  - View Statusbar — The View Statusbar menu item determines whether to display the status bar and information area at the bottom of each worksheets. Selecting the menu item toggles the check mark in front. When this menu item has the checkmark, Gnumeric will display the statusbar.

  - Full Screen — The Full Screen menu item changes the display of Gnumeric from a window based display to a display which occupies the whole screen. In full screen mode, the window borders will not be displayed nor will the toolbars. The key F11 toggles between full screen and regular display mode. When this menu item has the checkmark, Gnumeric is in Full Screen mode.

  - View Properties... — The View Properties... menu item opens the View Properties dialog.

    The View Properties dialog

    An image of the View Properties dialog.

    The View Properties dialog has four tabs. Auto Completion is described in , Protection in .

    The View Properties dialog, Cell Markers tab

    An image of the Cell Markers tab of the View Properties dialog.

    The check boxes on the Cell Markers tab shown in determine whether cells are shown with indicators that they contain formulae and/or that they have clipped content.

    The check boxes on the Widget tab shown in determine whether the notebook tabs, the horizontal scrollbar and/or the vertical scrollbars are shown in this view.

3

  Zoom... opens a dialog where you can set the magnification of one or more worksheets in the current workbook.

#### Insert Menu

The Insert menu is

The Insert menu.

An image of the Insert menu.

The menu choices are grouped into the following groups:

1 Insert into workbook.

  These menu items alter the cells available in a workbook.

  - Cells... — The Cells... menu item opens a dialog asking the user how the sheet should be altered when new cells are inserted. The dialog lists four choices. The user can choose one of these by clicking the mouse pointer on one of the four dots. Only one choice is possible and the currently selected choice has a black dot in front.

    The Shift cells right will insert a region of new cells of the size of the current selection. Cells which are on the same row as the selection and within or to the right of the selection will shift over to the right to accommodate the new cells. The Shift cells down choice will also insert a region of new cells the same size as the current selection. With this choice, cells which are in the selection or below the selection will move down to accommodate the new cells. The two other choices will act as if the user had chosen to insert rows or columns. These actions are explained above.

  - Columns — The Columns menu item will insert columns to the left of the current selection. The number of columns inserted will equal the number of columns spanned by the current selection.

  - Rows — The Rows menu item will insert rows above the current selection. The number of rows inserted will be equal to the number of rows spanned by the current selection.

  - Sheet — The Sheet menu item allows the user to insert a worksheet immediately following the current sheet.

2 Insert an object into the worksheet or content into the current cell.

  The menu items insert sheet objects into the worksheet or insert content into the current cell.

  - Graph... — The Graph... menu item will allow a user to insert a graphic plot of data. This menu item will launch the graph druid. Graphing in Gnumeric is explained in .

  - Image... — The Image... menu item will allow a user to insert a graphic object containing the image from an external file. The use of images in Gnumeric is explained in .

  - Function — This menu item opens a dialog to allow the user to enter a mathematical formula into the cell. The function dialog includes the names and a brief explanation of all the available functions.

  - Function Wrapper — Selecting an item from the submenu shown in replaces every rectangular region in the current selection with an array function in which the appropriate function is wrapped around an array version of the current content. This can be used to create a self-sorting data region.

    The Function Wrapper submenu.

    An image of the Function Wrapper submenu.

  - Name... opens a dialog with a list of all defined names that can be pasted into the current cell. The dialog is similar to the Define Names dialog opened by choosing Modify ▶ Names... from the . See for details.

  - Comment... opens a dialog where you can enter or edit a comment for the active cell. The dialog is described in .

  - Hyperlink... opens a dialog for entering the location of a link. The dialog is described in .

  - Special opens a submenu from which you can insert predefined content into a cell. You can insert the current date, the current time, or both.

#### Format Menu

The Format menu allows users to control the formats of cells, columns, rows, worksheets and the workbook. This menu also gives users access to templates of standard formats.

The Format Menu and Its Cells Submenu.

An image of the Format menu and its Cells submenu.

The Format Menu offers these menuitems:

  - Cells — The Cells... menu item opens a submenu with choices to allows the user to modify the formatting of the selected cells.

    - Format... — The Format... menu item opens the cell format dialog. This dialog is used to set cell data types and formats. It is explained in .

    - Conditional Formatting... — The Conditional Formatting... menu item opens the conditional format dialog. This dialog is used to set cell data types and formats that depend on values in the workbook. It is explained in .

    - Merge — This menu item combines the current selection into a single large cell.

    - Unmerge — This menu item divides a merged selection into the original cells.

    - Auto Fit Height — This menu item makes Gnumeric automatically choose the optimal row heights to display all of the text in the current selection.

    - Auto Fit Width — This menu item makes Gnumeric automatically choose the optimal column widths to display all of the text in the current selection.

  - Column — The Column menu item opens a submenu with choices to allows the user to modify the view of the selected columns.

    The Column Submenu.

    An image of the Column submenu.

    - Width... — The Width... menu item opens a dialog to enable the user to adjust the size of the columns which hold the current selection. The dialog has a single entry box in which the user can change the current size of the column in points.

    - Auto Fit Width — This menu item makes Gnumeric automatically choose the optimal column size to display all of the text in the current selection.

    - Hide — The Hide menu item will hide the columns containing the current selection. Gnumeric still holds these columns in memory and will save them to a file but will not display those columns. The only indication that a user has that columns have been hidden is that the column header names are not sequential.

    - Unhide — This menu item will show columns which are hidden if the selection spans the two columns on either side of the selection. If columns D, E, and F have been hidden, the selection must span at least across columns C and G for this menu item to unhide columns D, E, and F.

    - Standard Width — This menu item allows the user to resize the columns which hold the selection to the standard size. At 100 percent zoom this is 48 points or 64 pixels.

  - Row — The Row menu item provides the same functions as the Column menu item but operates on rows.

    - Height... — This menu item opens a dialog which allows the user to type in a row height in pixels.

    - Auto Fit Height — This menu item changes the rows which hold the selection to the optimal height to hold the text in the selection.

    - Hide — The Hide menu item will hide the rows in the selection. The workbook still contains the data in the hidden rows but those rows are not shown.

    - Unhide — This menu item will make hidden rows visible. The selection must span the rows which are hidden for this menu item to unhide the hidden rows.

    - Standard Height — This menu item resizes the rows back to the default height of 12.75 points or 17 pixels (at 100 percent zoom).

  - Sheet opens a submenu where you can change properties of the current worksheet. With the exception of Manage Sheets... and Zoom..., all operations on this submenu apply to just the current worksheet.

    Sheet Submenu

    An image of the Sheet submenu.
    1 Sheet Management

      These items are also on the worksheet tab context menu, accessed by clicking (usually with the right mouse button) on one of the worksheet tabs.

      Manage Sheets... opens a dialog from which the names and many properties of all the sheets can be managed. Properties that can be managed from this dialog include locking, worksheet visibility, column display order (left to right or right to left), sheet name, sheet order, and sheet tab appearance. From this dialog you can also add new worksheets and duplicate or remove existing worksheets. For more information, see .

      Rename... opens the Rename Sheet dialog. Edit the sheet name in the New Name: field and press Enter or click OK to change the worksheet name.

    2 Sheet Display Toggles

      The second section contains various toggles that control how a worksheet is displayed. If a toggle is enabled, a small check mark is displayed to the left of the menu item.

      - Display Formulas — When this property is enabled, the worksheet will show the actual formulae for all cells with formulae, instead of showing the calculated result. You can use this property to quickly determine which cells contain data and which contain formulae.

      - Use R1C1 Notation — When this property is enabled, Gnumeric uses R1C1-style notation to address cells, rather than A1 notation.

      - Hide Zeros — When this property is enabled, Gnumeric displays all cells which would display a zero value as empty cells. This can be used to more easily find cells with non-zero data in sheets with many zero results.

      - Hide Gridlines — When this property is enabled, Gnumeric does not draw the grid lines that ordinarily separate cells.

      - Hide Column Headers — When this property is enabled, Gnumeric does not display the column headers, which leaves room in the cell grid for roughly one more row of cells of default height.

      - Hide Row Header — When this property is enabled, Gnumeric does not display the row headers, which leaves slightly more room to display the contents of cells.

      - Direction — When this menu item is selected, Gnumeric switches between left-to-right sheets and right-to-left sheets. If row headers are displayed, they are moved to the right-hand side of the cell grid when the worksheet is displayed right to left.

    3 Zoom...

      Zoom... opens a dialog where you can set the magnification of one or more worksheets in the current workbook.

  - Autoformat... — This menu item opens the autoformat dialog to give user access to a list of format templates. Format templates are useful for users who are often filling out tables in a particular format. The user picks an area of the worksheet into which they want to apply the template. Most templates define headers and footers so the selection area must be big enough to fit those template elements and the user's data. The template will not affect data which has already been input into a worksheet.

    The dialog has two tabs: Preview and Template Details. The details are simply information about the template. The Preview tab has three main options: a Settings menu, an Edit menu and a category chooser. The settings menu allows a user to pick what parts of the template they want to copy into the worksheet. The edit menu will be used to create new templates. Currently templates are written as text into an extensible markup language (XML) format. The category chooser gives the user access to different groups of templates. Templates in each category are displayed in the middle area of the dialog. Users select the template they want to use by clicking on it. The currently selected template is highlighted with a red boundary which may be hard to see.

#### Tools Menu

The Tools menu is

The Tools menu.

An image of the Tools menu.

The menu choices are grouped into the following groups:

1 Automatic tools

  These two tools allow the user to make Gnumeric automatically correct typing or automatically save workbooks at periodic intervals.

  - Auto Correct... — The Auto Correct... menu item opens a dialog which allows the user to configure the way in which Gnumeric automatically corrects text which is being entered. The dialog presents the user with three tabs. Each of these tabs allows the user to correct one type of common spelling mistake, while allowing the user to add exceptions to the rules. Gnumeric can automatically capitalize the names of week days. Gnumeric can automatically change an entry which starts with two capital letters to only start with one and Gnumeric can change a sentence entry to start with a capital letter.

  - Auto Save — The Auto Save menu item opens a dialog which allows the user to have Gnumeric automatically save the current workbook after a fixed interval of time. The user can also have Gnumeric ask for confirmation before saving so that the user always remains aware of the state the workbook was in when it was saved.

2 Linear programming, scenario generation, simulation and statistical analysis tools

  Gnumeric can be used to solve systems of linear equations and other mathematical problems. These two dialogs enable access to these tools. A full discussion of these tools is presented in .

  - Goal Seek — The Goal Seek menu item opens a dialog through which the user can configure Gnumeric to iteratively search for a numeric value which solves a formula. This dialog is explained in .

  - Solver — The Solver menu item opens a dialog through which the user can configure Gnumeric to solve linear systems of equations. This is explained in .

  - Scenarios — The Scenarios menu item displays a submenu with two entries. The View... menu item opens a dialog in which the user can select previously defined scenarios. The Add... menu item opens a dialog in which the user can define the contents of a new scenario.

  - Simulation — The Simulation menu item opens a multipaned dialog allowing the user to configure the parameters for a simulation using linear modeling constraints.

3 The Plug-ins dialog.

  This entry launches the plug-in management dialog. Plug-ins are programs which are separate from Gnumeric but provide useful functionality. Some of the core parts of Gnumeric, such as Excel file format support, are actually plugins. This means that a user who never uses Excel files can remove this module from Gnumeric and make Gnumeric use less memory.

#### Statistics Menu

The Statistics menu is

The Statistics menu.

An image of the Statistics menu.

The Statistics menu and its submenus contain all available statistical analysis tools. These tools are explained in .

#### Data Menu

The Data menu is

The Data menu.

An image of the Data menu.

The menu choices are grouped into the following groups:

1 Data Field tools.

  These menu items allow the user to re-organize data.

  - Sort... — The Sort... menu item opens a dialog which allows users to sort a selection according to defined criteria. By default Gnumeric sorts the rows in a selected area depending on the contents of the cells in a particular column of each row. The sort criteria can be extended to calculate on the basis of the cells in several columns. Gnumeric can sort a selection using any number of rules. Rules can be added using the Add button. Rules with no column entered will be ignored or the user can remove these rules with the Remove button.

    For each rule, the dialog has an entry box in which the column to be sorted must be entered. The dropdown box (the little down pointing arrow) will show a list of appropriate columns. The user can determine a sort order for the selection. The Advanced button allows the user to further characterize the sort criteria..

    If the first row of the selection is a header, Gnumeric can be told not to shuffle this row during the sort. Gnumeric can also sort columns based on the contents of cells in specified rows, instead of shuffling rows on the basis of columns, if the user toggles the Sort to act right-left instead of top-down.

  - Shuffle... — The Shuffle... menu item opens a dialog that allows users to shuffle a selection. Shuffling means to rearrange the cells in the selection into a random order. The dialog allows users to shuffle the data within a column, within a row, or within an area.

  - Fill — The Fill menu item opens a submenu that allows various forms of data to be created.

  - Filter — The Filter menu item opens a submenu with three entries: Add Auto Filter, Show All, and Advanced Filter entry. Filters are explained in .

  - Validate... — The Validate... menu item opens the cell format dialog to the validation tab. Validation is a means of constraining the contents of a cell either to have a certain value or to fall within a certain range.

  - Consolidate... — The Consolidate... menu item opens a dialog box through which a user can create derived information based on data in other worksheets.

  - Table... —

  - Group and Outline — The Group and Outline menu item provides a submenu through which users can group rows or columns into units which can be collapsed to be hidden from view. These entries also allow users to alter the display of the grouping handles on the borders of the worksheet.

2 Data Modifications or Import.

  These entries allow user to convert data already in a worksheet or to import external data directly into a worksheet.

  - Text to Columns... — The Text to Columns... menu item opens a dialog box through which a user can create derived information based on data in other worksheets.

  - Import Data — The Import Data menu item provides the following submenu:

    The Import Data submenu.

    An image of the Import Data submenu.

    The items in this submenu allow the user to import data from various non-spreadsheet formats. To open files in a spreadsheet format, use the Open menu described in . See for details. These submenu items create a new window containing the selected file. A more extensive discussion is presented in .

  - Export Data — The Export Data menu item provides the following submenu:

    The Export Data submenu.

    An image of the Export Data submenu.

    The items in this submenu allows users to export the current file or sheet to a non-spreadsheet format. The Repeat Export menu item repeats the last export in the current session or, if the file was recently imported, exports the file to the original source. To save data from Gnumeric in a spreadsheet format, use the Save As... menu described in . For an explanation of the file formats which Gnumeric supports see .

#### Help Menu

The Help menu is quite simple.

The Help menu.

An image of the Help menu.

The Help menu connects users to this manual, to the list of functions available for use in Gnumeric and to the list of people who created this wonderful application.

1 Entries to find help and report a problem with Gnumeric

  These menu items allow the user to obtain help from several sources or to report a problem with the program.

  - Contents — This menu entry allows the user to launch the local help system and display this manual.

  - Gnumeric on the Web — This menu entry allows the user to launch a web browser and explore the web site dedicated to Gnumeric on the server used by the GNOME project.

  - Live Assistance — This menu entry allows the user to launch an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) client to join the GIMPnet network and the #Gnumeric channel. This channel is used by the Gnumeric developers. There is generally someone around who will, after a few minutes, notice a nice question and attempt to answer it.

    Live assistance is provided on a purely voluntary basis. There are no guarantees that your question will be answered or that the answer will be correct. We generally try our best to answer questions when they are asked politely and when the user shows that they have at least looked in the User Manual for an answer.

  - Report a Problem — This menu entry allows the user to launch a web browser and open the page on GNOME's GitLab issue/ bug entry system for the Gnumeric program. This page includes instructions on submitting reports of problems. The first time a user reports a problem, they will be asked to login to the system.

2 The About Gnumeric dialog.

  About —Shows basic information about Gnumeric, such as the authors' names and the application version number.

### Context Menus

Context menus are menus which open up under the mouse pointer and are therefore detached from the format graphical structure of the application. These menus provide an extra and convenient way to access Gnumeric commands. All of the commands in context menus are available through the regular menu system. Context menus provide different commands depending on the position of the pointer.

To activate a context menu, a user simply positions the pointer over the appropriate area and clicks one of the buttons on their mouse. Since this button is configurable and users have mice with different buttons, it may be a different button on any given machine or may even require the combination of a keyboard key and a mouse buttons. The user will have to find how to do this themselves.

Currently Gnumeric provides five different context menus. The context menu that is called in the central grid area is discussed next in . The Context menu that appears when the pointer is over the row headers or column headers is presented in . Another context menu relates to the worksheet tabs and is explained in . Yet another context menu applies to embedded objects or shaped components such as a plot. These are shown in .

#### The Context Menu for the Cell Grid Area

The context menu in the cell grid area appears when the pointer is over the cell grid area. This menu applies to the cells that have been selected, not necessarily the cell underneath the mouse pointer.

The Context Menu for the Cell Grid Area.

An image of the context menu in the cell grid area.

The grid context menu merely provides an extra way to access Gnumeric commands. The Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Special, Delete Cells..., Clear Contents, Remove Comment, Edit Hyperlink, and Remove Link commands are taken from the Edit menu and its submenus and are explained in . The Insert Cells... and Add Comment menu items are explained in the section on the Insert menu in . The Format Cells..., Conditional Formatting... items as well as the items on the Cell, Column, and Row submenus are explained in the manual section on the Format menu in .

#### The Context Menu for Column and Row Headers

The Context Menu for Column and Row Headers

The Context Menu of a Row Header

An image of the context menu on a row header.

The context menu which relates to column or row headers is similar to the context menu for the grid area. Both insert and delete operations are modified to operate explicitly on rows or on columns.

#### Context Menu for Worksheet Tabs

The context menu for worksheet tabs provides access to functions that manipulate worksheets as a whole, rather than their contents.

The Context Menu for Worksheet Tabs

An image of the context menu of the worksheet tabs.

The context menu for the worksheet tabs provides the same functions as the Sheet submenu of the Edit menu. These functions are explained in . There are also two submenus where you can select one of the existing sheets, whether its tab is currently visible or not. The first submenu lists the sheets in their current order, the second submenu lists them alphabetically.

#### The Context Menu for Embedded Objects and Components

The Context Menu for Embedded Objects and Components.

The Context Menu for Graphical Objects

An image of the context menu on embedded objects.

All embedded objects, such as drawing elements, graphs and images, have a context menu which can be invoked by placing the mouse pointer over the element and clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons.

The first menu entry, labeled Properties, will open a dialog specific to the type of element selected in which the user can configure the properties of the element.

The menu entry labeled Size & Position, will open a dialog that permits the user to adjust the size and position of the embedded object.

The menu entry labeled Snap to Grid, enlarges the object such that all of its corners are located at cell corners.

The menu entry labeled Order, opens a submenu which allows the user to change the visual order in which the graphical elements are placed. This order will affect the way in which the graphical elements obscure each other.

The Context Submenu for Graphical Object Order

An image of the context submenu allowing the re-ordering of graphical objects.

The menu entries labeled Cut, Copy, and Delete, allow the user to operate on the whole object at once. The Cut menu item allows the user to remove the element from its current position and then paste the object in a different location on the same sheet, in a different worksheet, in a different Gnumeric file, or in a file from a different program entirely. The Copy menu item provides the same functionality while leaving the original item in place. The Delete allows the user to remove the graphical element entirely.

The remaining menu item, Print, allows just the selected object to be printed.

For certain types of objects, a menu entry labeled Save As Image... allows the object to be saved as an image file. This menu item is not present in but is shown in .

The Context Menu for Graphs and Images

An image of the context menu for graphs and images.

Graphs have a context menu that also contains menu entries labeled Open in New Window and Copy to New Graph Sheet. The Open in New Window menu item shows the graph by itself in a window. The Copy to New Graph Sheet copies the graph to a special sheet in the current workbook that contains only a single graph.

#### The Context Menu for Toolbars

The Context Menu for Toolbars

The Context Menu for Toolbars.

An image of the context menu on the toolbars.

The context menu for toolbars allows the user to configure toolbars. Each toolbar can be displayed above the sheets, to the left of the sheets, or to the right of the sheets. The context menu can also be used to hide a toolbar. The toolbar can be made visible again via the Toolbars submenu of the View menu. See .

### Toolbars

The toolbars contain buttons and other elements which can be used to perform quickly some the more common operations. Each button has an icon intended to provide a mnemonic reminder of the operation performed by the button. The toolbar elements are intended to provide fast access to the commonly used tools. Almost all of these functions are also available through the menu system. The specific actions required to use each button vary.

Gnumeric has four toolbars, the standard toolbar, the format toolbar, the long format toolbar, and the object toolbar. The three toolbars are shown in .

The Four Gnumeric Toolbars

These toolbars will be discussed separately in the subsequent sections of this manual. User interaction with each toolbar happens in essentially the same way. Similarly, the toolbars can be configured in the same way. The next section explains the standard behavior of Gnumeric toolbars.

The long format toolbar contains all of the buttons of the format toolbar plus a few extra buttons, but in a different order. Users will usually choose only one of these toolbars to be displayed.

#### General Toolbar Behavior

The toolbar context menu described in can be used to determine where each toolbar (above the sheets, to the left of the sheets, or to the right of the sheets) is displayed. The Toolbars submenu of the View menu (see ) can be used to determine which toolbars are visible.

If the Gnumeric window is too small to fit all of the toolbar buttons, Gnumeric displays an arrow to indicate that there are more options. If the user clicks on this arrow, a window will open with the remaining buttons as shown in .

The Toolbar Extension Menu

Certain toolbar options, such as the zoom box, are combinations of a button or text entry area and a downward pointing arrow. If the user clicks on the arrow, a list of available options appears.

#### The Standard Toolbar

The standard toolbar is shown in .

The Standard Toolbar

The Standard Toolbar gives the user access to file operations, printing, movement of data blocks, the undo system, and to some of the powerful tools like the function creator and the graphing system.

An image of the standard toolbar's "New File" button.
New File.

  Create a new file.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Open File" button.
Open

  Open an existing file.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Save File" button.
Save

  Save the current worksheet to disk.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Print" button.
Print

  Print the current worksheet or workbook to a file or a printer.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Print Preview" button.
Print Preview

  Display a print preview of the current worksheet.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Cut" button.
Cut

  Copy the cells in the current selection to the clipboard buffer and mark them to be deleted from the current position. The cells will only be removed if they are pasted into a new position.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Copy" button.
Copy

  Copy the cells in the current selection to the clipboard buffer.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Paste" button.
Paste

  Paste the contents of the clipboard buffer into the active cell.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Undo" button.
Undo

  Undoes the last operation undertaken.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Redo" button.
Redo

  This is the reverse of the undo operation, restoring its original state.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Insert Hyperlink" button.
Insert a hyperlink

  This button opens a dialog to allow the user to define a hyperlink either internally within the spreadsheet or to an external resource such as a web page.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Sum" button.
Sum into the current cell

  Starts a simple sum formula in the selected cell with Gnumeric simply waiting for a selection to be made to complete the sum. The user selects the destination cell, pushes this button, enters the range to be summed and pushes the confirm button (green arrow) in the data entry area or types the Return key.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Function" button.
The function druid

  This button will start a formula in the current cell using the function druid.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Sort A to Z" button.
Sort Ascending

  Sorts the selected region in ascending order based on the first column selected.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Sort Z to A" button.
Sort Descending

  Sorts the selected region in descending order based on the first column selected.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Graph" button.
Graph

  This button calls the graph druid to create a graph.

An image of the standard toolbar's "Zoom" box.
Zoom

  The zoom button allows the users to trade-off the extent of the worksheet which is visible against the size of the visible text and cells.

#### The Format Toolbar

The Format Toolbar

The Format Toolbar

An image of the format toolbar's "Font" selection box.
Font Chooser.

  The user can change the font of a selection either by typing the name of a new font in the text area of this box or by clicking on the little arrow to the right of the text area. This will cause a menu to appear from which a font can be chosen.

An image of the format toolbar's "Font Size" selection box.
Font size

  The user can change the font size of a selection by typing the number of a different font size or by clicking on the little arrow to the right of the entry box and selecting the preferred size.

An image of the format toolbar's "Bold" button.
Bold

  Change the style of the current cell or the currently selected text to be bold, or unbold it if it is already bold.

An image of the format toolbar's "Italic" button.
Italic

  Change the style of the current cell or the currently selected text to be italicized.

An image of the format toolbar's "Underline" button.
Underline

  Change the style of the current cell or the currently selected text to be underlined.

An image of the format toolbar's "Left Justify" button.
Left justify..

  Justify the contents of the cell to the left of the cell.

An image of the format toolbar's "Center" button.
Center

  Center the content of the cells.

An image of the format toolbar's "Right Justify" button.
Right Justify

  Justify the content of the cells to the right side of the cells

An image of the format toolbar's "Center across Selection" button.
Center across the selection

  Center the content of the cells on the selected cells.

An image of the format toolbar's "Merge Cells" button.
Merge Cells

  Merge the selected cells into a single cell.

An image of the format toolbar's "Split Merged Cells" button.
Split Merged Cells

  Split previously merged cells into separate cells.

An image of the format toolbar's "Money" button.
Money

  Sets the format of the selected cells to be monetary.

An image of the format toolbar's "Percentage" button.
Percentage

  Sets the format of the selected cells to be a percentage.

An image of the format toolbar's "Thousands Separator" button.
Thousands separator

  Sets the format of the selected cells to use thousands separator.

An image of the format toolbar's "Increase Precision" button.
Increase the displayed precision.

  Increases the number of decimals shown in the currently selected cell.

An image of the format toolbar's "Decrease Precision" button.
Decrease the displayed precision.

  Decreases the number of decimals in the currently selected cell.

An image of the format toolbar's "Decrease Indentation" button.
Decrease the displayed indentation.

  This button decreases the indentation of selected elements.

An image of the format toolbar's "Increase Indentation" button.
Increase the displayed indentation.

  This button increases the indentation of selected elements.

An image of the format toolbar's "Borders" button and drop down palette.
Change the display borders.

  This button and drop down menu can be used to set the borders of all the cells in the selection.

An image of the format toolbar's "Set background colour" button and drop down palette.
Set the Background Colour.

  This button and drop down menu can be used to set the back ground colour.

An image of the format toolbar's "Set text colour" button and drop down palette.
Set the Text Colour

  This can be used to change the colour of the text.

#### The Long Format Toolbar

The Long Format Toolbar

The Long Format Toolbar

The Long Format Toolbar contains all buttons that the Format Toolbar (described in ) contains, except in a different order.

In addition, the Long Format Toolbar also contains the following buttons:

An image of the long format toolbar's "Subscript" button.
Subscript

  Change the style of the current cell or the currently selected text to be subscripted.

An image of the long format toolbar's "Superscript" button.
Superscript

  Change the style of the current cell or the currently selected text to be superscripted.

#### The Object Toolbar

The Object Toolbar

The Object Toolbar.

An image of the object toolbar's "Create a rectangle object" button.
Box

  Insert a rectangular box containing optionally some text into the worksheet.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert an Ellipse" button.
Ellipse

  Insert an ellipse or a circle into the worksheet.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Frame" button.
Insert a Frame.

  This button allows a user to insert a frame into a worksheet.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Line" button.
Line

  Draw a line on the worksheet.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert an Arrow" button.
Arrow

  Draw a line with an arrow head at one end.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Checkbox" button.
Insert a Checkbox.

  This button allows a user to insert a check box.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Radio Button" button.
Insert a radio button.

  This button allows a user to insert a radio button.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Button" button.
Insert a button.

  This button allows a user to insert a button.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Scrollbar" button.
Insert a Scrollbar.

  This button allows a user to insert a scrollbar.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a spinbutton box" button.
Insert a Spinbutton Box.

  This button allows a user to insert a spinbutton box.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Slider" button.
Insert a Slider.

  This button allows a user to insert a slider.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a List" button.
Insert a List.

  This button allows a user to insert a list.

An image of the object toolbar's "Insert a Combobox" button.
Insert a Combo Box

  This allows a user to insert a Combo Box.

### Data Entry Area

Immediately above the grid of cells is the data entry area as shown in .

The Data Entry area.

An image of the data entry area.

This is a small area, which contains a current cell indicator, a cancel button, a confirm button, an entry button, and an entry area for detailed editing of the cell contents. These elements are explained individually below.

#### Current Cell Indicator

On the far left of the Data Entry area is the current cell indicator area. This area is shown in

The Current Cell Indicator.

An image of the current cell indicator.

The cell indicator will show the address for the cell at the top left of the selected region. This address is listed in the standard column:row notation. The alphabetic part indicates the column of this top leftmost cell and the numeric part indicates the row of this top left cell. For instance, the cell which is over three columns and down two rows is designated:

> C2

This designation matches the column and row headers for this cell.

While a region is being selected, the current cell indicator will change to show the size of the region which is being selected. This information is presented in a row number by column number format. For instance, this designation:

> 15R x 6C

would indicate a selection area 15 rows high by 6 columns wide. Once the mouse is released at the end of the selection, the current cell indicator goes back to giving the address of the single top leftmost cell.

#### The Cancel Button

The Cancel button

An image of the cancel button.
can be used to cancel the current edit and to restore the cell contents to the previous state. If a user decides in the middle of an edit that the data being entered into a cell is not what they want, the user can push this cancel button to cancel the current data and return the cell to the state it was at before.

The most common use of this button is when overwriting the contents of a cell with new data. If the user decided to revert the change before confirming it, the cancel button is the answer. Note that this button works just like typing the escape key on the keyboard.

#### The Confirm Button

The confirm button

An image of the enter button.
. can be used to finish the edit of a cell and enter the edit into the workbook. Note that this button works in the same way as the enter key.

#### The Equals Button

The equals button

An image of the equals button.
can be used to start a formula in the currently selected cell. If a user wanted to make cell D10 equal to cell B4, the user could simply click on cell D10, click this equals button, click on cell B4 and type the enter key. Note that this button works the same way as the equals key.

### The Cell Grid

Most of the work done on a spreadsheet is done to the main Cell area, the large grid like part of the worksheet. This is where all the formulas and data are entered, and is the center of activity for the spreadsheet.

The Cell Grid area, with cells of different sizes.

An image of the cell grid area.

shows the cell grid area, the column and row headers on the top and left, the scrollbars on the right and bottom and the tab list at the very bottom.

The figure has a few and shows that cell B3 as being selected. In this figure, the columns and rows have been resized and therefore look uneven.

Each cell in this area is delimited by a light grey line by default. The current selection is indicated by a rectangular box with a little box on the lower right, this case cell J12. The view in this figure shows the middle portion of a worksheet which is evident in two ways. Firstly, the column and row headers do not start at column A and row 1. Secondly, the scroll thumbs are not at the top and left. The thumbs are the boxes within the scroll bars that are used to scroll. Note also that cell D19 has a comment within it which is shown by the little red triangle at the top right corner.

The size of a cell is determined by the width of the column and height of the row that the cell is in. The columns and rows can be resized by acting on the header relevant to the cell. The user must move the mouse pointer to the edge of the header which is either to the right or below the cell. With the mouse pointer in this position, the pointer will change to a set of opposite pointing arrows. The user must then drag this edge away from the top left corner. This takes a little practice.

The cell area is the core of Gnumeric. Therefore the manual explains the use of cells in much greater detail in a separate section. Interested users should read .

#### The Column and Row Headers

The sheet is bordered by column headers on the top and row headers to the left. Columns are labeled alphabetically running horizontally across the top of the sheet as shown in .

The column labels at the top of the worksheet.

An image of the column labels.
Rows are labeled along the left side of the worksheet. Each label is a different integer increasing downward. This is shown in .

The row labels at the left side of the worksheet.

An image of the row labels.

#### The Scrollbars

The cell grid area's scrollbars work like other scrollbars. In this case they let the user work on a worksheet which is much bigger than what could be shown at any given moment.

#### The Tabbed Sheet Indicator

At the bottom of , Gnumeric has a tabbed sheet indicator. This is the boxes with the labels "Guppies", "Turtles", "Mermaids", "seahorses" and so on. In workbooks where there are more than one sheet, extra tabs are used to indicate how many sheets are there, and also allows the user to move to another sheet by clicking the proper tab. Each tab is a link to a separate worksheet within Gnumeric. In this figure, the "Turtles" tab has been selected. Gnumeric shows this by making the "Turtles" since the tab is a little bigger and making it overlap the two neighbouring tabs.

On the far right, the two arrows indicate that there are more sheets in the workbook and more tabs for those sheets. Unfortunately, there is not enough space to show them all so Gnumeric displays these arrows. If all the sheets are visible, these arrows will not be displayed. These arrows can be used to scroll the tabs and bring tabs that were hidden into view. This may be a little difficult to understand and work with but becomes easier quickly.

### The Information Area

The section at the very bottom of the worksheet view is the information area as is shown in .

The Information Display Area.

An image of the information display area.
The information area displays information depending on what is happening in Gnumeric.

#### The Menu Hint Area

The leftmost portion of the information display area, the part which reads: "Sort the selected cells" is a hint explaining what a menu does. In this case, the Data menu was opened and the pointer is hovering above the "sort" menu entry. Gnumeric is responding by giving a quick explanation of what that menu entry does.

#### The File Status Indicator

Whenever Gnumeric opens or saves a file, the file status indicator appears with a progress bar which grows as Gnumeric progresses. In , Gnumeric was just over halfway done opening a file.

#### The Running Calculation Area

In the bottom right hand corner, is an info area that shows some constantly calculated values. The default set is to show the Sum of all the currently selected cells.

There is a right click option that includes a few more options. This can include Sum, Min, Max, Average, Count.

The running calculation area.

An image of the running calculation area.

### The Mouse Pointers used by Gnumeric

The shape of the mouse pointer (the pointer which is movable by the mouse) changes in different contexts. This indicates that different functionality is available and that mouse clicks will have different results. The different mouse pointers and the actions they indicate are discussed below.

An arrow pointing to the upper left.
The left pointing arrow pointer:

  The left hand pointing arrow pointer is the standard pointer used for most of the interaction with Gnumeric. This pointer is used to select menus and menu entries, toolbar buttons, columns or rows, the scrolling `thumbs' and various other elements.

A wide white cross with black shading.
The cell selection pointer:

  This pointer appears over the cell grid area and can be used to select cells for editing.

A vertical bar limited at each end by short horizontal stubs.
The text editing pointer:

  The text editing pointer is used to indicate the location in the text where new edits will appear. This cursor can be used to change the scale of the zoom, to change the name and size of the font currently used or to edit the cell contents in the cell entry area (the white area to the right of the equals (=) sign.

A thin cross pointer
The cross hair pointer:

  The cross hair pointer can be used to change the cell selection area. The pointer appears when the mouse pointer is placed over the handle box, the black square at the lower right hand side of the selection. When the cross hair pointer appear, the selection can be altered by clicking the left-hand mouse button and dragging the handle to a new position. The cross hair pointer can also be used to insert a graphic object, by clicking with the left hand mouse button to place one corner and releasing the button to place another of the corners.

A double ended vertical arrow.
A double ended horizontal arrow.
The expansion pointers:

  These pointers can be used to change the height of rows or the width of columns. These pointers appear in certain dialog windows to resize the different parts of the dialog. The pointers are also used to resize graphical objects as is explained below.

A left pointing hand icon.
The sheet selection and hyperlink pointer:

  This pointer appears above the sheet tabs and can be used, by left clicking, to change the currently selected sheet or, by right clicking, to obtain the sheet dialog box. This pointer also appears above cells which are hyperlinks. Left clicking on a hyperlink may change the view to a new location, or may open an external file.

An arrow pointing to the upper right.
The right pointing arrow pointer:

  The right hand pointing arrow pointer is used to select graphical objects (such as drawing objects (e.g. arrows, ellipses) and graph objects (e.g. charts)).

A four way arrow.
The movement pointer:

  The movement pointer can be used to move graphical objects around a worksheet without resizing the object.

A double ended vertical arrow.
A double ended horizontal arrow.
A diagonal double arrow with center box.
The graphical object re-sizing pointers:

  These pointers allow the resizing of graphical objects. If the mouse pointer is placed over one of the handle boxes of the graphical object, the handle box will turn green and the pointer will change to one of these forms. When these pointers appear, click dragging with the left mouse button will resize the graphical object either scaling or stretching the object.

Several pointers used to resize dialogs and windows.
The window resizing pointers:

  These pointers are used to change the size of Gnumeric windows and dialogs.

## Working with Data

This chapter explains the core functionality of Gnumeric including the basic types of data manipulated by Gnumeric, the methods of entering, manipulating and formatting data, and the basic tools for analysis of these data. More advanced analysis is described in .

### Data in Gnumeric Cells

The purpose of a spreadsheet is to manipulate data and perform calculations on those data. In order to understand how to use Gnumeric, it is necessary to understand what types of data are available and how these types can be manipulated.

Because all of the data which are entered into a Gnumeric workbook can eventually be stored in a file, the file contents define the kinds of data which can be entered into the spreadsheet. A file contains:

- metadata about the file contents,

- global data for the workbook,

- the actual data contents of each worksheet in the workbook.

The metadata include a brief document summary describing the file contents and include the settings applicable to the data contents, such as the settings for the printing of each sheet and any settings for automatically saving the file. The global data for the workbook include any names which are defined by the user and attributes, such as the protected status of the workbook and sheets. The actual data contained in the worksheets include the contents of the cells, both data and formatting, and other objects such as drawing and charts.

This chapter describes the information which can be stored in spreadsheet cells. This includes the five types of data which cells can contain and the formatting which can be applied to each cell. The chapter first describes the five data types available, then describes the formatting which can be performed on each cell, then explains how data can be inserted into a spreadsheet and finally describes how to copy and move data around a worksheet along with the transformations which can be performed as the data are moved. This chapter does not describe other types of data which can be stored in a spreadsheet such as drawing elements and graphs used to chart data. These are explained in later chapters.

### The Types of Cell Elements

Each cell in a Gnumeric worksheet can contain only a single data element. These elements will have one of five basic types: text, numbers, booleans, formulas, or errors. During data entry, Gnumeric assigns a default data type to the cell based on an analysis of the cell contents. This assignment can be changed later if Gnumeric makes the wrong assignment. For information on how to change the data type of a cell, see .

The five basic types of data which can be stored in a spreadsheet cell are:

Text

  A text element can contain a series of letters, numbers or other contents. For example, the first cell in a worksheet might contain the characters —This worksheet describes the company's income — which Gnumeric would interpret to be text. In order to distinguish text elements from number or formula elements, the text element may start with a single quote. For instance, if a cell contained only the three digits 345, Gnumeric would consider that to be the number three hundred and forty five. If this cell is intended to be a string, Gnumeric will store the cell as '345. The newline character cannot be entered directly but must be entered as Alt Enter. For more information on entering and formatting text elements, see .

Numbers

  A number element can contain a series of digits (425) but may include specific text and formatting characters to indicate negative numbers (-345), decimal separator (34.0567), thousand separators (12,342), currency ($23), dates (21-10-1998), times (10:23) or scientific notation (2.3e12). Dates may include the names of months or their abbreviation. The currency, decimal separator and thousands separator symbols vary depending on the locale (the language and other location specific behaviour) to which Gnumeric has been set. See to understand how to change the locale. If you want a number to be displayed as a plain string without any number formatting, you can put a single quote (') before it. For more information on entering and formatting, numeric elements see .

Boolean

  A boolean element can contain one of two values: TRUE and FALSE. These are useful as inputs or outputs from formulas and for boolean algebra. More information on boolean data elements is presented in .

Formulas

  A formula is an instruction to Gnumeric which describes a calculation which should be performed automatically. These formulas can contain standard arithmetic elements but can also contain references to other cells. Calculations which depend on other cells are usually recalculated when the values of another cell changes. Formulas always begin with a special character — the equals sign (=). The commercial at symbol (@) can be used instead of the equals sign during data entry but Gnumeric will convert this to an equals sign. Alternatively, an entry which describes a calculation and which starts with either the plus (+) or minus symbol (-) will be converted to a formula starting with an equals sign. For a more complete explanation of formulas, see .

  A cell reference is the part of a formula which refers to another cell. For example, in the formula to add two cells =(A4+A1), both A4 and A1 are cell references. These references can be quite complex referring to cells in different worksheets or even in different files. See for a complete explanation of references.

Error

  An error element describes the failure to calculate the result of a formula. These values are rarely entered directly by a user but usually are the display given when a formula cannot be correctly calculated. See for a complete list of error values and their explanation.

A cell may display a series of hash marks (######). This indicates that the result is too wide to display in the cell given the current font setting and the current column width. When this occurs, the value in the cell can be seen in two ways. If the cell is selected, the value will appear in the data entry area (to the right of the equals button directly above the cell grid). Alternatively, the column containing the cell can be widened until the data contents become visible: select the whole column (by clicking on the column header) and choose Format Column Auto fit selection .

#### Text Data Elements

Text elements consist of an arbitrary sequence of characters or numbers entered into a cell. Because Gnumeric automatically recognizes certain sequences as numbers or formulas, certain sequences of characters (such as sequences containing only digits or a text element which starts with an equals sign) must be treated specially to have them considered text. In order to force any sequence to be considered text, the sequence can be started with an apostrophe symbol ('). Alternatively, the 'number' format of the cell can be specified to be 'text' before entering the characters, as explained in . Text elements are the simplest elements to enter into spreadsheet cells.

An example of a spreadsheet cell grid with cells containing text is given in .

A Text Data Element in a Cell.

Valid text entries include simple words, whole sentences and even paragraphs.

To include a newline in a cell, a special key combination is required. A newline symbol can be inserted with the key combination of Alt Enter.

#### Number Data Elements

Number data elements include a variety of data all of which are stored and manipulated by Gnumeric as numbers. This includes integers, decimal fractions, general fractions, numbers in scientific notation, dates, times, and currency values.

Data are recognized as numbers when they are entered, dependent on the format of the sequence of characters entered. Gnumeric attempts to intelligently guess the subtype of the data and match the data to an existing format for numbered data. If it matches a data format, Gnumeric will automatically assign the datum to a data type and associate an appropriate display format with the cell. The format recognition of Gnumeric includes a wide variety of data formats which are discussed in detail in .

Because Gnumeric automatically guesses the data type of a number being entered into a cell, this process may have to be over-ridden for certain types of data. For example, postal codes in the United States consist of a sequence of numbers which Gnumeric interprets as an integer. However, U.S. postal codes can start with a leading zero which Gnumeric discards by default. In order to override the default format, the number format of the cell must be specified before the entry of the data. This is explained in , below.

#### Boolean Data Elements

Cells can contain boolean data elements. These elements arise from Boolean logic which is a branch of mathematics. These elements are useful for manipulation of formulas.

Boolean values can be either "TRUE" or "FALSE". If these strings are entered into a cell, Gnumeric will recognize these as boolean values. These values can then be used in formulas. Certain formulas will also return boolean values.

#### Formula Elements

Formulas are the key to making a powerful spreadsheet. A formula instructs Gnumeric to perform calculations and display the results. These calculations are defined as a formula data elements. The power of these formulas arises because these formulas can include the contents of other cells and the results of the formulas are updated automatically when the contents of any cell included in the formula change. The contents of other cells are included using "cell references" which are explained below.

Any formula entered into a cell must follow a specific syntax so that Gnumeric can interpret the formula correctly. This syntax closely follows mathematical notation but also includes spreadsheet formulas, object names and cell references.

##### Syntax

Formulas are distinguished from regular data by starting with an equals sign (=) as the first character. Everything following this equals sign is evaluated as a formula.

Alternate Beginnings for Formulas

To accommodate those more familiar with Lotus spreadsheets, Gnumeric recognizes the commercial at symbol (@) as the beginning of a formula and substitutes an equals sign. The plus and minus characters (+ and -) may also start formulas that involve calculation, but when used in front of a single number only indicate the sign of the number.

The simplest formulas just use the standard math operator and symbols. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division are represented by +, -, *, and /, just as you would expect. +,- can be placed in front of numbers to indicate sign, as well.

Examples of standard operators

    =5+5            returns 10.

    =5-4            returns 1.

    =-5             returns -5.

    =5*5            returns 25.

    =(5*5)+11       returns 36.

    =(5*5)+(49/7)   returns 32.

Formulas can result in error values in several instances. If a formula is entered incorrectly, Gnumeric will display a warning and allow either the formula to be corrected or will save the formula as text for editing later. If a syntactically correct formula results in a nonsensical calculation (for instance, a division by zero), then an error value will be displayed indicating the error.

##### Using Functions

Formulas can also contain functions which denote the use of standard mathematical, business, statistical, and scientific calculations. These functions take the place of any data element in a formula and can therefore be combined with the standard arithmetic operators described above.

These functions have the form:

Basic Function syntax

    FUNCTIONNAME(ARGUMENTS)

where FUNCTIONNAME indicates the name of a function and ARGUMENTS indicates one or more arguments to the function. The function arguments are separated by commas (,).

While the documentation generally refers to functions and to cells in capital letters, their use is not actually case sensitive.

Some examples of the use of functions are:

Some examples of function syntax

    =SUM(A1,A2,A4,B5)

    =AVERAGE(A1:A16)

    =EXP(1)

    =PI()

    =3+4*MIN(A1,A2,B6)

The arguments of the functions vary in number from none, as in the PI() function, to an unlimited number, as in the SUM() function, depending on the type of function.

##### Cell Referencing

Formulas can include the displayed data from other cells. These contents are described as `cell references' which are names indicating that the contents of other cells should be used in the calculation.

Each cell in a spreadsheet is named by its column and row labels. By default, the column labels are letters and the row labels are numbers. The first cell, therefore, is called A1. One column over and two rows down from cell A1 is the cell B3. In a worksheet of the default size, the right most and bottom most cell is cell IV65536 which is the cell in column IV and in row 65536. An alternative cell reference notation uses numbers for both row and column identification. See below for details.

The value of a cell can be used in a formula simply by entering its name where a number value would otherwise occur. For example, to have the data in cell B1 appear in another cell, enter =B1 into that cell. Other more complex examples include:

Some examples of simple cell reference syntax

    =A1+EXP(B1)-(C3/C4)

    =COS(A2)*SIN(A2)

###### Absolute cell referencing

Cells can be referenced in the default way (relative referencing), or by using absolute referencing. Absolute referencing means that when the cell is copied, the cell reference does not change. Normally, auto-filling a cell range or moving a cell will change its cell reference so that it maintains a relation to the original cell. Absolute referencing prevents these changes.

When Does Relative Referencing Make a Difference?

The difference between absolute and relative cell references only matters if you are copying or moving cells that contain cell references. For cells that are going to remain in place, both the relative and absolute references have the same result.

Relativa referenser

For example, if =A1 is the formula entered into cell B2, cell B2 will display the data in cell A1, which is one row up and one column left. Then, if you copy the contents of B2 to cell F6, cell F6 will contain the value from E5, which is also one row up and one column left.

For the copied cell to still refer to A1, specify absolute references using the $ character: $A$1 refers to cell A1, no matter where it is copied.

The format for absolute cell referencing is to use a '$' in front of the cell coordinate that you want to stay constant. The column, the row, or both can be held constant.

Cell referencing examples

What happens when a given formula is entered into cell B2, then copied to other cells?

=A1

  =A1 is a normal, or relative, cell reference function. When =A1 is entered into cell B2, it refers to the value of data one cell up and one cell left from the cell with the reference. Therefore, if this formula were copied from cell B2 to cell C2, the value displayed in cell C2 will be the value of data in cell B1. Copied to cell R19, the formula will display the data in cell Q18.

=$A1

  In this case, the column value is absolute, but the row value is relative. Therefore, if =$A1 is entered into cell B2, the formula refers to the data in column A that is one row up from the current location. Copied to cell C2, the formula will refer to the data in cell A1. Copied to cell R19, it will refer to the data in A18.

=A$1

  This formula uses a relative column value and an absolute row value. In cell B2, it refers to cell A1 as the data in the cell one column left and in row 1. Copied to cell C3, the formula will display the data in cell B1.

=$A$1

  No matter where this formula is copied, it will always refer to the data in cell A1.

###### References using R1C1 Notation

From the Format ▶ Sheet submenu you can select R1C1 notation for a worksheet. This causes all cell references on the sheet to be shown as “RrCc”, where r is the row number and c is the column number. When R1C1 notation is selected, the column headers show numbers rather than letters.

When r and c are positive integers, as in “R1C1”, the reference is absolute. To produce a relative reference, enclose a number in square brackets; if the number is zero, it can be omitted along with the brackets. For example, “RC[-2]” refers to the cell two columns to the left in the current row, while “R[1]C1” refers to the cell in the first column of the next row down from the referencing cell. The second example combines a relative row reference with an absolute column reference.

###### Referencing multiple cells

Many functions can take multiple cells as arguments. This can either be a comma separated list, an array, or any combination thereof.

###### Multiple individual cells

A comma separated list of cell references can be used to indicate cells that are discontinuous.

Some examples of function syntax

    =SUM(A1,B2,C4)

    =MIN(A1,B2,C4,C5,D6)

An image of a worksheet with a function.

###### Referencing a continuous region of cells

For functions that take more than one argument, it is often easier to reference the cells as a group. This can include cells in sets horizontally, vertically, or in arrays.

The ':' operator is used to indicate a range of cells. The basic syntax is upper left corner:bottom right corner.

Referencing blocks of cells

    =SUM(A1:E1)

    =AVERAGE(B4:E7)

    =MIN(A1:A5)

An image of a worksheet with a function referencing a block of cells.

###### Referencing non-continuous regions

For referencing cells that are in non-continuous regions, you can use any combination of the above methods to get the needed cells.

Referencing blocks of cells

    =SUM(A1:E1, B19, L14:L17)

    =AVERAGE(A1,A3, A5:C5)

###### Referencing cells on other sheets

It is possible to reference cells which are not part of the current sheet. This is done using the SHEETNAME!CELLLIST syntax, where SHEETNAME is an identifier (usually a sheet name) and CELLLIST is a reference to a cell or range of cells as described in the previous sections. If SHEETNAME contains spaces or other special characters, you must quote the whole name to allow Gnumeric to recognize it as a single name. See the examples below.

When the reference is to a range of cells, the worksheet name only needs to be given with the first cell reference. The ending cell of the range is assumed to be on the same worksheet if an explicit sheet name is not specified. Note, however, that “Sheet1!A1:Sheet3!C5” is a legitimate cell range description. It identifies a range three columns wide and five rows deep on each of the worksheets from Sheet1 through Sheet3. The preferred form of such a reference is “Sheet1:Sheet3!A1:C5”, which is the form Gnumeric will display if you subsequently edit the contents of a cell containing such a reference.

Referencing cells in other sheets

    ='Sheet 0'!A1+'Sheet 3'!A5

    =SUM(Sheet1!A1:A5)

###### Referencing cells on other files

It is possible to reference cells in other files. The canonical form for these references is [filename]SHEETNAME!CELLLIST. The square brackets serve to quote filename, so you should use quotation marks only if they are actually part of the file name. Note that the sheet name must be present in references of this form.

Referencing cells in other files

    =[Name of the file]'Sheet 0'!A1

    =CEIL( [First Version.gnumeric]'Sheet 1'!E20 )

##### Namn

Names are labels which have a meaning defined in the spreadsheet or by Gnumeric. A name can refer to a numeric value, a string, a range of cells, or a formula. For details on defining and using names, see .

Examples of name usage

If myCellRange is defined as '$A$1:$B$500' and my_E_Constant is defined as 2.71828182845 then we can have:

    =VLOOKUP(C1, "gnu", myCellRange, 2, 0)

    =LN(my_E_Constant)

    =SUM(myCellRange, my_E_Constant)

##### Array Formulas

It is periodically useful or necessary to have an expression return a matrix rather than a single value. The first example most people think of are matrix operations such as multiplication, transpose, and inverse. A less obvious usage is for data retrieval routines (databases, realtime data-feeds) or functions with vector results (yield curve calculations).

Entering an Array Formula

An array formula is currently entered by selecting the single range in which to store the result, entering the array formula, and hitting the key combination, Ctrl Shift Enter .

The result is displayed as:

    ={FUNCTION(ARGUMENTS)}(num_rows, num_cols)[row][column]

##### Database Formulas

Solely for compatibility with Excel and ODF files, Gnumeric supports various database functions: , , , , , , , , , , and .

Since these functions are quite restrictive on the criteria that can be used, it is often easier to use array functions as described in . Array functions are also useful in the case that a specific database function does not exist:

Simulating `DMEDIAN` with an Array Function

As shown in , instead of using (the non-existing) function `DMEDIAN` one can use the alternative expression `median(if(A1:A20="AA",B1:B20))` entered as an array function as described in . Multiple conditions can be combined using multiplication to obtain `AND` and addition to obtain `OR` as in `median(if((A1:A20="AA")+(C1:C20="BB"),B1:B20))`. Using defined names as introduced in for `A1:A20` and `B1:B20` can make this code very flexible and readable.

In this case we cannot use `if(OR(A1:A20="AA",C1:C20="BB"),...)` since the OR function would be applied to all 40 equality tests rather than each of the 20 pairs of equality tests.

Calculating the MEDIAN of Some Data Values

Calculating the MEDIAN of some data values.

#### Error Elements

Cells can display error values if the formula contained in the cell cannot be solved or if other anomalous conditions occur.

In Gnumeric all error values have names that start with `#`. 8 error values are standardized:

The standard error values of Gnumeric

Namn | Normal Use
--- | ---
`#DIV/0!` | Division by zero occurred.
`#N/A` | Not applicable. This is the result of the `=NA()` formula.
`#NAME?` | An unknown function name or other name was encountered.
`#NULL!` | The result of specifying an intersecting range that in fact does not intersect.
`#NUM!` | A formula could not be evaluated because an invalid number was used as argument, for example `=SQRT(-1)`
`#REF!` | An invalid cell address or reference was encountered.
`#UNKNOWN!` | Usually the result of importing an unrecognized error from a different file format.
`#VALUE!` | A formula could not be evaluated because the wrong type of argument was used.

### Data Entry

There are several ways to add data into a spreadsheet. The simplest data entry technique involves typing the data into a spreadsheet by hand. This is usually necessary the first time that data are introduced into a computer. If the data already exist in a computer file of some kind, a simple way might exist to insert these data into a Gnumeric worksheet. If the data are in a text file, they can be inserted into a worksheet rapidly using the text conversion facilities. If data exist in a spreadsheet file of a different format, Gnumeric may be able to open the file and the data can then be copied where they are wanted.

This section explains how to enter data by hand into a spreadsheet. The techniques necessary to obtain data from other computer sources are explained in which deals with external data sources.

If the information being entered into Gnumeric cannot be interpreted correctly, Gnumeric will display an error message. The user may then be forced to edit the data before continuing. For example, a formula may be mathematically incorrect if the user has two operators in a row (e.g. =3+*4) and the dialog will give the user the chance to re-edit the entry or accept the entry as text rather than as a formula. When the formula is corrected, the leading apostrophe can be removed and Gnumeric will re-interpret the entry as a formula.

#### Data Entry by Editing Cells.

The simplest method to place data in a spreadsheet involves selecting the location for the data, typing the data on a keyboard and then typing the Enter key to finish the input.

Simple Data Entry

- Select the cell where you want to enter data by clicking on it with the white cross cursor. This will place the thick `selection' box around that cell.

- Type in the data or formula. The details of this step are presented below for each of the five types of data which can be entered.

- Press the Enter key. This will complete the input and move the selection box down one cell which will then be able to receive further input.

At any time while entering the data and before the Enter is pressed, the user can cancel the data entry by typing the Esc key. This will return the spreadsheet to the selection mode and restore the contents previously in the selected cell.

Instead of the Enter key, other keys can be used to input the data in the current cell. These other keys will move the selection box to other locations than does the Enter key. The Tab key inputs the entry in the currently selected cell and then moves the selection box one cell to the right of the current cell. The arrow keys input the entry into the currently selected cell and move one cell in the direction of the arrow. The Enter key can also be used in conjunction with other keys. Typing the Shift Enter combination will move the selection upwards after entry. Typing the Ctrl Enter combination will re-select the currently selected cell.

##### Advanced Editing Mode

After selecting the cell and initially entering the data, the user is in a limited editing mode. The main key for editing mistakes in this mode is the backspace key.

For a more complete set of editing options, especially for longer entries, there is an advanced editing mode. To enter the advanced editing mode, press the F2 function key or click on the editing region. The keyboard focus will then shift from the current cell to the editing region at the top of the worksheet. There, you can use cursor keys to position the cursor within the data in the cell, and have all of the capabilities of the data entry area available.

For example, you can use:

Backspace

  Delete the character to the left of the cursor.

Cursor keys

  Move the cursor appropriately.

Ctrl+K

  Delete to the end of the line

See For more info on the data entry area.

All the normal key bindings for GNOME application entry boxes also apply in the data entry box.

After finishing the data entry, pressing the Enter key will input the data entry and move the selection box downward just like for the simple editing mode.

#### Entering Text Data

Text can be entered by selecting a cell, typing the text and then typing the Enter key. Anything that is not interpreted to be a number, boolean, formula or error will be treated as a text field. To prevent Gnumeric from interpreting an entry as one of these other elements, a leading apostrophe can be added to force the entry to be text. Any entry, no matter what the contents, which starts with a leading apostrophe (') will be considered to be text.

Postal codes in the United States are series of five integers. By default, Gnumeric interprets these to be numbers. This interpretation means that the leading zeros used in the postal codes of the northeastern region will be lost by default. To retain these leading zeros, either the code should be entered with a leading apostrophe (e.g. '02917) or the cells should be formatted as text before data entry (see for an explanation of formatting).

#### Entering Number Data

Numbers can be entered like other items. First the cell in which the number should be entered must be selected, then a valid number must be typed in and finally the entry must be inserted using the Enter key. The valid formats for numbers are presented in .

#### Entering Boolean Data

A boolean can be entered by selecting the cell, typing the boolean (either TRUE or FALSE) and then typing the Enter key.

#### Entering Formulas

Formulas can be entered simply by typing a syntactically correct formula in a cell. The correct syntax for formulas is explained in detail in . Formulas begin with an equals sign (=) and contain arithmetic symbols, functions with their arguments and cell references.

To enter a formula, first the cell must be selected, then the correct formula must be typed, and finally the Enter key must be typed.

If the formula entered into Gnumeric cannot be interpreted correctly, Gnumeric will display an error message giving the user the choice of re-editing the formula or saving the formula as a text field to be edited later. For example, a formula may be mathematically incorrect if the user has two operators in a row (e.g. =3+*4). If the formula is saved as text, when the formula is corrected the leading apostrophe must be removed. Gnumeric will then re-interpret the entry as a formula.

##### Shortcuts for including cell references and ranges in formulas

Formulas often include cell references or references to ranges of cells as arguments to functions. These references and ranges can be entered into a formula simply by typing in the proper syntax (see for more details). But manually entering in cell ranges is slow and cumbersome. In order to speed up the entry of these cell ranges, the mouse and the keyboard arrow keys can be used to select these cell ranges quickly.

When editing a formula, if the cursor is at a point where a cell reference or range would be appropriate, the reference or range can be selected using the mouse. If the mouse is used to click on a cell, the reference of that cell will be entered into a formula. Alternatively, if the mouse is used to drag a selection over a range of cells, that cell range will become part of the formula. The selected range will be highlighted by a border of moving black dashes, commonly called the "marching ants" border.

The highlighted selection

Using the mouse to enter cell references

- Begin entering a formula as you would normally. Stop at the point where a cell reference is appropriate. For example, example, type `=exp(`

- Click on the cell you want to reference. Its reference will be entered into the formula.

- To finish the formula, just type in the closing parenthesis. This will also "unselect" the region.

The mouse can be used to select a single cell, a continuous range of cells or several disjoint ranges of cells just like regular selections.

If entering lots of formulas or even just entering a few formulas, it is often quickest to use the keyboard to select cells and ranges of cells for use in formulas. Just as reaching a input point allows the user to select cells with the mouse, it is possible to use the keyboard to select cells. Just use the cursor keys and selection modifiers to create a selection.

Using the keyboard to enter cell references

- Select a cell to enter a formula into. For example A1.

- Enter a formula, but stop the cursor at a point where a cell reference is appropriate. For this example, =SUM(

- Move the selection around with the cursor keys. Move the selection cursor to cell B1 to start the selection.

- Hold down Shift and move the selection one cell over and one cell down. Cells B1,B2,C1,C2 should now be selected and the formula should show =sum(B1:C2

- To finish the function, close the parenthesis. The cell should now show =sum(B1:C2). Press enter and the formula is entered.

To select a range of cell, hold Shift and move over the desired area.

To stop entering a selection or to start over, press Shift Backspace

##### Entering formulas using the function list

##### Entering formulas using the formula guru

#### Entering Errors

Errors are almost never entered directly into a spreadsheet but usually arise from problems which Gnumeric encounters during calculations. A list of errors with their meanings is presented in .

In an unusual case where it is needed, an error can be entered by hand like the entry of other elements. First the cell must be selected, then the error must be entered (e.g. #DIV/0!) and finally the Enter key must be pressed.

### Advanced Data Entry

This section describes advanced methods for data entry in Gnumeric. This includes techniques useful when adding large amounts of data, methods to automatically catch mistakes during data entry, using pre-defined templates to format data input, obtaining data from external sources and generating sequences of random numbers with defined distributions.

#### Entering Large Quantities of Data

It is sometimes necessary to enter large amounts of data by hand into a spreadsheet. To facilitate this work, Gnumeric provides several techniques to facilitate the entry of large amounts of data.

If data are to be entered into a series of rows or columns, this region can be selected ahead of time thereby modifying the behaviour of the data entry keys (the Enter, Tab and arrow keys).

Data entry into a region

- Select the region with the mouse. For example, the region from cell C4 to cell E8 can be selected by clicking with the left mouse button on cell C4 and dragging the mouse cursor to cell E8. (More information on complex selections is presented below.)

- Enter data by typing the data and the Enter key. If this is done repeatedly, the fifth time the Enter key is pressed, the selection will not move to cell C9 but will jump up to cell D4.

The Tab key can also be used instead of the Enter key to move sequentially through the selection.

#### Entering a Regular Sequence

It is often necessary to enter a regular sequence of numbers or a repeated sequence of text. Gnumeric provides several ways to input series and sequences of this kind.

The simplest way to fill a series with the same element repeated involves entering the element once and dragging the selection box to fill that element repeatedly. For example, the text "employee:" could be input into cell C2. That cell could then be selected. The selection box is a thick white rectangle which surrounds the cell. This selection box has a small white square at the bottom right hand corner. If the mouse cursor is placed above this square box, it changes to a thin cross. If the left hand mouse button is clicked and held, and the mouse dragged to cell C10, Gnumeric will automatically fill all of the cells with the identical string.

An alternative way to enter data into a region involves first selecting the region, then typing the value and finally typing the Ctrl Enter key combination. This will fill the whole region with the identical value which was originally entered.

A similar method is available to fill sequences of integers. If the example just given was altered so that cell C2 had the number 14 and the Ctrl key was held during the dragging of the selection, Gnumeric will automatically fill the cells C2 to C10 with the series 14,15,16,...,22.

More complex series and sequences of data can be entered with a similar mechanism.

To do an autofill:

- Enter a value into the first cell you wish to autofill. For example, the cell C2 could have the number "24" entered.

- Enter a second value into the second cell you wish to autofill. This must be adjacent to the first cell. This sets the increment to use when autofilling the rest of your cells. For example, the cell D2 could have the number "28" entered.

- Select both the cells just entered. At the bottom-right of the selection should be a small box. Your mouse cursor will change to a cross-hair when placed over the box. Press and hold on the box. Drag in the direction, either vertical or horizontal, you wish to increment and release when all the cells are filled. For example, selecting cells C2 and D2, then dragging the bottom right of the selection to cell I2 will fill the cells with the sequence from 24 to 48 with each increment being 4.

An alternative to the last step involves using the menus. Once the first two values have been input, the whole range to be filled can be selected using the mouse and then the Autofill selection can be made from the Edit and Fill. This will automatically complete the series in the selected region.

Gnumeric is able to increment several types of data beyond simple integers. The procedure is the same as described above but involves different starting values. Gnumeric can increment:

Integers

  1, 2, 3, etc.

Natural Numbers

  1.03, 2.05, 3.07, etc.

Weekday Names

  Monday, Tuesday, etc.

Weekday Abbreviations

  Mon, Tues, etc.

Month Names

  January, February, etc.

Month Abbreviations

  Jan, Feb, etc.

Strings with Numbers

  Item1, Item2, etc

Dates

  11/14/2001, 11/15/2001, etc.

  Gnumeric supports incrementing the date by month, date, or year.

  Note that, While Gnumeric will increment days of the month, if you do 11/14/2001 and 12/14/2001, it will recognize it as the same day of the month and increment the month so the next value would be to 1/14/2002 instead of the day difference.

Gnumeric can be explicitly told the cells to autofill as in the examples above, but it can also guess the number of cells to fill based on the length of an adjacent column or row. For example, if the cells B2 to B10 have information and cell C2 has the integer value "1", then selecting cell C2 and double clicking on the bottom rightmost box of the selection rectangle will fill the value "1" from cell C3 to cell C10.

#### Automatically Correcting Simple Mistakes

The entry of large amounts of data into a spreadsheet is tedious work which is prone to repeated mistakes. Gnumeric provides a tool to automatically correct commonly made simple mistakes. The corrections are configured and activated using the `AutoCorrect' dialog, available via Auto Correct in the Tools menu.

The Auto Correct dialog.

An image of the auto-correct dialog.

##### Capitalize the Names of Days

If this correction rule is activated, the first letter of a name of a day is capitalized automatically. For example, if you type `monday', it is automatically replaced by `Monday'.

##### Correct TWo INitial CApitals

A common mistake is to hold down the shift key a little bit too long while typing initial letters. When it happens, you will get two initial capitals instead of one. If this correction rule is activated, the second letter of words beginning with two capital letters is automatically lowercased. For example, if you type `TOtal' into a cell it is replaced by `Total'. Note that if the word contains two capital letters only, it is not replaced.

It is possible to specify exceptions to this tool. For example, you do not want the tool to replace the word `PVbonds' when it is typed. To specify exceptions, type `PVbonds' into the ``Do not correct'' entry, and press ``Add'' button. Now the word should be included in the list of exceptions. To remove a word from the list, select the word and press the ``Remove'' button.

##### Capitalize the First Letter of Sentences

If this correction rule is activated, the first letter of a sentence typed into a cell is capitalized, if it is a lowercase letter in the first place. Only text that ends to a dot is considered a sentence.

It is possible to specify exceptions to this tool. For example, you do not want the tool to capitalize letters after acronym `i.g.'. To specify exceptions, type `i.g.' into the ``Do not capitalize after'' entry, and press ``Add'' button. Now the word should be included in the list of exceptions. To remove a word from the list, select the word and press the ``Remove'' button.

#### Using a Format Template

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

#### Generating Random Number Sequences

Random Number Generation Tool Dialog

An image of the random number generation tool.

Use the random number generation tool to generate random numbers. This tool can generate random numbers from various probability distributions.

Specify the random distribution by selecting one of the items from the random distribution list. The following random distributions are supported: Discrete, Normal, Poisson, Exponential, Binomial, Negative Binomial, Bernoulli, and Uniform.

Specify the parameters of the selected distribution:

Discrete Random Distribution

  Specify the value and probability input range in the Value and Probability Input Range: entry box. The value and probability input range is a table consisting of two columns and any number of rows. The first column specifies the discrete random values and the second column the probabilities for them. The discrete random values do not have to be numbers, for example, strings will do as well. The sum of the probabilities in the second column should be one. For example, if you have the values A, B, C, and D in A1:A4 and values 0.1, 0.4, 0.2, and 0.3 in B1:B4, you would specify the value and probability input range to be A1:B4.

  If the probabilities do not add to 1, they will be automatically scaled.

Normal Random Distribution

  Specify the mean and the standard deviation. The default values are 0 for the mean and 1 for the standard deviation.

Poisson Random Distribution

  Specify the lambda in the Lambda entry. Lambda is the average number of events in a unit time interval.

Exponential Random Distribution

  Specify b in the b Value entry.

Binomial Random Distribution

  Specify the probability of success (p) in the p Value entry and the number of trials (n) in the Number of Trials entry. The Binomial distribution is a discrete distribution in which the experiment consists of n identical trials. Each trial is independent of other the trials and has two possible outcomes, a success or a failure. The probability of success p is constant from one trial to another. The mean of a random variable that has a Binomial distribution is E(X) = np, and the variance is var(X) = np(1-p).

Negative Binomial Distribution

  Specify the probability of success p in the p Value entry and the number of failures r in the Number of Failures entry. Negative Binomial distribution is a discrete distribution in which the experiment consists of a sequence of independent trials. Each trial has two possible outcomes, a success or a failure. The probability of success p is constant from one trial to another. The experiment continues until r failures are observed, where r is fixed in advance. The mean of a random variable that has a Negative Binomial distribution is E(X) = r(1-p)/p, and the variance is var(X) = r(1-p)/p^2.

Bernoulli Random Distribution

  Specify the probability of success (p) in the p Value entry. p is a probability value between 0 and 1. The Bernoulli distribution has two random values 0 and 1, and p is the probability to observe value 1. The mean of a random variable that has a Bernoulli distribution is E(X) = 1(p) + 0(1-p) = p, and the variance is var(X) = p(1-p).

Uniform Random Distribution

  Specify the range of the continuous random variable with the Between: and And: entries. The default values for these entries are 0 and 1.

Specify the number of variables in the Number of Variables: entry on the `Options' Page. This determines the number of columns of random values to be produced.

Specify the number of random numbers for each variable in the Size of Sample: entry on the same page. This determines the number of rows of random values to be produced.

Some Example Data for the Random Number Generation Tool

An image of some example data for use with the random number generation tool.

Using the Random Number Generation Tool

shows some example data and the corresponding output.

Random Number Generation Tool Output

An image of the output from the random number generation tool.

### Obtaining Data from External Sources

Data are commonly obtained from external sources such as from other files, either in a spreadsheet format or in delimited text format, from other applications using the mouse to copy and paste data or from external applications such as databases or internet data streams.

#### Obtaining Data from External Files

Data which already exist in an external file can be imported into a workbook first by opening the file into a separate instance of Gnumeric and then by copying the relevant data into the desired worksheet.

Data contained in external files in the formats of several other spreadsheet applications can be opened by Gnumeric. Gnumeric can open files in Applix (TM) format, GNU Oleo format, Lotus 123 (TM) format, Microsoft Excel (TM) format, Multiplan (TM) format, OpenOffice Calc or StarOffice Calc (TM) format, Plan Perfect (TM) format, Quattro Pro (TM) format, sc and XSpread format or in the Xbase format.

Data contained in external text files which are formatted in well defined ways can also be opened by Gnumeric. Gnumeric can open files formatted in Data Interchange Format, formatted as HTML tables, or formatted in text formats such as comma separated values or tab delimited records. The opening of text format files is configurable by the user so that text files which contain data formatted in a wide variety of schemes can be imported correctly into Gnumeric. Obtaining data from these files is explained in detail in the section titled .

Data which are opened into a separate instance of Gnumeric can be copied and pasted into the current worksheet with the copy and paste commands as explained in .

#### Obtaining Data by Cut and Paste

Data can be obtained from other Gnumeric workbooks or other applications using the mouse to copy data and paste them into a worksheet. This is explained below in the section titled .

#### Getting Data from a Database

Detta har ännu inte skrivits.

#### Getting Data from an Internet Data Stream

Gnumeric has been connected to external data sources such as stock quotation service data streams using an experimental plugin. This requires the ability to write programming code. Information on extending Gnumeric by developing plugins can be found in the section called and the actual computer source code can be found in the directory `gnumeric/plugins/sample_datasource/` of either a distribution of Gnumeric or in a code checkout from the revision control repository.

### Selecting Cells and Cell Ranges

By selecting multiple cells at once, common operations can be performed on all the cells which have been selected. These operations include data entry, copying the cells, and multiple other operations .

Some operations cannot be done on selections of arbitrary shape. For instance, Gnumeric could not correctly reshape a worksheet following the deletion of a discontinuous group of cells therefore such an operation is not allowed. If users attempt an operation which cannot be performed, a warning dialog will appear.

#### Simple Selections

The simplest selection involves a single cell. In most cases, simply clicking with the left hand mouse button while the mouse cursor is over a cell will cause that cell to become selected.

The selected cell is indicated by a dark double line with a small square in the bottom right corner. The selected cell is the one that is currently in focus and will take any input for the keyboard.

A selected cell.

An image of a single selected cell.

To make a cell become the selected cell, simply move the white-cross cursor over the cell and press the left mouse button. There is one exception: When on a cell that contains a hyperlink, the mouse cursor changes from the white cross to a hand and clicking the left mouse button activates the link. In that case the cell can be selected by clicking the middle mouse button.

Selecting a cell with the mouse cursor.

An image of the cursor selecting a cell.

#### Selecting Multiple Cells

Several cells can be selected at once. When multiple cells are selected, the selected cells are indicated with a light, "baby" blue colour. When a single block of cells is selected, a double black line will surround the selection, and all cells except the first one to be selected will be shown in light blue.

A multi-cell selection

An image of a contiguous selection of cells.

##### Continuous selections

To make a continuous selection of cells, move the white cross mouse cursor pointer to the cell at one corner of the block of continuous cells, click and hold the primary mouse pointer on that cell, drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the block of cells and then release the mouse button. The block of cells will now be selected.

The arrow keys can also be used to select a continuous block of cells. To add cells in this manner, first select the cell in one corner of the cell block with the primary mouse button, then hold the Shift key and use the arrow keys to expand the selection block.

Multiple cells being selected with the cursor.

An image of a block selection and the mouse cursor.

##### Discontinuous selections

A discontinuous group of cells can also be selected, by selecting cells or block of cells while holding down the Ctrl key. To select a discontinuous group of cells, first select a cell or a continuous group of cells as explained above, then click and hold down the Ctrl while selecting more cells. All of the cells which are selected while the Ctrl key is held down will be added to the selection. All selected cells will be displayed with a light blue colour. Cells can be added individually or as continuous blocks. This selection process is additive with each selected cell added only once so selecting cells twice or more simply adds those cells once to the selection.

A discontinuous selection of cells.

An image of a multiple selection.

#### Advanced methods of Selection

There are several ways to make selections using the keyboard keys directly. These may be quicker than using the mouse pointer. As explained above, the simplest of these uses the Shift and arrow keys to make a new selection.

To select an entire row of cells, press the combination of Shift space keys. This is equivalent to pressing the row label button on the left side of the sheet.

An entire row being selected.

An image of a selected row.

To select an entire column of cells, press the combination of Ctrl Space keys. This is equivalent to pressing the column label button on the top of the sheet.

An entire column being selected.

An image of a selected column.

To select the entire sheet, press the combination of Ctrl A keys. This is equivalent to pressing the button in the top left corner of the sheet.

The entire worksheet being selected.

An image of an entire worksheet selected.

The following list summaries keyboard shortcuts which can be used to select large cell blocks.

- Shift Arrow : Define selection with cursor keys.

- Ctrl Arrow : Jump to the end of the current region.

- Alt Space : Select current row.

- Ctrl Space : Select current column.

- Ctrl A : Select the entire sheet.

- Ctrl/ : Select the array formula around the current edit position.

### Moving and Copying Data

Data which have been entered once into a spreadsheet can be moved to new locations and possibly duplicated. The simplest way to do this involves dragging the selection box. A more advanced way involves a formal cut or copy operation and then a paste operation in the new location. The latter approach allows the data to be modified as they are pasted which can be extremely important.

NOTE

Currently Gnumeric only supports copying, cutting and pasting of simple selections or continuous selections as described in . You cannot copy, cut or paste discontinuous selections.

It is frequently necessary to copy the results of complex calculations into a new location. This is done by selecting the data and using the As Value command from the Paste Special... dialog. This is explained in below.

#### Simple Copy and Move

The easiest way to move or copy a cell or a group of cells is by selecting the cell or cells to be moved or copied, then using the mouse to drag the selection box to a new location.

- Select a cell to move by clicking in it. You can also select a range of cells as described in .

- Click left mouse button on the border of the selection (anywhere except the autofill square in the bottom right corner). Use left mouse button to move cells or Ctrl+left mouse button to copy cells.

- Drag the selection to the new location.

- Release the mouse button.

The selected cells will be copied or moved to the new location. This will move both cells' content and formatting. When copying, relative cell references in all formulas will change as described in ; when moving, relative cell references will remain unchanged.

#### Cut, Copy and Paste

Another, more flexible, way to copy or move a selection is to use cut, copy, and paste operations. These operations allow the user to copy or move selected cells to the clipboard buffer and then paste the contents of the clipboard buffer to a different location or a different workbook.

##### Cutting a Selection to the Clipboard

To cut a cell or a selection to the clipboard, you should select a cell or range of cells as described in and then use one of the following methods:

- Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl X.

- Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

- Click on

  An image of the cut toolbar button.
  Cut button in the toolbar.

- Right-click on the selection and choose Cut from the context menu.

The selection will be copied to the clipboard buffer. To remind you of this, the border of the selection will be shown as "marching ants". The selection will be moved to a new location as soon as you choose Paste command as described below.

NOTE

Please note that the selection will remain in its current location until you paste it. If you want to delete a selection without pasting it to a new location, use Delete command instead.

##### Copying a Selection to the Clipboard

To copy a cell or a selection to the clipboard, you should select a cell or range of cells as described in and then use one of the following methods:

- Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl C.

- Choose Copy from the Edit menu.

- Click on

  An image of the copy toolbar button.
  Copy button in the toolbar.

- Right-click on the selection and choose Copy from the context menu.

The selection will be copied to the clipboard buffer. To remind you of this, the selection will outlined by "marching ants" border. The selection will be copied to a new location as soon as you choose Paste command as described below.

##### Pasting the Clipboard

To paste the contents of the clipboard (i.e., previously cut or copied selection) to a new location, just click on a cell and use one of the following methods:

- Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl V.

- Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

- Click on

  An image of the paste toolbar button.
  Paste button in the toolbar.

- Right-click on the cell and choose Paste from the context menu.

The contents of the clipboard will be pasted in the spreadsheet so that the selected cell becomes the top left corner of the selection. This will also copy the formatting of the original selection.

If you are pasting a selection which was copied to the clipboard buffer, all relative cell references in all formulas will change as described in . The selection remains in the clipboard buffer so that it can be pasted again. The original selection will remain outlined with "marching ants" border.

If you are pasting a selection which was cut to the clipboard buffer, all cell references in all formulas will remain unchanged. The original selection will be removed from the workbook and the clipboard buffer will be cleared.

#### Paste Special

All of the methods described above to move or copy data create identical copies of the original cells in the new location. This means that both the contents and the formatting of the original selection are copied to the new location and also means that any data present in the new location are deleted. It is frequently important either to alter the data before it is pasted or to merge the data in the new location with the data being pasted. The Paste Special... command enables this.

The Paste Special... command can act exactly like the Paste command or may selectively paste the cell contents, the cell formats, the calculated values of the original cells rather than their contents. described in the previous section copies both contents and formatting of the original selection. If you need more options, use Paste Special... command.

The Paste Special... command can be accessed, after a selection has been cut or copied as explained above, in one of two ways. First, the location where the pasting should happen must be selected. The easiest way to do this is to select the single cell which will be at the top left hand corner of the region of pasted cells. Alternatively, the exact region into which the cells will be copied can be selected. After the selection is made, the Paste Special... command can be chosen from the Edit menu or the context menu obtained by clicking with the right mouse button in the cell area of the spreadsheet.

The Paste Special... menu item opens a dialog with three categories. By default, Paste Special... acts as if it were the Paste menu item.

The first set of choices allow the user to control the data pasted.The user can choose to limit the pasting to only the cell contents (no cell formatting is copied) or the opposite only cell formats copied (no contents). Furthermore, the user can insert the selection while transforming all the contents into values only. Formulas will be replaced by their values.

A second set of choices allows the user to perform simple mathematical operations during the paste. These operations use the current contents of the cells in the paste range and the contents of the clipboard. For example, if you are pasting a cell containing number 5 to a cell that currently contains number 10 and choose option Divide, the result will be 10/5=2. Choosing option None will just replace the previous contents of the cells by the contents of the clipboard buffer (this is the default behavior).

The final choices contains the following options:

- Transpose. This option will transpose the selection, i.e. interchange the rows and columns. Thus, a range with k rows and n columns will become a range with n rows and k columns, so that the firs row becomes the first column, and so on.

- Skip Blanks. This option prevents Gnumeric from taking any action for the cells in the selection that are blank. For such cells, the existing contents of the cells in the paste range will be kept.

#### Cut and Paste Between Gnumeric and Other Applications

Cut and paste commands described above allow copying and moving selections from one location in a spreadsheet to another, or between different spreadsheets. However, you can also use cut and paste to exchange information between Gnumeric and other applications, using so-called X clipboard which is shared by all graphical applications.

Whenever you cut or copy a selection in Gnumeric, it is placed both in Gnumeric clipboard and in X clipboard. In X clipboard, it is placed as text, with formulas replaced by their values and contents of different cells separated by spaces.

To paste the selection from X clipboard to an application, click with middle mouse button (if you have two button mouse, you can emulate the middle mouse button by pressing left and right buttons simultaneously). Most applications also allow pasting from X clipboard by using keyboard shortcut (usually Ctrl V) or by choosing Edit Paste.

To paste a selection from another application to Gnumeric, place this selection in the X clipboard. Usually it is done by just selecting it with the mouse; some applications also allow you to use keyboard shortcut Ctrl C, or choose Edit Copy. After this, you can paste it in Gnumeric by using Paste command described above. This command will automatically paste the contents of X clipboard if Gnumeric's own clipboard is empty.

Pasting X clipboard in Gnumeric will automatically launch the Text Import druid which will assist you in importing the plain text contents of X clipboard into the spreadsheet. The Text Import druid is described in .

### Deleting Data

This section needs to be written.

### Inserting New Data Cells

This section needs to be written.

### Formatting Cells

This section describes how to format the appearance of data in a cell. The section describes a more advanced method of formatting where the depends on various conditions involving the current cell value and/or the values in other cells.

Cell formats allow you to only change the way cell data appears in the spreadsheet. It is important to keep in mind that it only alters the way the data is presented, and does not change the value of the data.

The formatting options allows for monetary units, scientific options, dates, times, fractions,and more. Positive and negative values can have different colors and formats for aiding in keeping track of values. There are also a large variety of date and time formats for virtually any time and date format one can think of. Formatting also allows you to set font, background color, and borders for selected cells.

Finally, advanced formatting options allow you to lock some of the cells so that their values cannot be changed, or restrict the range of values that can be entered in the selected cells.

To change the formatting of a cell or a selection, you can either use the Format Cells dialog which holds all of the formatting options or use specific formatting elements available as buttons on the Format Toolbar.

This dialog, shown in , gives you access to all formatting options.

Format Cells Dialog

An image of the cell format dialog opened to the "Number" tab.

To launch this dialog, select the cell or range of cells you want to format (see for details on selecting cells) and then use one of the following methods:

- Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl 1 (this is number one, not letter l).

- Choose Format Cells... in the menubar.

- Click with the right mouse button on the cell grid area and choose Format Cells... from the context menu.

The Format Cells dialog contains tabs Number, Alignment, Font, Border, Background, Protection, and Validation. These tabs are described in detail in the subsequent sections.

To set one of formatting options, select the corresponding tab, choose the options you need, and click OK. This will apply the options you selected (in all tabs) and close Format Cells dialog. You can also click on Apply to apply the and keep the dialog open, or on Close to close the dialog without applying changes.

Some of the most commonly used formatting options, such as font, background, and alignment, can also be accessed by using the buttons in the Format Toolbar. This toolbar is described in detail in ,

#### Number Formatting Tab

This tab allows you to select the format for the cell's contents. You can select one of the many preset formatting styles which should be more than adequate for the vast majority of cases. If none of these meet the needs of the user, it is possible to create your own formats.

To use one of the preset formats, select the format category (such as Number or Date) by clicking on the corresponding radiobutton in the left side of the dialog. The right side of the dialog will show you how the selected cell would look with this format and give more options for the selected format.

The following is a list of all available format categories:

General

  A Swiss army knife of a format. It will attempt to display a value it the 'best' way possible. The choice of format depends on the size of the cell and Gnumeric guess of what 'type' of value is being displayed (number, date, time ...).

Number

  Displays numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal place. Negatives can be displayed normally, within parentheses, or in red color. Optionally a delimiter can be added every third order of magnitude (thousand, million, ...). Both the decimal point and the thousands separator have internationalization support.

Currency

  Similar to Number, with the addition of a currency symbol. Currently known symbols include `$`, `¥`, `£`, `¤` and the three letter abbreviations of all major currencies. By default, Gnumeric will use currency symbol and placement (before or after the number) appropriate for your locale.

Accounting

  A specialization of Currency which pays more attention to the alignment of negative numbers. It ensures that a small amount of space is prepended to positive numbers so that they align with negatives.

Date

  This category contains various formats for presenting dates. By default, Gnumeric will use date format appropriate for your locale (country and language setting). You can also choose one of many possible date formats shown in the list in the right side of the dialog. The following is an explanation of codes used in these formats:

  - d: day of month (one or two digits). Example: 9.

  - dd: day of month (two digits). Example: 09.

  - ddd: day of week. Example: Wed.

  - m: month (number, one or two digits). Example: 3.

  - mm: month (number, two digits). Example: 03.

  - mmm: month (abbreviated name). Example: Mar.

  - mmmm: month (full name). Example: March.

  - mmmmm: month (first letter). Example: M.

  - yyyy: year (four digits). Example: 1967.

  - yy: last two digits of year. Example: 67.

  Some date formats also include time using the codes explained below. Examples of date formatting are shown in .
Time

  This category contains various formats for presenting time of day. You can choose one of many possible time formats shown in the list in the right side of the dialog. The following is an explanation of codes used in these formats:

  - h: hours.

  - mm: minutes.

  - ss: seconds.

  Sometimes it is necessary to display more than 24 hours, or more that 60 minutes/seconds without the values incrementing the display unit of the next larger measure (e.g., 25 hours instead of 1 day + 1 hour). To achieve this, use codes '[h]', '[mm]', and '[ss]'. Examples of time formatting are shown in .
Percentage

  Multiplies a value by 100 and appends a percent. Can be used with 0-30 digits after the decimal place.

Fractions

  Approximate the value with a rational number with either a specific denominator or with a maximum number of digits in the denominator.

Scientific

  Formats the value using scientific notation, e.g. `5.334 E 6` for `5,334,000`. Allows up to 30 digits after the decimal place. No provision for controlling the exponent are provided at this time.

Text

  Treats numeric values as text. This will show a number with as much precision as available and will lose knowledge of whether it represented a date, or time.

  TIP

  If your workbook contains serial numbers, ID numbers or other similar entries, choose Text format for them. If you choose General or Number format, Gnumeric will remove leading zeros, so that `01124` will be shown as `1124`.

Custom

  This category allows you to define your own format. This is only recommended for advanced users as it requires understanding of the codes internally used by Gnumeric for describing formats. To make it easier, this category provides a list of codes for all predefined formats so you can create our own format by modifying one of them rather than starting from scratch.

Examples of Date Formats

Format | Sample
--- | ---
General | 36068.755
m/d/yy | d/m/yy | 9/30/98 | 30/9/98
m/d/yyyy | d/m/yyyy | 9/30/1998 | 30/9/1998
d-mmm-yy | mmm-d-yy | 30-Sep-98 | Sep-30-98
d-mmm-yyyy | mmm-d-yyyy | 30-Sep-1998 | Sep-30-1998
d-mmm | mmm-d | 30-Sep | Sep-30
d-mm | mm-d | 30-09 | 09-30
mmm/d | d/mmm | Sep/30 | 30/Sep
mm/d | d/mm | 09/30 | 30/09
mm/dd/yy | dd/mm/yy | 09/30/98 | 30/09/98
mm/dd/yyyy | dd/mm/yyyy | 09/30/1998 | 30/09/1998
mmm/dd/yy | dd/mmm/yy | Sep/30/98 | 30/Sep/98
mmm/dd/yyyy | dd/mmm/yyyy | Sep/30/1998 | 30/Sep/1998
mmm/ddd/yy | ddd/mmm/yy | Sep/Wed/98 | Wed/Sep/98
mmm/ddd/yyyy | ddd/mmm/yyyy | Sep/Wed/1998 | Wed/Sep/1998
mm/ddd/yy | ddd/mm/yy | 09/Wed/98 | Wed/09/98
mm/ddd/yyyy | ddd/mm/yyyy | 09/Wed/1998 | Wed/09/1998
mmm-yy | Sep-98
mmm-yyyy | Sep-1998
mmmm-yy | September-98
mmmm-yyyy | September-1998
d/m/yy h:mm | m/d/yy h:mm | 9/30/98 18:07 | 30/9/98 187:07
d/m/yyyy h:mm | m/d/yyyy h:mm | 9/30/1998 18:07 | 30/9/1998 187:07
yyyy/mm/d | 1998/09/30
yyyy/mmm/d | 1998/Sep/30
yyyy/mm/dd | 1998/09/30
yyyy/mmm/dd | 1998/Sep/30
yyyy-mm-d | 1998-09-30
yyyy-mmm-d | 1998-Sep-3
yyyy-mm-dd | 1998-09-30
yyyy-mmm-d | 1998-Sep-30
yy | 98
yyyy | 1998

Exempel på tidsformat

Format | Sample
--- | ---
General | 36068.755
h:mm AM/PM | 6:07 PM
h:mm:ss AM/PM | 6:07:12 PM
h:mm | 18:07
h:mm:ss | 18:07:12
m/d/yy h:mm | 9/30/98 18:07
d/m/yy h:mm | 30/9/98 18:07
mm:ss | 07:12
[h]:mm:ss | 865650:07:12
[h]:mm | 865650:07
[mm]:ss | 51939007:12
[ss] | 3116340432

#### Alignment, Font, Border, and Background Tabs

##### Alignment Tab

This tab allows you to set horizontal and vertical alignment and justification options.

Alignment Tab

An image of the cell format dialog opened to the "Alignment" tab.

Horizontal justification options.

General

  The standard default justification. Use right justification for numbers and formulas, and left justification for text strings.

Left

  Left justify all cell contents.

Center

  Center all cell contents.

Right

  Right justify all cell contents.

Fill

  Fill the cell with the contents. This will repeat the cell's contents as necessary to fill the width of the cell.

Justify

  For text, wrap long lines of text and left justify. For other formats, same as Left.

Center across selection

  Centers the cell's contents so the middle of each line is aligned with the middle of other lines. This only works with multiple cells.

Left and Right justification options also allow you to specify indent from left (respectively, right) side of the cell. Indent is measured in multiples of the current font size: for font size 10, indent 4 means 40 pts.

Vertical Justification Options

Top

  Align the top of the cells contents with the top of the cell.

Center

  Center the cells contents vertically. Equally space between the top and bottom.

Bottom

  Align the contents of the cell with the bottom of the cell.

Justify

  For text, wrap long lines and spread lines of text evenly to fill the cell. For other formats (or if the text contains no long lines), same as Bottom justification.

##### Font Tab

This tab allows you to change the font used for cells content.

The Font Tab

An image of the cell format dialog opened to the "Font" tab.
To change cells font, select font family (such as Times, Helvetica, etc), style (Normal, Bold, ...) and size in points. You can also select font color and special effects such as underlining or strikethrough.

Gnumeric allows you to use any of the fonts known to GNOME printing system, gnome-print. The same fonts are used for screen display and for printing, assuring that the printed document will look identical to the one you see on screen. Advanced users can refer to documentation for gnome-print package to find out more about adding fonts and font management in GNOME.

TIP

A quicker way to change the selected cells' font is to use Format Toolbar.

##### Border Tab

This tab allows you to choose the border for the selected cells. You can select one of many border styles (none, single line, double line,...) and colors. You can also have different borders on different sides of the cell.

Border Tab

An image of the cell format dialog open to the "Border" tab.
To choose a border for a cell or a selection, select border style and color in the right side of the tab and click on the buttons corresponding to the sides of the cells in the left side of the tab. In addition to the buttons for left, right, top, and bottom sides, you also have buttons for drawing diagonal and reverse diagonal of the cell. (Strictly speaking, these cannot be called borders, but it is natural to put them in this tab.) The lowest row of buttons contains buttons None and Outline. Clicking on None removes all borders from the cell; clicking on Outline puts border on all sides of the cell or selection.

Please note that for a selection of cells, the buttons will put borders on one of the sides of selection, not of individual cells. For example, clicking on Bottom button will put the border along the bottom of the selection, so only the cells in the bottom row will be affected. In addition for selections you have three more buttons in the bottom row: Inside vertical, Inside, and Inside horizontal. Inside vertical puts borders on all inside vertical borders in the selection; Inside horizontal puts borders on all inside horizontal borders in the selection, and Inside puts borders on all inside borders in the selection, both vertical and horizontal.

To remove an existing border from one of the sides of a cell or selection, click on the corresponding button again.

##### Background Tab

This tab allows you to change the background of selected cells. You can choose solid color or patterned background. A preview of the selected background will be shown in the right part of the tab.

Background Tab

An image of the cell format dialog open to the "Background" tab.

To select a solid color background, select the color from Background Color drop-down box. You can use of the standard colors or define your own color by clicking on Custom Color button.

To select a patterned background, choose the background color in Background Color section. After this, choose the pattern color and type in Pattern section. Please note that the pattern type buttons use black pattern on white background, regardless of the colors you have chosen.

To remove pattern, choose Solid pattern type (top left button, looking like a white square).

#### Protection and Validation Tabs

These two tabs are used to control user's access to cells and restrict values of data allowed in a cell. Unlike other formatting options, these two tabs have no effect on a cells appearance. These options are mostly used for writing templates and forms to be filled by others.

##### Protection Tab

Protection Tab

An image of the cell format dialog open to the "Protection" tab.
This tab allows you to see and change cell protection in imported Excel workbooks. Cell protection has no effect in Gnumeric: you can edit cells whether or not they are marked as protected. However, Gnumeric keeps the protection setting of imported Excel workbooks. If you later save your workbook in Excel format, Gnumeric will save the protection information too. For more information about cell protection in Excel, please refer to Excel documentation.

##### Validation Tab

This tab allows you to set restrictions on allowed values of data in the cells. If you (or someone else) attempts to enter a data that does not meet the set criteria, a warning (or an error message, depending on the options set in this tab) will be shown.

Validation Tab

An image of the cell format dialog open to the "Validation" tab.

This tab consists of two part. The first part, Criteria is used to set the criteria for the cell values. The second part, Error Alert, is used to choose the action when data entered does not meet the criteria.

To set the criteria for cell values, follow these steps:

- Choose the type of data contained in the cells, using the Allow drop-down list.

- Choose a condition that must be satisfied by the cells value, using Condition drop-down list. In these conditions, `val` stands for the cells value (for text, `val` stands for the length of text string) and `min`, `max`, and `bound` are constants that you need to specify.

- Enter the values of constants used in condition. For example, if you chose condition `min<=val<=max` , you need to enter values of constants `min` and `max`.

After specifying the criteria, you need to specify how Gnumeric should respond to incorrect cell value. You can choose one of four possible actions from Action drop-down list:

None

  Accept invalid value without any warning. Equivalent to having no validation.

Stop

  Do not accept the invalid value. Show the user an error message which you need to specify (see below).

Warning

  Show the user a warning dialog, giving him a choice whether to accept or reject the invalid value. You need to specify the message to use in the warning dialog (see below).

Information

  Accept invalid values but show the user a warning dialog. You need to specify the message to use in the warning dialog (see below).

If you choose one of the options Stop, Warning, or Information, you must enter the message that will be show to the user in the error or warning dialog. Otherwise, the dialog will be empty so it will be completely useless. You need to enter the title (which will be used as the window title for the dialog window) and the message itself. For example, the values shown in will produce the dialog shown in .

Warning dialog in response to invalid input

An image of the validation error notification box.

### Conditional Formatting of Cells

This section needs to be written.

### Filtering Data

With data filters you can select a subset of rows in the worksheet that meet the given criteria. You can, for example, copy rows of a table containing sales of departments whose profit has been exceptionally high into a new sheet simply using a filter.

#### Auto Filters

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

- Alt Down Open the AutoFilter in the current cell.

- Down and Up Changes the selected item in an AutoFilter

- Home Select the first item [All] in an AutoFilter

- End Select the last item in an AutoFilter

- Enter or Alt Up Apply the current entry in an AutoFilter list, and close the combo-box.

#### Advanced Filter

To use advanced filter, you should have a few blank rows available in your worksheet to be used as a criteria range. These rows should not overlap with the rows in the table to be filtered.

Now copy all the column labels from the table you want to filter into the first blank row in the criteria range. Below the criteria labels, you can now type the conditions you want to match for the particular label. For example, under a label `Profit' you could type `>=1000'. The tool selects only rows that match all the criteria.

Worksheet containing the table to be filtered and a simple criteria

An image of a worksheet and the advanced filter dialog.

It is possible to have many conditions for a single label. For example, you can select the departments whose profit is either very high or very low. To do this, type, for example, `<=0' below the `>=40000' condition.

Criteria for selecting rows whose `Profit' column is between 0 and 40000.

An image of a worksheet with the filter criteria.

To start the tool, select ``Advanced Filter'' from the ``Data'' menu. It brings you the advanced filter dialog. In the dialog, select the action you want to take.

The Advanced Filter dialog.

An image of the advanced filter dialog.

``Filter in-place'' writes the new table in-place. Note that you will lose all the rows in the table that will not match the criteria. ``Copy to a new location'' copies the selected rows into the same sheet but into the specified cell range. Type the cell range into the ``Copy to'' entry if you want this action to happen. The other options let you to copy the selected rows into a new sheet or a new workbook.

You should then specify the cell range containing the table to be filtered in the ``List range'' entry. The cell range containing the criteria is specified in the ``Criteria range'' entry. If the original table contains duplicate rows, you may also want to specify the ``Unique records only''. If it is checked on, the filter removes all duplicates.

To start the tool, you can then click the ``OK'' button and you will get the new table.

### Modifying Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

#### Searching for Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

#### Searching and Replacing Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

#### Sorting Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

#### Shuffling Data

With data shuffling tool you can shuffle data in a given cell range. The tool can be started by selecting ``Shuffle'' menu item in ``Data'' menu. In order to use the tool give the input range in which the data to be shuffled is stored. The tool is able to shuffle the contents of the whole cell range, or, also shuffle data according to rows or columns. The shuffling method is selected under the ``Input Range'' entry. For example, if your data is grouped by rows then select ``Shuffle Method'' ``Rows''.

The default output method is to shuffle in-place. The shuffled data can also be written into a new sheet, new workbook, or into an existing sheet by giving the output range. If you select the ``Autofit Columns'' option, the width of each output column is automatically fixed according to the size of data in it.

### Generating Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

...

#### Creating a Tabulation of Dependencies

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

#### Creating Multiple Repeats of Standard Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

#### Consolidating a Result from Several Source Regions

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits…

### Comments in Cells

Each cell in a worksheet can have an associated comment. Comments are not ordinarily visible. Cells having associated comments are marked with a red triangle in the top right corner of the cell. If you move the mouse cursor over the red triangle, the cursor changes to the left-pointing arrow. If the cursor remains over the triangle long enough, a pop-up window appears, displaying the author's name and the text of the comment. The pop-up window is removed when the mouse cursor is moved off the red triangle.

To add a comment to a cell, first select the cell. Next choose Comment... from the to open the New Cell Comment dialog. If the cell already has an associated comment, Gnumeric instead opens the Edit Cell Comment dialog, which is shown below. The only difference is that the Edit Cell Comment dialog is initialized with the existing comment and it includes a line identifying the author of the existing comment.

The Insert Comment dialog.

An image of the Insert Comment dialog.

To change the appearance of the comment text, select the text to be formatted, then click on one of the character attribute selectors above the comment text box. You can select italics, strike-through, character weight, and underlining. The italics and strike-through selectors toggle the character attributes, based on the first character of the selected text. For example, if the first character is italic, clicking on the italics selector removes the italic attribute from all characters of the selected text.

The arrows next to the weight and underlining selectors open menus from which you can select a weight or underline style. Selecting a weight or underline style applies it to the selected text and makes it the meaning of the associated selector. For example, if you select Light from the weight menu, the selected text is made light. If you subsequently click on the weight selector, the text selected at that time is also made light. The weights may not all be visibly different, depending on the font in use.

"Wrap in properties window" controls word wrap in the comment editing box just above it. By default, lines are broken at spaces between words to prevent a line from exceeding the width of the text box. Click on the check-box to toggle word wrap. Line breaks occur in the comment pop-up only where you place them explicitly by pressing Enter. Turning off word wrap lets you see how the comment will be displayed in the pop-up.

### Hyperlinks

Each cell can have an associated hyperlink. A hyperlink permits the user of a spreadsheet to go directly to a particular cell or group of cells, to access another file on the local computer or on the web, or to send an email message to an address built into the link.

To add a hyperlink to one or more cells, first select the cells. Next choose Hyperlink... from the to open the HyperLink dialog.

The HyperLink dialog.

An image of the HyperLink dialog.

If the selection includes a hyperlink, the dialog is initialized from the existing link. If there is more than one hyperlink in the selection, the cell in the first row that has a hyperlink, and the first such column of that row, is used to initialize the dialog.

When you click on OK, the information in the dialog is attached to each cell in the selection, replacing any previously defined links. For any empty cells in the selection, the text of the link is set as the contents of the cell. For all cells in the selection, the cell format is modified to give the contents a distinctive color, and the text is underlined.

If the link location text box is empty when you click on OK, no hyperlink is created. Instead, if any cells in the selection have existing hyperlinks, those hyperlinks are removed. The distinctive format applied to links is not removed. For that reason it might be preferable to choose from the to remove existing hyperlinks.

Gnumeric supports four types of hyperlink. The first element of the HyperLink dialog, the Type menu, selects the type of hyperlink to be created. The HyperLink dialog varies slightly, depending on the selected hyperlink type:

- Internal Link: The second element of the dialog is a text box labeled "Target Range". You can enter a single range, with or without a worksheet name. To select the range from the worksheet, click on the button at the end of the "Target Range" line. This collapses the dialog to a single line and makes it possible to interact with the cell grid. Select the desired sheet tab, if necessary, then select the desired cells. When the selection is complete, click on the button at the end of the Target Range input box to open the full HyperLink dialog again.

  When an internal link is activated by clicking on the cell, the range of cells given by the link address becomes the current selection. The cell closest to A1 in the new selection becomes the active cell.

- External Link: The second element of the dialog is a text box labeled "File". Enter the path to a file. You can also enter a Universal Resource Locator (URL) here; the URL is accessed as described for Web Link below.

  When an external link is activated by clicking on the cell, Gnumeric launches an application to present the file, based on its apparent type. For example, "mypic.jpg" would be opened in an image viewer, while "myinfo.html" would be opened in a web browser.

- Email Link: The dialog provides text boxes where you can enter the destination address and subject line for an e-mail message.

  When an email link is activated by clicking on the cell, Gnumeric launches an e-mail client to send a message. The message is initialized with the destination address and subject specified in the dialog.

- Web Link: Enter a Universal Resource Locator (URL) in the Web Address text box.

  When the link is activated by clicking on the cell, Gnumeric launches an application to display the information at the specified URL, based on its apparent type. For a web address beginning with "http://" or "https://" the application is the default web browser.

When you move the mouse pointer to a hyperlink in the cell grid, a tool tip appears. The default tip shows the link address and instructions for activating the link or selecting the cell. To define a tip specific to the link, select the radio button next to "Tip", then enter the tip text in the text box. If the link-specific tip is selected and left blank, no tip is displayed when the mouse pointer is on the link.

### Defining Names

Names are labels with a meaning defined in the spreadsheet or by Gnumeric. Names can be defined for a whole workbook or for just a single worksheet. A name can refer to a numeric value, a string, a range of cells, or a formula. A name can be used wherever its meaning could otherwise be used.

A name is a sequence of letters, digits, and underscore characters, beginning with a letter or underscore. A name cannot look like a cell identifier. For example, "D7" is not a permitted name, while "D_7" and "_D7" are permitted.

To define a name or modify the definition of an existing name:

- If you wish to define or modify a name for use within a single worksheet and it is not the current worksheet, click on the appropriate worksheet tab at the bottom of the Gnumeric window.

- Open the Define Names dialog by choosing Modify ▶ Names from the .

- Use the dialog to modify the defined names as desired. When your changes are complete, click on Close to close the dialog.

The Define Names dialog

An image of the Define Names dialog.

The Define Names dialog lists the names defined in the workbook, organized into two or more groups corresponding to the workbook, the active sheet, and the inactive sheets, if any. When the dialog is opened, only the names defined for the workbook and the active sheet are visible; the definitions for any inactive sheets are collapsed into a single line for each, identified by the sheet name. The definitions for the workbook or a sheet can be exposed or hidden by clicking on the arrow at the left end of the workbook or sheet line.

The second column of the Define Names dialog can show one of three icons. To define a new name, click on the plus sign in the row for the workbook or the active worksheet. Names defined under a worksheet name are visible only on that worksheet. Names defined for the workbook are visible to any worksheet that does not have its own definition of the name. Names are created as "<new-name>", which must be changed before the definition can be used. Click on the new line to select it, then click on the name field and type the new name, followed by the Enter key. When you press Enter, the name is fixed. Only its value can then be changed.

If the second column shows a minus sign, the line is for a user-defined name. Click on the minus sign to delete the definition of the name. If the second column shows a padlock icon, the definition is created automatically and cannot be modified from this dialog.

For user-defined names, the third column of the Define Names dialog contains a downward- or upward-pointing arrow. Click on the arrow to move the definition down to the worksheet or up to the workbook. This operation is not permitted if the moved definition would replace a name already defined for the destination. To do such a replacement, first delete the name in the destination, then move the definition.

The last column of the dialog shows the value defined for the name. When a new name is created, this field is initialized with an absolute reference to the currently selected cells. To modify a definition, click on the value field and edit it as desired, then press the Enter key. To define a string value, enclose it in quotation marks, for example, 'string one' or "string two". To specify a range of cells, use absolute references. Relative references change in meaning depending on the cell where they are used, which is unlikely to produce your intended result. You can define a name as a cell or range of cells by clearing its existing definition, if any, and then selecting the desired cell or cells on the cell grid. You can switch worksheets prior to selecting cells. The dialog continues to modify names defined for the workbook or the worksheet that was displayed when the dialog was opened. A reference created by selection in the Define Names dialog includes the worksheet name and uses absolute cell coordinates. That is, a selection would look like "Sheet1!$A$1:$B$24".

Below the display of defined names is a filter box. If the workbook or sheet contains many defined names, you can see a subset of the names by typing a partial name in the filter box and pressing Enter. All names that do not contain the entered string are omitted from the display. Differences of case are ignored. For example, if “real” were entered in the filter box, names such as "Real_Value" and "Surreal" would be displayed. When you press Enter in the filter box, contexts that contain no matching names are automatically collapsed. You may later need to manually expand the workbook line, for example, if the filter string is changed. If the line for the workbook or a worksheet begins with a right-pointing arrow, it contains names that pass the filter. Clicking on the arrow will change it to a downward-pointing arrow and make the names visible. To see all the defined names, clear the filter by clicking on the button at the right end of the filter box.

In addition to the names defined by the user, Gnumeric has some pre-defined names for useful elements:

- Sheet_Title: The name of the current sheet.

- Print_Area: The range of cells set as the sheet's print area; undefined if print area is not set.

## Advanced Analysis

This chapter explains many of the advanced analytic tools available in Gnumeric including linear algebra calculations, the goal seek tool, simulation analysis, and scenarios.

### Advanced Analysis in Gnumeric

There are several kinds of analysis which can be performed using the Gnumeric spreadsheet. These include statistical analysis and linear programming methods. These are described in this chapter.

### Analysis using Complex Numbers

Complex numbers can be used in Gnumeric but, because they are not fundamental types, all the analysis must be done with functions.

### Goal Seek Tool

Use Goal Seek Tool to search for a value of a single model variable that yields a given desired value of another single variable. For example, you can use the Goal Seek to find the break-even value for sales (the break-even is the amount of sales whose marginal revenue just covers the fixed costs and the profit is thus zero).

#### Using the Tool

First, select the ``Goal Seek...'' tool item from ``Tools'' menu. Specify the output variable cell (``Set Cell'') by typing the cell reference into the entry or by clicking the worksheet cell. If you are searching for the break-even point, for example, you should specify the cell reference of the profit calculation here.

Specify the desired result for the output variable cell into the ``To Value'' cell. In the search for the break-even, specify this to be zero.

Specify the input variable cell (``By changing cell'') by typing the cell reference into the entry or by clicking the worksheet cell. In the search for the break-even, specify the cell reference of the sales here. When you have done this, you may want to press the ``Apply'' button to start the tool.

#### Results

Gnumeric will systematically iterate the model by changing the input value to achieve the desired result, if possible. If goal seek was successful the tool displays the message ``Goal Seeking with cell __ found a solution''.

It is possible that Gnumeric does not find a solution that generates the desired result. There may not be such a solution for the model, or, it may be too difficult to find. For example, the mathematical function behind the calculation may have many non-continuous points.

#### Desired Value in a Given Range

If Gnumeric did not find a solution that generates the desired result, you may want to try to specify a range (minimum and maximum) in which the value of the output variable should be. To do this, specify the ``Minimum'' and ``Maximum'' entries.

### Simulation Analysis

#### Introduction to simulation analysis

A simulation is the imitation of the operation of a real-world process or system. The behavior of a system is studied by generating an artificial history of the system through the use of random numbers. These numbers are used in the context of a simulation model, which is the mathematical, logical and symbolic representation of the relationships between the objects of interest of the system. After the model has been validated, the effects of changes in the environment on the system, or the effects of changes in the system on system performance can be predicted using the simulation model.

Adapted from Banks, Carson, Nelson and Nicol (2001), Discrete-Event System Simulation, 3rd ed.

Gnumeric includes a facility for performing Monte Carlo Simulation. Monte Carlo simulation involves the sampling of random numbers to solve a problem where the passage of time plays no substantive role.

Definition from Law and Kelton (1991), Simulation Modeling & Analysis, 2nd ed, pp. 113.

In other words, each sample is not effected by prior samples. This is in contrast to discrete event simulation or continuous simulation where the results from earlier in the simulation can effect successive samples within a simulation experiment. The Monte Carlo simulation will be enabled through the use of the Random Number functions as described in ??? and the results presented along with statistics for use in analysis.

Gnumeric random numbers are generated using the Mersenne twister MT19937 pseudo-random number generator as implemented in the GNU Scientific Library.

#### Setting up the simulation model

The remainder of this chapter will illustrate use of the simulation tool using an example from Banks et. al.

Adapted from Banks, Carson, Nelson and Nicol (2001), Discrete-Event System Simulation, 3rd ed. pp. 42-45.

A classic inventory problem is the newsvendor problem. A newsvendor buys papers for 33 cents each and sells for 50 cents. Newspapers not sold are sold as scrap (recycled) for 5 cents. Newspapers are purchased by the paper seller in bundles of 10. Demand for newspapers can be categorized as “good,” “fair,” or “poor” with probability 0.35, 0.45 and 0.20 respectively, with each day's demand being independent of prior days. The problem for the newsvendor is to determine the optimal number of papers to purchase when the day's demand is not yet known.

The daily profit equation for the newsvendor is:

Profit = [(Sale revenue) - (Cost) - (Scrap value)] Profit = [(Sale revenue) - (Cost) - (Scrap value)]

To set up the model, this example will use two tabs in Gnumeric, a tab labeled 'Profit' to calculate profit, and a tab labeled 'Demand Tables' to store the various tables needed to calculate the demand for any given sampling.

For the Profit tab, set up the profit tab as in .

At the top of the Profit' tab, the Profit table will be entered . There are three variables: Sale revenue, Cost and Scrap value, and they take the per unit coefficients of 0.5, 0.33 and 0.05 respectively. Enter the coefficients in cells B13 through D13. In cells B12 through D12, enter the equations for sale revenue, cost and Scrap value that are in the list below. In cell E12, enter the equation for Profit

Next, we add the values for the decision variable, which is the amount purchased, and the amount sold.

- B12: =B13*min(B16,B20)

- C12: =C13*B16

- D12: =D13*max(0,B16-B20)

- E12: =B12-C12+D12

- B13: 0.5

- C13: 0.33

- D13: 0.05

- B16: 50

Profit table for newsvendor example

This screenshot depicts the profit table from the newsvendor simulation example after the set of entries in cells B12 through E13 and Cell B16 have been filled in.

Using SIMTABLE for parameter values.

Sometimes, there is a need to try a number of different values for a single parameter. In the `SIMTABLE` function will be used to automate the use of a set of values for a parameter such as purchase quantity. For now, set the purchase quantity to 50 in cell C16.

Next, create the demand tables from which the demand will be generated. In the tab 'Demand Tables' enter the values of the probability in cells B4 through B6 (B4: 0.35; B5: 0.45; B6: 0.2). In cells C4, C5 and C6 enter the cumulative probability values (C4: 0.35; C5: 0.8; C6: 1) as shown in .

- B4: 0.35

- B5: 0.45

- B6: 0.2

- C4: 0.35

- C5: 0.8

- C6: 1.0

Probability distribution for type of newsday

Screenshot depicts Demand Tables tab of simulation worksheet with the cells B4 through C6 filled in with probability distribution for type of newsday.

The next table is the daily demand for newspapers based on the type of news day. The table Distribution of Newspapers Demanded is in cells A11 through D18 of the Demand Tables worksheet as shown in and contains the daily demand distribution values. The cumulative distribution tables in cells A21 through G29, shown in are derived values from the Distribution of Newspapers Demanded using values in the top Distribution of Newspapers demanded table.

Daily newspaper demand distribution table in Demand Tables worksheet

| A | B | C | D
11 | Demand | Good | Fair | Poor
12 | 40 | 0.03 | 0.1 | 0.44
13 | 50 | 0.05 | 0.18 | 0.22
14 | 60 | 0.15 | 0.4 | 0.16
15 | 70 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.16
16 | 80 | 0.35 | 0.08 | 0.06
17 | 90 | 0.15 | 0.04 | 0
18 | 100 | 0.07 | 0 | 0

Cumulative demand distribution table in Demand Tables worksheet

| A | B | C | D | E | F | G
21 |  | Cumulative Distribution |  |  | Values |  |
22 | Demand | Good | Fair | Poor | Good | Fair | Poor
23 | 40 | 0.03 | 0.1 | 0.44 | 0 | 0 | 0
24 | 50 | 0.08 | 0.28 | 0.66 | 0.03 | 0.1 | 0.44
25 | 60 | 0.23 | 0.68 | 0.82 | 0.08 | 0.28 | 0.66
26 | 70 | 0.43 | 0.88 | 0.94 | 0.23 | 0.68 | 0.82
27 | 80 | 0.78 | 0.96 | 1 | 0.43 | 0.88 | 0.94
28 | 90 | 0.93 | 1 |  | 0.78 | 0.96 | 1
29 | 100 | 1 |  |  | 0.93 | 1 |

When these values are entered, the final results will look like .

Completed probability distribution tables in Demand Tables worksheet

Screenshot of Demand tab for the newsvendor example with probability distribution for type of newsday in cells A21 through G29.

Finally, back in the Profit tab, the demand data will be filled in through the use of references to the Demand Tables tab as shown in .

In the following cells, enter the equations below in the 'Profit' tab:

- B17: =rand()

- C17: =if(B17<'Demand Tables'!C4,"Good",if(C19<'Demand Tables'!C5,"Fair","Poor"))

- B18: =rand()

- B20: =lookup($C17,$B23:$D23,$B24:$D24)

- B21: =E12

- B24: =lookup(Profit!$B18,'Demand Tables'!E23:E29,'Demand Tables'!$A23:$A29)

- C24: =lookup(Profit!$B18,'Demand Tables'!F23:F29,'Demand Tables'!$A23:$A29)

- D24: =lookup(Profit!$B18,'Demand Tables'!G23:G29,'Demand Tables'!$A23:$A29)

Profit table for newsvendor example

This screenshot depicts the profit sheet for the newsvendor example after references to demands are included in cells B17 through B21 and cells B24 through D24.

When done, the Profit spreadsheet will be setup with a profit equation, decision variables, and random events as shown in . The `rand()` functions in cells C17 and C18 return a random value between 0 and 1, which are used by the `lookup()` functions in cells B20, B24, C24 and D24 to calculate a randomly determined daily demand. Next, this sheet will be used for analysis through the use of simulation.

#### Running the simulation

To run the simulation, from the Gnumeric toolbar, select Tools → Simulation. In the Risk Simulation dialog box that appears, the first tab is the Variables tab. There are two entries in the Variables tab: Input variables and Output variables ().

Variables tab in simulation dialog box

Screenshot of the simulation dialog with input and output variables filled in for the newsvendor example.

Input variables are the cells which hold the functions based on random numbers of the type described in Section A.14. In this case, they are the cells B17 and B18 in the Profit worksheet, which hold the rand() function. Later, when the quantity purchased is a parameter set by the `SIMTABLE` function, cell B16 which holds the purchase quantity will be added to the range of input variables.

Output variables are the results of interest, or the dependent variable. In this case, the dependent variables are the demand and the profit, which are in cells B20 and B21.

The next tab is the Options tab . There are four settings in the options as shown in .

Options tab in Simulation dialog box for newsvendor simulation example

Options tab in simulations dialog showing Rounds and number of iterations.

The second pair of options are the number of iterations and the Max time. In a simulation, each iteration is the equivalent of a sample. A sample from a random distribution is taken for each of the input values (as specified in the Variables tab) and the resulting output value(s). The more iterations, the better the estimate of the output value. However, this also takes more time to run. A Max time value is specified in seconds where the simulation will end without output if an individual simulation takes longer than the Max time allotted. If this occurs (see ), the options are to either increase the Max time value, or decrease the number of iterations. A more drastic option is to change the model so that fewer calculations or samples of random numbers need to be made.

Maximum time for simulation exceeded message box

Dialog to warn that the maximum time for the simulation was exceeded.

The next tab is the Summary. There are two boxes in this tab, the Simulation Summary and the Summary of results (see ). In simulation summary, there is a description of the simulation parameters.

Due to the random nature of the simulation, the output may vary between simulation runs).

Summary tab for simulation tool

Simulation summary tab inside of simulation dialog box including summary of simulation options and summary of results.

- Simulations: Number of rounds as determined in the Simulation Options box.

- Iterations: Number of iterations in a single simulation round.

- # input variables: Number of random numbers sampled for each iteration.

- # output variables: Number of outputs recorded for simulation

- Runtime: Runtime of simulations in seconds.

- Run on: Date and time simulation was run.

In the summary of results window, there are summary statistics for each round of the simulation. If multiple rounds were done, the results of each round can be browsed by using the 'Prev. Sim.' and 'Next Sim.' buttons below the Summary of results box. For each output and input variable, the summary shows the Min, Average and the Max value across the iterations for that round of the simulation. Note that for the input variables, this shows the random number that is the average, max and min. If the statistics on intermediate values, such as a cost distribution, was desired, these intermediate values should be added to the list of output variables.

The last tab is labeled 'Output'. This tab identifies the location where the output table will be generated. There are two sets of options, first the Output Placement then Output Formatting as shown in .

Output options tab for simulation

Output tab inside of simulation dialog box showing options for output placement and output formatting.

The default output placement is 'New sheet'. This will create a new sheet in the Gnumeric workbook labeled 'Simulation Report (1)', where '1' can be replaced with another number if a tab labeled 'Simulation Report (1)' already exists. The option 'New workbook' creates a Gnumeric workbook named 'Book2.gnumeric' with a tab labeled 'Simulation Report.'

The third option is to embed the output table into an existing worksheet. This is done by specifying the 'Output range'. Note that the output range must be large enough to include the entire table, including heading information. For a single round this requires 11 rows and 16 columns. For example, the range Profit!A24:P35 would contain the statistics for one round with the three input variables and two output variables. As input and output variables change, or the number of rounds of the simulation change, the number of rows required will change.

For output formatting, their are four options.

- 'Autofit columns' automatically makes each column long enough to include the largest entry in that column. Note that column 'A' in the resulting spreadsheet used to save run information such as date and time and is kept narrow.

- 'Clear output range' is in effect if the Output Placement option chosen is Output range. It clears the selected cells in the spreadsheet before putting the output table in its place.

- 'Retain output range formatting' retains formatting for cells such as number formatting.

- 'Retain output range comments' retains comments that have been placed in output cells. This is most useful when the input and output variables remained the same.

#### Simulation output

The simulation output provides statistics on the output and input variables for each round. The statistics are calculated over the iterations in a single round of the simulation. These statistics for each variable are:

- Variable type and name - input variables are labeled as '(Input)'.

- Min – Minimum value of variable among iterations of round.

- Mean – Arithmetic mean of variable among iterations of round.

- Max – Maximum value of variable among all iterations of round.

- Median – Median of variable among iterations of round.

- Mode – Mode value among iterations of round. For the input variable, this will be “#N/A”.

- Std. Dev. - Standard deviation of the variable.

- Variance – Second moment of variable.

- Skewness - Third moment of variable.

- Kurtosis – Fourth moment of variable.

- Range – Difference between min and max of variable among iterations of the round.

- Count – Number of iterations in round.

- Confidence (95%) - 95% confidence interval of value, centered on mean.

- Lower Limit (95%) - Lower limit of 95% confidence interval of the value, centered on the mean.

- Upper Limit (95%) - Upper limit of 95% confidence interval of the value, centered on the mean.

Simulation output example

Simulation output spreadsheet including input and output variable statistics.

The output will include a heading, then a table for each round of the simulation. Judicious choice of output variables will also include any intermediate values of interest in the simulation in this table. Each row of the output table has statistics of the values of a variable over the iterations of the simulation as shown in .

The output will be of the input variables and the output variables that were variables tab of the Simulation window . For the input variables, the output will be the statistics of the random variable used in modeling the input variables. For the output variables, the statistics will be of the output variable. These statistics, in particular the standard deviation and confidence interval, should be examined to ensure the simulation was at a precision adequate for the purpose. Some notes on how to use these statistics for refining the simulation design can be found in .

#### Using SIMTABLE

The `SIMTABLE` function is intended to change a variable in the simulation so that each round of the simulation can be used to evaluate a different scenario. This automates the use of simulation for what-if questions or to create a set of possible outcomes to a situation.

In this example, we will use the `SIMTABLE` function to find the optimal quantity of newspapers to buy. For the purchase quantity in our spreadsheet, we will replace '50' with the following formula in Profit!B16:

        Profit!B16 = SIMTABLE(50,60,70,80,90)

Each entry in the list of the `SIMTABLE` arguments is a value that will be used for the purchased quantity. Each entry corresponds to one round of simulation, as used in . In this example there are 5 entries to the SIMTABLE list, so '5' will be entered into the 'Last Round #' option in the Options tab of the Simulation dialog.

Simulation output example using SIMTABLE and several rounds

Simulation output example using SIMTABLE and several rounds.

When this simulation is run with 5 rounds, the summary of results will have one entry for each round, with each round using a different entry from the `SIMTABLE` function for the purchase quantity. The results for the various rounds can be previewed using the 'Prev. Sim.' and 'Next Sim.' buttons. The output also has one table for each round of the simulation.

As seen in , each value in the original SIMTABLE statement corresponds to a simulation round, with the Purchase Quantity taking on the value from the SIMTABLE list. The analyst can then record the Profit statistics (mean, variance, skewness, kurtosis, 95% confidence intervals) and determine if the simulation results are of sufficient resolution for the analysts purposes.

The use of SIMTABLE to change parameters within the simulation provides a convenient method to do what-if analysis, and analyze the results as a whole.

#### Avgöra antalet iterationer

In simulation, one major question is how many iterations are needed to reach a chosen level of precision in the results. Simulation as a tool provides an approximation of the actual relationship between the input and output variables. The precision of the approximation is based on the number of iterations of the simulation done. More iterations in the sample lead to greater precision. But the relationship between iterations and precision depends on the relationship between the variables in the precision. In addition, the analyst must decide which output variable is the variable of interest, and what degree of precision is required. The next step is to determine a sufficiently large number of iterations $R$ R be used to satisfy:

\[ P\left(\left|\left(\widehat{\Theta}-\Theta\right)\right| \leq \epsilon \right) \geq 1-\alpha \]

The probability that the difference between the actual mean and the sample mean is less than epsilon is 1 - alpha.

Where $\widehat{\Theta}$ Θ-hat is the estimate of the mean, $\Theta$ Θ is the actual mean, ε is the specified error, and (1-α) is the probability that the estimate is within ε of the actual value (i.e. the (1-α) confidence interval). Common values of (1-α) are 95% and 99%. The Simulation Report from Gnumeric includes values for the 95% confidence interval as shown in .

The general procedure is as follows:

Adapted from Banks et. al. Discrete-Event System Simulation, 3rd Edition, pp. 414-416.

1. Run simulation for a sample of $R_0$ R0 iterations. The default value in Gnumeric is 1000, set in the options tab of the Simulation menu, .

2. Take the sample variance $S_0^2$ S0 2 from the simulation output spreadsheet and determine the sample standard deviation $S_0$ S0 (see ).

3. Using $z_{\alpha/2}$ zα/2 as the z-value of the $(1-(\alpha/2))$ (1-(α/2)) percentile of the standard normal distribution, set the initial estimate of the number of iterations required as the smallest integer $R$ R such that

   Iterations required for simulation

   $R \geq \left(\frac{z_{\alpha/2}S_0}{\epsilon}\right)^2$

   R is greater than equal to z of alpha divided by 2, times standard deviation, divided by epsilon. Quantity squared.

   . Note that if $R_0$ R0 is small, it would be more appropriate to use the student's t-distribution of $t_{\alpha/2, R_0}$ tα/2, R0 instead of $z_{\alpha/2}$ zα/2 .

In this example, to estimate the profit to within $\epsilon = 0.05$ ε=0.05 , first run the simulation with 1000 iterations and a purchase quantity of 50 results in the following

| Mean | Variance | Confidence (95%)
Demand QUANTITY | 59.19 | 152.4 | 0.64
Profit QUANTITY | 7.85 | 2.51 | 0.08

Taking the variance of the table, and setting $\epsilon = 0.05$ ε=0.05 and $\alpha = 0.05$ α=0.05 , lookup $z_{\alpha/2}$ zα/2 from a standard normal table. $z_{\alpha/2}=1.96$ zα/2=1.96 so we have

$R \geq \left(\frac{1.96 \times \sqrt{2.51}}{0.05}\right)^2 \geq 3856.8$
.

Therefore, the minimum number of iterations is 3857. The simulation can then be re-run with 3857 iterations to create a 95% c.i for profit where $\epsilon \leq 0.05$ ε <=0.05 In this example with 3857 iterations, we get the following Simulation Report table:

| Mean | Variance | Confidence (95%)
Demand QUANTITY | 59.11 | 163.9 | 0.34
Profit QUANTITY | 7.72 | 2.88 | 0.04

As expected, the 95% Confidence interval for Profit is less than 0.05. For the newsvendor example, the next step would be to look at the confidence intervals of the profit for all values of purchase quantity, and verify that this confidence interval is adequate for the decision to be made.

### Analysis using scenarios

#### Adding new scenarios

#### Viewing and managing scenarios

## The Solver

This chapter explains the linear programming solver available from within Gnumeric.

### Solver

With Gnumeric Solver you can solve linear programs.

#### Introduction to Linear Programming

A linear program (LP) is a problem that can be expressed as linear functions. As you probably already know, a linear function is the one whose graph is always a straight line. Thus each variable of it appears in a separate term with its coefficient. There must be no products or quotients of these variables. In addition, the exponent of each term must be one. No logarithmic, exponential, trigonometric terms are allowed. Especially note that functions like ABS, IF, MAX, and MIN are not linear. Here are a few examples of linear functions:

        3x + y - 5z
        -3.23x + 0.33y
        -0.3x + 4y - 2z + 1.2m

The linear problem has a so called objective function which is to be minimized or maximized and constraints. The objective function is the one whose value we would like to optimize. Typically, this function could determine the profit generated by the expected sales of the given model (maximization problem), or, the cost of the production in the given environment (minimization problem). Anyway, on purely mathematical point of view, we could examine the following objective function:

        Maximize 2x + 3y - z

In linear programming the variables of this functions are not allowed to take any values (otherwise the maximum of any objective function would be infinity). The problem also has constraints. The constraints are a set of linear functions and a set of their right hand side values (RHS). For example, for the previously defined objective function we have the following constraints:

        x + y <= 5           (#1)
        3x - y + z <= 9      (#2)
        x + y >= 1           (#3)
        x + y + z = 4        (#4)
        x, y, z >= 0         (non-negativity assumption)

This constraint set consists of three inequality constraints (#1-#3) and one equality constraint (#4). Their RHS values are 5, 9, 1, and 4. In addition, we also have the non-negativity assumption. That is, all the variables (x, y, and z) have to take only positive numbers. The idea is to find the optimal values for the variables (x, y, and z) but also to satisfy all the given constraints.

#### Spreadsheet Modeling

To solve optimization problems with Gnumeric you have to type in the problem into a sheet. A recommended way to start with is to allocate a separate column in the spreadsheet for each decision variable (in the previous example the x, y, and z) and a separate row for each constraint (the constraints #1-#4). The coefficients of these variables should be placed into the cells corresponding to the allocated row and the column. It is also recommended that you label the rows and the columns to make the sheet much more readable. The sheet for our maximization problem would look like this:

Linear programming example

An image of a worksheet with a linear programing problem.

As you can see, we have put the model variables into cells B3:D3. They are currently all zeros. The cell E4 contains the objective function definition. The easiest way to define it is to use SUMPRODUCT build-in function. Thus in our model, we have the formula `=SUMPRODUCT(B3:D3,B4:D4)' in E3.

The constraints are defined in rows seven to ten. Since the coefficients of these functions are in columns B, C and D we will get the total sum of each of the constraint using the formula `SUMPRODUCT(B$3:D$3,Bn:Dn)' where n is the row number of the constraint. For example, in E7 we have `=SUMPRODUCT(B$3:D$3,B7:D7)', in E8 `=SUMPRODUCT(B$3:D$3,B8:D8)' and so on. The right hand side (RHS) values of the constraints are typed into cells G7:G10.

#### Using Solver

##### Solver Parameters

Now it is time to select `Solver...' from the `Tools' menu. After you have done it, the following dialog will appear:

The empty Solver dialog.

An image of the solver dialog open to the "Parameters" tab.

Since we have the objective function in E3 type this into the `Set Target Cell:' entry. We are about to maximize this function, thus the radio button `Max' should be pressed on. By default, the problem is assumed to be maximization problem. The input variables (x, y, and z) were in cells B3:D3 so type the cell range into the `By Changing Cells:' entry.

The model to be optimized is a linear model. Thus, we should check that the check button `Linear (LP/MILP)' is pressed on the page `Model'. Also make sure that the assume non-negative button is on, otherwise, the input variables can also take negative values. There is also a check button `Assume Integer (Discrete)' which adds an integer constraint for all the input variables. The integer optimization is described, however, later.

A few additional options can be set too. If you want to limit the number of iterations the optimization algorithm is allowed to take you can set the maximum number in the `Max iterations' entry box on page `Options'. Similarly, you can limit the maximum time the optimization is allowed to take in the `Max time' entry box. If either one of these settings is exceeded during the optimization, the optimization is interrupted and an error dialog is displayed.

Some models can be better solved if the model is scaled into another form before the actual optimization. Gnumeric solver supports automatic scaling which can be checked on by using the check button on the bottom of the dialog. Note that the automatic scaling does not change the model since before checking out the results the model is scaled back to its original form.

##### Solver Constraints

Now we can add the constraints. Select the `Constraints' page from the top of the dialog and the following page should appear.

Add constraint dialog.

An image of the solver dialog open to the "Constraints" tab.

In this page, you can see all constraints that have been defined in the `Subject to the Constraints:' window. Since none has been defined, this window should be empty. Now type in the constraints (#1-#4) one by one.

When adding constraints, the three entry boxes in the bottom of the dialog are used. Put a cell name of the total left hand side (LHS) cell into the `Left Hand Side:' entry box. In our example, this would be E7 for the constraint #1, E8 for constraint #2, and so on. The combo entry in the middle defines the type of the constraint. It can be `≤', `=', `≥' ,`Int' or `Bool'. We will explain the `Int' and `Bool' constraints later. In this example, you should select `≤' for constraints #1-#2, `≥' for #3, and `=' for constraint #4. The last entry on the right takes the right hand side values of the constraints. For constraints #1-#4 they should be G7 (5), G8 (9), G9 (1), and G10 (4) in this order.

After typing a constraint press Add button, and you will be able to define the next one. When you have typed in all the constraints, the Solver dialog should look like this:

The solver dialog

An image of the solver dialog open to the "Constraints" tab with constraints entered.

The order of the constraints does not matter. If you want to change or delete a constraint click it and then press `Change' or `Delete' button.

Note that you can also type ranges into the LHS and RHS entries. For example, you could have typed D7:D8 and G7:G8 instead of the two separate constraints.

If the constraints have now been typed in correctly, we should check what reports we want to produce.

##### Solver Reporting

Select the `Reports' page from the top of the dialog and you will see a checkbox named `Program'. This report gives the model in its mathematical form. Program report is useful for checking out the correctness of the model. It can also be useful for educational purposes.

##### Optimization

After you have specified the parameters, the constraints and the reporting options it is time to press the Solve button. If everything went ok, you will see a dialog saying: `Solver found an optimal solution. All constraints and optimality conditions are satisfied.'. This means that the solver found an optimal solution and the optimal values are now stored into the input variables. For all models, this, however, does not happen.

If a feasible solution cannot be found, the solver reports that `A feasible solution could not be found. All specified constraints cannot be met simultaneously.'.

If the model is unbounded, the solver reports that `The Target Cell value specified does not converge! The program is unbounded.'.

If the maximum number of iterations specified in the options was exceeded, the solver reports that `The maximum number of iterations exceeded. The optimal value could not be found.'.

If the maximum time specified in the options was exceeded, the solver reports that `The maximum time exceeded. The optimal value could not be found in given time.'.

#### Integer Programming

You can use the Solver tool also for integer programming (IP) and more generally mixed integer programming. In integer programming some of the decision variables are required to take on integer values. To do so, just add a constraint whose type is `Int'.

## Statistical Analysis

This chapter explains the various statistical analysis tools available within Gnumeric including tools to create descriptive statistics, as well as parametric and non-parametric hypotheses tests.

Gnumeric includes various tools for statistical data analysis and data sampling. To use these tools select them from the Statistics menu and its submenus. The tools are described below. In this description as well as in the Statistics menu these tools are classified into six categories.

Statistical Analysis Tools

Gnumeric's Data Analysis Tools
An image of the statistical analysis tools available through the "Tools" menu.

### Overview

All tools have the same output options (see ). The results can be printed into a new sheet, into a new workbook, or into a given output range on a sheet of the current workbook. To select the output method select one of the radio buttons inside the Output frame. If you have chosen Output Range you must also enter a single range in the entry field.

Select the Autofit Columns option to automatically adjust the widths of the columns in the output range.

You will normally want to select the Clear Output Range option, since otherwise some of the cells with existing content will remain in the output range.

The Retain Output Range Formatting and Retain Output Range Comments options are useful if you have already preformatted the output range.

All analysis tools also provide a choice whether they will enter formulæ or just values in the cells. By default Gnumeric will usually enter formulæ. These formulæ will automatically reevaluate when the data change. For some tools, the formulæ also permit modification of certain parameters.

If the chosen output range is too small, some of the results will be lost.

The old data in the output range is deleted and cannot be recovered.

Common output options of the data analysis tools

An image of the output options dialog used by the statistical analysis tools.

To enter a range into an entry field, you can either type the range specification into the text field, or click in the text field and then select the range on the sheet (see ).

Specifying Ranges

An image of the input range text box used by the statistical analysis tools.

Some entry fields accept lists of ranges. To enter these lists, select one range, type a comma, and then select the next range. At any time, you may switch to another sheet of the workbook.

### Descriptive Statistics

#### Correlation Tool

Correlation Tool Dialog

An image of the correlation analysis dialog.

The correlation tool calculates the pairwise Pearson correlation coefficients of the given variables. Use this tool to calculate any number of correlation coefficients at the same time. The variables for which the correlations are calculated are specified by the Input Range: entry. The input range can consist of either a single range or a comma separated list of ranges. The given range or ranges can be grouped by columns, by rows, or by areas.

If the first row or column of the given ranges, or the first field of each area contains labels, the Labels option should be selected.

Some Example Data

An image of an example data set for a correlation analysis.

Using the Correlation Tool

For example, you want to calculate the correlation between three variables, one each in columns A, B, and C. Both variables have 10 values in rows 2 to 11 with labels in row 1 (see ).

1. Enter A1:B11 in the Input Range: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting that range on the sheet. In the latter case the entry will also contain the sheet name.

2. Select the Columns radio button next to Grouped By:, since each variable is in its own column.

3. Select the Labels option since the first row contains labels. (see ).

4. Specify the output options as described above.

5. Press the OK button.

The calculated correlations are given in a table with each column and row labeled with the names of the variables. If the names are not given in the input range, Gnumeric generates them. In our example, the correlation between the variables in column A and B, can be found in the second column and third row of the results table (see ).

Completed Correlation Dialog

An image of the completed correlation analysis dialog.

Correlation Tool Output

An image of the output of the correlation analysis.

#### Covariance Tool

Covariance Tool Dialog

An image of the covariance analysis dialog.

The covariance tool calculates the pairwise covariance coefficients of the given variables. Use this tool to calculate any number of covariance coefficients at the same time. The variables for which the covariances are calculated are specified by the Input Range: entry. The input range can consist of either a single range or a comma separated list of ranges. The given range or ranges can be grouped by columns, by rows, or by areas.

If the first row or column of the given ranges, or the first field of each area contains labels, the Labels option should be selected.

Some Example Data

An image example data for a covariance analysis.

Using The Covariance Tool

For example, you want to calculate the covariance between three variables, one each in columns A, B, and C. Both variables have 10 values in rows 2 to 11 with labels in row 1 (see ).

1. Enter A1:B11 in the Input Range: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting that range on the sheet. In the latter case the entry will also contain the sheet name.

2. Select the Columns radio button next to Grouped By:, since each variable is in its own column.

3. Select the Labels option since the first row contains labels.

4. Specify the output options as described above.

5. Press the OK button.

The calculated covariances are given in a table with each column and row labeled with the names of the variables. If the names are not given in the input range, Gnumeric generates them. In our example, the covariance between the variables in column A and B, can be found in the second column and third row of the results table (see ).

Covariance Tool Output

An image of the output of a covariance analysis.

#### Descriptive Statistics Tool

Descriptive Statistics Tool Dialog

An image of the descriptive statistics dialog.

The descriptive statistics tool calculates various statistics for the given variables and a confidence interval for the population mean. The variables are specified via the Input Range: entry. The given range or list of ranges can be grouped into variables by columns, rows, or areas.

This tool can produce four different kinds of statistical data.

- If the Summary Statistics option is selected, this tool calculates the mean, standard error, median, mode, standard deviation, sample variance, kurtosis, skewness, range, minimum, maximum, sum, and count for each variable.

- If the Confidence Interval for the Mean option is selected, the tool calculates confidence intervals for the population mean of each variable. Specify the confidence level in the entry box. The default confidence level is 95%.

  The interval given will usually be wider than the interval obtained using the CONFIDENCE function. The CONFIDENCE function assumes that the population standard deviation is known. This tool estimates the population standard deviation using the sample standard deviation.

- If the Kth Largest: option is selected, the tool finds the kth largest value of each of the variables. Specify k in the entry box next to the option. The default is 1.

- If the Kth Smallest: option is selected, the tool finds the kth smallest value of each of the variables. Specify k in the entry box next to the option. The default is 1.

If the first entry for each variable contains the label, select the Labels option.

Some Example Data

An image of some example data for descriptive statistics.

Using the Descriptive Statistics Tool

shows some example data, the selected options, and the corresponding output.

The Options Page For Descriptive Statistics

An image of some example data for descriptive statistics.

Descriptive Statistics Tool Output

An image of the output of a descriptive statistics analysis.

#### Frekvenstabeller

Gnumeric provides two types of frequencies tables:

- The frequency table tools is primarily useful for non-numeric data (data of nominal and ordinal level of measurement). It allows to determine frequencies for given values.

- The histogram tool is useful for numeric data that is supposed to be classified into a certain number of intervals. These intervals can be either specified or calculated.

##### Frequency Tables Tool

###### Introduction

The frequency tool can be used to create frequency tables for non-numerical data. It presents this table numerically as well as graphically.

If your data are numeric and you want to accumulate whole intervals of values into frequency counts then this tool is not appropriate. In that case you may want to use the histogram table tool described in section .

Frequency Tool Dialog

An image of the dialog to generate various frequency tables open to the "Input" tab.

As shown in , the frequency table dialog has four tabs. We will introduce them in sequence.

###### The Input Tab

The Input tab shown in contains the field specifying the data to be used for the histogram.

The Input Range entry contains a single range or a list of ranges, that can be grouped into variables by rows, columns, or areas.

If the first row or column of the given input ranges, or the first field of each area contains labels, the Labels option should be selected. If the input is grouped by areas and the top left cell contains a label, the other cells in the first row are being ignored.

###### The Categories Tab

The Categories tab permits the specification of a range that contains the possible values that are supposed to be counted in the input range.

The Automatic categories option is disabled since it is not yet implemented.

Frequency Tool Dialog Categories Tab

An image of the dialog to generate various frequency tables open to the "Categories" tab.

###### The Graphs & Options Tab

The Graphs & Options tab allows various options to be set. In the top half of the tab you can choose whether you would like a graph to be created. If you choose to have a graph created you can specify whether you would like to see a bar chart or a column chart.

In the bottom part of the tab you can select the percentages option. This option replaces the frequency counts with percentages.

If the categories range contains repeated values, then the percentages may add up to more than 100%. If the categories range does not contain all values that occur in the input range, the percentages may sum to less than 100%.

The Use exact comparisons checkbox determines how category values and input range values are compared. If it is checked then the function `EXACT` is used for the comparison. If it isn't checked then simple equality is used. In this latter case, empty cells and cells containing the numerical value 0 are considered equal. As a consequence you usually want that checkbox to be selected.

Frequency Tool Dialog Graphs & Options Tab

An image of the dialog to generate various frequency tables open to the "Graphs & Options" tab.

###### Frequency Tool Results

Frequency Tool Results

Sample results of the frequencies tool.

##### Histogram Tool

###### Introduction

The histogram tool can be used to create histograms or frequency tables for numerical data. Using this tool you can define intervals, or bins. The tool determines how many data points belong to each bin and presents this number numerically as well as graphically.

If your data are non-numeric this tool is not appropriate. In that case you may want to use the frequency table tool described in section .

Histogram Tool Dialog

An image of the dialog to generate various histograms open to the "Input" tab.

As shown in , the histogram dialog has five tabs. We will introduce them in sequence.

###### The Input Tab

The Input tab shown in contains the field specifying the data to be used for the histogram.

The Input Range entry contains a single range or a list of ranges, that can be grouped into variables by rows, columns, or areas.

If the first row or column of the given input ranges, or the first field of each area contains labels, the Labels option should be selected. If the input is grouped by areas and the top left cell contains a label, the other cells in the first row are being ignored.

###### The Cutoffs Tab

Histogram Tool Dialog Cutoffs Tab

An image of the dialog to generate various histograms open to the "Cutoffs" tab.

The cutoffs for the histogram can either be predetermined by data contained in your workbook or calculated by the histogram tool. These cutoffs determine bins as defined by the selection on the Bins tab.

Select the Predetermined Cutoffs option to specify data on your worksheet in the Cutoff Range: entry. The values in this range will be used as cutoffs c1, c2, and so on to cn.

Select the Calculated Cutoffs option to have the cutoffs determined by the tool. Enter the desired number of cutoffs in the Number of Cutoffs entry. It is strongly recommended (but optional) that you specify the minimum and maximum cutoffs in the Minimum cutoff and Maximum cutoff entries. If the minimum or maximum cutoff is not specified, the tool will use the minimum and/or maximum of the current data.

###### The Bins Tab

Histogram Tool Dialog Bins Tab

An image of the dialog to generate various histograms open to the "Bins" tab.

The bins tab is used to determine how the cutoffs c1, c2, and so on to cn are translated into bins. Specifically, it has to be determined whether first and/or last bins reaching from −∞ to c1 and from cn to ∞ are added and whether data points that much cutoffs exactly are included in the bin to the right or the left.

For example the option [∙,∙),[∙,∙),⋯, [∙,∙),[∙,∞) indicates that the first bin starts at the first cutoff while the last bin ends at ∞. Moreover, each cutoff value belongs to the bin on its right.

###### The Graphs & Options Tab

Histogram Tool Dialog Graphs & Options Tab

An image of the dialog to generate various histograms open to the "Graphs & Options" tab.

The options in the graphs and options tab specify any graph to be created and modify the appearance of the histogram:

- The No chart option causes the chart to be omitted.

- The Bar chart option causes a bar chart to be added to the histogram. For each bin, the bar chart shows a horizontal bar indicating the frequency.

  The Column chart option causes a column chart to be added to the histogram. For each bin, the column chart shows a vertical bar indicating the frequency.

  The Histogram chart option causes a histogram chart to be added to the histogram. For each bin, the histogram chart shows a vertical bar indicating the density (that is the frequency divided by the width of the bin).

- The Percentages option causes the frequencies to be expressed as percentages.

- The Cumulative answers option causes a cumulative frequency table (either with counts or with pecentages) to be created.

- The Count numbers only option determines whether only numbers are counted. If also non-numbers are counted they are first converted into numbers, usually into 0.

###### The Output Tab

The Output tab contains the standard output options and fields described in .

###### A Histogram Example

Some Example Data

An image of some example data for use with the histogram tool.

Using the Histogram Tool

For example, you want to calculate a histogram for the number of successes in several sequences of trials. The numbers of successes are recorded in column A and the cutoffs of interest in column C (see ).

1. Enter A1:A31 in the Input Range: entry of the Input tab by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting that range on the sheet. In the latter case the entry may also contain the sheet name.

2. Since you only have one variable select the Areas or Columns radio button next to Grouped By:.

3. Select the Labels option since the first cell of the Input Range contains a label.

4. Enter C2:C5 in the Cutoff Range: entry of the Cutoffs tab. The Predetermined Cutoffs option will now also be selected (see ).

5. In the Bins tab select the second option since we want to add two bins reaching to ∓∞ and we want to count each cutoff value in the bin to its right (see ).

6. Select the Percentage option of the Graphs &Options tab to have the frequencies expressed as percentages.

7. Select the Column Chart option of the Graphs &Options tab to have a column chart added to the histogram (see ).

8. In the Output tab, specify the output options as described in .

9. Press the OK button.

The results are shown in . Note that the graph will by default appear on top of the histogram table. It usually needs to be moved in to proper position. That has already been done here.

Histogram Tool: Specifying Cutoffs

An image of selecting the cutoffs for the example data used with the histogram tool.

Histogram Tool: Specifying Bins

An image of selecting a certain bins type.

Histogram Tool: Specifying Options

An image of specifying the required options.

Histogram Tool Output

An image of the output from the histogram analysis tool.

#### Rank and Percentile Tool

Rank and Percentile Tool Dialog

An image of the rank and percentile analysis tool.

Use this tool to rank given data and to calculate the percentiles of each data point.

Specify the datasets to use in the Input Range: entry. The given range can be grouped into datasets by columns, by rows, or by areas.

For each dataset, the tool creates three columns in the output table:

1. The first column gives the indices of the ordered data from largest to smallest data value.

2. The second column gives data values corresponding to the indices in the first column.

3. The third column indicates the percentile of the data value in the second column.

If you have labels in the first cell of each data set, select the Labels option.

Some Example Data for the Rank and Percentile Tool

An image of example data for use with the rank and percentile analysis tool.

Using the Rank and Percentile Tool

shows some example data and the corresponding output.

Rank and Percentile Tool Output

An image of the output from a rank and percentile analysis.

In the case of ties, the rank calculated by this tool differs from the value of the RANK function for the same data. This tool calculates the rank as it is normally used in Statistics: If two values are tied, the assigned rank is the average rank for those entries. For example in the two values 10 are the second and third largest values. Since they are equal each receives the rank of 2.5, the average of 2 and 3. The rank function on the other hand assigns the rank as it is normally used to determine placements. The two values 10 would therefore each receive a rank of 2.

### Sampling Tool

Sampling Tool Dialog

An image of the sampling tool.

Use the sampling tool to take a sample of a data set. This tool can take both a random sample of a given size or a periodic sample:

random sample

  A random sample is a subset of the population such that every subset of that size has the same chance of being picked.

periodic sample

  In a periodic sample every kth element in the population is selected.

To use this tool, first specify the data set or data sets by setting the Input Range: entry. The range or ranges given can be grouped into datasets by rows, by columns, or by areas.

If the first entry in each data set contains a variable, select the Labels option.

Select the sampling method which can be either periodic or random.

random sample

  Specify the size of the random sample in the Size of Sample: entry.

periodic sample

  Specify the period in the Period: entry.

Specify the number of samples you would like to obtain in the Number of Samples: entry.

Since the period uniquely determines a periodic sample, if you specify that you would like 2 samples you will be given the identical sample twice.

If the dataset for a periodic sample is a two dimensional range, Gnumeric will enumerate the data points by row first.

Some Example Data for the Sampling Tool

An image of example data for use with the sampling tool.

Using the Sampling Tool

shows some example data and the corresponding output.

Sampling Tool Output

An image of the output from the sampling tool.

### Dependent Observations

#### Forecast Tools

##### Exponential Smoothing Tool

Exponential Smoothing Tool Dialog

An image of the exponential smoothing dialog.

The Exponential Smoothing tool performs the exponential smoothing for the given set or sets of values. It provides the choice of 5 different exponential smoothing methods:

- Simple exponential smoothing according to (Hunter, 1968).

- Simple exponential smoothing according to (Roberts, 1959).

- Holt's trend corrected exponential smoothing (occasionally also referred to as double exponential smoothing)

- Additive Holt-Winters exponential smoothing

- Multiplicative Holt-Winters exponential smoothing (occasionally also referred to as triple exponential smoothing)

Since the kind of options available depend on the type of exponential smoothing desired, you can choose the type on the Input page.

###### Common Options of the Exponential Smoothing Tool

Specify the cells containing the datasets in the Input Range entry. The entered range or ranges are grouped into datasets either by rows or by columns.

If you have labels in the first cell of each data set, select the Labels option.

If you select the Include chart option, Gnumeric will also create a chart showing both the data and corresponding smoothed values.

###### Exponential Smoothing According to Hunter

Each value in the smoothed set is predicted based on the forecast for the prior period. The formula is given in . α is the value given as Damping factor. yt is the tth value in the original data set and lt the corresponding smoothed value.

Exponential Smoothing Formula According To Hunter

The formula used in exponential smoothing according to Hunter.

For example, a value for α between 0.2 and 0.3 represents 20 to 30 percent error adjustment in the prior forecast.

If you choose to have the tool enter formulæ rather than values into the output region, then you can modify the damping factor α even after you executed the tool.

To have the standard errors output as well, check the Standard error check box. The formula used is given in . The denominator can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate radio button. Since there are t−1 terms in the sum of the denominator, selecting n−1 means that the denominator will be t−2.

The Standard Error Formula For Exponential Smoothing According To Hunter

The formula used to calculate the standard error of exponential smoothing according to Hunter

If you check the Include chart check box, a line graph showing the observations yt and the predicted values lt will also be created.

Using the Exponential Smoothing Tool

shows some example data, the selected options and the corresponding output.

Some Example Data for the Exponential Smoothing Tool

An image of example data for exponential smoothing.

The Options for the Exponential Smoothing Tool

An image of the options tab of the exponential smoothing tool.

Exponential Smoothing Tool Output (Hunter)

An image of the output of an exponential smoothing analysis according to Hunter.

###### Exponential Smoothing According to Roberts

The simple exponential smoothing method according to Roberts is used for forecasting a time series without a trend or seasonal pattern, but for which the level is nevertheless slowly changing over time. The predicted values are calculated according to the formula given in . α is the value given as Damping factor. yt is the tth value in the original data set and lt the predicted value. l0 is the predicted value at time 0 and must be estimated. This tool uses the average value of the first 5 observations as estimate.

If you choose to have the tool enter formulæ rather than values into the output region, then you can modify the damping factor α and the estimated value at time 0 after executing the tool.

Exponential Smoothing Formula According To Roberts

The formula used in exponential smoothing according to Roberts.

To have the standard errors output as well, check the Standard error check box. The formula used is given in . The denominator can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate radio button.

The Standard Error Formula For Exponential Smoothing According To Roberts

The formula used to calculate the standard error of exponential smoothing according to Roberts

If you check the Include chart check box, a line graph showing the observations yt and the predicted values lt will also be created.

Using the Exponential Smoothing Tool

shows example output for the exponential smoothing tool using the formula according to Roberts. Cell A4 contains the estimated level at time 0. If you requested to have formulæ rather than values entered into the sheet, then changing the estimate in A4 and/or the value for α in A2 will result in an immediate change to the predicted values.

Exponential Smoothing Tool Output (Roberts)

An image of the output of an exponential smoothing analysis according to Roberts.

###### Holt's Trend Corrected Exponential Smoothing

Holt's trend corrected exponential smoothing is appropriate when both the level and the growth rate of a time series are changing. (If the time series has a fixed growth rate and therefore exhibits a linear trend, a linear regression model is more appropriate.)

yt is the true value at time t, lt is the estimated level at time t and bt is the estimated growth rate at time t. We use the two smoothing equations given in to update our estimates. α is the value given as Damping factor and γ is the value given as Growth damping factor.

This tool obtains initial (time 0) estimates for the level and growth rate by performing a linear regression using the first 5 data values.

Formulae Of Holt's Trend Corrected Exponential Smoothing

The formulae used in Holt's trend corrected exponential smoothing.

If you choose to have the tool enter formulæ rather than values into the output region, then you can modify the damping factors α and γ as well as the estimated level and growth rate at time 0 after executing the tool.

To have the standard errors output as well, check the Standard error check box. The formula used is given in . The denominator can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate radio button.

The Standard Error Formula For Holt's Trend Corrected Exponential Smoothing

The formula used to calculate the standard error for Holt's trend corrected exponential smoothing.

If you check the Include chart check box, a line graph showing the observations yt and the estimated level values lt will also be created.

Using the Exponential Smoothing Tool

shows example output for Holt's trend corrected exponential smoothing. Cell A4 contains the estimated level at time 0 and B4 the estimated growth rate at time 0. If you requested to have formulæ rather than values entered into the sheet, then changing the estimates in A4, B4, the values for α in A2 and/or for γ in B2 will result in an immediate change to the predicted values.

Exponential Smoothing Tool Output (Holt's)

An image of the output of Holt's trend corrected exponential smoothing.

###### Additive Holt-Winters Method

The additive Holt-Winters method of exponential smoothing is appropriate when a time series with a linear trend has an additive seasonal pattern for which the level, the growth rate and the seasonal pattern may be changing. An additive seasonal pattern is a pattern in which the seasonal variation can be explained by the addition of a seasonal constant (although we allow for this constant to change slowly.)

yt is the true value at time t, lt is the estimated level at time t, bt is the estimated growth rate at time t and st is the estimated seasonal adjustment for time t. We use the three smoothing equations given in to update our estimates. α is the value given as Damping factor, γ is the value given as Growth damping factor and δ is the value given as Seasonal damping factor. L is the value given as Seasonal period. If your data consist of monthly values, then L should be 12, if it consist of quarterly values then L should be 4.

This tool obtains initial (time 0) estimates for the level and growth rate by performing a linear regression using all data values. It obtains estimates for the seasonal adjustments by averaging the appropriate seasonal differences from values predicted by linear regression alone.

Exponential Smoothing Formulae Of The Additive Holt-Winters Method

The formulae used in the additive Holt-Winters Method.

If you choose to have the tool enter formulæ rather than values into the output region, then you can modify the damping factors α, γ and δ as well as all estimates after executing the tool.

To have the standard errors output as well, check the Standard error check box. The formula used is given in . The denominator can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate radio button.

The Standard Error Formula Of The Additive Holt-Winters Method

The formula used to calculate the standard error in the additive Holt-Winters Method

If you check the Include chart check box, a line graph showing the observations yt and the estimated level values lt will also be created.

Using the Exponential Smoothing Tool

shows the options' tab of the exponential smoothing tool for the additive Holt-Winters method. The data is expected to have a seasonal period of 4 (this would for example happen if we have a data value for each quarter of a year). shows the corresponding example output for the additive Holt-Winters method. Cell C7 contains the estimated level at time 0, D7 the estimated growth rate at time 0, and E4 to E7 the initial seasonal adjustments for each of the 4 seasons preceding our data time period. If you requested to have formulæ rather than values entered into the sheet, then changing any of these estimates, the values for α in A2, for γ in B2 and/or for δ in C2 will result in an immediate change to the estimated values.

Exponential Smoothing Tool Options (Additive Holt-Winters)

An image of the options' tab for the additive Holt-Winters method.

Exponential Smoothing Tool Output (Additive Holt-Winters)

An image of the output of the additive Holt-Winters method.

###### Multiplicative Holt-Winters Method

The multiplicative Holt-Winters method of exponential smoothing is appropriate when a time series with a linear trend has a multiplicative seasonal pattern for which the level, the growth rate and the seasonal pattern may be changing. A multiplicative seasonal pattern is a pattern in which the seasonal variation can be explained by the multiplication of a seasonal constant (although we allow for this constant to change slowly.)

yt is the true value at time t, lt is the estimated level at time t, bt is the estimated growth rate at time t and st is the estimated seasonal adjustment for time t. We use the three smoothing equations given in to update our estimates. α is the value given as Damping factor, γ is the value given as Growth damping factor and δ is the value given as Seasonal damping factor. L is the value given as Seasonal period. If your data consist of monthly values, then L should be 12, if it consist of quarterly values then L should be 4.

This tool obtains initial (time 0) estimates for the level and growth rate by performing a linear regression using the data values of the first 4 seasonal periods. It obtains estimates for the seasonal adjustments by averaging the appropriate seasonal differences from values predicted by linear regression alone during the first 4 seasonal periods.

Exponential Smoothing Formulae Of The Multiplicative Holt-Winters Method

The formulae used in the multiplicative Holt-Winters Method

If you choose to have the tool enter formulæ rather than values into the output region, then you can modify the damping factors α, γ and δ as well as all estimates after executing the tool.

To have the standard errors output as well, check the Standard error check box. The formula used is given in . The denominator can be adjusted by selecting the appropriate radio button.

The Standard Error Formula Of The Multiplicative Holt-Winters Method

The formula used to calculate the standard error in the multiplicative Holt-Winters Method

If you check the Include chart check box, a line graph showing the observations yt and the estimated level values lt will also be created.

Using the Exponential Smoothing Tool

shows the example output for the multiplicative Holt-Winters method, assuming 4 seasons. Cell C7 contains the estimated level at time 0, D7 the estimated growth rate at time 0, and E4 to E7 the initial seasonal adjustments for each of the 4 seasons preceding our data time period. If you requested to have formulæ rather than values entered into the sheet, then changing any of these estimates, the values for α in A2, for γ in B2 and/or for δ in C2 will result in an immediate change to the estimated values.

Exponential Smoothing Tool Output (Multiplicative Holt-Winters)

An image of the output of the multiplicative Holt-Winters method.

##### Moving Average Tool

Moving Average Tool Dialog

An image of the dialog for the moving average analysis tool.

Use the moving average tool to calculate moving averages of one or more data sets. A moving average provides useful trend information of the data that is lost in a simple average. In addition, moving averages can be used to eliminate random variance. For example, use this tool to create a smoother curve of a stock prize.

Specify the cells containing the datasets in the Input Range entry. The entered range or ranges are grouped into datasets either by rows or by columns.

If you have labels in the first cell of each data set, select the Labels option.

Choose the type of moving average you would like to calculate. The tool can determine 4 types of moving averages:

1. Simple moving average

2. Cumulative moving average

3. Weighted moving average

4. Spencer's 15 point moving average

Moving Average Tool Dialog: The Options Tab

An image of the Options tab of the moving average analysis tool.

Specify the Interval for the moving average. The interval i is the number of consecutive values to be included in each moving average. This options is only available for the simple and weighted moving averages.

Check the Standard errors checkbox if you would also like the standard error to be calculated. Since there is no general agreement on the denominator for the standard error you can choose the appropriate radio button.

In the case of the simple moving average, you can also choose between a prior moving average and a central moving average, or you may even specify any other desired offset.

1. Prior moving average: Each average takes into account the current observation and the most recent prior observations for a total of i observations.

2. Central moving average with i being odd: Each average takes into account the current observation and the same number of most recent prior observations and closest future observations for a total of i observations.

3. Central moving average with i being even: This is calculated according to the formula given in . at is the moving average at time t and yt is the observation at time t.

4. Other offset: If the offset is 0, this is just the prior moving average. Otherwise the offset indicates the number of closest future observations to include in the average. Correspondingly, the number of most recent past observations is decreased.

Formula For The Central Moving Average With Even Interval

The formula for the central moving average if the interval length is even.

The results are given in one column for each dataset (with a second column added if you have chosen standard errors to be calculated). Each row represents the moving average of the corresponding row or column in the input range. Depending on the type of average and the offset, the moving average cannot be calculated for the first rows in the input range.

###### Simple Moving Average

A simple moving average is the unweighted average of a collection of observations. Exactly which observations are included depends on whether a prior or central moving average is calculated.

###### Cumulative Moving Average

A cumulative moving average is a prior moving average in which the current and all prior observations are included.

###### Weighted Moving Average

A weighted moving average with an interval i is a prior moving average calculated according to formula . at is the moving average at time t and yt is the observation at time t.

Formula For The Weighted Moving Average With Interval i

The formula for the weighted moving average if the interval length is i.

###### Spencer's 15 Point Moving Average

Spencer's 15 point moving average is a central moving average calculated according to formula . at is the moving average at time t and yt is the observation at time t.

Formula For Spencer's 15 Point Moving Average

The formula for the Spencer's 15 point moving average.

###### A Moving Average Example

Some Example Data for the Moving Average Tool

An image of some example data for use with the moving average analysis tool.

Using the Moving Average Tool

shows some example data, shows the option settings, and the corresponding output.

Moving Averages Tool Options

An image of the option settings of the moving averages example.

Moving Averages Tool Output

An image of the output from the moving average analysis tool.

#### Fourier Analysis Tool

Fourier Analysis Tool Dialog

An image of the fourier analysis dialog.

The Fourier Analysis tool normally performs a Fast Fourier Transform to obtain the discrete fourier transform Fs of the given sequence ft of real numbers according to the formula given in .

Select the Inverse option to calculate the inverse discrete fourier transform ft of the given sequence Fs of real numbers

If the number of terms in the given sequence is not a power of 2 (i.e. 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, etc.), this tool will append zeros to reach such a power of 2!

Specify the cells containing the datasets in the Input Range entry. The entered range or ranges are grouped into sequences either by rows or by columns.

If you have labels in the first cell of each data set, select the Labels option.

Fourier Analysis Formulae

The formulae used in a fourier analysis.

Before using the numbers obtained by this tool, ensure that these are in fact the correct formulae for your discipline. In the physical sciences this fourier transform tends to be called the inverse fourier transform and vice versa. Moreover, frequently the scaling factor varies.

For example Mathematica uses the terms fourier transform and inverse fourier transform with the reversed meaning than Gnumeric and it uses a scaling factor of 1/SQRT(N) rather than 1/N.

#### Kaplan Meier Estimates Tool

##### The Input Tab

The Input tab shown in contains the fields specifying the data to be used for the Kaplan Meier Estimates. The time column contains the times or dates at which the subjects died or were censored. If any of the subjects were censored, the Permit censorship checkbox is checked and the Censor column contained the censorship marks. Censorship marks are typically 0s or 1s. The range of censor marks or labels can be set using the remaining two spinboxes.

Kaplan-Meier Tool Dialog

An image of the .Kaplan-Meier tool dialog.

##### The Groups Tab

If the subjects belong to several groups and the groups are supposed to be analyzed separately, the groups tab can be used.

Kaplan-Meier Tool Dialog Groups Tab

An image of the Kaplan-Meier tool dialog groups tab.

The groups tab can be enabled via the Define multiple groups checkbox. The groups column entry contains the address of the column specifying the group membership. Groups can then be defined or deleted via the Add and Remove buttons.

##### The Options Tab

The options tab of the Kaplan-Meier tools dialog is used to set various options of the Kaplan-Meier tool.

Kaplan-Meier Tool Dialog Options Tab

An image of the Kaplan-Meier tool dialog options tab.

##### The Output Tab

The Output tab contains the standard output options and fields described in .

##### A Kaplan-Meier Example

Kaplan-Meier Tool Example Input

An image of the input to the Kaplan-Meier estimate example and of the input tab of the Kaplan-Meier analysis tool.

Using the Kaplan-Meier Tool

Suppose you want to calculate Kaplan-Meier Estimates for the as given in . Each row contains the data for one subject. Column A contains the survival time, i.e. the time until death or censure. Column B contains the group number, we are considering two groups of subjects. Column C indicates whether the subject died (0) or was censured (1).

We complete the fields of the Input tab as shown in . The time column is A2:A21 and the censure column is C2:C21.

Since we have two groups of subjects, on the Groups tab we check the Define multiple groups check box and set up two groups with identifiers 1 and 2 in column B2:B21:

Kaplan-Meier Tool Example Group Tab

An image of the group tab of the Kaplan-Meier analysis tool.

On the Options tab all checkboxes are pre-checked and we leave them that way to obtain a maximum amount of information.

On the output tab we choose where we would like the output to be placed. For the purposes of this example we retain the New Sheet target. After clicking OK we get the output shown in . Note that the graph initially always appears on top of the numerical result and was moved for the screen shot.

B1:F17 shows the results of the first group, G1 to K17 the results of the second group. The graph shows the Kaplan-Meier survival curves for both groups.

M4:N7 shows the result of the Mantel-Haenszel Log-Rank Test. In this case the p-value is larger than 0.3 and we would fail to reject the Null hypothesis. There is no evidence that the survival times differ.

Kaplan-Meier Tool Example Output

An image of the output of the Kaplan-Meier analysis tool.

#### Principal Component Analysis

Principal Component Analysis Tool Dialog

An image of the principal component analysis tool dialog.

Principal Component Analysis Tool performs a principal component analysis (PCA). PCA is a useful statistical technique with application in fields such as face recognition and image compression. It is a common technique for finding patterns in data of high dimension.

Specify the cells containing the datasets in the Input Range entry. The entered range or ranges are grouped into the factors either by rows or by columns.

If you have labels in the first cell of each factor, select the Labels option.

Principal Component Analysis Example Data

An image of example data for use with the principal component analysis tool.

Using the Principal Component Analysis Tool

Suppose you want to perform a principal component analysis on the data given in having the two dimensions (factors) x and y.

1. Enter Sheet1!$A$1:$B$11 (or just A1:B11) in the Input Range: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting the range on the sheet.

2. Select the Labels option since the first row contains labels. (see ).

3. Specify the output options as described above.

4. Press the OK button.

The output of this principal component analysis is shown in . The output shows the covariance matrix, the eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors. The principal component is the constructed factor with the highest percent of trace, ξ1.

Principal Component Analysis Tool Output

An image of the output from a principal component analysis.

#### Regression Tool

Regression Tool Dialog

An image of the regression tool dialog.

The regression tool performs a multiple regression analysis.

Enter a range or list of ranges containing the independent variables into the X Variables: entry.

Enter a single range containing the dependent variable into the Y Variable: entry.

If the ranges for the independent and dependent variables also contains labels in the first field of each row, column or area, select the Labels option.

Specify the confidence level in the Confidence Level: entry. The default is 95%.

To force the regression line or plane to pass through the origin, select the Force Intercept To Be Zero option.

Specify the output options as described above. If the output is directed into a specific output range, that range should contain at least seven columns and 17 rows more than there are independent variables.

Regression Example Data

An image of example data for use with the regression tool.

Using the Regression Tool

Suppose you want to perform a regression analysis on the data given in using v and y as independent variables and u as dependent variable.

1. Enter B1:C11 in the X Variables: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting the range on the sheet.

2. Enter A1:A11 in the Y Variable: entry.

3. Select the Labels option since the first row contains labels. (see ).

4. Specify the output options as described above.

5. Press the OK button.

The output of this regression analysis is shown in .

Completed Regression Dialog

An image of the regression tool dialog with the required fields completed.

Regression Tool Output

An image of the output from a regression analysis.

### One Sample Tests

#### Normality Tests

The normality test tool provides for four tests of normality.

1. Anderson-Darling-testet

2. Cramér-von Mises-testet

3. Lilliefors-testet (Kolmogorov-Smirnov)

4. Shapiro-Francia-testet

Normality Test Dialog

An image of the normality test dialog.

The data range is specified via the Input Range: entry (see ). The given range or list of ranges can be grouped into separate data sets by columns, rows, or areas. The tool performs a separate test for each data set.

Test Tab of the Normality Test Dialog

An image of the test tab of the normality test dialog.

On the test tab one specifies which of the four tests to perform, the significance level for the test and whether to include a normal probability plot of the data (see ).

Normality Test Example Data

An image of example data for a normality test.

Using the Normality Test Tool

Suppose you want to perform a Lilliefors (Kolmogorov-Smirnov) Test for Normality on the data given in .

1. Enter A1:A50 (or Sheet1!$A$1:$A$50) in the Input Range: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting the range on the sheet.

2. Select the Labels option since the first row contains a label (see ).

3. On the test tab of the dialog (see ) select the Lilliefors (Kolmogorov-Smirnov) Test.

4. Specify an appropriate significance level Alpha, say 0.05.

5. Select the Create Normal Probability Plot option to include a normal probability plot in the output.

6. Specify the output options as described above.

7. Press the OK button.

The output of this normality test is shown in . Note that the graph appears initially on top of the output data and needs to be moved to make the data visible.

Completed Input Tab of the Normality Test Dialog

An image of the completed input tab of the normality test dialog.

Completed Test Tab of the Normality Test Dialog

An image of the completed test tab of the normality test dialog.

Normality Test Output

An image of the output from a normality test.

#### One Median

The One Median test tool provides two non-parametric tests that test the null hypothesis that the sample comes from a population with a given median:

1. Sign Test

2. Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test

Selecting the appropriate submenu item opens the dialog with the respective test preselected.

##### Sign Test

This section describes the one sample sign test to test the null hypothesis that the sample comes from a population with the given median. The tool to perform a sign test to test the null hypothesis that two paired samples come from populations with the same median is in section .

One-Median Test Dialog

An image of the one-median test dialog used by the Sign Test and the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test.

The Sign Test tool performs a one-sample sign test whether the sample comes from a population with a given median.

The sample data range is specified via the Input Range: entry (see ). The given range or list of ranges can be grouped into separate data sets by columns, rows, or areas. The tool performs a separate test for each data set.

On the Testtab of the dialog (see ) the predicted median as well as the significance level are specified.

The Test Tab of the One-Median Test Dialog

An image of the test tab of the one-median test dialog.

Using the Sign Test Tool

Suppose you want to perform a Sign Test on the data given in to determine whether the sample comes from a population of mean 3.

1. Enter A1:A19 (or Sheet1!$A$1:$A$19) in the Input Range: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting the range on the sheet.

2. Select the Labels option since the first row contains a label. (see ).

3. On the Test tab of the dialog (see ) select the Sign Test.

4. Specify an appropriate significance level Alpha, say 0.05.

5. Select thepecify the median of the null hypothesis (3) in the Predicted Median entry.

6. Specify the output options as described above.

7. Press the OK button.

The output of this sign test is shown in .

Output of a Sign Test

An image of the output of a Sign Test.

##### Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test

This section describes the one sample Wilcoxon signed rank test to test the null hypothesis that the sample comes from a population with the given median. The tool to perform a Wilcoxon signed rank test to test the null hypothesis that two paired samples come from populations with the same median is in section .

The Wilcoxon Signed Rank TTest tool performs a one-sample sign test whether the sample comes from a population with a given median.

The sample data range is specified via the Input Range: entry (see ). The given range or list of ranges can be grouped into separate data sets by columns, rows, or areas. The tool performs a separate test for each data set.

On the Testtab of the dialog (see ) the predicted median as well as the significance level are specified.

The p-values given by this tool are determined using a normal approximation. This approximation is only valid if the sample size is at least 12.

Using the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test Tool

Suppose you want to perform a Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test on the data given in to determine whether the sample comes from a population of mean 3.

1. Enter A1:A19 (or Sheet1!$A$1:$A$19) in the Input Range: entry by typing this directly into the entry or clicking in the entry field and then selecting the range on the sheet.

2. Select the Labels option since the first row contains a label. (see ).

3. On the Test tab of the dialog (see ) select the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test.

4. Specify an appropriate significance level Alpha, say 0.05.

5. Select thepecify the median of the null hypothesis (3) in the Predicted Median entry.

6. Specify the output options as described above.

7. Press the OK button.

The output of this sign test is shown in .

Output of a Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test

An image of the output of a Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test.

### Two Sample Tests

#### Comparing Means of Two Populations

Gnumeric provides four similar tools to test whether the difference of two population means is equal to a hypothesized value. These four tools use the same dialog (see ).

t- and z-Test Tool Dialog

An image of the t-test and z-test dialog.

Depending on the options settings, the appropriate test will be performed. The entries in the Input, Test, and Output frames are independent from the specific test.

Enter the first variable in the Variable 1 Range entry and the second variable in the Variable 2 Range entry.

Enter the hypothesized difference between the population means in the Hypothesized Mean Difference entry, which has a default of 0. Enter the significance level in the Alpha entry, which has a default of 5 %.

Specify the output options as described above. If the output is printed into a range, it should have at least three columns and ten rows.

There are up to three possible options that can be selected:

Paired versus Unpaired

  If the variables are dependent (or paired) select the Paired option.

Known versus Unknown

  For unpaired or independent variables, the population variances may be known or unknown. In the latter case they will be estimated using the sample variances. Select the Known option if you in fact know the population variances prior to collecting the sample.

Equal versus Unequal

  For paired variables with unknown population variances, we may either assume that the population variances are equal or not. If the population variances are assumed to be equal, Gnumeric will estimate the common variance by pooling the sample variances. Select the Equal option to assume that the population variances are equal.

##### t-Test: Paired Two Sample for Means Tool

t-Test (Paired) Tool Dialog Options

An image of the options for the t-test.

For paired variables, when you click on OK, Gnumeric will test whether the mean of the difference between the paired variables is equal to the given hypothesized mean difference.

Using the t-Test (Paired) Tool

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

t-Test (Paired) Example Data

An image of the example for a t-test.

Output from the t-Test (Paired) Tool

An image of the output results from a t-test.

##### t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances Tool

t-Test (Equal Variances) Tool Dialog Options

An image of the options for a t-test analysis of two samples with equal variances.

For unpaired variables with unknown but assumed equal population variances, when you click on OK, Gnumeric will test whether the mean of the difference between the paired variables is equal to the given hypothesized mean difference.

Using the t-Test (Unknown but Equal Variances) Tool

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

t-Test (Unknown but Equal Variances) Example Data

An image of example data for use with a t-test with unknown but equal variances.

Output from the t-Test (Unknown but Equal Variances) Tool

An image of the output from a t-test with unknown but equal variances.

##### t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances Tool

t-Test (Unknown and Unequal Variances) Tool Dialog Options

An image of the options in a t-test of two samples with unknown and possibly unequal variances.

For unpaired variables with unknown and assumed unequal population variances, when you click on OK, Gnumeric will test whether the mean of the difference between the paired variables is equal to the given hypothesized mean difference.

Using the t-Test (Unknown and Unequal Variances) Tool

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

t-Test (Unknown and Unequal Variances) Example Data

An image of example data for use in a t-test of two samples with unknown and possibly unequal variances.

Output from the t-Test (Unknown and Unequal Variances) Tool

An image of the output of a t-test of two samples with unknown and possibly unequal variances.

##### z-Test: Two Samples for Means Tool

z-Test Tool Dialog Options

An image of the options in a z-test of two samples.

For unpaired variables with known population variances, enter those variances in the Variable 1 Pop. Variance and Variable 2 Pop. Variance entries. When you click on OK, Gnumeric will test whether the mean of the difference between the paired variables is equal to the given hypothesized mean difference.

Using the z-Test Tool

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

z-Test Example Data

An image of example data for use in a z-test of two samples.

Output from the z-Test Tool

Output from the z-Test Tools
An image of the output from a z-test of two samples.

#### Comparing Medians of Two Populations

Gnumeric provides three non-parametric tests to test the null hypothesis that the two samples come from populations with the same median. Two tests, performed through the same tool, apply in the case of paired samples:

- Sign Test

- Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test

One test applies in the case of unpaired samples:

- Wilcoxon-Mann-Whitney Test

##### Sign Test

This section describes the two sample (paired) sign test to test the null hypothesis that the two samples come from populations with the same median. The tool to perform a sign test to test the null hypothesis that the single sample comes from a population with a given median is in section .

This section needs to be written.

##### Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test

This section describes the two sample (paired) Wilcoxon signed rank test to test the null hypothesis that the two samples come from populations with the same median. The tool to perform a Wilcoxon signed rank test to test the null hypothesis that the single sample comes from a population with a given median is in section .

This section needs to be written.

##### Wilcoxon-Mann-Whitney Test

This section needs to be written.

#### F-Test: Two-Sample for Variances Tool

F-Test Tool Dialog

An image of the dialog for an F-test analysis of the equality of two variances.

Use the F-Test tool to test whether two population variances are different against the null hypothesis that they are not.

Specify the variables in the Variable 1 Range: and Variable 2 Range: entries. The Alpha: entry contains the significance level which is by default 5%.

If the first field of each range contains labels, select the Labels option. The names of the variables will be included in the output table.

The results are given in a table. This table contains the mean, variance, count of observations and the degree of freedom for both variables. The output table also includes the F-value, the one-tailed probability for the F-value, and the F Critical value for one-tailed test and the corresponding values for a two tailed test. The one-tailed probability for the F-value (P(F≤f) one-tail row) is the probability of making a Type I error in the one-tailed test. Similarly, the two-tailed probability for the F-value (P two-tail row) is the probability of making a Type I error in the two-tailed test. Since in the two-tailed F-Test both critical values are positive, the F Critical two-tail row contains two numbers.

If the output is directed into a specific output range, that range should contain at least three columns and eight rows.

Some Example Data

An image of some example data for an F-test of the equality of two variances.

Using the F-Test Tool

shows some example data and the corresponding output.

F-Test Tool Output

An image of the output of an F-test analysis of the equality of two variances.

### Multiple Sample Tests

#### Analysis of Variance

##### ANOVA: Single Factor Tool

Use this tool to perform a single factor analysis of the variances of given variables. The variables are specified by the Input Range: entry. The given range can be grouped into the variables either by columns, by rows or by areas. The Alpha: entry specifies the significance level which is by default 5%.

If the first row or first column of the given range, or the first field of each area contains labels, select the Labels option. The names of the variables will be included in the output table.

The results of this analysis of variance are presented in a standard ANOVA table. The F critical value is the largest value of F that is statistically significant using the given significance level (Alpha).

This tool also calculates the count, sum, average, and the variance of each variable.

1-factor ANOVA Dialog and Example Data

An image of a multilevel single factor ANOVA analysis.

Using the single factor ANOVA

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

Output From a 1-factor ANOVA

An image of the output from a multilevel single factor ANOVA analysis.

##### ANOVA: Two-Factor Tool

Gnumeric can perform two factor fixed effects ANOVAs with and without replication. The same dialog is used and the appropriate tool is selected depending on whether the number of rows per sample is 1 or larger than 1.

###### ANOVA: Two-Factor Without Replication Tool

If the number of rows per sample is given as 1, Gnumeric performs a two factor fixed effects ANOVA without replication. Each column of the input range is interpreted as a level of the first factor while each row is interpreted as a level of the second factor.

The first row and column of the range may contain labels for these levels. In this case the Labels option should be selected.

The Alpha: entry specifies the significance level which is by default 5%.

Using the 2-factor ANOVA Without Replication Tool

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

2-factor ANOVA Without Replication Dialog

An image of a two factor ANOVA without replication analysis.

Output From a 2-factor ANOVA Without Replication

An image of the output from a two factor ANOVA without replication analysis.

###### ANOVA: Two-Factor With Replication Tool

If the number of rows per sample is larger than 1, Gnumeric performs a two factor fixed effects ANOVA with replication. Each column of the input range is interpreted as a level of the first factor while groups of rows (the number of rows in each group given by the number of rows per sample value) are interpreted as levels of the second factor.

The first row and column of the range may contain labels for these levels. In this case the Labels option should be selected.

The Alpha: entry specifies the significance level which is by default 5%.

See for an example of a completed dialog and for the corresponding output.

2-factor ANOVA With Replication Dialog

An image of a two factor ANOVA with replication analysis.

Output From a 2-factor ANOVA With Replication

An image of the output from a two factor ANOVA with replication analysis.

Gnumeric will estimate missing values for each level combination as the mean of the existing values in that combination. The degrees of freedom are adjusted appropriately.

#### Tests for a Contingency Table

##### Test of Homogeneity

##### Test of Independence

## Graphics: Images, Widgets, and Drawings

This chapter explains how to add graphical elements to a Gnumeric worksheet, including images from external files, graphical user interface widgets which interact with worksheet data, and simple drawing elements.

### Overview

Gnumeric provides several types of graphical elements which can be added to a worksheet. The creation, manipulation and deletion of these elements all occur in similar ways. When these elements are part of a worksheet, they all "float" above the cell grid, possibly hiding data in the cells underneath.

Gnumeric currently displays four different types of graphical elements: data graphs, images, widgets, and drawings. Data graphs allow users to present worksheet data visually in charts containing several kinds of plots including pie plots, bar and column plots, and scatterplots. Images in many standard computer formats can be added to a worksheet. Graphical user interface widgets can also be added to a worksheet and connected to the values contained in worksheet cells. Drawings allow users to add simple graphical elements on top of a worksheet including lines, arrows and simple polygons.

The four types of graphical elements.

An image of Gnumeric showing the four types of graphical elements which can be added to a worksheet: a data graph with a column plot, an image showing a map of France, a scrollbar which can be used to alter the value in cell "I6", and a drawing element: a red arrow.

The four types of graphical elements which can be added to a worksheet: a data graph with a column plot, an image showing a map of France, a scrollbar which can be used to alter the value in cell "I6", and a red arrow drawing element.

The various graphical elements which can be added to a Gnumeric worksheet all behave in similar ways. The graphical elements all "float" above the cells in the cell grid and may obscure the contents of the cells behind, without affecting the contents of these hidden cells. All graphical elements are added in essentially the same way by selecting the element to add and then using the mouse, either with a simple click to place the element with a default size or with a click and drag to select the area of the worksheet to be covered by the element. These objects are moved or re-sized by clicking on the object with the primary mouse button and using the object body, border and "handles" (the small circles which appear at the corners and in the middle of each side) to manipulate the object. All of these objects will present a context menu through which to change the properties of the object, to save the object as an image, to change the stacking order (which graphical elements are in front of others), or to delete the object. Each of these operations will be summarized below and then explained in greater detail in the sections which follow.

#### Adding Graphical Elements

All graphical elements are added in similar ways which differ only in the original selection and configuration of the element. Data graphs are added using the Graph Guru, which is invoked either through the Insert menu or with the toolbar button, to define the properties of the graph. Images are added using the Insert menu Image... menu entry, selecting the name of the file with the appropriate image and clicking on the Open button. Widgets and drawing elements are added by selecting the appropriate button on the object toolbar.

After any of these steps, the mouse cursor will change into a thin cross-hair cursor,

An image of the thin cross hair mouse pointer.
, when the mouse pointer is placed over the cell grid area.

The graphical element can be placed in the workbook by moving the cursor onto the worksheet and clicking once with the primary mouse button. The graphical element will appear at its default size with the top right hand corner defined by the position of the mouse cursor.

Alternatively, the graphical element can both be placed on the worksheet and have its size determined which is done by click-dragging with the mouse. When the cursor has changed to the thin cross-hair, the graphical element can be inserted by moving the pointer over the worksheet to determine one of the corners of the resulting element, clicking and holding the primary mouse button, dragging the pointer to the opposite corner, and releasing the mouse button. The graphical element will then appear between the place where the primary mouse button was pressed and the place the button was released.

#### Selecting Graphical Elements

Selecting the graphical element requires placing the mouse pointer over the element and then clicking the primary mouse button. Gnumeric indicates the element is selected by drawing eight 'grab handles' around the element; these are small circles at the four corners and in the middle of the four edges of a rectangle surrounding the graphical element.

A graphical element which has been selected.

An image of several graphical elements of which one has been selected, and is therefore showing its grab handles.

The graphical column plot has been selected as evidenced by the eight small circular 'grab handles' at the corners and in the middle of each edge.

The mouse pointer will also change shape when placed over a selected element or over the element's 'grab handles'. When the pointer is placed over a selected element, the mouse pointer will change to the 'move' shape,

An image of the move mouse pointer.
; when the pointer is placed over the element's 'grab handles' it will change to one of the resizing mouse pointer shapes, which are presented in .

Some elements, such as the widget scrollbars, may be difficult to select because they interact themselves with the primary mouse button. An alternative selection process, which involves first invoking the context menu and then dismissing it, can be used for these elements and will work with any graphical element. When the mouse pointer is anywhere over the graphical element, clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons will cause the element to be selected and a context menu to appear. If the primary mouse button is then pressed while the pointer is anywhere over the desktop other than over the menu, the context menu will be dismissed but the element will stay selected.

#### Moving and Resizing Graphical Elements

Graphical elements can be moved from their original location on the worksheet or can be changed in size or shape. All of these operations first require selecting the graphical element with the primary mouse button and then using this mouse button and the mouse pointer to manipulate the element.

##### Moving elements with the mouse

Moving the graphical element can be performed by first selecting the graphical element, then placing the mouse pointer over the element which will change it to the 'move' mouse shape,

An image of the move mouse pointer.
, clicking and holding the primary mouse button and moving the mouse pointer to a new location. As the mouse is moved with the primary mouse button held down, the graphical element will move along with the mouse cursor. When the mouse button is released, the object will stay in its new location.

##### Moving elements with the arrow keys

Once they are selected, graphical elements can be moved with the arrow keys on the keyboard. The movement can be made in smaller increments if the Ctrl key is held simultaneously.

##### Resizing and reshaping elements

Changing the size or shape of the graphical element can be performed by selecting the graphical element, placing the mouse pointer over one of the 'grab handles' at the corners or edges of the rectangular box around the element, which will cause the mouse pointer to change shape to one of the resize pointers, clicking and holding with the primary mouse button, dragging the corner or edge to a new position, and releasing the mouse button. If one of the corner 'grab handles' is used, the graphical element can be altered into any new rectangular shape and size. If one of the edge handles is used, the element can only be reshaped perpendicular to the chosen edge.

#### Invoking the Context Menu for Graphical Elements

Many operations on graphical elements, including changing their internal properties, saving elements as images, modifying the stacking order of the elements, and deleting the elements, are performed through the context menu. The context menu appears when the mouse pointer is placed over the graphical element and one of the secondary mouse buttons is clicked. When the mouse pointer moves over a graphical element, it will change from the usual wide cross cursor to a right pointing arrow cursor. Clicking with the primary mouse button will select the graphical element but clicking with one of the other mouse buttons will open the context menu. The specific button that will trigger this menu depends on the specific hardware and configuration of the computer. By default it is usually the rightmost mouse button.

The context menu for graphical elements.

An image of Gnumeric showing the context menu of a graph element.

The context menu for graph elements is the most complete. It includes an entry to modify the internal properties of the graph, an entry to save the graph as an image, four entries to reorder the stacking of the graph in front or behind other graphs and one entry to delete the graph.

The context menu for graphical elements contains a sub-menu labelled Order which allows the user to change the presentation order for overlapping graphical objects.

The order submenu of graphical element context menus.

An image of the order sub-menu in the context menu of graph elements.

The order submenu of the context menu for graph elements allows the user to change the stacking order for the various graphs on the worksheet. This will affect which objects are visible in front of other objects when several objects overlap.

#### Modifying Graphical Elements

Many of the graphical elements have internal properties which can be changed. This includes the contents of a particular graph, the association of a widget and the contents of a spreadsheet cell, or the characteristics of a drawing element. These properties can be altered using the Properties... menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse pointer is placed over the graphical element and one of the secondary mouse buttons is clicked. After the context menu appears, clicking on this menu item will open up a dialog allowing the user to alter the properties of the element. Since these properties are specific to each element, these dialogs will be discussed in each of the sections below.

#### Saving Graphical Elements as Images

Some of the graphical elements, the data graphs and the image elements, provide an item in the context menu which allows the element to be saved to a file containing only an image of that element. Graphical plots can be saved in Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG), Portable Network Graphics (PNG) or JPEG formats. Images can be saved to their original format, or to PNG and JPEG formats.

Elements which can be saved as images can be output to a file using an entry in the element's context menu. First the context menu must be invoked by placing the mouse pointer over the graphical element and clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons. Next the Save as Image or the Save as menu items must be selected by placing the mouse pointer over that item and clicking with the primary mouse pointer. This will open up the Save As dialog which will allow the user to name the file which will be created, select where the file will be created, select the file type to use for the image and then generate the file.

#### Restacking Graphical Elements

Graphical elements can overlap when they are placed over the cell grid area. Conceptually, each graphical element occupies one layer in a stack of all the elements. By default, elements which have been created more recently will overlap in front of elements which were created earlier.

Stacked graphical elements.

An image of Gnumeric showing stacked graphical element.

The order of each element in the stack can be changed using the four menu items in the context menu. The Top will bring the selected element in front of all the other objects. The Up menu item will bring the selected element forward one layer. Conversely, the Down menu item will move the selected element one layer towards the back, and the Bottom menu item will palace the selected element at the very back of the stack of elements. Jointly, these menu items allow the user to specify exactly which order in which the graphical elements should appear.

The stacking of graphical elements in Gnumeric is currently not working correctly. Widget elements are always placed above the other elements and do not honor the same ordering scheme as the rest of the elements. A large amount of work will be required to fix this and a decision has been made to ignore this problem until the developers have the time to fix this problem correctly.

#### Deleting Graphical Elements

All of the graphical elements in Gnumeric can be deleted using the context menu. Deleting a graphical element will never alter the data contents of the cells in the workbooks.

Deleting a graphical element requires using the context menu. First the mouse pointer must be placed over the graphical element. Next, the context menu must be invoked by clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons. Finally, the Delete menu item must be selected by placing the mouse pointer over this menu item and clicking with the primary mouse button. When this menu item is selected, the graphical element will disappear from the worksheet and will not be saved as part of the spreadsheet file the next time the file is saved.

### Images

Images can be added, as floating graphical elements, to Gnumeric worksheets. These images will be saved as part of the file and therefore can be sent to others embedded within the spreadsheet file.

Images in several file formats can be added, but the specific list depends on the particular installation of the underlying software library, `gdk-pixbuf`. By default, the ANI, BMP, GIF, ICO, JPEG, PCX, PNG, PNM/PBM/PGM/PPM family, Sun raster (RAS), Targa (TGA), TIFF, WBMP, XBM, XPM image formats are supported, but extensions to the library can also support other formats such as the WMF Windows Metafile and SVG Scalable Vector Graphics formats.

A complete listing of the file formats supported by the local version of `gdk-pixbuf` can be generated with the

    gdk-pixbuf-query-loaders

command-line application, if this is installed on the system.

#### Inserting Images

Inserting an image is performed like inserting any other graphical element using the menu entry to start the process, then selecting the file, and finally using the mouse to place the image above the worksheet.

Procedure to insert an image into a worksheet.

- Select the "Image" menu item in the "Insert" menu

  Inserting an image starts by selecting, in the Insert menu, the Image menu item using the mouse cursor and the primary mouse button. This will open a dialog in which the user can select the file which contains the desired image.

- Select the file containing the image

  In the dialog which appears the user must select the file which contains the desired image. The dialog will be specific to the particular operating system platform but should provide a way to navigate the filesystem to pick the folder that contains the file and have a way to select the file or type its name. When these choices have been made, the dialog can be dismissed by double clicking on the file or by clicking on the Open button. This will dismiss the dialog and expose the worksheet, with the mouse pointer now converted to a thin cross-hair.

- Place the image on the worksheet with the mouse pointer

  The image, which will float like other graphical elements above the worksheet, must be placed on the worksheet. The image can be placed with its default size by moving the thin cross-hair pointer above the worksheet and clicking with the primary mouse button. Alternatively, the image can be placed and sized by selecting two of the resulting corners. This is done by moving the thin cross-hair pointer over the worksheet, determining one corner by clicking and holding the primary mouse button, dragging the pointer to the opposite corner, and releasing the mouse button. The image will then appear between the place where the primary mouse button was pressed and the place the button was released.

#### Saving Images to New Files

Images in a Gnumeric worksheet can be saved to a new, separate file. The image can be saved either in its original format or in PNG or JPEG formats. The ability to save images to a new file is especially useful when a spreadsheet file has been transferred to a computer that does not have a copy of the original image.

Images above a worksheet can be saved by accessing the context menu, selecting the many entry and navigating the file saving dialog which appears.

Procedure to save a worksheet image.

- Open the context menu

  The context menu is opened by placing the mouse cursor over the image and clicking one of the secondary mouse buttons.

- Select the "Save As" menu item

  Once the context menu appears, the mouse cursor can be moved over the menu. As the cursor passes over each menu item, that item will be highlighted. When the Save As menu item is highlighted, clicking with the primary mouse button will select that entry, causing the context menu to disappear and the Save As dialog to appear.

- Select the file name and location

  The Save As dialog which opens will depend on the platform that the user is using but should be standard for that platform. The dialog should allow a user to define a name for the file, to select the folder (directory) in which a file will be saved, and to select the format for the saved file. When all these selections have been made, the Save can be pressed which will dismiss the dialog and save the file.

#### Deleting Images

An image element, floating above a worksheet, can be deleted from the worksheet and from the Gnumeric file using the context menu. The procedure for deleting all graphical elements is the same; this procedure is explained in .

### GUI Widgets

A Gnumeric worksheet can graphical user interface (GUI) elements, commonly called 'widgets', which can be tied to the data contents of worksheet cells. For example, users can add a slider widget which, when the position of the slider moves, alters the numeric value in a worksheet cell.

Widgets are currently experimental!

The current implementation of these widgets is incomplete. Some of the obvious configuration settings for these widgets do not exist and much of the functionality that these widgets should exhibit has not been implemented. Future versions of Gnumeric will complete these widgets and make them functional.

Widgets do not currently stack properly on the worksheet

Widgets currently stay above all the other graphical elements because they use a different system to calculate their positions than the other graphical elements do. This will also be fixed in future updates.

Each of these elements can be added by selecting the appropriate icon on the object toolbar and using the thin cross-hair mouse pointer to place the element on the worksheet by clicking or by click-dragging with the primary mouse button. This process is explained in greater detail in .

Each of these elements can be configured using the context menu and its Properties menu item, as explained in .

Each of these elements can be moved and resized on the worksheet, as explained in .

The stacking order, from the front to the back, which determines which widgets obscure each other, can be changed using the entries in the context menu, as explained in . However, as explained in the note above, the widgets do not currently stack under the other graphical elements.

Each of these elements can be deleted using the context menu and its Delete menu item, as explained in .

#### Labels.

Labels are intended to be small text elements which can be added to the worksheet. Since it is currently not possible to edit the text field, these widgets are not currently usable. The properties of the border and background of the widget can be changed but, because the word "Label" is always present, the rectangle drawing element, presented in will be more useful.

A label widget.

An image of a label widget.

##### Configuring the properties of the label

The properties of the label can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the label and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

The label outline color and width, as well as the background, "fill", color can be changed.

The configuration dialog for label properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure checkbox widget elements.

The color of the label outline can be altered by moving the mouse pointer over the button with the icon of a small, black, downward pointing arrow and then clicking with the primary mouse button. This will open up a panel with a number of standard colors presented as small squares. Any of these colors can be selected by moving the mouse pointer over the desired color and pressing once with the primary mouse button. Alternatively, a custom color can be chosen by clicking on the button at the bottom of the panel. This will open up the color chooser dialog. In this dialog colors can be defined using the numeric boxes or can be selected using the color triangle. The color can be selected by Clicking on the outer circle while the darkness or lightness can be selected by clicking inside the triangle. Once the desired color has been configured, this color can be used for the label outline by clicking on the OK button.

The border width can be changed either by typing a new number into the text box or by using the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the width number.

The color of the background fill can be changed in the same way as the color of the outline border, which was explained above.

#### Frames.

Frames are intended to be transparent boxes with a title that can be placed around part of the worksheet to highlight that area. Because the format of the border of these widgets cannot be altered, they are less visible than they could be. A similar frame, without the title, can be made with the rectangle drawing element, which is presented in .

A frame widget.

An image of a frame widget.

##### Configuring the properties of the checkbox

The properties of the frame can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the frame and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Currently, only the word that appears in the frame can be altered.

The configuration dialog for frame properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure frame widget elements.

The word displayed in the frame can be altered by typing new text in the textbox next to the word "Label".

#### Checkboxes.

Checkboxes are widgets which allow a user to visually see the state of an entity, whether it is checked or not, and tie this state to the truth value of a Boolean cell, "TRUE" if the checkbox is checked and "FALSE" the checkbox is not. The check box can be used to alter the value of a cell, which will alter any other cells whose values are computed based on the dependent cell. This provides a simple way to alter a whole series of computations.

A checkbox widget.

An image of a checkbox widget.

##### Configuring the properties of the checkbox

The properties of the checkbox can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the checkbox and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Checkboxes have two properties which can be configured: the worksheet cell whose value will be altered by clicking in the checkbox and the text displayed on the checkbox.

The configuration dialog for checkbox properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure checkbox widget elements.

The "Link to:" field allows the user to select a cell that will be changed in response to changes in the state of the widget. A user can type the name of a cell in the text box or may click in the text box to activate it and then click on the worksheet to select the desired cell and Gnumeric will automatically add a reference to the cell.

The "Label" field accepts a text value which will appear next to the checkbox. This text can indicate what the checkbox field alters, for instance in the checkbox could be used to alter a series of calculations, between including interest or excluding it, from the computation.

#### Scrollbars.

Scrollbars are widgets that allow the changing of a numeric value by click-dragging with the mouse.

A scrollbar widget.

An image of a scrollbar widget.

The scrollbar widget can be used in three ways: by dragging the 'thumb', by clicking on the arrows, or by clicking in the 'channel'. The 'thumb' is the small rectangular element between the two arrow buttons. The 'thumb' can be dragged by placing the mouse pointer over the thumb, clicking and holding with the primary mouse button and then dragging the mouse pointer up or down. Clicking on the arrow buttons will scroll the thumb in the direction of the arrow. The 'channel' is the area between the arrows that is not the 'thumb'. A mouse click with the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the 'channel' will cause the scrollbar to move a 'page'. The motion of the 'thumb' will cause a numeric value to change based on the configuration of the widget, as is explained below.

##### Configuring the properties of the scrollbar

The properties of the scrollbar can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the scrollbar and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Scrollbars have five properties which can be configured: the worksheet cell whose value will be altered by movement of the scrollbar 'thumb', the minimum value when the thumb is at the top of its channel, the maximum value reached when the thumb is at the bottom of its channel, the smallest increment of change which is the change caused by clicking on the arrows, and the page increment which is the change which occurs when the channel is clicked.

The configuration dialog for scrollbar properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure scrollbar widget elements.

The "Link to:" field allows the user to select a cell that will be changed in response to changes in the state of the widget. A user can type the name of a cell in the text box or may click in the text box to activate it and then click on the worksheet to select the desired cell and Gnumeric will automatically add a reference to the cell.

The other properties can be changed either by typing a new number into the text box or by using the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the width number.

#### Spinbuttons.

Spinbuttons, like sliders, are widgets that allow a user to change the numeric value in the cell by interacting with a widget. The value of spinbuttons can be changed either by typing a new number into the text box or by clicking on the arrow buttons. If the buttons are clicked and held, the numeric value will spin, incrementing or decrementing depending on the arrow being held.

A spinbutton widget.

An image of a spinbutton widget.

##### Configuring the properties of the spinbutton

The properties of the spinbutton can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the spinbutton and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Spinbuttons have five properties which can be configured: the worksheet cell whose value will be altered by the spinbutton, the minimum value when the thumb is at the top of its channel, the maximum value reached when the thumb is at the bottom of its channel, the smallest increment of change which is the change caused by clicking on the arrows, and the page increment which is the change which occurs when the channel is clicked.

The configuration dialog for spinbutton properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure spinbutton widget elements.

The "Link to:" field allows the user to select a cell that will be changed in response to changes in the state of the widget. A user can type the name of a cell in the text box or may click in the text box to activate it and then click on the worksheet to select the desired cell and Gnumeric will automatically add a reference to the cell.

The other properties can be changed either by typing a new number into the text box or by using the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the width number.

#### Sliders.

Sliders, like scrollbars and spinbuttons, allow a cell value to be changed based on user interaction with a widget on the screen.

A slider widget.

An image of a slider widget.

The slider widget can be used in two ways: by dragging the 'thumb' or by clicking in the 'channel'. The 'thumb' is the small rectangular element between the two arrow buttons. The 'thumb' can be dragged by placing the mouse pointer over the thumb, clicking and holding with the primary mouse button and then dragging the mouse pointer up or down. The 'channel' is the area between the arrows that is not the 'thumb'. A mouse click with the primary mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the 'channel' will cause the scrollbar to move a 'page'. The motion of the 'thumb' will cause a numeric value to change based on the configuration of the widget, as is explained below.

##### Configuring the properties of the slider

The properties of the slider can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the slider and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Sliders have five properties which can be configured: the worksheet cell whose value will be altered by movement of the scrollbar 'thumb', the minimum value when the thumb is at the top of its channel, the maximum value reached when the thumb is at the bottom of its channel, the smallest increment of change, and the page increment which is the change which occurs when the channel is clicked.

The configuration dialog for slider properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure slider widget elements.

The "Link to:" field allows the user to select a cell that will be changed in response to changes in the state of the widget. A user can type the name of a cell in the text box or may click in the text box to activate it and then click on the worksheet to select the desired cell and Gnumeric will automatically add a reference to the cell.

The other properties can be changed either by typing a new number into the text box or by using the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the width number.

#### Lists.

List widget elements are currently unusable because they cannot be configured.

A list widget.

An image of a list widget.

#### Combination Boxes.

Combination box widgets are currently unusable because they cannot be configured.

A combination box widget.

An image of a combination box widget.

### Drawing Elements

A Gnumeric worksheet can contain graphical elements which are simple drawing shapes.

This implementation of the drawing objects is temporary and will eventually be replaced by a more complete implementation including more types of drawing objects and based on scalable vector graphics (SVG) format graphical elements.

Each of these elements can be added by selecting the appropriate icon on the object toolbar and using the thin cross-hair mouse pointer to place the element on the worksheet by clicking or by click-dragging with the primary mouse button. This process is explained in greater detail in .

Each of these elements can be configured using the context menu and its Properties menu item, as explained in .

Each of these elements can be moved and resized on the worksheet, as explained in .

The stacking order, from the front to the back, which determines which widgets obscure each other, can be changed using the entries in the context menu, as explained in . However, as explained in the note above, the widgets do not currently stack under the other graphical elements.

Each of these elements can be deleted using the context menu and its Delete menu item, as explained in .

#### Drawing Lines.

Lines are simple drawing elements which can be added to a worksheet. shows a wide orange line element placed above the worksheet grid.

A line drawing element.

An image of a line drawing element.

##### Configuring the properties of the line

The properties of the line can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the line and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Lines have two properties, the color used for the line and the width of the line.

The configuration dialog for line properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure line drawing elements.

The color of the line can be altered by moving the mouse pointer over the button with the icon of a small, black, downward pointing arrow and then clicking with the primary mouse button. This will open up a panel with a number of standard colors presented as small squares. Any of these colors can be selected by moving the mouse pointer over the desired color and pressing once with the primary mouse button. Alternatively, a custom color can be chosen by clicking on the button at the bottom of the panel. This will open up the color chooser dialog. In this dialog colors can be defined using the numeric boxes or can be selected using the color triangle. The color can be selected by Clicking on the outer circle while the darkness or lightness can be selected by clicking inside the triangle. Once the desired color has been configured, this color can be used for the label outline by clicking on the OK button.

The line width can be changed either by typing a new number into the text box or by using the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the width number.

#### Drawing Arrows.

Arrows are elements that can be used to point to values in a worksheet. shows a purple arrow floating over a worksheet

An arrow drawing element.

An image of an arrow drawing element.

##### Configuring the properties of the arrow

The properties of the arrow can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the arrow and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

Arrows have five properties, the arrow color, the width of the line stem of the arrow, and tree dimensions for the arrow point which will be explained below.

The configuration dialog for arrow properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure arrow drawing elements.

The dimensions of related to the arrow are presented in .

The dimensions of the arrow point.

An image describing the dimensions of the arrow head.

The 'Arrow Tip' is the distance from the point of the arrow to the base of the arrowhead where the shaft begins. The 'Arrow Length' is the distance from the arrow point to either of the outer side points of the arrow head, projected along the shaft of the arrow. The 'Arrow Width' is the distance between the two outer side points of the arrow head.

#### Drawing Rectangles.

Rectangles are areal drawing elements. shows a yellow rectangle with a blue border.

Rectangles have three properties which can be configured, the color and width of the border and the color of the interior of the rectangle.

A rectangle drawing element.

An image of a rectangle drawing element.

##### Configuring the properties of the rectangle

The properties of the rectangle can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the rectangle and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

The configuration dialog for rectangle properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure rectangle drawing elements.

The color of the outline border can be configured by selecting a new color from the color picker as was explained in for the line drawing element. The width of the border can be configured by typing a new dimension in the text box or by clicking on the increment arrows, up to increase the width and down to decrease the width. The color of the interior of the rectangle, the 'fill' color, can be configured in the same way as the color of the outline border.

#### Drawing Ovals.

Ovals are areal drawing elements. shows a red oval with a transparent background, which is a useful way to circle important ranges in a workbook.

Ovals, like rectangles, can be configured in the color and width of the outline border, and the color of the fill.

An oval drawing element.

An image of an oval drawing element.

##### Configuring the properties of the oval

The properties of the oval can be altered with the Properties menu item in the context menu which appears when the mouse cursor is placed over the oval and one of the secondary mouse buttons is pressed.

The configuration dialog for oval properties.

An image of the dialog used to configure oval drawing elements.

The configuration of these properties is the same as the configuration of the rectangle properties explained above.

## Graphs

Gnumeric includes a powerful mechanism to create graphical charts which present visually the data contained in a worksheet.

The first section of this chapter starts with an overview of graph creation, discusses terminology, and presents graph components and their organization. The next section explains the "Chart Guru" which is the tool used to configure graphs. The subsequent section presents the different types of plots which can be included in a graph and the final section explains how data can be pre-selected to speed up the process of graph creation.

Charts are exceedingly effective communication devices. Unfortunately, this means that one cannot determine, simply based on the data to be plotted, what type of plot will be the most effective. Instead users must familiarize themselves with the various types of plots which are available and decide for themselves which plot type is the most effective to communicate an idea. contains a detailed explanation of the plot types available in Gnumeric.

This chapter explains how to add graphs to plot worksheet data.

### Overview of Graphs

This overview will start with a brief summary of the process involved in creating a graph, then will discuss the terminology used in this document, will present the components of a graph, and present the hierarchy of the components used in to configure the graphs.

#### The Graph Creation Process

The process of graph creation involves several steps each of which requires the user to understand clearly what they intend to do. This outline is presented to help users understand the subsequent discussion in this document.

Outline of the procedure to create a graph.

- Data entry.

  Before a graph can be created, the data must be entered into a workbook.

- (Optional) Data pre-selection.

  As explained in , it is possible to pre-select the data and have Gnumeric correctly assign the cell contents into series names, category labels and data values. This process can only be understood once the rest of the graph creation process has been mastered so the discussion of pre-selecting data is left until the end of this section.

- Opening the graph guru

  The Graph Guru can be opened in two ways. It can be opened by clicking on the Graph Guru button,

  An image of the toolbar graph guru button.
  , which is on the standard toolbar immediately to the left of the zoom box. Alternatively the Graph Guru can be opened by using, in the Insert menu, the Chart menu item.

- Configuring the graph

  The Graph Guru provides the user with a large number of options to configure the graph, its charts and the plots. The first panel provides a way to select the plot type, sub-type and, for some types, a style. The second panel allows the user to configure each element of the graph. When the configuration is complete, the guru is dismissed by clicking the OK button. This step will be explained in detail in , below.

- Inserting the graph

  Finally, the graph is inserted into the worksheet like any other graphical element, as was explained in .

#### On Terminology

The terminology used for describing the components of data graphs is confusing because graphs use many components and the words are applied arbitrarily to each component. For example, the words "graph", "chart", and "plot" could be used interchangeably but in Gnumeric these words are used as explained below.

The term 'graph' will be used, in this documentation, to refer to the entire graphical element placed on the worksheet. A graph has an outline and a background, may have one or more titles, and will have at least one 'chart'.

The term 'chart' will be used to denote an intermediate level element which has an outline and a background, may have one or more titles, may have a legend and will have at least one 'plot'. To support the plot, the chart may have a 'grid' area behind the plotted data, and have one or more axes.

Each 'plot' will be defined to be of a particular type when it is created. Plots will have one or more 'series' of data values which will define the magnitude of the values of to be plotted and may define a number of other related values including errors in the x and y directions.

This terminology can be used to describe in detail the components of a graph in Gnumeric. presents the components of a graph.

#### The Components of Graphs

The components of Gnumeric graphs

This screenshot depicts a graph in Gnumeric and describes all of the components.

This screenshot presents several of the major components of Gnumeric graphs. These components will be presented next in their containment hierarchy. The hierarchy is used in the Graph Guru to organize the components so a user can change all the preferences.

#### The Graph Component Hierarchy

The components that make up a graph in Gnumeric are arranged in a hierarchy with all the configurable options of the graph assigned as properties to one of the components in the hierarchy.

The hierarchy of components and their properties

This figure includes an image of the graph hierarchy presented by the graph guru along with text descriptions of each component and of their properties.

The hierarchy of graph component elements and the associated properties. In this case, the element 'X-Axis2' is selected.

In Gnumeric, Graphs are the top level element containing all the other components. Graphs have two properties related to the style of the background rectangular panel, its fill and its outline. Graphs can hold one or more titles and one or more charts.

Titles have the same properties related to their background rectangular panel, the fill and outline, have properties related to the text, the font type, style, and size, and have the text data that will be the title itself.

Charts have the same properties related to the background rectangular panel and can contain a number of other components including their own titles, a legend, plot accessories and plots.

Legends have the same properties related to their background rectangular panel and also have the properties related to the font in which the name of each series will be added to the legend, the font type, style, and size.

Certain plot types require accessory components such as the elements related to the creation of a Cartesian coordinate system. Charts which include one or more plots of this kind will have a Grid and may have X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axes.

Grids are the background of Cartesian plots and have the properties determining the fill of this area and the line pattern displayed behind the plotted series.

Axes have properties related to the outer bounds of the axis, the style of the line drawn for the axis, the font style of the markers along the axis, detail properties of the tics and other markers on the axis, and the number format of the axis markers.

Axis labels share the same properties related to the style of their background rectangular panel, including the fill and outline properties, have properties related to the style of the font used for the text, including the font type, style and size, and the data contents of the text used to label the axis.

The properties of each type of plot, and of the data series they contain, vary depending on the actual type of the plot. For instance, the values of a data series which are plotted as a pie plot will not have any associated error values, whereas values plotted as columns could be associated to Y-error values and values plotted as an XY scatterplot could be associated with error values in both the X and the Y direction. Obviously, these different plot types will require different options. The options associated with each specific plot type will be discussed below, in .

### The Graph Guru

All graphs in Gnumeric are created using the Graph Guru which is a complex dialog that allows for detailed customization of each graph.

#### The components of the Graph Guru

The Graph Guru consists of two panels which appear sequentially. The first panel allows the user to select the type of the plot, and possibly a sub-type and a style. The second panel provides a way to configure the style formats of each component of the final graph. shows the different areas of the two panels of the Graph Guru.

The two panels of the Graph Guru

This screenshot depicts the two panels of the graph guru.

The different parts of each panel of the Graph Guru have been shaded with boxes of different colors and labeled with a letter in . The purpose of each of these sections will be explained below:

The components of the two panels

A - The Plot Type Selection Area

  This area lists the different types of plots which can be contained within the graph. The desired plot type can be selected simply by placing the mouse cursor over the desired type and clicking with the primary mouse button. The blue highlight indicates the currently selected type.

B - The Preview Area.

  This area shows a preview of the currently selected plot type/sub type combination using the default settings for this type of plot.

C - The Plot Subtype Area.

  This area presents a number of icons which change depending on the plot type that has been selected. Certain icons represent plot sub-types, for example, distinguishing plots with columns that are side by side from plots with stacked columns. Other icons represent different plot styles, for example distinguishing line plots in which each data point is labeled with a graphical symbol from line plots where data points do not have any symbol. The highlight box around one icon indicates which icon is currently chosen.

  Hovering the mouse pointer over one of these icons causes a description of the plot type to be shown next to the icon.

D - The First Panel Navigation Buttons

  These buttons enable the user to navigate through the Graph Guru.

  The Help Button

    The Help button should cause this section of the manual to open.

  The Cancel Button

    The Cancel button will dismiss the Graph Guru and return the user to the Gnumeric worksheet.

  The Forward Button

    The Forward button will dismiss the first panel of the Graph Guru and open up the second panel.

  The Insert Button

    The Insert button will dismiss the Graph Guru and allow users to insert the graph, as it is currently defined, into the worksheet. The resulting graph may not include any plots or data but it can be modified subsequently using the context menu's Properties menu entry.

E - The hierarchy tree of graph components

  This area allows the user to navigate the hierarchy of graph components. The components are arranged in a tree with nodes indicated by arrowheads. Components can be selected by clicking on the component name with the mouse pointer and nodes can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the arrowheads. The selection of different components in this area will cause different property options to be displayed in area J since each component in the hierarchy has its own specific properties.

  Immediately below the hierarchy are buttons that allow a user to modify the hierarchy of components by adding components with the Add button or by removing components with the Delete button. The Order allows the user to change the stacking order of charts, moving them up or down, or of data series, moving them toward the front or back.

F - The preview area

  This area shows a preview of the graph as it will look if the user clicks on the Insert or Apply at the bottom of the panel, in area H.

G - The component properties selection area.

  This area allows the user to change the graph by modifying the properties of the component that is selected (highlighted in blue) in area E. For components which have multiple properties these may be grouped into related sets and placed on different tabs. By clicking on the tabs at the upper left, a user can access the properties in each set.

H - The second panel navigation buttons

  If the guru is opened to create a new graph the buttons in this are act in the same way as the buttons in the first panel, in area D except that the Forward is now a Back and takes the user back to the first panel.

  If the guru is opened to modify an existing graph the following buttons are shown (as in the screenshot ).

  The Help Button

    The Help button should cause this section of the manual to open.

  The Cancel Button

    The Cancel button will dismiss the Graph Guru and return the user to the Gnumeric worksheet, leaving the graph unchanged.

  The Apply Button

    The Apply button will dismiss the Graph Guru and apply the changes to the current graph.

K - The panel rearrangement handles

  These triple dots in various places of the two panels of the graph guru indicate that the mouse can be used to change the size of the different areas. These handles can be used by placing the mouse pointer above a handle, clicking and holding with the primary mouse button, then dragging the handle to a new position, and then releasing the mouse button.

#### Navigating the graph guru

Graphs in Gnumeric are created using the Graph Guru. The process involved in using this 'guru' essentially follows the alphabetical labels presented in .

The Graph Creation Process

- Data Pre-selection

  Advanced users generally start by pre-selecting at least some of the data they will use in their plots. However, this step requires a complete understanding graphs and this step is not described here. will explain data preselection once the rest of the graphing process has been explained.

- Launching the Graph Guru

  The Graph guru can be started in two ways. One way to start the Graph Guru is to click, with the primary mouse button, on the toolbar graph button,

  The icon on the toolbar button which starts the graph guru.
  . Another way is to select, from the Insert menu, the Chart... menu item. Both approaches will launch the Graph Guru.

- Selecting the plot type, sub-type, and style.

  The Graph guru opens to the first of two panels. The areas of this panel are shown in the left hand side of . This panel enables the user to select the type of the first plot in the chart, and its sub-type and style. To make a graph with multiple plots, a user should start by selecting the first plot; subsequent plots can be added later.

- Picking the plot type

  The first area, area A, provides a list of the plot types. The user can pick one of the types by placing the mouse pointer on top of that appropriate entry in the list and clicking the primary mouse button. The blue highlight indicates which plot type has been chosen. The characteristics of the different plot types are explained extensively in .

- Picking the plot sub-type and style

  The second area of the first panel of the Graph Guru, labeled B in , presents one or more icons. The icons presented in this area will change depending on what plot type is highlighted in area A. The icons provide a way to select a sub-type of plot, for example, the icons for the column plot type provide the choice between plotting columns of each data series side-by-side or plotting these columns stacked upon each other. These icons may also provide a way to quickly select different styles for the plot type, for example the icons for the line type provide a choice between plotting a simple line or placing markers at the points along the line. The sub-type cannot be changed in the next panel of the Graph Guru without deleting the plot and creating a new one. However, the style choices can be altered in the next panel. The meaning of each of these icons is explained in below grouped by plot type. If data has been pre-selected, clicking on the Show Sample will present a preview of the plot type in area B.

- Moving to the next panel

  Once a plot type has been chosen in area A and an icon selected in area B, the first panel has been completed. Clicking on the Forward button will dismiss the first panel of the Graph Guru and bring up the second panel.

- Configuring the plot

  The second panel of the Graph Guru enables users to configure the plot. This includes determining the values which will actually be plotted, adding titles to various components, labels to the data series, names to data categories, and changing the appearance of the different components.

  The simplest way both to learn the hierarchy of components in Gnumeric graphs and to understand the properties which can be changed for each component is to work sequentially through all of the components while both noting the components which can be added, listed in the drop down menu when the Add button is pressed, and observing the properties of the component which can be altered, shown in the lower part of the panel, the area labeled J in . Each component in the hierarchy can be selected in turn using the complete tree of all the components presented in the top leftmost area, labeled F. Components can be selected by placing the mouse pointer over their name in this tree and then clicking with the primary mouse button. The currently selected component is indicated by the blue highlight on that line. Changing the selected component will also change the properties listed in area J. Tree nodes, indicated by arrowheads in front of the name of a component, can be expanded or collapsed with alternative mouse clicks.

  The second panel of the Graph Guru only allows two types of actions to be performed: the hierarchy of component elements can be modified or the properties of an element can be altered.

  Changing the component elements

    The component elements of the graph can be changed using the buttons in area G. Elements can be added, deleted or re-ordered.

    Adding component elements

      An element can be added by selecting the parent element in the hierarchy presented in area F and then clicking and holding the Add button. This action will reveal a drop down list including all the possible elements that can be added. By moving the mouse pointer onto the drop down list and releasing the mouse button while the pointer is over an element, that element will be added. To add a plot to a chart, it is necessary to navigate into the sub-menu to select the plot type and then into that sub-menu to select a plot sub-type or style in a process that mimics the process of selecting a plot discussed above.

    Deleting component elements

      An element can be deleted by selecting the element in the hierarchy presented in area F, and then clicking the Delete button below the hierarchy.

    Re-ordering component elements

      The order of some of the elements can be interchanged using the Order button below the element hierarchy. For example, if an element has two titles, the order of the titles could be swapped. Similarly the vertical order of charts can be interchanged. The effect on plots and series is different. For those elements, the order button changes the stacking order in the front to back dimension. For example, if a chart has a bar plot and a line plot, the order button will change which of the two plots is visible in front of the other.

  Configuring the properties of the Element

    The bottom area of the second panel, area J in , allows the user to configure the properties of each element in the hierarchy. When there are many properties, they will be grouped into similar sets and placed on different tabs. The detailed explanation of how to configure each property of each element will be explained in below.

  Once the plot is sufficiently configured, it can be placed on the worksheet to assess its appearance. The user can return to this panel of the Graph Guru using the context menu on the graph. The Graph Guru is dismissed by clicking on the OK button.

- Place the graph

  After exiting the Graph Guru, the user must place the graph on a worksheet. Immediately after exiting the Graph Guru, the mouse pointer will have changed to the thin cross-hair cursor. The user can place the graph by moving the pointer over the worksheet and clicking once with the primary mouse button. Alternatively, the user can place and size the graph by determining two of the corners of the graph. This is done by moving the pointer onto the worksheet to the first corner, clicking and holding the primary mouse button, dragging the mouse pointer to the opposite corner and releasing the mouse button.

- Modifying an existing graph

  A graph which has already been created can be modified by clicking on the graph with one of the secondary mouse buttons in order to invoke the context menu and then selecting the Properties menu entry. This will cause the second panel of the Graph Guru to appear which will enable the user to make any desired modifications. The use of the context menu was discussed in .

- Deleting a graph

  A graph which has been made can be deleted by invoking the context menu and selecting the Delete menu item.

### Plot Types

Gnumeric graphs can include any of the plot types presented below. The section for each type explains the overall concept of the plot, gives an example, explains the data required for the plot type, and explains the icons in the Graph Guru which allow setting the plot sub-type and style.

#### Area Plots

Area plots present the numeric values of categorical data with the data values of each series connected by a line and the area below the line shaded. This type is directly analogous to the line plot type. Sequential data values are considered to belong to different categories and are plotted along the horizontal axis at equally spaced intervals. The data values from different series are assigned to these categories based on the position of the value in the series, for example, the second data value taken from each series all share one category. The data values are plotted along the vertical (Y) axis according to their numeric value and the particular sub-type chosen for the area plot.

Area plot sub-types provide three options for relating the values from different data series. The first sub-type plots each series independently with the data value determining the vertical distance between each point and the horizontal axis. The second sub-type plots the series stacked on each other in a cumulative fashion with the data value of each series determining the vertical distance from the point to the sum of the values in all the previous series. For example, if the first series starts with values `{3.9, 4.2, ...}`, the second series with values `{1.2, 3.5, ...}`, and the third series with values `{3.1, 1.9, ...}`, then the point value for the second element of the third series will be plotted at 9.6 (since `9.6=4.2+3.5+1.9`) along the vertical axis. The third sub-type plots each series based on the proportional contribution of the value to the total of all values in that category. Using the example above, the three values would be plotted at 0.4375, 0.8020, and 1 because the intervals between zero and each of these numbers is `0.4375=4.2/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the first, `0.3645...=3.5/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the second, and `0.1979...=1.9/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the third, although, by default, these numbers are presented as percentages on the vertical (Y) axis.

Area plots do not have any pre-defined styles.

An example of area plots

A screenshot of a worksheet with a data table and a graph containing an area plot.

This screenshot shows a table of data and three area plots. The data consist of three series organized by row and starting with the words "Widgets", "Gadgets", and "Lumpets". Each of these series has values in five categories. The three graphs illustrate the three sub-types of area plots, with the series plotted independently in the left plot, stacked in the middle plot, and proportionately stacked in the right plot.

Each series in area plots can include three main elements and two error elements, although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The 'Label' element is shared by all of the series. The legend added to an area plot identifies the different series, by default using the entries of the 'Name' element of each series. The two error elements include a list for errors in the positive direction and one for errors in the negative direction.

The data in each area plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the area plot. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A series of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, 1100, 2487}
Label | A series of textual elements labeling each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the "Value" series. These entries are shared by all the series in the area plot. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}
Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}

Area plots provide three icons to choose one of the three area plot sub-types.

Area plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with independent, overlapping areas.

  The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with independent, overlapping areas.

The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with stacked areas.

  The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with stacked areas.

The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with stacked, proportionate areas.

  The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with stacked, proportionate areas.

#### Bar Plots

Bar plots present the numeric values of categorical data with the data values of each series represented as a horizontal bar. Sequential data values are considered to belong to different categories and are plotted along the vertical axis at equally spaced intervals. The data values from different series are assigned to these categories based on the position of the value in the series, for example, the second data value taken from each series all share one category. The data values are plotted along the horizontal (X) axis as bars of different lengths and positions depending on the numeric content of the data value and the particular sub-type chosen for the bar plot.

Bar plot sub-types provide three options for relating the values from different data series. The first sub-type plots each series independently in adjacent bars, each of which is tied to the vertical axis and has its length determined by the numeric content of the data value. The second sub-type plots each series as a horizontally stacked set of bars with the horizontal length of each element determined by the numeric content of the data value and the position of the bar determined by the position of the element in the data series. For example, if the first series starts with values `{3.9, 4.2, ...}`, the second series with values `{1.2, 3.5, ...}`, and the third series with values `{3.1, 1.9, ...}`, then the third bar will be plotted ranging from 7.7 to 9.6, since `7.7=4.2+3.5` and `9.6=4.2+3.5+1.9`. The third sub-type plots each series as a horizontally stacked set of bars scaled to the total all the numeric values in that category. Using the example above, the three bars would range from 0 to 0.4375, from 0.4375 to 0.8020, and from 0.8020 to 1 respectively because the intervals are the proportional contribution of each data value to the total, i.e. `0.4375=4.2/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the first, `0.3645...=3.5/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the second, and `0.1979...=1.9/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the third. By default, these numbers are presented as percentages on the horizontal (X) axis.

Bar plots do not have any pre-defined styles.

An example of bar plots

A screenshot of a table of data and three bar plots made using those data.

This screenshot shows a table of data and three bar plots. The data consist of three series organized by row and starting with the words "Widgets", "Gadgets", and "Lumpets". Each of these series has values in five categories. The three graphs illustrate the three sub-types of bar plots, with the series plotted independently in the left plot, stacked in the middle plot, and proportionately stacked in the right plot.

Each series in bar plots can include three main elements and two error elements, although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The 'Label' element is shared by all of the series. The legend added to a bar plot identifies the different series, by default using the entries of the 'Name' element of each series. The two error elements include a list for errors in the positive direction and one for errors in the negative direction.

The data in each bar plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the bar plot. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A series of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, 1100, 2487}
Label | A series of textual elements labeling each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the "Value" series. These entries are shared by all the series in the bar plot. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}
Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}

Bar plots provide three icons to choose one of the three bar plot sub-types.

Bar plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for a bar plot of the sub-type with independent, adjacent bars.

  The icon for a bar plot of the sub-type with independent, adjacent bars.

The icon for a bar plot of the sub-type with horizontally stacked bars.

  The icon for a bar plot of the sub-type with horizontally stacked bars.

The icon for a bar plot of the sub-type with horizontally stacked, proportionately scaled bars.

  The icon for a bar plot of the sub-type with horizontally stacked, proportionately scaled bars.

#### Bubble Plots

The data values from three series of equal length are plotted on the Cartesian (X-Y) plane, the value from the first series determining the position of the plotted symbol center along the X axis, the value from the second series determining the position of the plotted symbol center along the Y axis, and the value of the third series determining the radius of the circle plotted. Each triplet of series can be plotted with different symbols but the data values of any series can be shared.

An example of a bubble plot

A screenshot of a worksheet with two series of data, each with three lists, and of the resulting bubble plot.

This screenshot shows a worksheet with a table of data with two series, each with three lists of numeric values. The screenshot also shows a bubble plot made from these two series.

Each series in a bubble plot can include four main components and four optional error components. The series may have a name, a single text value which will identify the series in the graph guru and in any legend attached to the chart. The series must have two lists of quantitative values, a list of X values and a list of Y values, which must have an equal number of elements. The series must also have a list, with the same number of elements, whose values will determine the size of the circles drawn at each point. The series may have lists of error components for the X values or the Y values and for positive or negative errors.

The data in each bubble series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. | {"Series1"}
X | A list of numeric values, which will place the values along the horizontal axis. | {14.5, 2.8, 11.8, 5.7, 8.2}
Y | A second list of numeric values, which will place the values along the vertical axis. | {154, 29, 63, 90, 107}
Bubble | A series of numeric values, which will determine the size of each circle drawn at the points. | {45, 54, 34, 23, 37}
X Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'X' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
X Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}
Y Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Y' list, and therefore in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Y' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.09, 0.11, 0.10, 0.12, 0.09}
Y Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Y' list, and therefore in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Y' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.09, 0.08, 0.11, 0.11}

Bubble plots have a single icon for the plot style.

The icon for bubble plots

The icon for a bubble plot.

  The icon for a bubble plot.

#### Colored XY Plots

Work in Progress

#### Column Plots

Column plots present the numeric values of categorical data with the data values of each series represented as a vertical column. Sequential data values are considered to belong to different categories and are plotted along the horizontal axis at equally spaced intervals. The data values from different series are assigned to these categories based on the position of the value in the series, for example, the second data value taken from each series all share one category. The data values are plotted along the vertical (Y) axis as columns of different heights and positions depending on the numeric content of the data value and the particular sub-type chosen for the column plot.

Column plot sub-types provide three options for relating the values from different data series. The first sub-type plots each series independently in adjacent bars, each of which is tied to the horizontal axis and has its height determined by the numeric content of the data value. The second sub-type plots each series as a vertically stacked set of columns with the vertical height of each element determined by the numeric content of the data value and the position of the column determined by the position of the element in the data series. For example, if the first series starts with values `{3.9, 4.2, ...}`, the second series with values `{1.2, 3.5, ...}`, and the third series with values `{3.1, 1.9, ...}`, then the third column will be plotted ranging from 7.7 to 9.6, since `7.7=4.2+3.5` and `9.6=4.2+3.5+1.9`. The third sub-type plots each series as a vertically stacked set of columns scaled to the total all the numeric values in that category. Using the example above, the three columns would range from 0 to 0.4375, from 0.4375 to 0.8020, and from 0.8020 to 1 respectively because the intervals are the proportional contribution of each data value to the total, i.e. `0.4375=4.2/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the first, `0.3645...=3.5/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the second, and `0.1979...=1.9/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the third. By default, these numbers are presented as percentages on the vertical (Y) axis.

Column plots do not have any pre-defined styles.

An example of column plots

A screenshot of a table of data and three column plots made using those data.

This screenshot shows a table of data and three column plots. The data consist of three series organized by row and starting with the words "Widgets", "Gadgets", and "Lumpets". Each of these series has values in five categories. The three graphs illustrate the three sub-types of column plots, with the series plotted independently in the left plot, stacked in the middle plot, and proportionately stacked in the right plot.

Each series in column plots can include three main elements and two error elements, although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The 'Label' element is shared by all of the series. The legend added to a column plot identifies the different series, by default using the entries of the 'Name' element of each series. The two error elements include a list for errors in the positive direction and one for errors in the negative direction.

The data in each column plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the column plot. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A series of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, ,1100, 2487}
Label | A series of textual elements labeling each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the "Value" series. These entries are shared by all the series in the column plot. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}
Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}

Column plots provide three icons to choose between three plot sub-types.

Column plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for pie plot of style with joint slices.

  The icon for pie plot of style with joint slices.

The icon for pie plot of style with joint slices.

  The icon for pie plot of style with joint slices.

The icon for pie plot of style with joint slices.

  The icon for pie plot of style with joint slices.

#### Contour Plots

Work in Progress

#### DropBar Plots

Work in Progress

#### Line Plots

Line plots present the numeric values of categorical data with the data values of each series connected by a line. Sequential data values are considered to belong to different categories and are plotted along the horizontal (X) axis at equally spaced intervals. The data values from different series are assigned to these categories based on the position of the value in the series, for example, the second data value taken from each series all share one category. The data values are plotted along the vertical (Y) axis according to their numeric value and the particular sub-type chosen for the line plot.

Line plot sub-types provide three options for relating the values from different data series. The first sub-type plots each series independently with the data value determining the vertical distance between each point and the horizontal axis. The second sub-type plots the series stacked on each other in a cumulative fashion with the data value of each series determining the vertical distance from the point to the sum of the values in all the previous series. For example, if the first series starts with values `{3.9, 4.2, ...}`, the second series with values `{1.2, 3.5, ...}`, and the third series with values `{3.1, 1.9, ...}`, then the point value for the second element of the third series will be plotted at 9.6 (`9.6=4.2+3.5+1.9`) along the vertical axis. The third sub-type plots each series based on the proportional contribution of the value to the total of all values in that category. Using the example above, the three values would be plotted at 0.4375, 0.8020, and 1 because the intervals between zero and each of these numbers is `0.4375=4.2/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the first, `0.3645...=3.5/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the second, and `0.1979...=1.9/(4.2+3.5+1.9)` for the third, although, by default, these numbers are presented as percentages on the vertical (Y) axis.

Two styles are available by default for line plots. In the first no markers are placed on the value of the point whereas in the second a point marker is added wherever the points are plotted.

An example of line plots

A screenshot of a line plot and the data necessary to generate the plot.

This screenshot shows a table of data and three line plots. The data consist of three series organized by row and starting with the words "Widgets", "Gadgets", and "Lumpets". Each of these series has values in five categories. The three graphs illustrate the three sub-types of line plots, with the series plotted independently in the left plot, stacked in the middle plot, and proportionately stacked in the right plot.

Each series in line plots can include three main elements and two error elements, although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The 'Label' element is shared by all of the series. The legend added to a line plot identifies the different series, by default using the entries of the 'Name' element of each series. The two error elements include a list for errors in the positive direction and one for errors in the negative direction.

The data in each line plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual entry labeling the data series. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the line plot. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A list of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, 1100, 2487}
Label | A list of textual entries labeling each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the 'Value' series. These entries are shared by all the series in the line plot. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}
Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}

Line plots provide six icons to choose between three plot sub-types each with two different styles.

Line plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with independent, overlapping lines and of the style without point markers.

  The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with independent, overlapping lines and of the style without point markers.

The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked lines and of the style without point markers.

  The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked lines and of the style without point markers.

The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked proportion lines and of the style without point markers.

  The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked proportion lines and of the style without point markers.

The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with overlapping lines and of the style with point markers.

  The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with overlapping lines and of the style with point markers.

The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked lines and of the style with point markers.

  The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked lines and of the style with point markers.

The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked proportion lines and of the style without point markers.

  The icon for a line plot of the sub-type with stacked proportion lines and of the style without point markers.

#### Min-Max Plots

Work in Progress

#### Pie Plots

Pie plots present the numeric values from a single series of categorical data as slices of a circular area, the angular arc of each slice determined by the proportional magnitude of each value compared to the overall sum of all the values. For example, if the series had values { 1.12, 4.48, 3.36, 1.68, 0.56}, the contribution of each slice to the total would be {0.10, 0.40, 0.330, 0.15, 0.0 5}, since `0.10= 1.12/(1.12+4.48+3.36+1.68+0.56)`, and the angular arcs of the wedges would be {36, 144, 108, 54, 18} degrees, since `36=0.10*360`.

Pie plots do not have any sub-types.

Pie plot styles provide two choices for the rendering of the pie chart, either with all slices linked into one overall circle, or with gaps between the slices. The size of the gap is a property of the pie plot which can be changed.

An example of a pie plot

A screenshot of a worksheet area showing a data table and a pie plot made with those data.

This screenshot shows a table of data and a pie plot. The data consist of a single data series organized in a row and starting with the word "Widgets". The series has values in five categories. The legend includes the names of the different data categories.

Each pie plot contains a single series which can include three elements although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The legend added to a pie plot identifies the different categories using the entries in the 'Label' element.

The data in each pie plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual entry labeling the data series. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A list of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, 1100, 2487}
Label | A list of textual entries labeling the category of each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the 'Value' list. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the pie plot. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}

Pie plots do not have any sub-types but provide two icons to distinguish the style of the plot allowing a choice between pie plots which comprise a single circular area or plots with distinct pie slices separated by small gaps.

Line plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for a pie plot of the style with joint slices.

  The icon for a pie plot of the style with joint slices.

The icon for a pie plot of the style with separated slices.

  The icon for a pie plot of the style with separated slices.

#### Polar Plots

Work in Progress

#### Radar Plots

Radar plots present the numeric values of categorical data as a set of points plotted along a set of axes radiating from a central point, with as many axes as there are values in the series and with the points connected by a line, possibly with the interior of the shape filled in. Sequential data values are considered to belong to different categories and are plotted on separate axes which are not necessarily orthogonal and radiate from a central point. Sequential points are connected by a line with the final point connected back to the first to form a closed polygon. The data values from different series are assigned to categories based on the position of the value in the series, for example, the second data value taken from each series all share one category and will therefore all be plotted on the same axis. The data values are plotted along the axis of each class according to their numeric value.

Radar plots do not have any sub-types.

Radar plot styles provide three choices for the rendering of the chart. The first style presents the radar chart as only a polygon of lines. The second style also includes a marker where the data values are plotted on each axis. The third style plots the radar chart as a filled polygon.

An example of radar plots

A screenshot of a worksheet area showing a data table and three radar charts made using those data.

This screenshot shows a table of data and three radar plots. The data consist of three series organized by row and starting with the words "Widgets", "Gadgets", and "Lumpets". Each of these series has values in five categories. The three graphs illustrate the three sub-types of radar plots, with the top left plot including lines only, the top right plot including both lines and markers on the points, and the bottom middle plot using filled polygons.

Each series in radar plots can include three main elements and two error elements, although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The 'Label' element is shared by all of the series. The legend added to a radar plot identifies the different series, by default using the entries of the 'Name' element of each series. The two error elements include a list for errors in the positive direction and one for errors in the negative direction.

The data in each radar plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A series of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, 1100, 2487}
Label | A series of textual elements labeling each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the 'Value' series. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}
Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}

Radar plots provide three icons distinguishing the three different styles.

Radar plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for a radar plot with the style of simple lines only.

  The icon for a radar plot with the style displaying simple lines only.

The icon for a radar plot with the style displaying both lines and point markers on the data values.

  The icon for a radar plot with the style displaying both lines and point markers on the data values.

The icon for a radar plot with the style displaying a filled area.

  The icon for a radar plot with the style displaying a filled area.

#### Ring Plots

Ring plots present the numeric values of categorical data as segments of circular rings. Sequential data values are considered to belong to different categories and are plotted with distinct patterns. The data values from different series are assigned to these categories based on the position of the value in the series, for example, the second data value taken from each series all share one category. The data values are used to determine the size of the arc based on the proportionate size of the data value to the sum of all data values in the series. For example, if the series had values { 1.12, 4.48, 3.36, 1.68, 0.56}, the contribution of each ring section to the total would be {0.10, 0.40, 0.330, 0.15, 0.0 5}, since `0.10= 1.12/(1.12+4.48+3.36+1.68+0.56)`, and the angular arcs of the sections would be {36, 144, 108, 54, 18} degrees, since `36=0.10*360`.

Ring plots do not have any sub-types.

Ring plot styles provide two choices. Ring plots can be plotted with all segments linked into a single overall ring, with different series plotted immediately adjacent to one another in sequentially larger rings. Alternatively, the segments of the outermost ring can be split and float a certain distance away from the next ring.

An example of ring plots

A screenshot of a worksheet area showing a data table and two ring plots made with those data.

This screenshot shows a table of data and two ring plots. The data consist of a single data series organized in a row and starting with the word "Widgets". The data consist of three series organized by row and starting with the words "Widgets", "Gadgets", and "Lumpets". Each of these series has values in five categories. The two graphs illustrate the two sub-types of ring plots, the left most plot without any gaps and the right most plot having the outer plot with gaps.

Each series in ring plots can include three main elements and two error elements, although only the value element is necessary. The series can have a 'Name' element, which is a single text entry used to identify the series, must have a 'Values' element, which is a sequence of numeric values, and may have a 'Label' element, which is a sequence of text entries used to identify the categories. All of these elements can be defined as references to a region of the worksheet, as literally defined entries, or as formula expressions which result in the correct type. The 'Label' element is shared by all of the series. The legend added to a ring plot identifies the different series, by default using the entries of the 'Name' element of each series. The two error elements include a list for errors in the positive direction and one for errors in the negative direction.

The data in each ring plot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. | {"Widgets"}
Value | A series of numeric values. | {1293, 2502, 3297, 1100, 2487}
Label | A series of textual elements labeling each value. Generally, this series will have as many entries as there were in the "Value" series. | {"North", "South", "Central", "East", "West"}
Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Value' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}

Ring plots provide two icons distinguishing the two different styles.

Ring plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for a ring plot with the style of displaying series in contiguous rings.

  The icon for a ring plot with the style of displaying series in contiguous rings.

The icon for a ring plot with the style of displaying the outermost series separated from the rest.

  The icon for a ring plot with the style of displaying the outermost series separated from the rest.

#### Statistics Plots

Work in Progress

#### Surface Plots

Surface plots are used to plot (x,y ,z) points in three-dimensional space as a surface where z is interpreted as the height above the xy-plane. A Gnumeric chart of course shows the projection of this surface in 3-space onto a 2-dimensional sheet.

Surface plot sub-types provide for 2 distinct ways of providing the data for a surface plot.

The first subtype uses an n by 1 or 1 by n range for the x-values, a second 1 by m or m by 1 range for the y-values and an m by n range for the z values. The plotted points are constructed from these three ranges in such a way that the z value in the ith column and jth row is combined with the ith x value and the jth y value. This subtype then uses an m by n grid for the surface.

An example of a surface plot with rectangular data area

A screenshot of a worksheet with a data table and a graph containing an surface plot with rectangular data area.

The second subtype uses a direct listing of the n points. The x values are specified with an n by 1 range, so are the y and z values. The ith z value is then combined with the ith x and ith y value to obtain the points to be plotted.It is not necessary to provide the same number of y coordinates for each x coordinate or vice versa. Gnumeric will interpolate missing values. For this purpose one needs to specify the number of (equidistant) rows and columns to be used for the surface grid. This grid need not align with the provided coordinates.

An example of a surface plot with x,y, and z series

A screenshot of a worksheet with a data table and a graph containing an surface plot with xyz series.

Surface plots do not have any pre-defined styles.

The data in each surface plot series with rectangular data area

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the surface plot. | {"Widgets"}
X | An optional series of numeric values to be used for the x coordinates of the grid. This defaults to {1,2,…,n}. | {1,3,5,6,8,9}
Y | An optional series of numeric values to be used for the y coordinates of the grid. This defaults to {1,2,…,n}. | {1,1.5,2,2.5}
Z | A rectangular range of numbers where the number in jth row and ith column is the height of the (i,j) grid point. | A2:J15

The data in each surface plot series with xyz series.

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. These will be used in the legend which may be displayed with the surface plot. | {"Widgets"}
X | A series of numeric values to be used for the x coordinates of the grid. | {1,1.5,2,2.5}
Y | A series of numeric values to be used for the y coordinates of the grid. | {1,1.5,2,2.5}
Z | A series of numeric values to be used for the z coordinates of the grid. | {1,1.5,2,2.5}

Surface plots provide two icons to choose one of the two surface plot sub-types.

Surface plot sub-type and style options.

The icon for a surface plot of the sub-type with rectangular data area.

  The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with rectangular data area.

The icon for a surface plot of the sub-type with xyz series.

  The icon for an area plot of the sub-type with xyz series.

#### XY Scatterplots

The data values of two series of equal length are plotted on the Cartesian (X-Y) plane, the value from the first series determining the position of the plotted symbol along the X axis, and the value from the second series determining the position of the plotted symbol along the Y axis. Data can be plotted as points only, with each pair of data series having different symbols, or, alternatively, sequential data pairs can be connected by a line, or, finally, both symbols and a connecting line can be used.

An example of an XY scatterplot

A screenshot of an XY scatterplot and the data used to generate the plot.

This screenshot shows a data table with two different series highlighted which are usable in a scatterplot. Each series is comprised of two lists of numeric values. The screenshot also shows the scatterplot made from these two data series.

Each series in a scatterplot can include three core components and four optional error components. The series may have a name, a single text value which will identify the series in the Graph Guru and in any legend attached to the chart. The series must have two lists of quantitative values, a list of X values and a list of Y values, which must have an equal number of elements. The series may also contain lists of error values for each of the X and Y lists with a positive and a negative component for each.

The data in each XY scatterplot series

Element | Type | Example
--- | --- | ---
Namn | A single textual element labeling the data series. | {"Series1"}
X | A list of numeric values, which will place the values along the horizontal axis. | {14.5, 2.8, 11.8, 5.7, 8.2}
Y | A second list of numeric values, which will place the values along the vertical axis. | {154, 29, 63, 90, 107}
X Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'X' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.12, 0.09, 0.11, 0.09}
X Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Value' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.08, 0.11, 0.10, 0.09, 0.11}
Y Error (+) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Y' list, and therefore in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Y' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.09, 0.11, 0.10, 0.12, 0.09}
Y Error (-) | A list of numeric values with as many elements as there were in the 'Y' list, and therefore in the 'X' list. These values can be in the same units as the numeric values in the 'Y' list, can be proportions or can be proportions multiplied by one hundred. | {0.10, 0.09, 0.08, 0.11, 0.11}

XY scatterplots provide three icons to select between different style options. The plots can be rendered with markers at each point, with markers at each point and a line joining adjacent values in the data lists, or with a line but no markers.

XY scatterplot style options.

The icon for scatter plot of style with only a marker at each point.

  The icon for scatterplot of style with only a marker at each point.

The icon for scatter plot of style with a marker at each point and a line between adjacent points in the value lists.

  The icon for scatterplot of style with a marker at each point and a line between adjacent points in the value lists.

The icon for scatter plot of style with only a line between adjacent points in the value lists.

  The icon for scatterplot of style with only a line between adjacent points in the value lists.

### Configuring Graph Element Properties

Graphs in Gnumeric can be configured extensively using the Graph Guru. In this way, the user can determine the data used in the plots, the names and labels associated with the data, the numerical values of the axes and the stylistic presentation of all the graphical elements.

Graphs are configured element by element, first by selecting the element name in the top left area of the second panel of the Graph Guru, shown as area F in , and, second, by altering the properties in the bottom area of the second panel of the Graph Guru, shown as area J. These changes will be applied to the graph only when the OK button is pressed.

A number of properties of the graph are configured using the Gnumeric entry box shown in .

The data entry box widget

This screenshot depicts the widget used to enter data as defined values, references or expressions.

The data entry box widget allows users to enter data as defined values (e.g. "A name", 123, or {12,32,14}), as references (e.g. 'Sheet1!A2:B4'), or as expressions (e.g. sin({11,16}) ).

Information can be inserted to the data entry box, first, by selecting the box with a mouse click and, then, either typing data on a keyboard or using the mouse to select a region of the worksheet.

#### Background Panels: Graphs & Charts

Several elements of the graph function as background panels for the other elements. These panels can be configured to display a visible background consisting of a solid color, a pattern, a gradient, or an image. Alternatively, the panel can be made transparent to show the underlying panel, if any. Where there are only transparent panels, the worksheet itself will be visible behind the graph.

The background panel configuration.

This screenshot depicts the two elements of background panels which can be configured, the background fill and the outline.

This screenshot depicts the two elements of background panels which can be configured, the background fill and the outline.

The background panel Fill refers to the area which is behind the entire component. The Outline refers to a solid box which will be drawn around the edge of the component.

The Outline can be configured by selecting a color using the color picker widget and by choosing a size using the spin button box. A size of '-1' indicates that no line will be drawn, whereas sizes zero and above indicate the size of the line that will be drawn.

The Fill can be configured to be a pattern, which includes a solid color, a gradient or an image.

The pattern background panel fill configuration.

This screenshot depicts the configuration properties for the pattern background panel fill.

This screenshot depicts the configuration properties for the pattern background panel fill.

The fill using a pattern enables the panel background to consist either of a solid color, or of a solid color overlain by a pattern. The top drop down button, labeled Pattern, allows the user to select the pattern overlay from a number of different standard patterns. The pattern in the top left corner is an empty pattern which allows the background color indicated in the third drop down button to fill the panel. The middle drop down button, labeled Foreground, allows the user to select the color of the overlay in the pattern. The bottom drop down button, labeled Background, allows the user to select the color of the underlay. If the pattern is empty, the color of the Background will be the color of the entire panel.

If all of these buttons appear black, change the color of the Background to white to see the pattern and foreground color.

The gradient background panel fill configuration.

This screenshot depicts the configuration properties for the gradient background panel fill.

This screenshot depicts the configuration properties for the gradient background panel fill.

The background panel can be filled with a gradient transitioning either between two colors or between a color and a tone, either white or black. The top drop down button, labeled Direction, gives the user a number of choices for the direction in which the gradient will operate. The drop down button named Type allows the user to pick between gradients which transition between two colors, the 2 Colors option, and gradients that transition from a color to pure white or pure black, the Brightness option. The drop down buttons for the Start and End colors allow the user to pick the colors in the gradient. For the brightness gradients, a slider allows the user to select the transition direction. Moving the slider toward Brighter will fade the color to white whereas moving the slider toward Darker will fade the color toward black.

If all of these buttons appear black, change the color of the Start button to white to see the gradient.

The image background panel fill configuration.

This screenshot depicts the configuration properties for the image background panel fill.

This screenshot depicts the configuration properties for the image background panel fill.

The image background fill type allows the user to select an image to fill the background of the panel. The image can be in any file format supported by the `gdk-pixbuf` library as explained in . The image can be fit in one of two ways. The image fit can be stretched so the image fills the whole panel area or the image fit can be wallpapered where the image is repeated in a tile pattern to fill up the whole background. The button labeled Select allows the user to call the file selector and choose the file which contains the desired image. On the GNOME desktop, the file chooser has a preview area to see the image before adding it. The size of the image, in pixels, is displayed in the configuration dialog as '# x #' where the number symbol indicates the number of pixels, and the number of pixels in each row comes before the number in each column.

#### Titles and Axis Labels

Both Title and Axis Labels can be configured using three tabs. The first tab allows the user to configure the background panel of the title or axis label. The second tab allows the user to select the font that will be used to display the words in the title or axis label. The third tab allows the user to input the actual words which will be used in the graph.

The font selection for Titles and Axis Labels.

This screenshot depicts the font configuration panel for titles and axis labels in the Graph Guru.

This screenshot depicts the font configuration panel for titles and axis labels in the Graph Guru.

The Style tab allows the user to configure the background panel in the same way this was configured for graphs, charts and grids, as was explained above in .

The Font tab is shown in and consists of three column lists. The first column list allows the user to select the font name by scrolling the list and then clicking on the desired name. The currently selected font name is highlighted in light blue. The second column list allows the user to select the font style including italic and bold styles. The third column list allows the user to select a size for the font. The preview area contains a few characters to illustrate the appearance of the currently selected combination.

The Data tab displays a single entry box in which the user can place the words which will appear in the title or in the label. The user can simply type the text, can add a reference to a section of the worksheet or can add an expression which results in a text value.

#### Chart Legends

Chart legends provide a graphical explanation of the data plotted with the names and style of the different series, or categories, plotted in each chart. Legends are configured through two tabs, labeled Style and Font. The Style tab allows for the configuration of the background pane in a manner analogous to the graph, chart and grid background panes, explained in . The Font tab allows the configuration of the font that will appear in the legend. This configuration is identical to the configuration of the title and axis label fonts presented in .

#### Axes

Axes are used in several different kinds of plots to provide quantitative indexes for the scale of each plot direction. Gnumeric uses four different kinds of axes. Category axes do not provide a quantitative scale but merely distinguish each different category by providing space for the values of the category along the axis. Continuous axes provide a quantitative measure of each value based on the projection of that value onto the axis. Radial axes are used in radar plots and are continuous axes which radiate from a central point. Circular axes have not yet been implemented.

Line, column and area charts use a category axis to separate the categories along the horizontal direction and a continuous axis to distinguish values in the vertical direction. Bar charts reverse these two axes. XY scatter plots and bubble plots use two continuous axes, one in the horizontal direction, the X-axis, and one in the vertical direction, the Y-axis. Radar plots use three or more continuous axes radiating from a central point. Pie and Ring plots do not use any axes.

##### Category Axes

Category axes distinguish the different categories of each value in a category series such as the series in line, bar, column and area plots.

Category axis bounds configuration.

This screenshot depicts the 'bounds' tab for the configuration of a category axis.

The Bounds tab allows the user to override the automatic configuration of axis tick marks and labels. Each of the three choices can be over-ridden by deselecting the check box on the left. The check boxes can be deselected by placing the mouse pointer over the check box and clicking with the primary mouse button. When a check box is unselected, the entry box will become active allowing the user to input a different value than the default. The first check box controls the number of tick marks, allowing tick marks to appear after the integer number of categories shown. The second check box controls the number of labels displayed, allowing a regular number of category labels to be skipped. The third check box controls the placement of the orthogonal axis relative to the category axis.

Category axis line style configuration.

This screenshot depicts the 'style' tab for the configuration of a category axis.

The Style tab allows the user to configure the line style of the axis, including the color and thickness of the line. The drop down button labeled Color can be clicked to expose the color picker panel which allows the user to select a new color either simply by clicking on an icon or by using the color picker wheel. The size spin button allows a user to change the thickness of the axis by typing a new number in the text box or by clicking on the arrows. A value of '-1' in this box will cause the axis not to be drawn.

The Font tab allows the user to configure the font used to label the separate categories. The font configuration is performed in the same way as the font configuration for titles and axis labels which was explained in .

The category axis details configuration.

This screenshot depicts the 'details' tab for the configuration of a category axis.

The Details tab allows a user to configure other aspects of the axis.

The Position of the axis is placed in the Low position by default. This can be altered by pressing the radio button in front of the High label which will move the internal button and will alter the position of the axis, moving it either to the top of the graph for horizontal axes, or to the right of the graph for vertical axes.

The Mapping of the axis can be changed simply by clicking on the check box. This will cause a check mark to appear in the box and will invert the axis so that the order of the categories will become reversed.

The Major ticks displayed on the axis can be altered. The labels shown in the plot can be hidden by unchecking the check box in front of the 'Show Labels' text by placing the mouse cursor over the box and clicking with the primary mouse button. The ticks on the axis can be hidden or can be displayed on the outside of the graph, or on the inside of the graph, or on both sides depending on which of the two boxes are checked.

The Minor ticks do not currently have any effect for category axes.

##### Continuous Axes: Linear, Radial & Circular

Continuous axes are configured in much the same way as category axes except for some minor differences.

Continuous axis bounds configuration.

This screenshot depicts the 'bounds' tab for the configuration of a continuous axis.

The Bounds tab allow users to configure the limits and intervals of a continuous axis. The meaning of the values for Major Ticks and Minor Ticks depends on the type of continuous axes:

Continuous Axes with Linear Scale

  The Major Ticks value gives the distance between major ticks and the Minor Ticks value the distance between minor ticks.

Continuous Axes with Logarithmic Scale

  The Major Ticks value gives the number of decades (powers of 10) between major ticks. The Minor Ticks value gives the number of minor ticks between major ticks.

  If the Major Ticks value is N, then the Minor Ticks value can be 0, N−1, or 9N−1.

The Style tab changes the linear style of the axis in the same way as it acted on category axes. The explanation given in apply equally well to continuous axes.

The Font tab also allows users to configure the font used in the numeric markers along the axis. Selecting the font for a continuous axis works in the same way as for a category axis as was explained in .

The Details tab has two small differences compared to category axes. The mapping of the axis can be altered from a linear scale to a logarithmic scale by clicking on the drop down box and dragging to the entry labeled Log. The minor ticks, whose size was configured in the Bounds tab, are displayed for continuous axes unlike for categorical axes.

Continuous axis format configuration.

This screenshot depicts the 'format' tab for the configuration of a continuous axis.

The Format tab allow users to configure the numeric type of the elements on a continuous axis. This configuration parallels the configuration of the numeric type of a worksheet cell as explained in .

##### Grids

Users can add both major and minor grids to an axis. Grids are lines that are perpendicular to the axis at fixed intervals. An example of major (in blue) and minor (in green) grids attached to a vertical axis are shown in .

Major and Minor Grids.

This screenshot shows a plot with major (in blue) and minor (in green) grids attached to the vertical axis.

To add either a major or minor grid to an axis, the user selects the appropriate axis in the hierarchy tree of graph components, clicks the Add button below the hierarchy, and selects either MajorGrid or MinorGrid.

When a grid has been added to an axis, it can be selected in the hierarchy tree of graph components and customized in its configuration tab. One can specify the style, color, and thickness (size) of the grid lines as well as specify a fill to be applied to the space between every second pair of consecutive grid lines.

#### Plots

Certain of the properties of plots are assigned directly to the plot element and are configured when the plot element itself is selected.

Line plots, Area plots, and XY scatter plots do not have any plot level properties which can be configured.

##### Bubble plots

The bubbles in bubble plots are used to represent a third data component with the size of the bubble representing the value of the third component.

The configurable properties of a bubble plot.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a bubble plot which can be configured.

The first choice in the bubble plot properties allows the user to represent the bubble value based on the area or the diameter of the bubble. The representation of a bubble using the surface is similar to using a log scale since the area is a squared quantity.

The Show negative values property, if the check box is checked, will cause negatives values to be shown with the size of the bubble based on the absolute value of the value and the style of the bubble having a white fill.

The Vary colors by bubble, if the check box is checked, will cause each value in a series to be displayed with a different fill color instead of coloring all the values in a single series with the same color.

The bubbles in a series are scaled relative to each other with the maximum value having a default, fixed size and the other values being scaled to this maximum bubble. Using this spin button, the default size of the maximum bubble can be altered.

##### Pie plots

Pie plots represent the data values as slices of a circular area, with the central angle of each slice, or wedge, proportional to the size of the value compared to the sum of all the values in the series.

The configurable properties of a pie plot.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a pie plot which can be configured.

The slices by default are plotted clockwise starting from the vertical which is considered 0 degrees. The first option allows the user to set a different starting point for the pie series by changing the value in the spin box. The value will increase to 360 degrees and then reset to zero.

Pie plots can be displayed with the slices separated from each other which in certain situations may improve the visual clarity of a pie plot. The second spin button allows the slices to be separated.

The colors of each slice, by default, are all different to allow the easy visual distinction between each slice. Since pie plots only allow a single series to be plotted, there is no need to use color to associate the values from different series. By unchecking this box, all of the slices in a pie chart can be made to follow the color scheme defined in the plot series Style tab. However, if this box is unchecked, the outlines of the slices must be styled with a different color for the slices to be distinguishable.

##### Bar and Column plots

Bar and column plots can be displayed with different sized gaps between categories and different overlaps between the values of different series in each category.

The configurable properties of bar and column plots.

This screenshot depicts the properties of bar and column plots which can be configured.

The Gap describes the separation between the values plotted in each category. By default, the gap between categories is one and half times the width of a bar or a column. This spin button can be used to decrease the gap to zero, so there is no gap between categories, or increase the gap to 500% so the gap is five times the size of a bar or a column.

The Overlap describes the separation between values of the different series in each category. By default these values will be plotted immediately adjacent to each other. This spin button can be lowered to minus 100% which leaves a gap the size of a bar or column between the values of each series. Alternatively, the values can be made to overlap up to 100%, a complete overlap. When values completely overlap, the latter series are plotted on top of the first series and a value may be completely obscured. In this case it may be possible to use partially transparent colors for the different series to allow both values to be visible.

##### Radar plots

Radar plots have as many axes as there are categories in each series.

The configurable properties of a radar plot.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a radar plot which can be configured.

By default the axis for the first category is vertical leaving the center point in the upward direction. The first spin box in the radar plot properties allows a user to change this orientation. The spin button can increase from zero degrees to 359 degrees when it will reset to 0.

The Vary colors by slice property is probably a mistake which should not be part of radar plot properties.

##### Ring plots

Ring plots are similar to pie plots but may have an empty center and can be made with multiple series.

The configurable properties of a ring plot.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a ring plot which can be configured.

Like pie plots, ring plots assign values to the slices of a circular area by representing the magnitude of the value by the central angle of the slice, although for ring plots the center of the circular area is empty. Like pie plots, the first slice is plotted starting clockwise from the vertical and this first option can change the beginning point of the first slice's angle.

The slices of a ring plot can also be separated. The Slice Separation option allows a user to determine the proportional size of the gap between slices.

The Center size option determines the size of the hole in the middle of the rings as a fraction of the total radius. The center size can be altered in 5 percent increments.

The Vary colors by slice check box allows the user to assign colors either by slices, which is the default, or by series. To use color to distinguish series rather than categories, this button should not be checked.

#### Data Series

Each plot will have one or more 'series' which organize the data values. Each series element has a number of properties. The element will have a Style tab with which the style of the line and point markers, or the area and outline can be set. Each series element will have a Data tab in which the name of the series, the values used for the series and any labels associated with these values can be entered. The data values will generally be entered as references to cells on a worksheet which will allow the plots to be automatically altered when the values in the worksheet change. The series may also have one or more Error tabs in which error values can be associated to the data value of each element in the series.

##### Series line style

Series in line plots, in some radar plots and in scatter plots will have a style tab in which the graphical style of the lines and point markers can be established.

The configurable properties of a line style.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a line style which can be configured.

The properties of a single value data series include an optional name, a required list of values and an optional list of labels. The name, in this case, is a reference to cell D7 in the first worksheet. The values are the contents of the cells in the range E7:I7. The labels are the contents of the cells in the range E6:I6. Note that there are as many cells in the labels range as in the values range.

The Line properties include the line color and size. The color can be altered in the standard way using the drop down color chooser. The width of the line can be changed with the spin box. A line size of '-1' means that the line will not be plotted.

The Marker properties determine the style of the graphical symbol which will be plotted for each data value. The first drop down box allows the user to choose between a number of different symbols. The blank symbol indicates that no symbol will be plotted where the data value would be. Each shape will have a fill color, and an outline with both a color and a size. The colors can be changed by clicking on the drop down box and picking one of the given colors or using the color picker to select a new color. The size of the outline can be altered by clicking in the text area and editing the value or by using the spin arrows to increase or decrease the size.

##### Series filled style

Series in bubble plots, area plots, bar plots, column plots, filled radar plots, and ring plots will have a Style with fill and outline properties. These properties are the same as those presented for background panels in and are changed in the same way.

The configurable properties of a filled style.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a filled style which can be configured.

The Fill properties will determine the character of the inside of the area. The fill type can be none, pattern, gradient, or image, in the same way as the fill of background panels. If images are used for the background, the whole image will be shown and it will be scaled to the size of the area.

The Outline properties will determine the size of the linear element that surrounds the area. The color and size of this outline element can be altered.

##### Series data: single values

The Data tab allows the user to configure the data contents of the series. Some of these data contents are optional, as is indicated by the parentheses around the label. At the minimum one set of numerical quantities will be required.

The entry boxes in the Data tab can be filled in several ways. The data can be a static value or array such as a sting literal, "SeriesName", or a group of values, `{12.05, 73.02, 128.89}`. Note that the separator between elements in the array will depend on the locale since the glyph between whole numbers and decimal fractions differs around the world. Alternatively, the value of an entry box can be the reference to a cell or to a range. This reference can either be typed into the entry box or can be entered by clicking in the entry box text area and then selecting the range on the worksheet. Finally, the value in the entry box can be an expression, such as `sin({120, 982, 140})`.

Single series involve the simplest data. They may have an overall name, must have a list of values, and may have a list of names, with as many names as there are numbers in the values list, which will act as category names. For plot types with more than one single list series, the label names will be shared between all the series.

The configurable properties of single value data series.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a single value data series which can be configured.

The Name property is a single string which will give a tag to the series itself. A name is not required. This name will be used in the Graph Guru to name the series and may be used in a chart legend to describe the series.

The Values property must contain a list of numeric quantities. A list of values is required. The values can be described either directly as a static array, described through a reference to a cell range with numeric values, or described through an expression which results in the list of quantities.

The Labels property describes the names of the categories. This property is not required. must be a list of text elements, with as many elements as there are quantities in the list of values. These elements will provide the elements in the legend for pie and ring plots. For line, area, bar and column plots, the labels will provide the category names for the axis with categories.

The Show in Legend property determines if this series will be shown in the legend if a legend is added to the chart. It is sometimes useful to exclude certain series from the legend. If the box is checked, the series will be included in any legend displayed in the chart; if the box is not checked, the series will not be displayed in the legend. The box can be unchecked by placing the mouse pointer over the box and clicking with the primary mouse button.

##### Series data: X and Y values

Series with dual data values allow plots to be constructed in which one value is plotted against the other. XY scatter plots require this type of data.

The configurable properties of dual value data series.

This screenshot depicts the properties of data series with two values, an x and a y, which can be configured.

Dual data series require two sets of values, an X list and a Y list.

The Name property is a single text element that will name the series in the graph guru and in any legend in the chart.

The X property is a list of quantitative values that will provide the horizontal positioning of each element. This list is required.

The Y property is a list of quantitative values that will provide the vertical positioning of each element. This list is required and must have the same number of elements as the list of X values.

##### Series data: bubble values

Bubble series are simple extensions of the XY series to include a third data value, often called W, which will determine the size of the bubble.

The configurable properties of bubble data series.

This screenshot depicts the properties of a bubble data series with three values which can be configured.

The Name property is a single text element that will name the series in the graph guru and in any legend in the chart.

The X property is a list of quantitative values that will provide the horizontal positioning of each element. This list is required.

The Y property is a list of quantitative values that will provide the vertical positioning of each element. This list is required and must have the same number of elements as the list of X values.

The Bubble property is a list of quantitative values that will provide the size of the bubbles associated to each element. This list is required and must have the same number of elements as the lists of X and of Y values.

##### Series error values

Several plot types allow the plotting of error values using whisker plots. The series in these plot types will have extra tabs allowing the whisker positions to be listed. Line, bar, column and area plots allow an error plot to bracket the plotted quantitative value in the direction of the quantitative axis. XY scatter plots and bubble plots allow whiskers in both directions.

The configurable properties of data series error values.

This screenshot depicts the properties of the error values in a data series which can be configured.

The Error Category includes several different categories which can be selected by clicking on the drop down box and dragging the mouse pointer onto the appropriate entry. If the error category is set to "none", no error bars will be plotted. If the category is set to "absolute" the values in the error lists will be considered to be in the same units as the axis. If the category is set to "relative", the values in the error list are assumed to be a fraction of the total of each value. If the category is set to "percent", the values in the error list are assumed to be 1/100 th of the fraction of the total of each value. Note that if the cells in the worksheet are already set to the percent format, they should be incorporated as "relative" errors.

The Style properties alter the appearance of the error whiskers. The Display property can be used to prevent the display of any whiskers, to allow only upper or lower whiskers, or to display both. The Width property alters the width of the outer marker of the whisker. The Line width property alters the size of the whiskers. The color box selects the color of the line used to draw the whiskers.

The Values properties describe the lists of quantitative values which will be used for the whiskers. These lists are required if an error is to be displayed and the lists must have as many elements as were in the list of data "Values". The positive (+) list quantifies either only the upper error values if the lower values are not displayed or the negative list is defined. The positive list can also be used for both error values if the errors are symmetrical. The negative (-) list quantifies the lower whisker.

### Pre-Selecting Data

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

## Using Worksheets

This chapter explains the use and manipulation of worksheets in Gnumeric. The chapter explains how to move around a worksheet, how to alter the appearance and display organization of the worksheet contents, how to manipulate entire worksheets and how to protect worksheet contents.

### Worksheet Overview

Worksheets contain the elements, such as the cell grid area, which provide the principal work entities for Gnumeric users. The worksheet grid area allows users to enter data, develop analyses of these data, and display both data and results. Worksheets also contain graphical elements such as graphs and widgets. Worksheets are grouped into a workbook which is stored in a Gnumeric file. The manipulation of workbooks is explained in while the material below explains the manipulation of worksheets.

Worksheets contain both working elements and metadata elements. The working elements include the data contents of cells in the grid area, cell comments, cell formatting, and sheet objects, such as graphical plots. The metadata include the worksheet name and worksheet settings controlling the visual appearance of the worksheet or the display of the worksheet.

This section explains the main ways to manipulate Gnumeric worksheets. explains how to navigate the worksheet to change the area which is displayed and change the currently selected area. presents several alternative settings which alter the display of cell contents, of the grid area, of the worksheet as a whole or of Gnumeric itself. explains how to alter settings which affect all the contents of the worksheet such as the status of the content protection mechanism. gives a brief explanation of the print settings which apply specifically to each worksheet; a more complete explanation of the print settings is given in . Finally, explains how the entire collection of worksheets can be manipulated so as to add, duplicate, delete or re-order the worksheets within a workbook.

### Worksheet Navigation

Gnumeric worksheets can be conceived of as a single, continuous, two-dimensional grid of cells. However, Gnumeric cannot display the entire grid at once but only shows a portion of the worksheet. Since only a portion of the worksheet can be seen at any particular time, Gnumeric provides users with several ways to change the portion of the worksheet that is displayed. explains the various ways that the display window can be moved to a different section of the worksheet grid, while , further below, explains more powerful methods to re-organize the display of the cell grid area.

#### Moving Around a Worksheet

#### Moving the Selection

### Worksheet Display

The display of each worksheet can be controlled by several settings and configurations. The worksheet, conceptually, consists of a single continuous two dimensional grid of cells arranged in rows by columns, and Gnumeric, by default, displays a small portion of the worksheet area as a continuous region.

A worksheet is created with the number of rows and columns specified by the preference setting that can be adjusted on the Windows tab of the Preference Dialog (see ).

The maximum number of rows in a sheet is 16,777,216 and the maximum number of columns is 16384. The dimensions of a sheet can only be set to powers of 2.

The size of an existing sheet can be increased through the Resize Sheet dialog accessible through the sheet tab context menu (see ) or the Sheet submenu of the Edit menu (see ).

#### Worksheet Appearance

A number of aspects of how a worksheet is displayed in the cell grid can be modified. To adjust the display of formulas or results, A1 or R1C1 notation for cell references, how cells with a value of zero are displayed, the presence or absence of grid lines or row or column headers, or whether columns are ordered left to right or right to left, see the description of the submenu.

#### Workbook Appearance

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

##### Zoom: Changing the Scale of a Sheet

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

##### Full Screen Mode

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

##### Displaying Workbook Tabs

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

##### Displaying Grid Area Scrollbars

Detta avsnitt har ännu inte skrivits.

#### Grouping Rows and Columns

#### Display Panes

### General Settings

#### Content Protection

### Print Settings

### Managing Worksheets

This section discusses functions that manipulate worksheets as a whole, rather than their contents.

#### Worksheets and the Menubar

Gnumeric provides a number of options for manipulating worksheets as a whole, rather than the contents of the worksheets. These operations are documented in the later section . In addition to the worksheet tab context menu and the Sheet submenu of the Edit menu, some of these operations are also available from other menus:

- The Insert function is also available as Sheet on the Insert menu.

- The Rename and Manage Sheets dialogs are also available on the Format ▶ Sheet submenu.

In addition to worksheet manipulation, Gnumeric provides the ability to control various aspects of how or whether a worksheet is displayed in the cell grid. Several such controls are included in the , described in a later section. Other worksheet display controls are located in the submenu, which are described there.

#### Worksheet Tab Context Menu

Except for the addition of the two Select submenus, which appear only on the context menu, this is the same as the Edit ▶ Sheet submenu. The Manage sheets... dialog is discussed in , which follows the description of the context menu.

The Context Menu for Worksheet Tabs

An image of the context menu of the worksheet tabs.

- Insert — Select this menu item to insert a new, empty worksheet ahead of the current worksheet. The new worksheet is the same size as the current one.

- Append — Select this menu item to add a new, empty worksheet at the end of the existing worksheets. The new worksheet has the default size, which can be set in the Gnumeric Preferences dialog in the “Windows” tab.

- Duplicate — Select this menu item to add a copy of the selected worksheet immediately after the selected worksheet.

- Remove — Select this menu item to delete the selected worksheet.

- Rename — Select this menu item to access the Rename Sheet dialog, which lets you change the name of a single worksheet. To rename more than one worksheet, the Manage Sheets dialog may be more convenient.

- Resize... — Select this menu item to access the Resize Sheet dialog. Use the sliders to adjust the size of the sheet, then click OK. Worksheet dimensions are restricted to powers of two. By default the Resize Sheet dialog changes the sizes of all worksheets in the current workbook. To change the size of a single worksheet, clear the check mark next to Apply change to all sheets before clicking OK.

- Select and Select (sorted) — Select one of these menu items to access a menu of worksheet names. Click on one of the names to select that worksheet. The displayed tabs are adjusted so that the selected worksheet's tab is visible, and the selected worksheet is displayed in the cell grid.

#### Manage Sheets dialog

The Manage Sheets dialog can be accessed from the worksheet tab context menu, from the Edit ▶ Sheet submenu, or from the Format ▶ Sheet submenu.

Manage Sheets dialog

An image of the Tools menu.

The worksheets contained in the current workbook are listed in the upper left portion of the dialog. When Show advanced sheet properties is enabled, the Dir, Rows, and Cols fields are included. A worksheet can be selected by clicking anywhere in its line, although clicking one of the icons will toggle its associated property along with selecting the worksheet. Multiple selection, using the Shift and Ctrl keys, can be used to operate on more than one worksheet at a time. The current worksheet shown in the cell grid tracks the selected worksheet in this dialog. That is, selecting a single worksheet from the list also causes that worksheet to be displayed in the cell grid. When more than one worksheet is selected in the list, the first one in the list is set as the current worksheet in the cell grid. Some operations are not available when more than one worksheet is selected. The buttons for those operations are dimmed when they are unavailable.

The Lock column of the list shows an icon to indicate whether the worksheet is locked,

Locked icon

, or unlocked,

Unlocked icon

. Click on the displayed icon to toggle the sheet's lock status. Locking a worksheet prevents accidental modification of the data on that worksheet.

The Viz column of the list shows an icon,

Visible icon

, if the worksheet is currently visible. The Viz column is blank if the worksheet is not visible. Click in this column to toggle the worksheet's visibility. When the visibility attribute is turned off, the worksheet does not get a tab at the bottom of the Gnumeric window. Its data is preserved, and references to cells on the non-visible sheet continue to access the expected values. Note that a non-visible worksheet cannot be selected from the list, although the active fields in the list continue to function. To apply functions that require selecting the worksheet, such as Insert or Remove, first click in the Viz column to make it visible.

The Dir column of the list shows a right-pointing or left-pointing arrow, depending on whether the sheet is currently set to be displayed left-to-right or right-to-left. Click on the arrow to toggle a worksheet's display direction.

The Rows and Cols columns show the current size of each worksheet. Worksheet size cannot be adjusted here.

To change the name of a worksheet, click in its New Name field until the contents of the field, if any, are highlighted, then type the desired new name and press Enter. If the new name duplicates a name already in use, a warning is displayed. You can change the new name or you can assign a new name to the other worksheet with that name. Name changes are not applied immediately. Instead, Gnumeric waits until you click on the Apply Name Changes button and makes all the name changes at once. When you apply the name changes, Gnumeric automatically updates all cell references that include worksheet names to use the new names.

The worksheets can be re-ordered in the workbook by pressing the left mouse button in a worksheet's line and dragging it up or down in the list of worksheets. You can also select a single worksheet and then click on the Up or Down button to move it up or down in the list. Alternatively, you can sort the worksheets into ascending or descending order by name by clicking on the Ascending or Descending button.

You can add an empty worksheet by clicking on Insert, to add the worksheet ahead of the selected worksheet, or on Append, to add the worksheet after the last sheet in the list. Insert creates a new worksheet the same size as the currently selected worksheet, while Append creates a new worksheet of the default size.

Click on Remove to delete the currently selected worksheet or worksheets.

Click on Duplicate to add an exact copy of the selected worksheet to the list immediately following the selected sheet. The name of the new worksheet is the same as the name of the duplicated worksheet, but with “(n)” appended, where n is the smallest integer greater than 1 that produces a unique worksheet name. If the worksheet name already ends in “(n)”, nothing is appended. Instead, the value of n is increased to the smallest value that produces a unique worksheet name.

To change the background color of the tabs for the selected worksheets, click on the background color fill button,

Background color button

to set the background color to the color shown below the bucket icon, or click on the downward-pointing arrow to access the color selection dialog.

Similarly, to change the color of the text in the tabs of the selected worksheets, click on the text color button,

Text color button

to set the text color to the color shown below the character icon, or click on the downward-pointing arrow to access the color selection dialog.

#### Adding a Blank Worksheet

A new, empty worksheet can be added to a workbook by insertion ahead of the worksheet currently displayed in the cell grid or by appending one after the last worksheet.

A new worksheet can be inserted ahead of the current worksheet by selecting Sheet from the Insert menu or Insert from the worksheet tab context menu or by using the Insert function of the Manage Sheets dialog described above. The new worksheet will be the same size as the one currently displayed.

A new worksheet can be added to the end of the list by selecting Append from the worksheet tab context menu or by using the Append function of the Manage Sheets dialog described above. The new worksheet will be the default size.

#### Copying or Pasting a Worksheet

Gnumeric does not directly support copying and pasting of worksheets, however copying blocks of cells provides a very similar function. For example, to replace the contents of worksheet Sheet3 with the contents of Sheet1, begin by selecting the worksheet tab for Sheet1. Select all the cells in Sheet1 by clicking on the blank rectangle at the top of the row headers, to the left of the column headers, or by selecting Select ▶ All from the Edit menu. Next use Edit ▶ Copy or Edit ▶ Cut to copy the worksheet contents to the clipboard, depending on whether you want to copy or move the information. Select the worksheet tab for Sheet3 and select cell A1 or the entire worksheet, then use Paste or Paste Special from the Edit menu to copy the contents of Sheet1 into Sheet3.

Use of Paste Link in the Paste Special dialog should be avoided when operating on whole worksheets, as it creates links to every selected cell in the first worksheet, 16,777,216 cells in a worksheet of the default size, and has no option to skip empty cells in the first worksheet.

A similar operation can be performed using the Manage Sheets dialog. Duplicate the worksheet to be copied, then move the copy to precede or follow the worksheet it is to replace. Delete the second worksheet and rename the copy. This operation is similar to the copy and paste technique described above, but this method also copies metadata, such as the display appearance controlled by the Format ▶ Sheet submenu.

## Workbook Settings

This chapter explains the contents of a Gnumeric workbook which are not part of the worksheets. This includes several settings which apply to the workbook and are saved in the Gnumeric file. Settings which apply to the Gnumeric program itself are called `preferences' and are explained in .

### Overview

The contents of a Gnumeric file describe all of the elements which can be changed by the user. This sections examines all of the workbook contents which are not part of the worksheets.

Detta kapitel har ännu inte skrivits.

### Document Summary

A small amount of metadata is associated with each document. These metadata describe the author of the document and other related information.

### Document Settings

#### Document Printing Settings

#### Document Autosave Settings

The AutoSave tool can save your workbook automatically at specific intervals. You can specify how often you want your work to be saved by entering a number in the ``Minutes'' box. If you check the ``Prompt before saving'' button on, Gnumeric asks a confirmation before each automatic save.

The Auto Save Tool dialog

#### Document Autocorrection Settings

#### Document View Settings

#### Document Protection Settings

#### Document Validation Settings

#### Document Recalculation Lag Settings

### Document Named Elements

## Configuring Gnumeric

This chapter explains how to change the default behaviour of Gnumeric including the startup behaviour and default locale (language and number display).

### Overview

Several preferences which relate to Gnumeric as a whole can be configured and will affect the appearance and behaviour of the program every time it is run. These preferences can be set by the user.

Gnumeric provides a main preference configuration panel which allows users to configure fundamental properties of the program including the font used within the spreadsheet, the type of file generated when a workbook is saved, default settings for the tools and the 'undo' mechanism, as well as several fundamental properties of the program, such as the pixel pitch of the display, which require advanced knowledge to understand. explains how to alter these preferences.

The toolbars can also be configured by being hidden from view. This allows Gnumeric to be fit into a smaller space. explains how to hide or show each toolbar.

Much of the functionality of Gnumeric is provided through the plugin mechanism. Individual plugins can be disabled to save memory space or when the plugin computer code is being altered. explains how to disable and re-enable Gnumeric plugins.

Gnumeric is designed to be used around the globe and therefore allows the use to determine the language for the menus and to determine location specific information such as the character used to separate whole numbers from fractional units. These language and locale settings are explained in .

### General Preferences

Gnumeric provides several general preferences which can be set by the user using the Preferences Dialog.

The Preferences Dialog has several pages. Each page addresses a certain aspects of using Gnumeric. The pages are selected by clicking on one of the options in the top left column. These act like a tab interface in changing the rest of the dialog options.

Tooltips appear under the mouse pointer

When the mouse pointer is placed over an entry field or a checkbox, after a certain delay, a temporary tooltip may appear. The tooltip is a small window with information about each option. The tooltip disappears once the mouse pointer is moved to a new area of the screen.

Some preferences require advanced understanding.

Certain of the options, such as the options for changing the number of pixels per length (the 'pixel pitch') on the screen, are generally set correctly automatically. These options are fundamental and should only be changed by users who understand the option.

#### Using the Preferences Dialog

The preference dialog can be started by selecting the Edit and then the Preferences... menu item.

The dialog is used by selecting one of the categories in the top left column of options and then changing the settings for that option. The categories are presented as a list; each can be selected in turn by placing the mouse pointer over the desired element and clicking with the primary mouse button.

Certain elements, such as the Font preference, have a small triangle in front of their name. Clicking on this triangle will open a sub-element line which allows the sub-element to be selected and have its options altered.

#### Font Preferences

The font preferences allow the user to change the font which is used by default in the Gnumeric grid cells and to set the font used for headers and footers when printing.

The Font selection sets the default font name, size and style to be used in the cells on every sheet.

Display Font

The Headers/Footers selection sets the font name, size and style which will be used, by default, in the headers and footers added to each page of printed output. These selections can be over-ridden in the print preferences dialog as explained in . The content of the headers and footers is determined via the Page Setup dialog, detailed in .

Header & Footer Font

#### Copy and Paste Preferences

The Copy and Paste element allows the user to determine how copied items are integrated into the clipboard mechanism.

Copy and Paste

#### File Preferences

The Files element provides settings related to the handling of files.

Files

The number of recently used files

If you are usually using one of a small number of documents, you should set the Length of File History to be slightly larger than the number of these documents.

#### Tools Preferences

The Tools element allows to determine the settings for the recently used function list, for autocompletion of data entry in cells and for range selections.

Tools

The Sorting element allows to determine the default settings for the Sort Dialog.

Sorting

#### Undo History Preferences

The Undo element permits to customize the undo feature. You would normally like the number of undo items to be in the 10 to 25 range and the maximal undo size to be 10000 to 100000, unless you only have little memory available.

Undo

#### Windows Preferences

The windows preferences include options to set the default appearance of the whole window displaying the Gnumeric interface as well as

The Windows element includes a variety of options that did not fit within any of the other tabs.

Windows

The Screen elements allows the user to set the pixel pitch (number of pixels per length) for the screen. This is a fundamental property of the display which should be set correctly by default.

Screen

The pixel pitch is fundamental

These options affect the display of Gnumeric and should only be changed after serious consideration. By default these options should be correct and should only be altered for non-standard screens and when the appearance of Gnumeric and its contents are clearly incorrect.

### Toolbars

The three Gnumeric toolbars can either be hidden from view or shown above or below the cell grid area. The three different toolbars are explained in .

Toolbars can be hidden or shown by clicking with the primary mouse button on the View menu, the dragging the pointer down to the Toolbars to open its submenu and then moving the pointer into the sub-menu listing the three toolbars. By default each toolbar appears with a small check mark in front of its name indicating that it is visible. Clicking on any of the toolbars will alter its setting, making the toolbar visible if it is hidden or hiding the toolbar if it is visible.

### Plugins

Gnumeric allows users to configure the plugins which are currently in use. The Plugin Manager provides all the configuration options in one location.

The Plugin Manager can be started by clicking on the Tools menu and selecting the Plugins... menu item.

The Plugin Manager is a tabbed dialog with three tabs. The first tab, labeled Plugin List, provides a list of all the currently visible plugins, the second tab, labeled Plugin Details provides details on the plugin selected in the first tab. The third tab, labeled Directories lists the directories which are currently searched to discover new plugins.

The first tab provides a list of plugins, an explanation of each and a method to activate or de-activate the plugin. The list includes all of the plugins which have been found by Gnumeric in the directories listed in the third tab. An explanation can be obtained for each plugin by selecting the plugin from the list by placing the mouse pointer over the plugin name and clicking with the primary mouse button. The explanation will then appear in the bottom text area. The active column provides check boxes in front of each listed plugin. If the box contains a check mark, the plugin has been activated and its functionality should be available.

### Languages and Locales

Gnumeric can be run in many languages with settings for number formats, currencies and dates appropriate to each particular area. Unfortunately, this aspect of the program is exceedingly complex and requires the proper participation of the underlying operating system. This dependency makes it impossible for this manual to provide a complete explanation. The operating system should include a complete discussion of locales and location settings.

By default, Gnumeric finds the configuration currently used by the user and sets the language and locale settings appropriately.

It is also possible to run Gnumeric using the language and locale settings for a different place. This should be possible simply by redefining the `LC_ALL` environmental variable. For example, using the bash shell it should be possible, within a terminal, type:

    LC_ALL=fr_FR gnumeric &

to make gnumeric open with its menus displayed in French and using the french convention for numbers and currency.

## Working with Files

This chapter explains how to use files in Gnumeric. The chapter provides an extensive description of the file formats used by Gnumeric. The chapter also explains how to open files, import data from text files, save files, export data to text files, send data to others via electronic mail, and convert files from one format to another.

### Files in Gnumeric

Gnumeric stores its information by creating files and re-opening these files during a future session. Saving information to files also allows a user to send the information to others.

The default file format for Gnumeric is based on the eXtensible Markup Language (XML). By default, files are saved as text files, consisting of XML, which are then compressed using the library of the gzip program. The extension for Gnumeric files is `.gnumeric` on platforms which support file extensions of any size, `.gnum` for systems which restrict extensions to four letters, or `.gnm` for systems which restrict extensions to three letters.

Gnumeric can also open or save files in a number of other file formats. The project prides itself for the work reverse engineering and supporting the file formats used by Microsoft Excel. Gnumeric can use the Excel file format as if it were the native file format, meaning that Gnumeric can store and retrieve essentially every aspect of a worksheet using the Excel format. Similarly, Gnumeric supports the OASIS Open Document Format for Office Applications (ODF 1.2) file format (ISO/IEC 26300:2006/Amd 1:2012) as well as the ECMA 376 2nd Edition file format (ISO/IEC 29500:2008) as if they were the native format.

Gnumeric cannot delete files from the file system. Gnumeric can open existing files and create new files but cannot delete files once they are created. Files can be deleted using a file browser such as Nautilus on the GNOME desktop or using the command-line program rm.

This chapter discusses working with actual files. It is also possible to import data into Gnumeric using the clipboard by copying either text or html table information in another program and then pasting the resulting data into a worksheet. See for details.

Text files are often used to store data, using many different systems to structure the data such as using commas, tabs or spaces to separate values. Gnumeric features a flexible system that enables users to define exactly the structure of the text file to be imported or exported.

Gnumeric can be integrated with an email client to allow files to be sent directly as attachments to an electronic mail message.

Gnumeric also features a command-line tool called ssconvert to convert files between any of the file formats which it supports.

### File Formats

Gnumeric supports numerous file formats in addition to its own XML based format. The table below lists the formats currently supported. In the table below, the name of the format is a link which can be used to jump to the section which discusses the format.

The file formats supported by Gnumeric

Format | Extension | Open | Save | Import | Export | MIME-typ
--- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
Gnumeric | `.gnumeric` / `.gnm` / `.xml` | YES | YES |  |  | application/x-gnumeric
Applix | `.as` |  |  | YES |  | application/x-applix-spreadsheet
Comma/Tab/Semicolon Separated Values | `.csv`/`.tsv` |  |  | YES | YES | text/plain
Data Interchange Format | `.dif` |  |  | YES | YES |
GNU Oleo | `.oleo` |  |  | YES |  | application/x-oleo
HTML | `.html` / `.htm` |  |  | YES | YES | text/html
LaTeX | `.tex` |  |  |  | YES | text/x-tex
Linear and Integer Program | none / `.mps` |  |  | YES |  | application/x-mps
Lotus 1-2-3 | `.wk1` / `.wks` |  |  | YES |  | application/vnd.lotus-1-2-3, application/x-123
Microsoft Excel Old Binary Format (versions 2 - 5) | `.xls` / `.xlt` / `.xlw` | YES |  |  |  | application/vnd.ms-excel
Microsoft Excel Binary Format (Excel 95 - 2003) | `.xls` / `.xlt` / `.xlw` | YES | YES |  |  | application/vnd.ms-excel
Microsoft Excel 2003 SpreadsheetML | `.xlsx` | YES |  |  |  | application/vnd.ms-excel
Microsoft Office Open SpreadsheetML (MOOX/ECMA376/ISO29500) | `.xlsx` | YES | YES |  |  | application/vnd.ms-excel
OpenOffice.Org / StarOffice Old Format | `.sxc` / `.stc` |  |  | YES |  | application/vnd.sun.xml.calc
OpenDocument Format (OASIS ODF and ISO/IEC 26300:2006) | `.ods` / `.odt` / `.sxc` / `.stc` | YES | YES |  |  | application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet
Paradox Database | `.px` / `.db` |  |  | YES | YES |
Plan Perfect | `.pln` |  |  | YES |  | application/x-planperfect
Psion 5 Sheet Files | `.psisheet` |  |  | YES |  |
PostScript | `.ps` / `.eps` |  |  |  | YES | application/postscript
PDF | `.pdf` |  |  |  | YES | application/pdf
Quattro Pro | `.wb1` / `.wb2` / `.wb3` |  |  | YES |  | application/x-quattropro, application/x-quattro-pro
SC/XSpread | none / .`sc` |  |  | YES |  | application/x-sc
Multiplan (SYLK) | `.sylk` / `.slk` | YES | YES |  |  | application/x-sylk
Text Formats | `.txt` / `.text` |  |  | YES | YES | text/plain
TROFF | `.me` |  |  |  | YES | application/x-troff
Xbase | `.dbf` |  |  | YES |  | application/dbase, application/dbf, application/x-dbase, application/x-dbf, application/x-xbase, zz-application/zz-winassoc-dbf
XHTML | `.xhtml` / `.html` |  |  |  | YES | application/xhtml+xml

Files in the file formats marked as Save/Open can be opened or saved with the Open, Save, and Save As menu items in the File menu. Files in the file formats marked as Import/Export can be imported or exported with the items on the Import Data and Export Data submenus of the Data menu.

#### Gnumeric XML File Format

The Gnumeric file format is based on the eXtensible Markup Language (XML) and is used as the default file format.

Gnumeric is currently using two different systems to process XML.

The newer system is based on the SAX processing method for XML and is substantially faster than the older method. This code is based in a plugin module. The exporter is currently used by default but the importer is still incomplete.

The older system is part of the core Gnumeric program and is still used to open files in the Gnumeric format.

Name: | The Gnumeric file format
Extensions: | `.gnumeric`
Compatible Programs: | Gnumeric
Open / Save: | Both

Limitations

  This is the default file format and therefore has the best support of all the formats available. Every feature that can be created in the spreadsheet should be savable using this format.

Plugin

  The Gnumeric file format is handled using two different code bases. The older version is part of the application itself. The newer version is in a plugin called "EXPERIMENTAL SAX based XML" because the parser is based on SAX.

Format Details

  The Gnumeric file format stores the file contents in the eXtensible Markup Language (XML) and compresses the file using the GNU project's gzip compression library.

  The Gnumeric file format is designed to be flexible and powerful. The format is easily processed by computers. The format can readily be improved as gnumeric develops without breaking compatibility with older versions. The format is designed to be easily translated into text so that it can be read by humans.

  Gnumeric automatically recognizes the version of the file format of any file saved since this format is contained in the file header. The table below is for information purposes only.

  Gnumeric XML format versions

  XML File Format Version | Gnumeric Version
  --- | ---
  1 |
  2 |
  3 | Since 0.52
  4 | Since 0.57
  5 | Since 0.58
  6 | Since 0.62
  7 | Since 0.66
  8 | Since 0.71
  9 | Since 0.73
  10 | Since 1.03

  An outdated PDF document discussing the Gnumeric file format which should provide a useful starting point was developed by the JWorkbook project. The file can be downloaded from `http://www.jfree.org/jworkbook/download/gnumeric-xml.pdf`.

Further Processing

  Direct manipulation of Gnumeric files is possible by transforming the files to text files and then using standard text file tools like document editors. In order to read the contents a Gnumeric file must first be decompressed and can then be opened. In GNU systems, the Gnumeric default file "Book1.gnumeric" can be uncompressed as follows:

      zcat Book1.gnumeric > Book1.text

  alternatively, the file can be renamed and then uncompressed with the following pair of commands:

      cp Book1.gnumeric Book1.text.gz
      gunzip Book1.text.gz

  both possibilities yield the file "Book1.text" which is an ASCII text file. This file can be opened in any editor, like Vim or Emacs, or pager, like Less.

  XML manipulation tools can be used to transform Gnumeric files and access the data they contain, since the file format is XML. The file can be validated by an XML Schema Definition (XSD) . These are available via the Internet at http://git.gnome.org/cgit/gnumeric/plain/gnumeric.xsd.

  The Java Language can be used to create, access, or manipulate Gnumeric format files using the JWorkbook project library. See the project's website for details.

  The C# language, through the mono implementation can also be used to manipulate Gnumeric format files.

#### Applix File Format

The Applix file format is used by the Applixware group of applications which include a spreadsheet component. The Applixware spreadsheet is made by Vistasource and claims to be a 'real-time', event driven software system.

Gnumeric can read some files produced by the Applixware spreadsheet.

Name: | The Applix File Format
Extensions: | .as
Compatible Programs: | The Applixware Spreadsheet
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

  Saving Applixware files has recently been disabled due to lack of developer interest. Instead of directly saving a file in the Applix format, files can be exported to Applixware can be performed using the Excel file format.

Plugin

  Supported by the Applix plugin.

Format Details

#### Comma/Tab/Semicolon Separated Value (CSV/TSV) File Formats

The Comma Separated Value (CSV) and Tab Separated Value (TSV) file formats are a common structuring strategy for text format files. In these files, each line in the file represents a row of data and, within each line of the file, the different data fields are separated from one another using a separator character, often a comma, semicolon or tab. Gnumeric handles CSV and TSV files through the text importer and exporter but these formats are given their own definitions in this document because they are considered very common formats.

Gnumeric will automatically open CSV and TSV format files separating each row into columns based on the presence of appropriate separator characters in the file. If the automatic import leads to any errors, these can generally be corrected by using the "Text Import (configurable)" file format instead. Selecting that file format will launch the Text Import druid which allows the user to import CSV and TSV format files while specifying in greater detail the settings of the import configuration parameters. See the section on importing text files or the section on exporting text files for an explanation of how to open or save CSV and TSV files through the Text Import druid.

Name: | Comma/Semicolon/Tab Separated Value, CSV/TSV
Extensions: | .csv, .tsv, .txt
Compatible Programs: | Many
Import / Export: | Both

Limitations

  The CSV file format is only useful for the exchange of cell data and cannot be used for sheet objects like graphical plots. This file format cannot save the formatting of cell contents, backgrounds or borders.

Plugin

  Supported by the core Gnumeric program.

Format Details

  CSV files are simple text files where each row of the text file represents one row in the spreadsheet and where the cells within a row are separated from each other by a comma.

Further Processing

  CSV files can be processed using any tool which operates on text files. The CSV format is also common as a format which can be opened by applications.

See the section on Text Formats

#### Data Interchange Format (DIF) File Format

The Data Interchange Format (DIF) file format is a text based format encoded in ASCII with a header, for integrity checking, and a body. The format was originally developed by Software Arts in order to transfer data from VisiCalc, the first spreadsheet.

Name: | Data Interchange Format
Extensions: | .dif
Compatible Programs: | Various
Import / Export: | Both

Limitations

  Since the DIF format only supports a single worksheet, Gnumeric only exports the top worksheet in the view used to save the workbook.

Plugin

  Supported by the Data Interchange Format (DIF) module plug-in.

Format Details

  The format is a text file, encoded in ASCII, with a header and body.

Further Processing

  The file can be processed as a text file or imported to any program that recognizes the DIF format.

#### GNU Oleo File Format

The GNU Oleo file format is the format used by the GNU Oleo spreadsheet, one of the early free software spreadsheets. The GNU Oleo project has stagnated so this format is only supported to enable the import of old files.

Name: | GNU Oleo
Extensions: | Unknown
Compatible Programs: | GNU oleo
Import / Export: | Open Only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'GNU Oleo' plugin.

Format Details

#### The HTML File Format

The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file format is a text file format with markup in the Hypertext Markup Language. These files are designed to be viewed in a web browser.

Gnumeric can save the cell contents in a worksheet to a text file which consists either of entire, well formed HTML files of version 3.2 or 4.0, or of a file fragment which contains only a <table> structure and must be inserted into an HTML file. Gnumeric can also open files which consist only of simple, well formed HTML <table> structures.

Names: | Hypertext Markup Language (HTML)
Extensions: | .html, .htm
Compatible Programs: | Any Web Browser, any text editor
Import / Export: | Export only, but also can import HTML <table> structures

Limitations

  Only the cell contents of a worksheet are saved with sheet object elements, such as graphical plots, ignored.

Plugin

  Supported by the 'HTML & TeX' plugin.

Further Processing

  All these files can be opened by any text editor. The HTML 3.2 and 4.0 format files can be opened by any web browser such as Mozilla.

  Files which are generated as HTML fragments must be placed into an HTML file with a valid pre-amble and closing statements.

See Also: XHTML Format

#### LaTeX File Format

The LaTeX file format is a text file format with markup in the LaTeX 2ε derivative of the TeX family of languages.

Gnumeric generates LaTeX files to allow the export of tables of numeric values for use in the LaTeX document processing system. LaTeX is a derived format of the TeX system. The files generated by Gnumeric are designed to be used by a LaTeX processor, such as latex or pdflatex, to generate files in viewable formats such as Device Independent (DVI), PostScript (PS) or Portable Document Format (PDF).

The generated files can either be processed directly or can be included in other LaTeX files.

Name: | LaTeX
Extensions: | .tex
Compatible Programs: | latex, pdflatex
Import / Export: | Export only

Limitations

  Gnumeric generates a LaTeX `longtable` structure which contains only the contents of the cells in the worksheet displayed in the view at the time the file was created.

  Font coloring is supported. Thin cell borders are translated into single lines and thick cell borders are translated into double lines. Cell background colors are ignored.

Plugin

  Supported by the 'HTML & TeX' plugin.

Format Details

  The generated file includes extensive documentation in TeX comment fields, to explain how to use and alter the file. Lines in the file which are comments begin and end with double percent symbols (%%). Lines which are designed as user options begin with a single percent symbol (%) which can be deleted to make the LaTeX command on that line take effect.

Further Processing

  The LaTeX files generated by Gnumeric can either be processed directly by a LaTeX processor or can be included as tables in other files. The files can be included by reference as explained below or can be pasted into other files at the appropriate location. The file can also be altered to change certain parameters. These alterations are explained as comments within the file itself and are presented below.

  The file created by Gnumeric can be run directly through a LaTeX processor without any modifications. For example, if the file were saved as `Book1.tex`, the following command

      pdflatex Book1.tex

  generates a PDF file named `Book1.pdf`. The file can be generated in landscape format and the headers, footers and column widths of the file can be altered in the manner explained below.

  The file can also be included within another LaTeX file to provide a single table. This requires, first, ensuring that all the packages which will be needed are included, and second, defining a LaTeX variable which is used as a dummy tag to exclude the preamble used to process the file on its own. The LaTeX file generated by Gnumeric requires using the following lines in the preamble

      \usepackage{ucs}
      \usepackage{utf8}{inputenc}
      \usepackage{color}
      \usepackage{array}
      \usepackage{longtable}
      \usepackage{calc}
      \usepackage{multirow}
      \usepackage{hhline}
      \usepackage{ifthen}

  to include each of these packages. Optionally, to include the table in landscape mode, the preamble also needs the line

      \usepackage{lscape}

  to include the `lscape` package. Second, the following line

      \def\inputGnumericTable{}

  must be included to make the LaTeX processor ignore the preamble section of the file generated by Gnumeric. The generated file can be included either by adding, at the appropriate location in the other file, the line

      \input{mygnumericfile.tex}

  with the text `mygnumericfile` replaced with the appropriate file name or by pasting the entire file generated by Gnumeric into the other file.

  An option is provided in the file allows the table to be presented in landscape mode which allows wider tables to be included. For files which are to be processed independently, the option can be changed in the document class definition

      \documentclass[12pt%
      	           %,landscape%
                   ]{report}

  by removing the percent symbol (%) in front of `,landscape`. For files to be included as tables in other LaTeX files, the preamble must include the `lscape` package, as was explained above, and the two commands

      \def\gnumericTableEnd{\end{landscape}}
      \begin{landscape}

  must have the leading percent sign removed.

  An option is provided to change the widths of the columns of the file generated by Gnumeric. By default, the file attempts to maintain the proportions between the columns in the Gnumeric worksheet, yet scale the resulting table for the width of the paper defined in LaTeX. To change the column widths, look for the section in the LaTeX file with lines that look like

      \def\gnumericColA{107pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColB{89pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColC{98pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColD{89pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColE{89pt*\gnumericScale}

  and that may have as many entries as there were columns in the worksheet. The TeX 'lengths' defined for each column can be changed. For example, change the second column (Column B) to a width of 0.75 inches, we would simply have to modify this code to:

      \def\gnumericColA{107pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColB{0.75in}
      \def\gnumericColC{98pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColD{89pt*\gnumericScale}
      \def\gnumericColE{89pt*\gnumericScale}

  and the resulting file would have a second column 0.75 inches wide.

  An option to change the headers and footers of the table is provided as well. The file itself contains comments on how to alter these but the choices will require seeing the documentation of the `longtable` LaTeX package. See that documentation and the contents of the file generated by Gnumeric for details.

#### Linear and Integer Program Expression (MPS) File Format

The Linear and Integer Program Expression file format is a text file format, encoded as ASCII, which uses fixed columns. The format was developed by International Business Machines Corporation to express linear and integer programs.

Name: | Linear and Integer Program Expression (MPS)
Extensions: | none / .mps
Compatible Programs: | Various linear programming applications
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'Linear and integer expression (MPS) format module' plug-in.

Format Details

  The Argonne National Laboratory of the United States has a simple introduction to the MPS format on their web site.

  The MIPLIB site has more information including a file named mps_format which is a brief introduction to the format and includes the following section:

      The following template is a guide for the use of MPS format:

      ---------------------------------------------------------------------
      Field:    1           2          3         4         5         6
      Columns:  2-3        5-12      15-22     25-36     40-47     50-61

                NAME   problem name

                ROWS

                 type     name

                COLUMNS
                         column       row       value     row      value
                          name        name                name
                RHS
                          rhs         row       value     row      value
                          name        name                name
                RANGES
                          range       row       value     row      value
                          name        name                name
                BOUNDS

                 type     bound       column     value
                          name        name
                ENDATA
      ---------------------------------------------------------------------

  and provides further explanations to the components. The file also suggests as more complete references:

        "Advanced Linear Programming," by Bruce A. Murtagh
        "Computer Solutions of Linear Programs," by J.L. Nazareth

  which should provide a better explanation.

#### Lotus 1-2-3 File Format

The Lotus 1-2-3 file format is the format used by the Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet, which is now part of the office suite called SmartSuite.

Name: | Lotus 1-2-3
Extensions: | .wk1,.wks
Compatible Programs: | Lotus SmartSuite
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'Lotus 123' plugin.

Format Details

Further Processing

  Many spreadsheet programs support this format.

#### Microsoft Excel Old Binary File Format

The Microsoft Excel Old Binary file format is a binary file format used by the Excel program in the Office suite between versions 2 and 5. The format is a common format supported to various extents by most spreadsheets although it is incompletely documented. The Gnumeric project has reversed engineered all of the core features of the format.

Name: | Excel
Extensions: | .xls
Compatible Programs: | Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Office, and many other spreadsheets
Open / Save: | Both

Plugin

  Supported by the 'MS Excel (tm)' plugin.

Format Details

  These are binary file formats.

Further Processing

  A number of other programs are able to process files in the Microsoft Excel file format.

#### Microsoft Excel New Binary File Format

The Microsoft Excel New Binary file format is a binary file format used by the Excel program in the Office suite between versions 95 and 2003. The format is a common format supported to various extents by most spreadsheets although it is incompletely documented. The Gnumeric project has reversed engineered all of the core features of the format.

Name: | Excel
Extensions: | .xls
Compatible Programs: | Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Office, and many other spreadsheets
Open / Save: | Both

Plugin

  Supported by the 'MS Excel (tm)' plugin.

Format Details

  These are binary file formats.

Further Processing

  A number of other programs are able to process files in the Microsoft Excel file format.

#### Microsoft Excel 2003 XML File Format

Microsoft Excel 2003 shipped with a file format called SpreadsheetML. This file is XML. It is not very common, but its core features are supported.

Name: | Excel
Extensions: | .xlsx
Compatible Programs: | Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Office, and many other spreadsheets
Open / Save: | Both

Plugin

  Supported by the 'MS Excel (tm)' plugin.

Format Details

  These are zip files containing SpreadsheetML files and binary files.

Further Processing

  This file format is not very widespread and therefore support by 3rd-party applications is limited.

#### Microsoft Excel Office Open XML SpreadsheetML

Microsoft Office 2007 shipped with a new set of file formats, namely the Microsoft Office Open XML SpreadsheetML format. This format is a semi-open standard based around a zipped XML file. Microsoft Office Open XML SpreadsheetML is mostly standardized in ECMA 376 and ISO 29500. This implementation is covered under the Open Specification Promise and therefore does not infringe upon Microsoft patents.

Name: | Excel
Extensions: | .xls
Compatible Programs: | Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Office, and many other spreadsheets
Open / Save: | Both

Limitations

  Most core features of the format are supported.

Plugin

  Supported by the 'MS Excel (tm)' plugin.

Format Details

  These are zip files containing SpreadsheetML files and binary files.

Further Processing

  A number of other programs are able to process files in the Microsoft Excel file format.

#### Microsoft Excel XML

The Microsoft Excel file format is a binary file format used by the Excel program in the Office suite. The format is a common format supported to various extents by most spreadsheets although it is incompletely documented. The Gnumeric project has reversed engineered all of the core features of the format.

Name: | Excel
Extensions: | .xls
Compatible Programs: | Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Office, and many other spreadsheets
Open / Save: | Both

Limitations

  Most core features of the format are supported.

  Gnumeric does not support the very old file formats used by Excel versions prior to Excel 2.0.

  Gnumeric can open files from most of the Microsoft Excel file formats and all of the recent file formats. The formats supported are:

  - MS Excel 5.0/95.

  - MS Excel 97/2000/XP.

  - MS Excel 97/2000/XP & 5.0/95.

Plugin

  Supported by the 'MS Excel (tm)' plugin.

Format Details

  These are binary file formats.

Further Processing

  A number of other programs are able to process files in the Microsoft Excel file format.

#### Multiplan SYLK File Format

The Microsoft Multiplan Symbolic Link Interchange (SYLK) file format is a column based format.

Gnumeric can read files in this format.

Name: | Symbolic Link Interchange (SYLK)
Extensions: | none / .slk
Compatible Programs: | Multiplan
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'Multiplan (SYLK)' plugin.

Format Details

#### OpenDocument Format (OASIS ODF and ISO/IEC 26300:2006)

The OpenOffice.org XML file format is zip archive including several components all of which are text files, most of these with markup in the eXtensible Markup Language (XML).

Gnumeric reads version 1.0, 1.1 and 1.2 of ODF spreadsheet files and writes version 1.2 files with or without foreign elements. Foreign elements are an extension mechanism defined in ODF and allow features to be saved in ODF files that are not specifically standardized by ODF. Gnumeric plans to continue to support this format in the future.

Name: | Open Document Format, ODF
Extensions: | .ods
Compatible Programs: | OpenOffice.org Calc, LibreOffice Calc, KSpread, StarCalc
Open / Save: | Both

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'Open Document Format' plugin.

Format Details

  The file format is a zip archive containing several text and XML elements: a `mimetype` file giving the mime type, a `content.xml` file with the contents of the spreadsheet cells, and several other files with meta data, style definitions or information on the settings. The file contents can be extracted with the unzip command line program or with any of a number of graphical interface programs.

  The Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards (OASIS) has accepted this file format as the standard "OASIS Open Office XML Format". The published specification for the file format is available from the OASIS Open Office XML Format Technical Committee web page. Other information is available from the OpenOffice.org XML File Format web page, part of the OpenOffice.org project.

  Version 1.0 of ODF was adopted as an international standard by ISO/IEC as ISO/IEC 26300:2006.

Further Processing

  Files in this format can be imported and modified by many different programs including the OpenOffice.org Calc and LibreOffice Calc spreadsheets or may be modified through XML processing.

#### OpenOffice.org Old File Format

OpenOffice.org originally shipped with a file format that has served as a basis for the new OASIS-standardized file format. This file format is deprecated.

Gnumeric can both open and save files in this format and plans to continue to support this format in the future.

Name: | OpenOffice.org/StarOffice file format
Extensions: | .sxw
Compatible Programs: | OpenOffice.org Calc, StarCalc
Import / Export: | Both

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'Open Document Format' plugin.

Further Processing

  This file format is deprecated and is not widely used.

#### Plan Perfect File Format

The Plan Perfect file format is a format used by the PlanPerfect spreadsheet.

Name: | Plan Perfect
Extensions: | Unknown
Compatible Programs: | PlanPerfect.
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'Plan Perfect' plug-in.

Format Details

Further Processing

#### PostScript File Format

The PostScript file format is a text format which contains the program code for a postScript interpreter. PostScript is a page description language designed to enable the creation and transfer of printer-ready output.

Gnumeric supports the creation of PostScript files through the printing interface, not through the file save mechanism. See , for details on how to generate a PostScript file.

Name: | PostScript
Extensions: | .ps
Compatible Programs: | Many programs can interpret and display PostScript files including: GGV, ghostview (gv), and ghostscript.
Import / Export: | Export only

Limitations

Plugin

  The creation of PostScript files is supported internally by the printing sub-system.

Format Details

  The PostScript language was created by Adobe, Inc. The Adobe web site has a non-technical introduction, as well as a technical overview and the actual specifications.

Further Processing

  PostScript files can imported into other documents by several programs. For the very advanced, PostScript files can be reprogrammed using a text editor.

#### Portable Document Format (PDF) File Format

The Portable Document Format (PDF) file format is a binary format which contains page description primitives and combines a subset of the Postscript language with some more recent features. The Portable Document Format is a page description language designed to enable the creation and transfer of printer-ready output.

Gnumeric supports the creation of PDF files through the printing interface, not through the file save mechanism. See , for details on how to generate a PDF file.

Name: | Portable Document Format (PDF)
Extensions: | .pdf
Compatible Programs: | PDF is supported by a wide variety of programs including gPDF, Xpdf, GGV, ghostview (gv), and ghostscript,
Import / Export: | Export only

Limitations

Plugin

  The creation of PDF files is supported internally by the printing sub-system.

Format Details

  The Postscript language was created by Adobe, Inc. The Adobe web site has a non-technical introduction, as well as a technical overview and the actual specifications.

Further Processing

  PDF files can imported into other documents by several programs.

#### Quattro Pro File Format

The Quattro Pro file format is the format used by Corel's QuattroPro spreadsheet.

Gnumeric supports opening these files to import their data.

Name: | Quattro Pro
Extensions: | .wb1 / .wb2 / .wb3
Compatible Programs: | Quattro Pro
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the Quattro Pro plugin.

Format Details

#### SC/Xspread File Format

The SC/Xspread file format is the file format used by the old sc and Xspread spreadsheets.

Name: | SC file format
Extensions: | YES
Compatible Programs: | SC, Xspread, S spreadsheets.
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'SC/XSpread' plug-in.

Format Details

#### Text File Formats

Files in the text file format are files in which the bytes represent the text characters of a particular character set using a specific system to relate the binary numbers in the file to the text characters of the set. Such systems are called 'encodings' and become an issue when the file includes characters that are not in the standard ASCII set, such as characters in languages other than English. Character encodings are explained in greater detail in .

Choosing Import Text File... menu item in the Import Data submenu of the Data menu or the Import Other File... menu item in the Import Data submenu of the Data menu and specifying the "Text import (configurable)" or "Text export (configurable)" file formats to open or save files will cause Gnumeric to start the Text Import or Text Export druids. These allow the users to configure in detail the parameters with which existing files will be read into a workbook or existing workbooks will be output to a file.

The Text file format includes a number of different formatting strategies for text files in which data fields are structured in a regular pattern. Most of these formats represent rows of data on different lines of the file using different strategies to separated data values within each row. 'Fixed-width' formats place each data entry in a separate column and therefore limit the size of the data entries. 'Separated' formats use a special character or character sequence to separate entries. For instance, the comma separated value, the tab separated value formats and the space separated value formats use commas, tabs, and spaces respectively to separate the data fields.

Gnumeric can import and export files from and to a wide variety of text file formats when the text importer or the text exporter is configured appropriately. File can be generated with many different encodings. See the section on importing text files or the section on exporting text files for an explanation of how to import or export these formatted text files.

Name: | Text File Format
Extensions: | `.text` / `.txt` / none
Compatible Programs: | Many programs can read and create formatted text files
Import / Export: | Both

Limitations

  The exporter can only create text files using a separator character and cannot create fixed-width structured files.

Plugin

  Supported by the core Gnumeric program.

Format Details

  Text file format files are simple text files containing the data for each cell of the worksheet organized in a systematic fashion.

Further Processing

  Text format files can be processed using any tool which operates on text files, and many other applications can read or generate one or more of these formats.

#### `TROFF` File Format

The `TROFF` file format is a text file format with markup in `TROFF`.

The `TROFF` system is a documentation preparation system that can generate many different output files from an input file with standard markup. Gnumeric produces a file that can be used as input to the `TROFF` system or its GNU project replacement, `GROFF`.

The support for this format is mostly intended to produce simple tables into a file which can be used in the `TROFF` system. Since Gnumeric supports full output to Postscript and PDF file formats, those formats should be used to generate graphics for plots and drawing elements.

Name: | TROFF
Extensions: | .me
Compatible Programs: | TROFF, GROFF
Import / Export: | Export only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'HTML & TeX' plugin.

Format Details

Further Processing

  Two examples of the `TROFF` system will illustrate how to use this file format. Both examples start with a simple worksheet which consists of a simple grid of cells with cell contents, which has been used to create a file called "myfile.me" in the `TROFF` file format.

  A table in PostScript file format can be created starting from the file generated by Gnumeric. The command

      groff -me -t -Tps myfile.memyfile.ps

  will create a PostScript file of the corresponding table. Note, however, that Gnumeric itself can make a Postscript file of the table directly through the printing system.

  A table in PostScript file format can be created starting from the file generated by Gnumeric. The command

      groff -me -t -Tascii myfile.memyfile.ascii

  creates an ascii (straight text) file. This file will look like:

      Sheet 0

      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |          | Operating System |             |            |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |          |       DOS        |    Linux    |    SCO     |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |  January | $1000.00         | $900.00     | $500.00    |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      | February | $900.00          | $2500.00    | $300.00    |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |    March | $800.00          | $4100.00    | $100.00    |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |    April | $700.00          | $5700.00    | ($100.00)  |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |      May | $600.00          | $7300.00    | ($300.00)  |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |     June | $500.00          | $8900.00    | ($500.00)  |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |     July | $400.00          | $10500.00   | ($700.00)  |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |   August | $300.00          | $12100.00   | ($900.00)  |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |September | $200.00          | $13700.00   | ($1100.00) |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |  October | $100.00          | $15300.00   | ($1300.00) |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      | November | $0.00            | $16900.00   | ($1500.00) |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      | December | ($100.00)        | $18500.00   | ($1700.00) |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |          |                  |             |            |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |  Totals: | $5400.00         | $116400.00  | ($7200.00) |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+
      |          |                  |             |            |   |
      +----------+------------------+-------------+------------+---+

                                    1

#### Xbase File Format

The Xbase file format is a file format that includes a series of files of which one is a text file containing the data and the rest are index or other files. The data file consists of a header and then the records themselves.

Gnumeric only opens the data file.

Name: | XBase data file format
Extensions: | .dbf
Compatible Programs: | dBase, Clipper, FoxPro, Visual dBase, Visual FoxPro, and numerous other database applications.
Import / Export: | Import only

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'XBase' plugin.

Format Details

  The xBase file format is a generic name for database files saved in the format used by Aston-Tate's (then Borland's) dBase database system. The system became widely popular and has been used extensively by other systems.

  See the Xbase File Format Description by Erik Bachmann for more details on the xBase format.

#### XHTML File Format

The XHTML file format is a text file format with markup in the eXtensible Markup Language (XML) using a definition which mimics the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). These files are designed to be viewed in a web browser.

Gnumeric can save the cell contents from a worksheet to a text file which consists of an XHTML file fragment containing only a <table> structure, designed to be inserted into another XHTML file.

Name: | XHTML
Extensions: | `.xhtml` / `.html`
Compatible Programs: | Most modern web browsers such as Mozilla and Mozilla-Firefox
Import / Export: | Both

Limitations

Plugin

  Supported by the 'HTML & TeX' plugin.

Format Details

  The file is generated, encoded in UTF-8, in the World Wide Web consortium (W3C) XHTML 1.0 Transitional file format.

Further Processing

  These XHTML files can be opened by any text editor and can be viewed using any web browser such as Mozilla.

See Also: HTML Format

### Opening Files

Opening an existing file into a Gnumeric workbook requires working through the File Open dialog. The user must select the file that they wish Gnumeric to open, possibly specifying a file format and character encoding.

The steps required to open a file.

1. Launch the File Open dialog.

   In the File menu, select the Open menu item.

2. Open the folder containing the desired file.

   Navigate the folder hierarchy by double-clicking on the folders.

3. Select the desired file within the folder.

   Click on the file name in the folder content area.

4. (Optional) Specify a file format type.

5. (Optional) Specify the character encoding.

6. Click on the Open button.

The remainder of this section explains these steps in greater detail, first, by describing the components in the File Open dialog and, then, by explaining each of the steps above in greater detail.

#### Using the File Open dialog.

Opening a file into a workbook is a relatively simple process. The only complications come from using the File Open dialog to find the desired file, from changing the automatic file format type recognition system, or from specifying a different character encoding than that chosen by Gnumeric. The first of these steps will become intuitive once the user understands the functioning of the dialog. The latter two steps are generally unnecessary and can be ignored by most users.

The next section explains in detail the different components of the File Open dialog and the subsequent section describes each step in the process of opening a file.

##### The components of the File Open dialog

The File Open dialog allows the user to open an existing file into a Gnumeric workbook but requires that the user find the folder containing the file, select the file, and optionally define a file format type and a character encoding. The dialog also allows the user to change the list of bookmark folders to quickly access different parts of the file system.

The File Open dialog first appears as is shown in which also shows a label for each different component of the dialog.

The File Open dialog with the component areas labeled.

This screenshot depicts the 'File Open' dialog with the different areas labeled.

The different components of the File Open dialog, shaded with boxes of different colors and labeled with a letter.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the dialog

A - The starting folder selection area.

  This area allows the user to begin navigating the filesystem by choosing a starting folder. The navigation system in this dialog only allows users to select sub-folders of this starting folder so the starting folder must contain the desired file, possibly nested in one or more sub-folders.

  The folders listed in this area include the standard folders provided by the system and a number of folders added, as bookmark folders, by the user. The standard folders provided by the system will vary for different machines and system administrators may have disabled access to certain branches of the filesystem. By default, the standard folders provided include the user's 'Home' folder, the user's 'Desktop' folder, a folder pointing to the root of the filesystem tree and folders for each of the removable storage devices attached to the computer. The user's home folder, on GNU and other UNIX like systems, this folder is usually known as `~` or `~user_account_name` where the phrase `user_account_name` represents the account name used by the current user. This folder is often located at `/home/user_account_name/` in the filesystem. The 'Desktop' folder is the folder which holds the files which are displayed in the background of the user's window. The 'Filesystem' folder is the top of the filesystem tree, which on GNU systems is also known as `/`. The list also presents peripheral or external devices. Below the standard folders, area A has a separator and the bookmark folders selected by the user. In the folder `currentWork` is a folder named by the user and added to the list of bookmark folders.

  Understanding the file organization system.

  In order to understand how to change folders, it is first necessary to understand the system by which documents are stored. This system is called the 'filesystem'.

  All documents are stored in a folder. Folders can contain files but can also contain other folders. Any folder therefore can contain several sub-folders, each of which may itself contain several sub-folders; the resulting structure is called a nested 'tree' with the original folder being the 'relative root' of that tree.

  In GNU and UNIX systems, all of the files are stored in folders organized in a single, unified filesystem tree with a folder named '`/`' at the absolute root of the tree. Every file is accessible from this absolute root folder and, by default, this folder is provided as the choice named `Filesystem` with an icon of a disk drive in area A in the File Open dialog.

  Navigating the directory tree from the single root folder would quickly become burdensome and the File Open dialog provides several other starting folders in area A. Two starting folders which are commonly provided are the 'Home' and 'Desktop' folders for the current user.

  In a complex computer system, the absolute root folder may be hidden from the user and the starting folders accessible to the user may only provide limited access to the filesystem. Jointly, the starting folders provided should allow the users to access all the folders in which the user has permission to store files and to the folders which are designed to be read by the user.

  Several starting folders may be provided when files can be opened from different filesystems. This will be the case when filesystem on other machines are accessible over a network or when Gnumeric is running on operating systems whose filesystems are not unified, such as the proprietary operating systems sold by Microsoft in which each disk drive has its own root named, for example, `C:\` or `D:\`.

  Additional starting folders can be added as 'bookmark folders' by the users themselves. These bookmark folders do not provide access to a different set of folders but merely provide efficient access to a folder and its sub-folders. These bookmark folders are easy to change to allow a user to work efficiently. These bookmark folders are listed, in area A, under the thin horizontal separator line. The creation and deletion of these bookmark folders is explained below, in .

B - The folder hierarchy area.

  This area displays the folder hierarchy starting from the starting folder selected in area A and ending in the current folder, the folder whose contents are displayed in area C, while displaying all the folders between the two. This area changes dynamically as the user changes to new folders. In the case shown in , the user has selected their 'Home' folder as the starting folder in area A and has not navigated to any sub-folders.

C - The folder content area.

  This area displays the contents of the currently selected folder which is the rightmost folder shown in area B.

  This list of folders and files is filtered.

  Not all of the sub-folders and files present in the folder area are shown.

  Firstly, hidden folders and files, those that start with a leading period, are not displayed by default. These can be shown by placing the mouse pointer over area C, clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons to raise the context menu, moving the pointer onto the Show hidden files menu entry, and clicking with the primary mouse button. This step will ensure that all the folders are displayed.

  Secondly, the filtering rule defined in area F will limit the files displayed based on the characteristics of these files. By default, a filtering rule is applied which causes only those files present that have an extension commonly used for spreadsheet files. The rule can be changed to display all the files regardless of their extension, except possibly for the hidden files.

D - The panel rearrangement handles.

  These triple dots indicate that the mouse can be used to change the shape and size of the different areas in the dialog. These handles can be used by placing the mouse pointer above a handle, clicking and holding with the primary mouse button, then dragging the handle to a new position, and then releasing the mouse button.

E - The bookmark folder list modification buttons.

  These buttons will add or remove folders to or from the list of bookmark folders in area A. The Add button will add the folder currently selected in area C. The Remove button will remove any bookmark folder that is selected in area A.

F - The filter definition area.

  This area contains a drop down menu with the different filters defined by the application. Filters are rules that limit the types of files which are displayed in the folder content area, area C.

  By default, the File Open dialog starts with a filter named "Spreadsheets" which causes the folder content list to only show files which are recognized as files that Gnumeric could open.

  The filter in area F can be changed by clicking on the area to open the drop down list and then selecting the filter named "All files". This filter applies no rules, essentially disabling any filtering operation, and lists all the files in the currently selected folder. Note, however, as explained in the warning given in the section explaining area C above, that any files starting with a leading period are not shown. To display such 'hidden' files, the user must use the context menu available in area C.

G - The file format type selection area.

  This area provides a drop down list of all the file formats provided by the Gnumeric program itself and by all the currently active plugins.

  By default, Gnumeric is configured to automatically recognize the type of each file selected by the user. This recognition system is sophisticated and generally works. The best strategy is to try opening the file using this automatic recognition strategy and, only if the automatic recognition system fails, close the worksheet with the mangled file and re-try to open the file a second time but manually selecting the file type in the second attempt.

  The file formats which can be selected are those listed in below. Each of these formats are explained in detail in .

  If the file format type named "Text import (configurable)" is opened, this will start the text import procedure. explains this procedure in complete detail.

H - The character encoding selection area.

  This area provides a drop down menu which allows the user to specify the encoding which Gnumeric must use to interpret the characters in text files. This menu is only enabled for the two text file formats: "Comma or Tab Separated Values (CSV/TSV)" and "Text Import (configurable)". This menu is disabled for all other file types because Gnumeric automatically detects the encoding for those files.

  A character encoding is a system to relate the binary digits contained in a computer file to the characters of a textual script. All computer files consist only of binary digits so some system is required to determine this relationship. Where early computers used simple encoding systems which only supported the characters commonly used in English, most systems are now standardizing on the UTF-8 encoding scheme which relates the binary digits in computer files to characters defined in the Universal Character Set, a set which is still being defined but will include all the characters in every language and many other useful symbols for mathematics, science, music and literature. contains a brief explanation of character encoding, and discusses the encodings available in Gnumeric.

  The character encoding can be set using the drop down menu in area H. By default, the encoding is set for the locale of the user. The locale is set by the operating system and defines the language, time zone and other geographic related preferences of the user. The character encoding is changed by clicking on the drop down menu button in area H, that is by placing the mouse pointer over this menu and clicking on the primary mouse button, and then navigating the menu to select the new encoding, that is by moving the mouse through the menus and clicking on the name of the new encoding. Gnumeric will then use this encoding to open the text file.

I - The button area.

  The button area provides two buttons, the Cancel and the Open buttons. Clicking the Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. Clicking the Open button will cause the selected file to be opened into a worksheet, using either the automatic file format type detection or the file format type specified if one has been selected, and using the character encoding scheme if one has been selected.

The procedure required to open a file into a workbook using this dialog is presented next.

##### The procedure to open an existing file.

Opening an existing file into a workbook requires selecting the folder containing the desired file, selecting the file within this folder, and optionally selecting the file format type and character encoding.

The procedure to open a file.

- Launch the File Open dialog.

  The File Open dialog can be launched using three alternative approaches.

  Using the Menus

    Select, in the File menu, the Open menu item.

  Using the Standard Toolbar

    Click on the Open button:

    An image of the open file button.
  Using a Keyboard Shortcut

    Type the combination Ctrl o, typing both keys simultaneously.

  All three methods will result in the equivalent action, launching the File Open dialog to allow the user to find the file that they wish to open.

- Navigate the file system to open the folder with the file.

  Changing folders involves selecting a starting folder in area A which contains the folder with the desired file, and then double-clicking on the folders listed in area C until the folder containing the file has been reached. The folder hierarchy listed in area Bcan also be used to navigate up the hierarchy if a folder was opened by mistake. As explained below, a user can move around the hierarchy with as many folder selections as they need to reach the folder containing the file the user desires to open.

  To select a new folder, one of the starting folders which contains the desired folder must first be selected and then the hierarchy must be navigated to find the desired folder, and this folder must be opened to expose its contents. As explained below, a user can move around the hierarchy using as many changes as they need to choose the folder in which to save their Gnumeric file.

  1. Select a starting folder in area A.

     The first step in choosing a new folder requires selecting, in area A, a starting folder which contains the desired folder. The new starting folder is chosen by placing the mouse pointer over the folder name and double clicking (click twice rapidly without moving the mouse) with the primary mouse button. This will change the leftmost button in area B and change the folders and files listed in area C to list the contents of the starting folder which was just selected.

  2. Navigate the filesystem to reach the desired folder using area C.

     The next step involves descending the folder tree to reach the desired folder. This requires double clicking the sub-folder of the staring folder which contains the desired folder and continuing through the whole hierarchy until the desired folder is reached. After each double click, the selected folder is added as the right most button in area B and the contents of the selected folder are shown in area C. Once the desired folder is reached, it must be opened in the same way, so that its contents are listed in area C and the file can then be saved into this folder by clicking on the Save button.

  3. Navigating back up the folder tree using area B.

     If the sub-folder selected in area C does not contain the branch of the folder tree leading to the desired folder, the buttons in area B can be used to jump further up the folder tree but only as far as the starting folder selected in area A. Area B provides a list of buttons with the names of all the folders between the starting folder listed in area A and the currently selected folder. By clicking on one of these buttons, that is by placing the mouse pointer over the button and clicking with the primary mouse button, the folder listed on the button will be opened in area C so that the selection process can restart from this branch.

- Select the file.

  The file must be selected by placing the mouse pointer over the filename in area C and clicking with the primary mouse button.

  The file can be opened and the dialog dismissed by selecting the file with a double click of the primary mouse button. The last two steps are optional and, if configured appropriately, the file can be selected and opened simply by double clicking on the file name.

- Optional: Select the file format type.

  Gnumeric can automatically recognize the file format type. Alternatively, the file format can be specified explicitly by clicking on the drop down list button in area G and scrolling down the list to the desired file type.

  If the file format type named "Text import (configurable)" is opened, this will start the text import procedure. explains this procedure in complete detail.

- Optional: Determine the file character encoding.

  For text files the character encoding must be specified. By default, Gnumeric takes the character encoding appropriate to the user's locale. This encoding scheme can be changed by clicking on the drop down menu button in area H and navigating the menus to find the desired encoding.

- Click the Open button.

  Finally, the Open button must be pressed by placing the mouse pointer over the button and clicking with the primary mouse button.

The file will be opened in a new window. If the selected file format was "Text import (configurable)" the Text Import druid will be opened. This druid is explained in great detail in .

##### Changing the list of bookmark folders.

The list of starting folders shown in area A of may contain starting folders selected by the user. These folders are called 'bookmark folders' and are listed in area A below a thin horizontal separator line. For example, contains a folder named `currentWork` which is a bookmark folder selected by the user.

These bookmark folders can be added in two ways. A folder which is selected in area C can be added as a bookmark by clicking on the Add button in area E.

Alternatively, the folder can be dragged from area C into area A. The folder can be dragged by placing the mouse pointer over the folder name in area C, clicking and holding the primary mouse button, moving the mouse pointer to area A and releasing the mouse button. As the mouse pointer is moved from area C to area A, a small icon of the folder will move with the mouse pointer.

Any bookmark folder can also be removed from the list of starting folders presented in area A. A bookmark folder can be removed by clicking on the folder name in area A and then clicking on the Remove in area E.

#### The file formats which Gnumeric can read.

Gnumeric can open files which have been created in several formats by other spreadsheet programs or databases. The details of these formats are provided in and the name of each file type in the table below skips to the appropriate section of . The opening of text formatted files is described in . Gnumeric can also import text data or HTML and XHTML tables through the clipboard mechanism, as is explained in .

Most of these formats are provided by plugins, which are independent, configurable modules. If a format described below does not appear in the File Open dialog, this may be because the appropriate plugin has not been configured or started. This can be verified by examining the list of plugins which are currently running in the Plugin Manager dialog.

The Plugin Manager dialog lists the plugins which are currently in use and provides a way to start plugins which are currently disabled. The Plugin Manager can be started by selecting, in the Tools menu, the Plug-ins... menu item; see for more information.

The file formats which Gnumeric can open.

Format | Extension
--- | ---
Gnumeric | `.gnumeric` / `.gnm`
Applix | `.as`
Comma Separated Values | `.csv`
Data Interchange Format | `.dif`
GNU Oleo | `.oleo`
HTML | `.html` / `.htm`
Linear and Integer Program | none / `.mps`
Lotus 1-2-3 | `.wk1` / `.wks`
Microsoft Excel Old Binary | `.xls`
Microsoft Excel New Binary | `.xls`
Microsoft Excel 2003 XML | `.xls`
Microsoft Excel Office Open XML | `.xlsx`
OpenOffice.Org / StarOffice (OASIS ODF/IS26300) | `.ods` / `.odt`
OpenOffice.Org / StarOffice Old Format | `.sxc` / `.stc`
Plan Perfect | `.pln`
Quattro Pro | `.wb1` / `.wb2` / `.wb3`
SC/XSpread | none / .`sc`
Multiplan (SYLK) | `.sylk` / `.slk`
Tab Separated Values | `.tsv` / `.tab`
Text Formats | `.txt` / `.text`
Xbase | `.dbf`

### Importing Text Files

Gnumeric can import data which is organized as text fields structured in some systematic fashion either from a file or from the clipboard. Importing structured text may require extensive intervention on the part of the user so Gnumeric provides a Text Import druid, which is a three paneled dialog with configuration options. For text imported from files, this druid appears after the file has been imported, using the Import Text File... menu item in the Import Data submenu of the Data menu as described in . For text imported from the clipboard, the druid appears when a user attempts to paste the text into a worksheet, as is explained in .

The text import druid contains three panels but the middle panel differs depending on the structuring system used, either with data fields separated by a special character or with data fields occurring at equally spaced intervals in each line. The first panel allows the user to configure the character encoding, line break characters, structuring system, and line range. The second panel allows the user to define the columns by either, for separated data, setting the separating character and text delimiting character, or, for fixed space data, by setting the column spacing. The third panel allows the user to select which columns to import and define their data types.

The steps involved in the text import druid.

1. Launch the Text Import druid using, in the File, the Open and selecting the "Text import (configurable)" file format type.

2. Define the character encoding of the text block.

3. Define the characters indicating the breaks between the lines.

4. Select the line range from the text block to be imported.

5. Go to the second panel, which will be different for data structured by separating characters and data structured by fixed spacing.

6. (For separated data) Define the separating character.

7. (For separated data) Define the character grouping a text field.

8. (For fixed width data) Define the field widths.

9. Go to the third panel.

10. Configure the inclusion of empty outside columns.

11. Select the locale that will influence the formatting of the numerical elements in each column.

12. Select the numerical formats for the data in each columns.

13. Select the columns to be included in the imported block.

14. Click on the Finish button.

This explanation of the Text Import druid will first start with a discussion of text files including character encodings and line break delimiters. The explanation will then cover the various strategies used to structure numeric data in text files. Following these discussions, the components of the druid will be presented and, finally, a detailed explanation of each step in the use of the druid will be presented.

#### The complexities of text format files

The use of text format files to store and transmit data for use in a spreadsheet involves three somewhat complex decisions which determine how the file expresses and separates each data value. These complexities must be understood for a user to be able to use the Text Import druid effectively. These complexities exist because of the limitations of early computers and because or the historical development of computer systems by different manufacturers and programmers, in different countries, targeting different types of users, speaking different languages.

The first complexity involves the different systems which relate the contents of a computer file to the characters in a written language. All text files on a computer consist of a long sequence of binary digits. Text files are files in which these digits are used to indicate different textual characters. Character 'encodings' are standardized systems which relate the binary digits in a computer file to a formal system of characters which includes both text glyphs (shapes) and formatting indicators. Each encoding defines a way to interpret the binary digits and uses the characters from a particular character set. The alternative character encoding strategies are explained in greater detail in , below.

The second complexity involves the decision of how to separate the characters in a file into different lines. Text files explicitly determine the end of each line of a file with a specific character or sequence of characters. The complexity involves the particular character sequence used to determine the end of each line. Different conventions have been used in different computer systems. The alternative line breaking strategies are explained in greater detail in , below.

The third complexity involves the decision of how to separate the characters in each line into separate value fields. Again, different strategies exist. These can be separated into two broad categories: strategies which use a character or sequence of characters to separate the values, so called 'delimited' or 'separated' strategies, and strategies which use the position of the character in the line to separate the values, so called 'fixed-width' strategies. The alternative data structuring strategies are explained in greater detail in , below.

Fortunately, the Gnumeric Text Import druid provides users with a way to preview the information in a text file. This enables users to change the settings which determine each of these three conventions until the text in the preview correctly shows the contents of the data file. Therefore, while the details of these three steps are complex, the practical impact on users is minimal. Users can simply experiment until the file appears correct without having to understand each of these complexities in detail.

##### Character Encodings

The use of text files to store data in a structured fashion for use by spreadsheet programs, and more generally all text files, require some scheme to relate the binary number in the computer file itself to the characters of a written language. Such schemes are called 'encodings'.

The origin of computers led to the invention of a number of different encoding schemes. Due to the limitation of early computer hardware, these encoding schemes all restricted themselves to character sets which contained only the most essential characters of the English language. The desire to support characters which were not in this basic set of characters led to the creation of new encoding schemes, many of which restricted themselves to the characters in specific languages. One encoding scheme, called UTF-8, has now emerged as the best encoding scheme for the future for a multitude of reasons including its ability to co-exist with current operating systems and its ability to encode all of the characters in the largest set of characters which has been consistently defined, the Universal Character Set. However, the existence of the diversity of encoding schemes means that for the foreseeable future, files will be created and distributed using several different schemes. This is especially true for files containing text in languages other than English.

This complex situation generally does not impact users. Gnumeric has been designed to deal with most of the complexity. Many kinds of files, such as the Gnumeric file format itself, describe their encoding scheme internally in such a way that it can be easily recognized. Gnumeric also provides an easy approach to changing the encoding scheme in case this proves necessary.

Encoding schemes merely prove a hindrance to users when opening files. There is no danger that data be lost or that any other serious problem arise by selecting the wrong scheme. If the wrong scheme is selected, either the file will contain characters which are nonsensical and Gnumeric will open an error dialog asking the user to select a different encoding scheme, or the preview area will display nonsensical characters. These nonsensical characters may simply be characters grouped together which do not occur in any language, such as "åÕÛÛÞ", or may be characters for which a graphical representation (a glyph) does not exist in the font being used and is therefore displayed using a small box with four numbers inside. Each of these errors indicates that the encoding scheme used to read the file was not the same encoding scheme as was used to create the file. The difficulty is then to determine what encoding scheme to use. A simple process of trial and error should lead to picking the right scheme.

A basic strategy to find the right encoding for a file being imported into Gnumeric is, first, to use the scheme proposed by Gnumeric and, then, to hunt for the correct encoding. The default encoding scheme is the one defined by the locale setting of the user and this is also the default scheme Gnumeric uses to create text files. If the default encoding is incorrect, the correct encoding must be found by trial and error. One strategy to use is to examine the major western encodings and then the major regional encodings. The major western encoding schemes are ASCII, ISO-8859-1, and UTF-8, but ASCII is a subset of the other two so it does not need to be tried on its own. The major regional encodings are the IS0-8859-x schemes since these have become quite popular in GNU operating systems. Alternatively, the various character sets used by the Microsoft operating systems can be attempted. The encoding schemes are listed under "Western", "Unicode", and the alphabet names.

The World Wide Web has many resources dedicated to explaining encoding systems and other related information. One of the best sites discussing UTF-8 and Unicode is the UTF-8 and Unicode FAQ for UNIX/Linux page maintained by Markus Kuhn. The Unicode project has a web site which includes an online copy of their standard character set. A discussion of the ISO-8859 family of encodings can be found at a page titled: "The ISO-8859 Alphabet Soup", which may alternatively be found here. A similar discussion on Wikipedia, focusing on the western alphabets, can be found here.

##### Line break delimiters

The use of text files to store data in a structured fashion for use by spreadsheet programs requires a scheme to separate each line of the file. Structured text files rely on the files having explicitly defined rows within the file as one component in the structuring system. Each of these rows is defined by a character sequence indicating the end of a row.

Two characters that are part of the ASCII code, an early encoding that became a widely followed standard, were included to help define the end of the line. These are the 'linefeed' character and the 'carriage return' character, named after the two processes which occur when a typewriter starts a new line: first the typewriter barrel rolls - the linefeed - then the whole carriage with the sheet of paper moves back to the starting point -the carriage return. In the same way that different computing systems have used different encoding schemes, three different approaches became common for defining the end of the line.

In GNU operating systems and other systems that inherit from the UNIX legacy, the end of a line was defined simply using the 'linefeed' character. The pre-OSX Macintosh operating system chose instead to use only the 'carriage return' character. The Windows operating system uses both characters in the sequence 'carriage return' then 'linefeed'.

A user opening a file into Gnumeric will see, in the preview area of the Text Import druid, whether or not the line breaks have been recognized correctly and will be able to alter the recognition settings. An incompatible setup will either yield a single unbroken line of text, lines of text with extra, empty rows between them, or lines of text with extra symbols at the start or end of each line.

The correct line break delimiters can be established by checking or unchecking the alternatives. The preview area will then show the result of the file interpreted with these settings.

##### Data Structuring Strategies

The use of text files to store data in a structured fashion for use by spreadsheet programs also requires some scheme to separate each value within every line. Two different approaches are used to separate these values. The first strategy, uses a particular character or character sequence to denote the start and end of each value. Such strategies are called 'Separated Value' or 'Delimited Value' systems. The second strategy places each value stating at a specified position in the line. Such strategies are called 'Fixed Width' strategies because they inherently require that each value have a pre-determined size.

Separated Value structuring systems distinguish the contents of each value using pre-determined characters to separate the values. Certain characters have become common in such schemes, for-example 'Comma Separated Value' files use a comma character to separate values while 'Tab Separated Value' files use a tab character. Gnumeric allows the user to define the value separator to be any one of several common characters or a specific sequence of characters, either on their own or in combination. For example, a file could use both space characters and tab characters to separate values. Similarly, a file could be read which used the entire word 'STOP' to separate values like the common scheme to separate sentences in a telegram.

Separate Value structuring systems often also include a method to surround a single text value which may itself contain the character used to separate values. The quote character is often used in this role but Gnumeric allows users to configure any character in this role. For example, a file which used the comma to separate values could nonetheless contain a value like "Zoe, Sally, Dodji" if this value had appropriate text indicating characters at either end.

Fixed Width structuring systems are common formats for the output of database tables since the contents of these tables have often been defined as variables of a particular size. To import these files, users must specify exactly the start of each column so that the importer can separate the values on each row.

#### The Components of the Text Import Druid

The Text Import druid consists of three panels with the middle panel differing according to the type of data structuring used.

The first panel allows users to configure the character encoding used by the file, to determine the character sequences used to separate lines, configure the type of structuring being used and select the lines of the file to import. The second column allows the user to define the separation strategy used for each value. For separated value files this involves defining the separating character sequences and the text indicating character. For fixed width files, this involves defining the width of each column. The third panel allows the user to select the columns to be included during the import and to select the format of the values in each column.

Users navigate the Text Import druid by clicking on the Forward button on each panel after they have configured the settings properly. The third panel contains a Finish which causes the file to be imported to a workbook using all the settings as they are configured.

##### The first panel of the Text Import Druid.

The first panel of the Text Import Druid allows users to set the file encoding, to determine the character sequences used to separate lines, configure the type of structuring being used and select the lines of the file to import.

The first panel of the Text Import druid with the component areas labeled with callouts.

This screenshot depicts the first panel 'Text Import' druid with callouts labeling the different areas.

The different components of the first panel of the Text Import druid with each component labeled with a callout.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the first panel

1 - The file encoding selection menu.

  This drop down menu provides a list of encoding schemes for the characters in the text file. By default, Gnumeric selects the encoding scheme used by the locale of the user. See for more details.

2 - The line break character selector.

  These three check boxes can be selected individually or together to define the sequences which will be interpreted as line break indicators. Generally, selecting all three boxes will produce the correct results.

  The errors produced if the wrong combination of boxes is selected will include the entire file being placed on a single line, empty lines appearing between the lines of the file, or undefined symbols appearing at the beginning or end of almost every line. See for more details.

3 - The data structuring system selector.

  These two push buttons allow the choice between the two different structuring schemes, data structured by placing a separating character between the data values and data organized in fixed width columns. Note that this choice will determine which panel will be shown as the second panel of the druid. See for more details.

4 - The line range spinbuttons.

  These two spin buttons allow the user to select the start and end rows for the data import. The spin boxes can be used either by typing a new value in the text entry area where the numbers are displayed, or by using the mouse button to click on the up arrow to increase the number and the down arrow to decrease the number.

  For instance, if the text file contained a large header area with meta information, this header could be excluded from the data imported to the Gnumeric worksheet by increasing the number of the starting, "From", line.

5 - The preview area.

  This area displays a preview of the file as it will be interpreted when the settings that are currently selected in this first panel are applied.

6 - The button area.

  These four buttons allow the user to navigate the druid. The Help button should open the Gnumeric manual to this section. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. The Back button is disabled since this is the first panel of the druid and the Forward button will bring up the next panel in the druid.

##### The second panel of the Text Import Druid used for separated data

The second panel of the Text Import Druid used for separated data allows the user to configure the character sequences used to separate the values in each row and to configure the text delimiting characters. Gnumeric, by default, guesses which characters are being used to separate values and pre-sets those characters. The user can, however, reconfigure these characters.

The second panel of the Text Import druid for separated data with the component areas labeled with callouts.

This screenshot depicts the second panel 'Text Import' druid for separated data with callouts labeling the different areas.

The different components of the second panel of the Text Import druid for separated data with each component labeled with a callout.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the second panel for structured data

1 - The separator definition area.

  This are allows the user to define the characters used to separate data value fields within each row. The checkboxes can be pressed to add or remove characters from those treated as separators. Additionally, the 'custom' type allows the user to define either other single characters, or a particular character sequence used to separate values. The preview area in the panel will show the file processed with the rules which have already been applied.

  Generally, this type of file structuring uses a single character to separate fields but it is possible to use either several different characters or to use a sequence of characters. For example, it would be possible to use the old telegraphic convention of separating phrases with the word 'STOP' by selecting the 'custom' separator type and entering the character sequence 'STOP' in the text field.

  This area also includes a checkbox enabling two separator sequences that immediately follow one another, to be treated as a single separator. This option will only be useful where data is imported with one or more completely empty columns and no partially filled columns. If this option is checked and the data file has partially filled columns of data, the columns will be jumbled during the text import operation.

  See for more details.

2 - The text indicating character area.

  Separated value files often additionally define a character used to indicate the start and end of a data element which should be considered a single text entry. This strategy allows the inclusion of text entries which include the value separator.

  For example, a file which is structured as a comma separated value file, could use the double quotation mark to delimit text values and would then be able to include text values such as: 'Zoe, Mark, Sally'.

3 - The preview area.

  This area displays a preview of the file as it will be interpreted when the settings that are currently selected in the first and second panels are applied.

4 - The button area.

  These four buttons allow the user to navigate the druid. The Help button should open the Gnumeric manual to this section. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. The Back button will take the user back to the first panel, without, however, changing the settings in this second panel. The Forward button will bring up the next panel in the druid.

##### The second panel of the Text Import Druid used for fixed width data

The second panel of the Text Import Druid used for fixed width data allows the user to define the widths of each column to be imported. Gnumeric provides a mechanism to automatically guess the widths of the columns and allows the user, using the mouse, to define the widths of the columns.

The second panel of the Text Import druid for fixed width data with the component areas labeled with callouts.

This screenshot depicts the second panel 'Text Import' druid for fixed width data with callouts labeling the different areas.

The different components of the second panel of the Text Import druid for fixed width data with each component labeled with a callout.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the second panel for fixed width data

1 - The automatic column discovery button.

  This left most button, named Auto Column Discovery, will cause Gnumeric to scan the file an attempt to assign the columns automatically. The example presented in shows one result after this button has been pressed: many of the columns were discovered automatically, but the second and third columns were misidentified. Nonetheless, the automatic mechanism provides a useful starting point. The definition of the columns can be refined using the methods described below.

2 - The column definition clearing button.

  This right most button, named Clear, will clear all the column definitions and reset the file to a single column. This button should be used cautiously since there is no way to reverse its action and any carefully prepared column definition layout will be irretrievably lost.

3 - The preview and column width definition area.

  This area acts as both a preview area and an area where users can define the columns widths.

  As a preview area, this area displays a preview of the file as it will be interpreted when the settings that are currently selected in this first panel are applied.

  This area can also be used to define column widths. When the panel first appears, a single column will be defined. The automatic column discovery mechanism may split this single column into many more columns. The mouse can then be used to further divide columns or to join previously separate columns.

  A new column can be defined by placing the mouse pointer where the column should start and double-clicking with the primary mouse button. This will split the column which used to contain this position and add a new column starting at this location.

  To remove the definition of a column which already exists or to alter the ending position of a column, the context menu must be used. The context menu appears by clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons. A column which has already been defined can be merged with the column on the left or right using the Delete and Merge Left or Delete and Merge right menu items. The size of a column can be increased by placing the mouse pointer inside the column area or header and using the Widen or Narrow menu items, respectively. Either of these will change the width of the column by changing the right hand end of the column.

  The context menu can also be used to define new columns using the Split menu item but the double-click approach described above should be easier.

4 - The button area.

  These four buttons allow the user to navigate the druid. The Help button should open the Gnumeric manual to this section. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. The Back button will take the user back to the first panel, without, however, changing the settings in this second panel. The Forward button will bring up the next panel in the druid.

##### The third panel of the Text Import Druid

This panel allows users to select and format the columns to be imported to the Gnumeric workbook. The first button allows the exclusion of empty columns on either of the outer sides of the columns with data. The second button allows the user to define the locale used to interpret the values in the file. The remaining area allows the user to predefine the data format to be used for all the values in each column. This area also allows the users to select which columns in the file will be imported to the Gnumeric worksheet. Finally, this panel provides the Finish which is used to dismiss the dialog and import the file.

The third panel of the Text Import druid with the component areas labeled with callouts.

This screenshot depicts the third panel 'Text Import' druid with callouts labeling the different areas.

The different components of the third panel of the Text Import druid with each component labeled with a callout.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the third panel

1 - The trim of empty outer columns drop down list button.

  This button provides a list allowing the user to select whether to trim any outer columns which are completely empty. The choices are to delete the columns on both sides, on neither side, or on one side only. This will only affect columns which have been previously defined but which contain no data values at all.

2 - Locale definition for import drop down menu button.

  This button provides a list of locales which can be set. The chosen locale will affect how numeric values are interpreted when then are imported. For instance, the locale will define the character expected as the decimal separator which is the period character (.) in some locales, and the comma character (,) in others. These locales generally then use the other character as the spacer grouping the digits in thousands.

3 - The column data format selection list.

  This list allows predetermining the format which Gnumeric will assign to each of the values in the columns selected below. Cell data formats are explained in .

  To use this list, first, one or more columns must be selected in the preview area below, then, a data format in this list can be selected, and finally any details of the format can be configured. Number formats for instance allow the user to force numbers to contain fixed number of digits after the decimal point.

4 - The column selection, inclusion, and file preview area.

  This area allows users to select columns which will be preformatted, to select which columns to include in the import and to preview the file. Each single column can be selected by clicking with the mouse pointer on the column header. Any single column can be excluded from the data imported to the Gnumeric worksheet by clicking in the checkbox in the column header to remove the check mark. The area also provides a preview of the data in the text file showing the effect of the with the current configuration.

5 - The button area.

  These four buttons allow the user to navigate the druid. The Help button should open the Gnumeric manual to this section. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. The Back button will take the user back to the second panel, without, however, changing the settings in this third panel. The Finish button will dismiss the druid and cause the file to be imported into a new worksheet using the selected configuration parameters.

### Spara filer

There are several ways to save a Gnumeric workbook that is currently open.

Existing files can be saved directly but this process does not allow a user to change any settings to the file creation process.

Saving files directly

If the workbook has already been saved to a file or if the workbook was opened from a file that already existed, Gnumeric will simply overwrite the file with the newer version.

Three alternative ways to save a file directly

Using the Menus

  Select, in the File menu, the Save menu item.

Using the Standard Toolbar

  Click on the Save button:

  An image of the file save button.
Using a Keyboard Shortcut

  Type the combination Ctrl s , typing both keys simultaneously.

Each of these approaches will save the file directly, allowing no intervention on the part the user. If the file has been newly created, Gnumeric will automatically launch the Save As... dialog asking the user for a file name and other configuration options for the file, as is explained below.

Users wishing to save an existing file to a new file must invoke the Save As... dialog. The Save As... dialog can be invoked at any time to save the current workbook to a new file with either a different name or a different file format type. This dialog is automatically launched when a user attempts to use one of the methods described above to save a workbook which does not already have an existing file.

The Save As... dialog asks the user to provide a name for the file to be created, to select a folder in which to place the new file, and to select a file format type for the file.

The steps required to save a file to a standard location.

1. Launch the File Save dialog.

   In the File menu, select the Save As menu item.

2. Name the file. Open the folder containing the desired file.

   In the text entry area, enter the file name.

3. Select the desired folder in which to save the file.

   Select one of the standard locations to open the file.

4. Specify a file format type.

5. Click on the Save button.

The remainder of this section explains these steps in greater detail, first, by describing the components in the File Save dialog and, then, by explaining each of the steps above in greater detail.

#### Using the File Save dialog.

Saving a workbook to a file can be a simple process, depending on the folder in which the file is to be saved. If this folder is in the predefined list of standard folders and user bookmark folders, the file can be created with the compact File Save dialog. The components of the compact File Save dialog and the procedure to save a workbook to a file in the predefined list of folders are explained next.

However, when the workbook is to be saved to a file created in a folder which is not in the preselected list, the expanded File Save dialog will be required. The components of the expanded File Save dialog, the procedure for saving files in a different folder, and an explanation of bookmark folders and their use are given further below.

##### The components of the compact File Save dialog.

The File Save dialog allows the user to save a workbook into a new file but requires that the user provide a name for the file, select the folder in which to save the file, and select a file format type to use for this file. This dialog also provides a way to navigate the folder hierarchy as will be explained further below.

The File Save dialog first opens in a compact layout. The different areas of the dialog in this compact layout are shown and labeled in .

The compact form of the File Save dialog.

This screenshot depicts the 'File Save' dialog in its compact form with the different areas labeled.

The purpose of each labeled area will be explained below:

The components of the compact File Save dialog

A - The naming area.

  This area is used to give the file its name. This is a standard text entry area allowing all the basic editing commands. The cursor can be moved left or right using the keyboard arrow keys. The cursor can be placed anywhere in the text by placing the mouse pointer where the cursor should go and clicking with the primary mouse button. The mouse can also select part or all of the text with a click and drag. The keyboard shortcuts for copying, Ctrl c, cutting, Ctrl x, or pasting, Ctrl v, all work. The dialog uses filename matching to guess file names based on the files already in the parent folder.

B - The folder selection area.

  This area provides a drop down list of previously selected folders including the standard folders and the folders which have been bookmarked by the user. The area will be disabled if area D has been selected to expand the dialog.

  The desired folder can be selected by moving the mouse pointer over the button, clicking and holding the primary mouse button, dragging the mouse pointer onto the name of the desired folder and releasing the mouse button. The new folder name will appear on as the name on the button.

C - The file format type selection area.

  This area provides a drop down list of all the file formats provided by the Gnumeric program itself and by all the currently active plugins.

  If the file format type named "Text export (configurable)" is opened, this will start the text export procedure. explains this procedure in complete detail.

D - The dialog expansion area.

  This area will alter the dialog to expand or collapse it. When expanded the dialog provides a way to select any folder accessible on the system, to create new folders and to add and remove bookmark folders from the user's bookmark folder list. When the dialog is expanded, the small arrow will point downward, the areas showing in will appear and area B will be disabled.

E - The button area.

  This area provides two buttons, the Cancel and the Save buttons. Clicking the Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. Clicking the Save button will cause a file to be created with the currently selected name, parent folder and format. If the selected file already exists, Gnumeric will open a confirmation dialog since the command will obliterate the previously existing file.

The procedure to save a file using this dialog in its compact form is present next, in . The components of the dialog in its expanded layout, converted by clicking in area D when the File Save dialog is in its compact form, will be explained further on, in , followed by sections explaining the use of the dialog in this expanded layout.

##### The basic file saving procedure.

Saving a workbook to a new file requires providing name the file, selecting a folder in which the file will be placed, and selecting a file format type.

The default action, if a user simply opens the File Save dialog and clicks on the Save button, is to name the file `Book1.gnumeric` incrementing the number for each new file created, to save the file in the user's home folder, and to create a file in the Gnumeric file format.

If the user provides a name for the file to be saved which is the same as the name of a file that already exists, Gnumeric will open up a confirmation dialog asking the user if they really want to overwrite the existing file. If the user then clicks on the Yes button, the existing file will be destroyed and the new file created in its place.

The procedure to save a file.

- Open the File Save dialog.

  First, the dialog must be opened using either of the two following methods:

  Two alternative ways to open the File Save dialog.

  Using the Menus

    Select, in the File menu, the Save as... menu item.

  Using a Keyboard Shortcut

    Type the combination Shift Ctrl s , typing all three keys simultaneously.

  Both methods will launch the File Save dialog to allow the user to name the file, select a folder (also called a directory) for the file and choose a file format type. This dialog will also open automatically the first time a new workbook is saved.

- Select a name for the file.

  Next, a name must be given for the file. Gnumeric provides a default name but, when the dialog is first opened this name is highlighted indicating that it is already selected. Therefore, a user can simply start typing a new name and the first character entered will delete the name given by default. The file name field is presented as area A in .

  If typing a name does not have any effect, the 'focus' was probably inadvertently changed from the text entry area. Focus can be returned to the area by placing the mouse pointer over the box and clicking the primary mouse button. All the standard keyboard editing commands work in this text area and the mouse can be used to select text or to move the cursor location.

- Select a folder in which to save the file.

  Then, the folder in which to save the file can be chosen from the drop down list shown as area B in .

  Using this list requires placing the mouse pointer above the list button and clicking with the primary mouse button to open the list. The desired folder can then be selected by moving the pointer down the list and clicking again with the primary mouse button. The second click will close the drop down list and change the selected folder. Instead of the two mouse clicks, the entire operation can be replaced by a click-hold, drag and release, where the first mouse click is replaced by the click-and-hold and the second mouse click is replaced by the release.

  This list only provides a limited number of choices including several standard folders and any bookmark folders the user has previously added to the file selector. Other folders can be chosen, new folders can be created, and the list of bookmark folders available can be changed, by clicking in area D to change to the expanded dialog, as will be explained further below, in , and .

- Select a file type.

  Next, the desired file type must be selected. Area C in provides a drop down list of file types. The process for using this list is the same as was described in the previous step. The file types are listed below in and explained in detail in .

  If the file format type named "Text export (configurable)" is opened, this will start the text export procedure. explains this procedure in complete detail.

- Click the Save button.

  Finally, the Save button must be pressed by placing the mouse pointer over the button and clicking with the primary mouse button.

This basic procedure does not allow a user to save the file into folder other than one already provided. An expanded procedure is needed to explain how to save a file into other folders in the file system. The next section explains the extra elements provided when the File Save dialog is expanded and that section is followed by a step-by-step procedure explaining how to use this expanded dialog.

##### The extra components in the expanded File Save dialog.

In order to select folders other than those provided in the drop down list shown as area B in , the File Save dialog must be expanded by clicking in the area labeled D. In the expanded form, the File Save dialog allows a user to select a new folder in which to save a file, to create new folders, and to add bookmark folders to the list provided in the area labeled C.

This section will explain the extra components of the File Save dialog which are provided when the dialog is expanded. shows these different areas and adds a label to each.

The expanded form of the File Save dialog.

This screenshot depicts the 'File Save' dialog in its expanded form with the different areas labeled.

The different parts of each panel of the File Save dialog after it has been expanded have been shaded with boxes of different colors and labeled with a letter in . Five of the labeled areas are the same as the areas in the dialog when it is in a compact form; these areas were explained above. The remaining areas are explained below:

The extra components in the expanded version of the File Save dialog

F - The 'relative root' selection area.

  This area allows the user to select the starting folder from which to navigate the folder hierarchy. The navigation system only allows users to select sub-folders of the currently selected 'relative root' folder so the root folder selected in area F must contain the desired folder as a sub-folder.

  The folders listed in this area include the standard folders provided by the system and a number of folders added, as bookmark folders, by the user. The standard folders provided by the system will vary for different machines and system administrators may have disabled access to certain areas. By default, the standard folders provided include the user's 'Home' folder, the user's 'Desktop' folder, a folder pointing to the root of the filesystem tree and folders for each of the removable storage devices attached to the computer. The user's home folder, on GNU and other UNIX like systems, this folder is usually known as `~` or `~user_account_name` where the phrase `user_account_name` represents the account name used by the current user. This folder is often located at `/home/user_account_name/` in the filesystem. The 'Desktop' folder is the folder which holds the files which are displayed in the background of the user's window. The 'Filesystem' folder is the top of the filesystem tree, which on GNU systems is also known as `/`. The list also presents peripheral or external devices. Below the standard folders, area F has a separator and the bookmark folders selected by the user. In the folder `currentWork` is a folder named by the user and added to the list of bookmark folders.

G - The folder hierarchy area.

  This area displays the folder hierarchy starting from the starting folder selected in area F and ending in the current folder, the folder whose contents are displayed in area I, while displaying all the folders between the two. This area changes dynamically as the user changes to new folders. In the case shown in , the user has selected the 'Home' folder as the starting folder in area F and has not navigated to any sub-folders.

H - The Folder Creation button.

  This button allows the user to create a folder in the directory listed in the rightmost part of the file component area, area G. When this button is clicked, by placing the mouse pointer over the button and clicking with the primary mouse button, a new folder is added to the list in area I with a temporary name of '`Type name of New Folder`' pre-selected and therefore ready to be edited into a new name.

I - The folder content area.

  This area displays the contents of the currently selected folder which is the rightmost folder shown in area G.

  Not all of the sub-folders and files present in the folder area are shown.

  Firstly, hidden folders and files, those that start with a leading period, are not displayed by default. These can be shown by placing the mouse pointer over area I, clicking with one of the secondary mouse buttons to raise the context menu, moving the pointer onto the Show hidden files menu entry, and clicking with the primary mouse button. This step will ensure that all the folders are displayed.

  Secondly, the filtering rule defined in area L will limit the files displayed based on the characteristics of these files. By default, a filtering rule is applied which causes only those files present that have an extension commonly used for spreadsheet files. The rule can be changed to display all the files regardless of their extension, except possibly for the hidden files.

J - The panel rearrangement handles.

  These triple dots indicate that the mouse can be used to change the shape and size of the different areas in the dialog. These handles can be used by placing the mouse pointer above a handle, clicking and holding with the primary mouse button, then dragging the handle to a new position, and then releasing the mouse button.

K - The bookmark folder list modification buttons.

  These buttons will add or remove folders to or from the list of bookmark folders in area F. The Add button will add the folder currently selected in area G. The Remove button will remove any bookmark folder that is selected in area F.

L - The filter definition area.

  This area contains a drop down menu with the different filters defined by the application. Gnumeric currently defines two filters. The first filters out all files that do not have an extension used by the spreadsheet formats supported by gnumeric. The second filter, labeled "All files", essentially disables any filtering operation, and lists all the files in the currently selected folder, except that files starting with a leading period are not shown.

The uses of the File Save dialog in its expanded form is explained below.

##### Changing the currently selected folder.

In order to save a file in a folder other than that provided by default, it is necessary to change the default folder. The note below explains briefly the notion of folders and the procedure further down explains how to change folders.

Understanding the file organization system.

In order to understand how to change folders, it is first necessary to understand the system by which documents are stored. This system is called the 'filesystem'.

All documents are stored in a folder. Folders can contain files but can also contain other folders. Any folder therefore can contain several sub-folders, each of which may itself contain several sub-folders; the resulting structure is called a nested 'tree' with the original folder being the 'relative root' of that tree.

In GNU and UNIX systems, all of the files are stored in folders organized in a single, unified filesystem tree with a folder named '`/`' at the absolute root of the tree. Every file is accessible from this absolute root folder and, by default, this folder is provided as the choice named `Filesystem` with an icon of a disk drive in area F in the File Save dialog.

Navigating the directory tree from the single root folder would quickly become burdensome and the File Save dialog provides several other starting points in area F. These will be called, in this documentation, the 'relative root' folders since each of these will act as the root of the branching structure of sub-folders the relative root folder contains. Two relative root folders which are commonly provided are the 'Home' and 'Desktop' folders for the current user.

In a complex computer system, the absolute root folder may be hidden from the user and only 'relative roots' will be present. These should jointly provide some way to access all the areas where the user can save files.

The 'relative roots' are also necessary when several file systems are available to the user. This will be the case when filesystem on other machines are accessible over a network or when Gnumeric is running on operating systems whose filesystems are not unified, such as the proprietary operating systems sold by Microsoft in which each disk drive has its own root named, for example, `C:\` or `D:\`.

Additional 'relative root' folders can be added as 'bookmark folders' by the users themselves. These bookmark folders can be used to access quickly folders which are commonly used. The bookmark folders are listed, in area F, under the thin horizontal separator line. The creation and deletion of these bookmark folders is explained below, in .

Changing folders involves selecting a 'relative root' folder, then navigating into the appropriate sub-folder. When the Save button is pressed, the file will be saved in the folder listed as the right most button in area G of which also means that the file will be saved alongside the folders and files listed in area I.

The procedure to change the currently selected folder.

To select a new folder, one of the 'relative root' folders which contains the desired folder must first be selected and then the hierarchy must be navigated to find the desired folder. As explained below, a user can move around the hierarchy using as many changes as they need to choose the folder in which to save their Gnumeric file.

- Select a 'relative-root' folder in area F.

  The first step in choosing a new folder requires selecting, in area F, a 'relative root' folder which contains the desired folder. The new 'relative root' folder is chosen by placing the mouse pointer over the folder name and double clicking (click twice rapidly without moving the mouse) with the primary mouse button. This will change the leftmost button in area G and change the folders and files listed in area I.

- Navigate the filesystem to reach the desired folder using area I.

  The next step involves descending the folder tree to reach the desired folder. This requires double clicking the sub-folder of the 'relative root' folder which contains the desired folder and continuing through the whole hierarchy until the desired folder is reached. After each double click, the selected folder is added as the right most button in area G and the contents of the selected folder are shown in area I. Once the desired folder is reached, it must be opened in the same way, so that its contents are listed in area I and the file can then be saved into this folder by clicking on the Save button.

- Navigating back up the folder tree using area G.

  If the sub-folder selected in area I does not contain the branch of the folder tree leading to the desired folder, the buttons in area G can be used to jump further up the folder tree but only as far as the 'relative root' folder selected in area F. Area G provides a list of buttons with the names of all the folders between the 'relative root' listed in area F and the currently selected folder. By clicking on one of these buttons, that is by placing the mouse pointer over the button and clicking with the primary mouse button, the folder listed on the button will be opened in area I so that the selection process can restart from this branch.

The process of exploration of the folder tree can continue as long as the user wishes. If the user desires it is also possible to create new folders as is explained next.

##### Adding a folder.

Often the user wishes to save the Gnumeric workbook by creating a file in a folder which does not yet exist. A new folder can be added to the folder tree by clicking on the Create Folder button, which is labeled as area H of . The button can be clicked by placing the mouse pointer over the button and pressing the primary mouse button.

When the Create Folder button is pressed, a folder will be added at the top of the list in area I, with its name, `Type name of new folder` already selected so that the user can simply start typing to give the folder a desired name. Once the name has been entered on the keyboard, typing the Return key (or the Enter key, depending on the keyboard) will change the folder name and open that folder. Area I will therefore be empty since the newly created folder has no contents.

There is no way to delete folders once they have been created, just as there is no way for Gnumeric to delete files it has created. Folders created by mistake must be deleted using a file browser such as Nautilus or using command line programs such as rm.

##### Changing the list of bookmark folders.

The list of 'relative root' folders shown in area F of may contain 'relative root' folders selected by the user. These folders are called 'bookmark folders' and are listed in area F below a thin horizontal separator line. For example, contains a folder named `currentWork` which is a bookmark folder selected by the user.

These bookmark folders can be added in two ways. A folder which is selected in area I can be added as a bookmark by clicking on the Add button in area K.

Alternatively, the folder can be dragged from area I into area K. The folder can be dragged by placing the mouse pointer over the folder name in area I, clicking and holding the primary mouse button, moving the mouse pointer to area F and releasing the mouse button. As the mouse pointer is moved from area I to area F, a small icon of the folder will move with the mouse pointer.

Any bookmark folder can also be removed from the 'relative root' folders presented in area F (or in the drop down list labeled B). A bookmark folder can be removed by clicking on the folder name in area F and then clicking on the Remove in area K.

#### The file formats which Gnumeric can write.

Gnumeric can write files in several formats used by other programs. The details of these formats are provided in and the name of each file type in the table below skips to the appropriate section of . The creation of files which consist of structured text is described in . The creation of PostScript and Portable Document Format (PDF) files is done through the printing mechanism and is described in .Gnumeric can also export text data or HTML and XHTML tables through the clipboard mechanism, as is explained in .

Most of these formats are provided by plugins, which are independent, configurable modules. If a format described below does not appear in the File Save dialog, this may be because the appropriate plugin has not been configured or started. This can be verified by examining the list of plugins which are currently running in the Plugin Manager dialog.

The Plugin Manager dialog lists the plugins which are currently in use and provides a way to start plugins which are currently disabled. The Plugin Manager can be started by selecting, in the Tools menu, the Plug-ins... menu item; see for more information.

The file formats which Gnumeric can create.

Format | Extension
--- | ---
Gnumeric | `.gnumeric` / `.gnm`
Comma Separated Values | `.csv`
Data Interchange Format | `.dif`
HTML | `.html` / `.htm`
LaTeX | `.tex`
Microsoft Excel Old Binary | `.xls`
Microsoft Excel New Binary | `.xls`
Microsoft Excel 2003 XML | `.xls`
Microsoft Excel Office Open XML | `.xlsx`
OpenOffice.Org / StarOffice (OASIS ODF/IS26300) | `.ods` / `.odt`
OpenOffice.Org / StarOffice Old Format | `.sxc` / `.stc`
PostScript | `.ps` / `.eps`
PDF | `.pdf`
Multiplan (SYLK) | `.sylk` / `.slk`
Tab Separated Values | `.tsv` / `.tab`
Text Formats | `.txt` / `.text`
TROFF | `.me`
XHTML | `.xhtml` / `.html`

### Exporting Text Files

Gnumeric can export worksheets to structured text files. To create a text file one chooses the Export As Text File... item in the Export Data submenu of the Data menu. In the dialog, one specifies the file name, and selects the folder in which to save it, retaining the file format "Text export (configurable)". Upon clicking Save the Text Export druid appears which permits the configuration of file structure characteristics.

The Text Export Druid.

The steps involved in the text export druid are:

1. Launch the Text export druid using, in the Export As Text File... item in the Export Data submenu of the Data retaining the "Text export (configurable)" file format type.

2. Select the worksheets to include in the exported file.

3. Configure the order of the worksheets for the exported file.

4. Go to the second panel.

5. Select the line termination character.

6. Select the value separating character or character sequence

7. Select when values should be surrounded by a text indicating character.

8. Select the character or sequence to use to indicate a text field.

9. Configure the character encoding to use for the file.

10. Select how to handle unknown characters.

11. Select whether to preserve the format of the cell contents.

12. Click on the Finish button to export the file.

#### The Components of the Text Export Druid

The Text Export druid consists of two panels. The first panel allows the user to select the worksheets included in the export and their order. The second panel allows the user to configure the structuring elements, the line delimiting characters, value separating characters, text indicating characters, and file encoding.

##### The first panel of the Text Export Druid.

The first panel of the Text Export Druid allows users to set the file encoding, to determine the character sequences used to separate lines, configure the type of structuring being used and select the lines of the file to import.

The first panel of the Text Export druid with the component areas labeled with callouts.

This screenshot depicts the first panel 'Text Export' druid with callouts labeling the different areas.

The different components of the first panel of the Text Export druid with each component labeled with a callout.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the first panel

1 - The worksheet selection area.

  This area allows the user to select the worksheets to be included in the file. By default, only the top most sheet will have its checkbox checked and be included in the export. The user can add sheets by clicking in their checkboxes to set the check marks.

2 - The worksheet selection and ordering buttons.

  The top two buttons allows the user quickly to select or unselect all the worksheets to be included in the export file. The bottom two buttons allow the user to change the order of the worksheets in the file to be exported.

3 - The button area.

  These three buttons allow the user to navigate the druid. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. The Back button is disable since this is the first panel of the druid. The Forward button will dismiss the first panel and bring up the second panel of the druid.

##### The second panel of the Text Export Druid.

The second panel of the Text Export Druid allows users to select the line termination character, configure the value separating character, select the text indicating character and set the character encoding.

The second panel of the Text Export druid with the component areas labeled with callouts.

This screenshot depicts the second panel 'Text Export' druid with callouts labeling the different areas.

The different components of the second panel of the Text Export druid with each component labeled with a callout.

The purpose of each labeled component in is explained below:

The components of the second panel

1 - The export characteristic menu buttons.

  These drop down menus provide to set the different configuration parameters for the exported file. The various menus are as follows.

  - Line Delimiting Character-

    This button allows the user to activate a drop down list from which to select the character used to indicate the end of a line and beginning of the next. The three commonly used alternatives are provided. See for more details.

  - Value Separating Character-

    This button allows the user to select a character to use as a value separator. The "Custom" type will active the text entry area to allow the user to determine a particular character or character sequence to use to delimit data values. See for more details.

  - Value Separating Character entry area-

    This entry area allows the user to define explicitly the character or character sequence which should be used to separate each value field on every line. This area is only active if the "Custom" type has been selected from the list in the button above.

  - The Text Field Delimiter activity setting-

    This button activates a list with three choices for the use of text field delimiters. Text fields can be delimited only where needed, meaning that the quote characters will only be used if the value contains the character used as a separator or a space. Alternatively the text field separators can be used around all values or never applied. See for more details.

  - The Text Field Delimiter character entry area and list-

    This area can be used as a text entry area to type the character to use to delimit text fields. Alternatively, three pre-selected characters, double quotes or single quotes, can be selected from the drop down list which appears by clicking on the downward pointing arrow to the right of the text field.

  - File encoding selection button-

    This button allows the user to set the encoding scheme to use for the file. By default, Gnumeric selects the encoding scheme used by the locale of the user. See for more details.

  - The unknown character handling setting button-

    This button selects whether to escape or transliterate characters which Gnumeric does not recognize.

  - The format preservation checkbox-

    This checkbox sets whether to preserve the number formats for formatted values.

  .
2 - The button area.

  These three buttons allow the user to navigate the druid. The Cancel button will dismiss the dialog and return the user to the worksheet. The Back button is disable since this is the first panel of the druid. The Finish button will dismiss the druid and cause the file to be saved using the selected options.

### Sending Files

Gnumeric can send files directly as attachments to an electronic mail (email) message, as long as Gnumeric is run in an environment where it can access an Email client.

### Converting Files

Gnumeric can convert files automatically without needing user intervention. This allows a large number of files to be converted using a script. Gnumeric is distributed along with a program called ssconvert which is the program used to convert files automatically. All of the file formats supported by Gnumeric can be used except for the PostScript and PDF file formats which operate through the printing system.

This application is used, from the command line by specifying, any desired options, an input file and an output file. For example,

    ssconvert myfile.xls myfile.gnumeric

would convert an Excel format file to a Gnumeric format file.

The available import and export file formats which ssconvert can read can be listed using

    ssconvert --list-importers

or

    ssconvert --list-exporters

respectively.

Like other GNU command line applications, ssconvert includes a manual page. This page can be accessed by typing:

    man ssconvert

which will open the manual page. This page can be navigated by typing the space bar or using the Page Up and Page Down buttons. The man program can be dismissed by typing the q key.

## Printing

This chapter explains how to print spreadsheets, tables and plots from Gnumeric to a printer directly or into PostScript or PDF (both are page description languages).

### Printing to a Printer or a File.

The Print dialog includes the most important options related to printing. More detailed options related to printing can be set in the Page Setup dialog, detailed in . Press the Print to print out the workbook. Press the Print Preview button to display the Print Preview.

The number of tabs and the content of some of the tabs of the Print dialog depends on the printer model you use. Some of the described tabs or options may not be available with your printer, especially when printing to a file.

#### Print General

Print Dialog Printer Tab

Select the preferred printer in the upper half of the tab. Your default printer is already highlighted when you open the Printer dialog. Optionally select the number of copies and a page range in the lower half of the dialog. Click on Print to send the document to your printing system.

When printing to a file you may want to change the output name and folder before printing. You can choose between saving a PostScript or a PDF file.

#### Page Setup

Print Dialog Page Setup Tab

In the Page Setup tab you can choose several options concerning the layout or the paper. Choose how many sheets shall appear on one piece of paper, about two-sided printing, limit the printed pages by even or odd page numbers or the scale in the layout section. Select the paper type (e.g. preprinted) and the paper source and output tray in the paper section.

The preview in the lower part of the tab gives you a small hint of how your printed document will look like.

#### Print Range

Print Dialog Range Tab

The Print Range tab gives you the opportunity to limit the range of the printed workbook. You may choose between printing the whole workbook, only the selected or not the selected area or a defined range of worksheets.

#### Print Job

Print Dialog Job Tab

In the Job tab you may change the priority or add billing information to the print job. Also you can choose to add a cover page in front or after the printed worksheets. Finally you can decide whether your job should be printed right now or at a defined point in time.

Some options may be unavailable due to user restrictions. Ask your local administrator for further details.

#### Image Quality

Print Dialog Image Quality Tab

In the Image Quality tab you can select the resolution of the printed document depending on your printer. No more, no less.

#### Finishing

Print Dialog Finishing Tab

The Finishing tab lets decide whether you want a blank separation sheet after every page, after the whole job or no separation sheet at all.

#### Advanced

Print Dialog Advanced Tab

In the Advanced tab you can change several options depending on the printer model you use.

### Page Setup.

The Page Setup Dialog can be used to configure various options related to printing out a workbook. Click on File Menu Page Setup to activate the Page Setup.

Remember that at any time you can click on the Print preview button to see what your document looks like with your selected options. See the

Normally the specified settings apply only to the current sheet. Select another sheet at the bottom of the Page Setup Dialog or select Apply to all sheets of this workbook. You can also save your adjustments by activating the save as default settings flag.

#### Page Setup Dialog - Page

Print Setup Page Tab

Change the paper type by clicking the Change Paper Type button.

Print Setup Paper Type dialog

Select the preferred printer or choose Any Printer to see the formats supported by all printers. Pick a paper size and page orientation (portrait, landscape or reverse) to suit the best layout for your document.

Specify the required margins of the page. Nothing will be printed inside these margins, not even page numbers. The margins will be measured in the same units (millimetres, points or inches) as the paper size. Change the unit in the paper and layout section to best fit your needs. You may also specify whether the page is centered horizontally and/or vertically on the printable part of the page.

#### Page Setup Dialog - Scale

Print Setup Scale Tab

Select the scale applied while printing. You can choose between no scaling, a fixed scaling or automatic scaling to fit the workbook to a defined number of paper sheets.

#### Page Setup Dialog - Headers and Footers

Print Setup Headers and Footers Tab

Select a predefined format for either the header or the footer. You can define an header or a footer by clicking the Configure button next to the according drop-down field.

Print Setup Headers and Footers Configure Dialog

Headers and footers are divided into left, center and right area. Select the area you want to change. Insert a user-defined text or just select one or several of the given options. When selecting time and/or date you may choose the format by clicking on the arrow next to the symbol and click on the preferred option. Beside the according page number, the number of total pages and the name of the according worksheet, you may also insert the file name and/or path. Finally you can select a defined cell to appear in the header/footer. Additionally there are a number of special opcodes for common options. These are:

&[TAB]

  Name of the worksheet.

&[PAGE]

  Page number in the printing.

&[PAGES]

  Total number of pages in the printout.

&[DATE]

  Current date in format dd-mmm-yyyy. The format can be changed by specifying the desired format in the opcode: `&[DATE:yyyy/mm/dd]`.

&[TIME]

  Current time in format hh:mm. The format can be changed by specifying the desired format in the opcode: `&[TIME:hh:mm:ss]`.

&[FILE]

  The basename of the file. For the file `/home/jdoe/file.gnumeric`, this opcode prints `file.gnumeric`.

&[PATH]

  The path of the file excluding the basename. For the file `/home/jdoe/file.gnumeric`, this opcode prints `/home/jdoe/`.

&[CELL:$A$1]

  The content of the cell `$A$1` on the sheet being printed. Instead of `$A$1` any other absolutely addressed cell may be used.

&[CELL:A1]

  The content of the top left cell on the current page. Instead of `A1` any other relative cell address may be used. This relative address is interpreted with respect to the top left cell on the current page. Any repeating rows or columns are ignored.

&[CELL:rep|A1]

  The content of the top left cell on the current page. Instead of `A1` any other relative cell address may be used. This relative address is interpreted with respect to the top left cell on the current page. Repeating rows or columns are not ignored. So if the top left cell is in a repeating row or column then the relative address is interpreted with respect to that cell.

TIP

You can choose the font in which the header and footer is printed by selecting a default header/footer font in the preferences (see in ).

TIP

Double clicking on the header or footer preview will quickly allow you to customize that header or footer.

#### Page Setup Dialog - Print Area

Print Setup Print Area Tab

You can select rows or columns to be printed on every page of the output. This is commonly used for printing column or row names. To enable this, enter the range of cells to be repeated in Rows to repeat... or Columns to repeat... field. Instead of entering them manually, you can also select columns or rows to be repeated using the mouse.

WARNING

Note that the rows and columns must be entered as ranges. That is, if you want to have first row repeated, you must enter `1:1`, not just `1`. Similarly, to have column `A` repeated, you must enter `A:A`.

#### Page Setup Dialog - Sheet

Print Setup Sheet Tab

Select Grid lines to print the cell grid lines with your document. Unselect the button to hide the grid lines from your print output.

Select Black and white to convert the colours in your document to a greyscale range.

Select Do not print with all sheets if you want to avoid printing this sheet whenever you choose to print all sheets. If this item is checked then this sheet will only be printed as the active sheet or as part of a range of sheets. This is useful if you have a non-hidden sheet that contains only auxillary information and should normally not be printed.

Select Row and column headings to print the row and column headings (1,2,3,... and A,B,C,...).

Select Styles with no content to ensure cells with style changes will be printed, even if they are empty. For example, if you have a number of cells with the background color changed but no data in them, you can select this option to ensure they are in the printed output.

The Errors selection box allows you to choose how to print error values:

Print as displayed

  Every error value is printed just as shown on the worksheet.

Print as spaces

  No error values are printed.

Print as dashes

  Every error value is replaced by two m-dashes (separated by a thin space): "— —".

Print as NA

  Every error value is printed as an #N/A error.

Finally you can decide about the direction in which the workbook will be printed (Down, then right or Right, then down).

### Print Preview

The Print Preview Dialog is used to display what the printed output will look like. The Print Preview dialog can be used to check whether you have the desired formatting and layout before you print out the workbook. Evince is set up to be the default viewer.

#### Customizing the preview application

You may change the default preview application by editing your presets for GTK. Open the file .gtkrc-your GTK version and add a line in the format `gtk-print-preview-command="command to your preferred viewer"`.

Please make sure you have only one line defining your preview application.

It is strongly recommended to use Evince as the default viewer. A convincing argument is that Evince deletes the preview file after closing the viewer.

## Getting More Help

This chapter describes other sources of help which are available to users including the Gnumeric web site, the mailing list, and the internet relay chat (IRC) discussion channel.

### Sources of Help

This manual is the most complete source of explanation for Gnumeric and attempts to describe as much of the program as possible. However, this manual cannot answer all the possible questions readers may have: the manual is not yet finished and there are many situations which cannot be explained through a manual. Other sources of information which might be helpful to Gnumeric users are presented below.

Several of the sources of information below involve talking directly with the people who have created Gnumeric. These people are volunteers who have spend several years working on the program to make it useful. They will all be glad to help you but only if they decide they want to. They are all busy and only volunteer on this project. You can take several steps to make these people want to help you.

First of all, try to help yourself by reading the existing documents. If you have read the documents, others will be much more likely to want to answer any questions that remain. Secondly, be polite by introducing yourself, thanking developers for their hard work and asking your questions nicely. Please be aware that the developers all respect each other and their users so therefore, while their answers may appear brisk or discourteous, they are simply trying to be efficient and save time by being curt. Please assume they respect you and want to help you, after all they have written a program for you to use.

Steps for getting help.

- Read the Manual:

  First, please look carefully through this manual to see if you can answer your own question. This can be hard and requires careful thinking but will teach you the most.

- Read the Web Site:

  Second, look at the Gnumeric web site, look on the world wide web for explanations using other spreadsheets or look for a book on how to use another spreadsheet. explains how to access and find information on the web site.

- Read other Spreadsheet Tutorials:

  Another useful source of help is the literature written for other spreadsheets. Gnumeric is quite similar to a number of other spreadsheets and often books, web sites, tutorials and other documents which describe how to use other spreadsheets can help users understand how to use Gnumeric. describes other spreadsheets for which usage manuals may provide useful information.

- Send email to the Gnumeric List:

  The Gnumeric project maintains an email mailing list which is a way for people to send email to all the core developers. explains how to send email to the gnumeric list and how to read past messages including questions and answers which may be helpful.

- Join the Chat Discussion:

  The Gnumeric project also uses an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) channel, also known as a `discussion room', in which developers talk to each other, and to anyone else, about the program. explains how to join this discussion.

### Web Resources

The Gnumeric project maintains a web site with explanations, links and other useful information to learn about and use this spreadsheet.

#### The Gnumeric Web Site

The Gnumeric web site can be accessed by clicking on this link. Alternatively, it may be necessary to enter the address directly into a web browser. The Gnumeric project page address is:

    http://www.gnome.org/projects/gnumeric/

It may be necessary to copy the text and paste it into the address field.

### Related Manuals

Gnumeric strives to mimic the behaviour of other spreadsheets so books which explain how to use these other spreadsheets will probably be useful to help understand Gnumeric.

The OpenOffice.org spreadsheet named Calc is another popular and highly functional spreadsheet which provides users with the freedoms provided by Gnumeric including the freedom to access and use the source code of the program itself. The documentation for Calc may also help explain how to use Gnumeric and can be accessed through the OpenOffice.org web site at http://www.openoffice.org/ .

The manuals for other spreadsheets, even those that restrict users freedoms in several ways, may help to explain how to use Gnumeric. Gnumeric attempts explicitly to behave in a manner understandable to users of the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Because Excel has a very large number of users, many books have been written explaining how to use that spreadsheet. Any local bookstore should have at least a few of these books which may help answer any questions.

### Sändlistan

The Gnumeric project maintains a mailing list which is a system by which people can send one email which gets distributed to everyone who has signed up to read these emails. Please understand that this list is used for serious discussions about developing this spreadsheet further. Questions from users are generally answered when posted to this list but simple questions which are answered in the manual may generate the simple answer, "Please read the manual." Also, developers volunteer any time they take to answer your questions so please be polite.

The best way to use this resource is first to read the archives for the past few months to see if any of the subjects look similar to the issue which interests you. It may be that your question has just been asked by someone else and a good answer has been posted. To access the archives, use a web browser to go to the mailing list web page at http://www.gnome.org/ and then ...

If none of the emails recently posted to the mailing list address your issue, if you would like clarification to an earlier answer, or if you simply want to thank the developers, you are welcome to send an email of your own to the list. This simply requires writing an email and sending it to

    gnumeric-list@gnome.org

and your posting will eventually get sent to everyone who is subscribed to the list. Please select the subject of your email carefully to make it easy for everyone to see if they are interested in reading and possibly answering your message. For example, the subject "I need help" may be true but is ineffective; a better subject would be "Help needed with statistical regression". Please make it easy for others to give you help.

After you have sent your email, there may be an initial delay while the moderator of the list, a person who acts as editor, reviews your email to see if it is relevant to the discussion. This step is required to limit the junk email that gets sent out to everyone.

Very rarely an email might automatically be discarded if it appeared to be a mass junk mailing. If, after a few days, your email does not appear in the archives and you don't get any response, then re-send your email to the list omitting any signatures or other material that might appear to be commercial solicitation. A simple, text message is the least likely to be discarded by these automatic tools.

Once your email is sent to everyone on the list, someone may answer you. They may choose to answer you directly, to post a response to the list, or to do both. In the hours and days after posting, you can check to see if you received email and check the list archives, as is explained above, to see if someone answered there.

### Internet Chat (IRC)

The GNOME and GIMP projects maintain a series of servers to provide a world wide network enabling an Internet Relay Chat (IRC) system for discussion on issues related to those projects including a discussion channel dedicated to Gnumeric. This is a system by which people can communicate directly with each other by typing lines into an IRC client which are then broadcast to everyone listening in a particular channel. Unfortunately this manual cannot provide a full explanation for how to obtain, install and use an IRC client. There are a number of such programs available, many of which provide users all the freedoms which Gnumeric provides and instructions for these can be obtained from the world wide web. More information and access to such software can easily be obtained by running a search in any world wide web search engine for "IRC" and "client" and the name of the operating system of the machine which will run the software.

The Gnumeric IRC discussion channel is named `#gnumeric` (although the number symbol, #, may not be needed) and is hosted on the series of servers called `GIMPnet`. The best way to connect to GIMPnet is using the IRC server `irc.gimp.org`. That hostname points to a variety of different servers in the United States. If you live elsewhere, after you are connected you can use the chat command `/links` to find a server which is closer on the internet to your location.

If you decide to join the discussion, please be polite, post a question or comment and be prepared to wait a little bit for someone to address you. Several of the developers are permanently connected to the channel and check every half hour or so to see if anyone has asked a question but are working on something else in the meantime. Your question may be answered right away but asking questions using the mailing list may prove to be more efficient since it would not require paying attention to the IRC channel discussion, even if it ultimately requires longer to obtain an answer.

## Reporting a Problem

This chapter explains how to report a problem with Gnumeric so that the problem can be fixed. The same procedure can be used to file a report requesting an enhancement or a new feature.

### Overview

Gnumeric is a complex computer program and therefore necessarily contains some mistakes. The Gnumeric team is keenly interested in finding these errors and correcting them. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome and can be submitted in the same fashion as an error report.

Please, help us to fix any errors by telling us about them.

Reports of problems with Gnumeric provide the project with a way of making sure that the mistake is eventually fixed. Often the mistake is obvious and a fix can be made immediately to be included in the very next release of Gnumeric. Occasionally, the mistake is more complex and the problem may take a while to be resolved. In these cases, the report provides a way to remind the developers that the problem still exists.

Mistakes in programs are often called "bugs" after one of the earliest errors in an old machine which was actually caused by an insect entering the machine and preventing a switch from closing.

The Gnumeric project uses a world wide web system called GitLab to collect reports of program errors and then to track these errors until they are finally fixed. The system was developed as part of the Mozilla web browser project, which explains the origin of the strange name.

The process of submitting the report of a problem or of a suggested enhancement is quite simple and can be completed in just a few steps. The process begins with obtaining a good understanding of the problem to be able to provide a detailed statement explaining the problem exactly. Next, the user must open an account with the GNOME project's GitLab system. Finally, the user must submit the statement of the problem, ideally, along with some information about the computer setup being used by the person experiencing the problem.

The explanation given below should be sufficient to file a report. For more detailed instructions, the main page of GNOME's GitLab can be found at https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME and instructions can be found at https://handbook.gnome.org/issues/reporting.html .

### Defining the error

The most critical step is understanding the error as well as possible. This requires knowing clearly what was happening before the error occurred, what specifically caused the error to occur, what the error condition is and what happened as a consequence of the error.

The most helpful situation to enable the developers to find and correct the error is to come up with a sequence of steps that generate the error. If the error can be repeated, it can almost always be corrected. The most helpful error reports include a small recipe that can cause the error to occur.

### Opening an account

The first time a user uses Gitlab, they must create an account. This account is needed to allow users to be informed of the status of the bug as it is tracked by the system from submission to resolution. The only requirement for opening a Gitlab account is the possession of a valid email address through which the user can receive a password.

#### Creating a new account

Users of Gitlab are automatically redirected to a login page, unless they have previously logged into the system and accepted a 'cookie' with which they identify themselves. The login page has a link called "Create a new account" which will direct users to the account creation page.

Alternatively, by clicking on this link, users can follow a shortcut directly to the account creation page.

Creating a new account is very simple. The account creation page has two fields. In the first, a valid email account must be given. The second asks for a name by which the user wishes to be known. After a user fills out these two fields, clicking on the button labeled "Create Account" will cause a new account to be created and an email sent to the address given in the email field. The email will contain the password used to identify this user.

#### Logging into the account

After creating an account, users can visit the bug entry page for Gnumeric. Here users are asked to login with their email address and password. After logging in, GitLab will present a page to add a bug report.

A user who accepts cookies from `gitlab.gnome.org` will only have to give a password the first time they visit GNOME's GitLab. During all future visits, GNOME will recognize the cookie and thereby identify the user.

### Filing a report

In order to file a report of a problem with Gnumeric, a GitLab account is necessary. Please see the previous section, , for an explanation of how to open an account.

The Gnumeric bug entry page consists of several fields many of which must be filled out to provide a useful bug report. The most important of these will be the "Bug Description" which contains both the brief "Summary" field which acts like an email subject line and the detailed description field "Step to reproduce the bug" which should be used to give a more complete explanation of the problem and, ideally, to describe step by step how to reproduce the bug. The only other field which is required is the "Component" field which can be set to "General" and left to the developers to define more specifically. The remaining fields can be helpful, since they provide extra information which may help resolve the problem, but are not necessary. After filling out these three fields, a user can, if they desire, simply skip to the bottom and press the Commit button.

#### Accessing the GNOME project's GitLab

There are several ways to file a bug report through GitLab.

One of the entries in the Help menu is called Report a Problem. This menu entry should cause a browser window to launch and open GitLab to the Gnumeric page.

Alternatively, users can click on this link to access the Gnumeric page in Gitlab.

If neither of those shortcuts work, the user must use a web browser to access the following location:

    https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gnumeric/-/issues/new

The simplest way would be to use the mouse to copy the text and paste that text into the location bar of a web browser.

The user may be asked to login, by giving their account name and their password, when they begin their browser session with GitLab. See for an explanation of how to login to GitLab.

#### The Bug Description

A useful error report will include a subject that describes the error concisely, has a brief introduction which explains in greater detail what happened and, ideally, has a small recipe that leads to the error being repeated.

The summary field, like the subject of an email message, briefly describes the problem. For example, a useful error report might have a summary "Gnumeric crashes when saving a file".

The field titled "Steps to reproduce the bug" should contain a slightly expanded version of the summary giving an overview of the problem and then give a step-by-step example of how to reproduce the problem. For example, this field could look like the following:

    This report describes an error which causes Gnumeric to crash
    during the use of the file save dialog.

    1) Start a new Gnumeric
    2) In Cell A1 type "hello"
    3) From the "File" menu, select "Save As"
    => The "Save As dialog" opens up
    4) In the file name box, type "my_spreadsheet.gnumeric"
    5) Click on the "Save" button
    => I expected the file to be saved, and to be able to keep
    working but instead Gnumeric disappeared and the file was
    never saved.

    thanks,
    a user

#### Product and Component

The Product should be set to Gnumeric since the GNOME version of GitLab is used for all the different programs in the project.

The Component describes the part of Gnumeric that causes the problem. This may not be obvious so, unless one of the other entries clearly matches, the component should be set to "General". The possible components for Gnumeric are as follows.

Components of Gnumeric

Komponent | Förklaring
--- | ---
Analytics | Problems with calculations and other mathematics.
Charting | Problems with graphical plots of worksheet data.
Compilation | Problems encountered during source code compilation.
Database plugin | Problems when using a database from Gnumeric.
Documentation | Problems with this manual, with the explanations of functions, or with any other explanations.
General | The Default. Use this when none of the other categories apply.
GUI | Problems with the graphical user interface.
GUI Expression Entry Widget | Problems while entering or editing cell contents.
import/export Applix | Problems opening or saving a file to the file format used by the Applix spreadsheet.
import/export HTML | Problems opening or saving a file to the HTML or LaTeX file formats.
import/export MS Excel (tm) | Problems opening or saving a file to any of the various file formats used by the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
import/export OOo / OASIS | Problems opening or saving a file to the OASIS file format used by OpenOffice.Org Calc or Star Office Calc.
import/export Text | Problems opening or saving a file to a text file format including tab, comma and space delimited files.
Installation | Problems encountered during Gnumeric installation.
Main System | This component is no longer used.
Printing | Problems encountered when printing a worksheet.
Sheet Objects | Problems with any images, widgets, or drawing elements added to a worksheet.

#### The Severity and Priority of the Problem

The severity level indicates the seriousness of the problem and the priority level indicates the desire of the developers to address the bug. These fields are used mostly by the developers and should both be left as "normal" unless the user has a good reason to change them.

There are two cases when the user should change the severity of the report. In the first case, if the user has a problem which causes Gnumeric to crash (to suddenly disappear or stop working) or a problem in which data is lost, the severity should be set to "critical". In the second case, if the user has a report about a desired feature, the severity should be set to "enhancement" so the developers will know right away that the desired functionality has not yet been added to the program.

The problem severity levels are explained below.

Problem Severity

Severity Level | Förklaring
--- | ---
blocker | The level used to indicate a problem which must be fixed before any next release.
critical | The level used to indicate a very important problem such as a program crash or loss of data.
major | The level used to indicate a severe problem but one that does not cause a crash or loss of data.
normal | The level to use by default and used for the majority of reports.
minor | The level used for problems which do not affect the functioning of the program.
trivial | The level used to report typos, aesthetic, and other very small problems.
enhancement | These are reports which are requests for future improvements of the program.

The priority level should be left at the "normal" level since this is a field used by the developers themselves.

#### The Version of Gnumeric and GNOME

The version field is used to indicate the version of Gnumeric which was used when the problem occurred. If the problem occurs with several versions, the most recent version number should be used. The version number can be obtained by opening the "About Gnumeric" dialog using the Help menu and the About menu item.

The "GIT" version refers to a version which the user has recently obtained from the Git revision control repository provided by the GNOME project.

The "Other version details" text box can be used to describe any unusual characteristics of the program such as plugins which were added or other uncommon modifications.

If Gnumeric is being used with a GNOME desktop, the version of GNOME being used can be entered in the "Gnome Version" field.

#### The Type of Operating System and Distribution

The "Operating System" field can be used to describe the underlying operating system being used to run the Gnumeric program. Please note, that if the program is run in an artificial environment such as a virtual machine or a Cygwin setup, this should be indicated in the next field.

The "Distribution/Version" field should be used to add detail to the operating system described earlier.

#### Other fields and keywords

These fields are used by advanced users to better sort through all the reports. The "Keywords" field is used to relate the reports to each other and the "CC" field is used by those who are interested to add themselves to those who are notified when changes are made to the report.

#### Submitting the report

In order to submit the bug report into GitLab, once all of the important fields have been submitted, simply click on the Commit button.

Once the bug is committed, a bug report number for this bug will be assigned, and email will be sent either the project maintainer or to one of the other developers which deal specifically with that component of the program. When others take an interest in the bug and add comments or solutions, email will be sent out to the user to inform them of the status of the bug until it is either dismissed or resolved. Bugs can be dismissed if they describe a behaviour that is expected or if they are not deemed important enough to fix.

A user can choose not to be notified when changes to reports are submitted. The user preference page can be accessed here at the following URL.

    https://gitlab.gnome.org/profile/notifications

#### Bookmarking a template

A version of the bug entry page with most of the fields already filled out can be saved as a link and bookmarked for future use. This ability is only of use for developers or for users who have found a large number of bugs in one particular component of Gnumeric.

To use this shortcut, first open a new bug report, then fill out only the fields that will apply to all the future bugs being reported and then click on the button labelled "Bookmark these values". GitLab will then construct a template and will provide a link which can be saved for future use just as any other page on the web can be saved as a bookmark. To use these values, simply clicking on the bookmark will open the Gnumeric page of GitLab with the common fields already filled out.

## Extending Gnumeric

This chapter explains how to go about extending Gnumeric to provide extra functionality. Because Gnumeric is Free Software this is quite easy to do.

### The Approaches to Extending Gnumeric

There are several ways that Gnumeric can be extended to add functionality.

### Defining New Functions

### Programming Gnumeric using Python

A powerful way to access and manipulate data in Gnumeric involves using the Python programming language. As Gnumeric develops from version 1.2, the scripting methods will become increasingly powerful. Since Gnumeric is free software, you could extend it directly using the source code and adding C language functions to the code. Python offers a higher level abstraction through which to interact with the spreadsheet.

Python and Gnumeric can be used in several ways. This section will describe how to obtain Gnumeric, install it and get things configured correctly for access with Python. If you already have the pieces in place, you can skip the section .

This section was written by Charles Twardy. It owes a great deal to the nice guide Travis Whitton wrote: Python/Gnumeric guide for the old API in Gnumeric 1.0. Jon Käre Hellan contributed most of the code to enable Python in Gnumeric and wrote the file `python-gnumeric.txt` in the source tree. Nathan Hurst provided the idea and support.

The Python API, that is the list of methods available in Python, is still experimental and may change!

For further information, the web page maintained by Jon Käre Hellan's has some python plugins and other useful information. That page can be found through this link. The main Gnumeric page may also have useful information.

If you need help online, you may want to check out:

- The Gnumeric Function-Writer's Guide. Until I write one for Python, you'll have to settle for `doc/developer/writing-functions.sgml` in the Gnumeric source tree.

- The files that actually define the Python interface. In particular, `plugins/python-loader/py-gnumeric.c` has good comments at the beginning.

- The instructions on how to use GNOME Git can be found here.

- The gnumeric discussion list: `<gnumeric-list@gnome.org>`

- The IRC channel #gnumeric on the GIMPnet server. Right now, the project leader is Jody Goldberg (jody) and the Debianizer is: J.H.M. Dassen (jhm). Jody, Jon K. Hellan, and Zbigniew Chyla appear prominently in the Python ChangeLog.

#### Installing and Building Gnumeric for Python

This section describes how to obtain the Gnumeric source code, configure it for Python and build it. This section will eventually be removed as Python becomes supported by default.

##### Preliminaries

I'm going to define some variables here so that you can insert the appropriate command or item for your system when they occur. I'll prefix them all with '$'.

- $root: Do whatever you do to become root. The usual options are:

  - `su -` and hit Enter

  - `sudo`

  - `fakeroot` (works in some situations, but not all)

- $version: Whatever your current Gnumeric version is. Some examples:

  - 1.4.20

  - 1.6.20

  - 1.7.90

##### In the Beginning (Installing and Building)

You need to get Python and Gnumeric, and the Python plugin for Gnumeric. You can get the binaries, the packaged source, or the developing edge sources from Git.

###### Getting the binaries (Debian)

I've only tested this on sid (unstable). The version you get from stable (woody) may not act quite the same.

- $root `apt-get install gnumeric gnumeric-python python`

###### Getting and building the current Debianized source

If you have Debian, and don't need the bleeding edge, this is by far the easiest way to get and build the source.

- Change to a directory where you want to hang the source directory.

- $root `apt-get build-dep gnumeric`

- `apt-get source gnumeric`

- `cd gnumeric-`$version

- `debian/rules build`

- To make the .deb packages: $root `./debian/rules binary`

- To install those .deb packages:

- `cd ..` to change to that directory.

- $root `dpkg -i gnum*deb` (presuming you don't have other .deb packages beginning with "gnum" lying around here).

- You may or may not want to remove those .deb files now: $root `rm gnum*deb`

###### Getting and building the source from Git

Remember that this is the developing edge. Things may not work. Generally don't do this unless you are subscribed to the mail list and possibly also on the IRC channel.

You will need a few things for this to work at all:

- gnome-common

- libgsf (se nedan)

- pygtk2 (On Debian, make sure to get python-gtk2 and python-gtk2-dev)

- gnumeric (see below, obviously)

And although the following will build in the main build space, it's probably better to build in a temporary space. But I can't be bothered to learn how to fiddle the build pathways.

- Change to a directory where you want to hang the source directory for Gnumeric and a few other GNOME things.

- Getting and building libgsf:

- git clone git://git.gnome.org/libgsf

- cd libgsf

- Red Hat: `./autogen.sh`

- Debian: `./autogen.sh --prefix=/usr --with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gconf/schemas`

- `make`

- $root `make install`

- If you find that this didn't work, try `make clean` and then repeat from the autogen step.

- Getting and building libgal No longer necessary! (13 June 2003)

- Getting and building goffice:

- git clone git://git.gnome.org/goffice

- cd goffice

- Red Hat: `./autogen.sh`

- Debian: `./autogen.sh --prefix=/usr --with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gconf/schemas`

- `make`

- $root `make install`

- If you find that this didn't work, try `make clean` and then repeat from the autogen step.

- Getting and building gnumeric:

- `git clone git://git.gnome.org/gnumeric gnumeric-head`

- `cd gnumeric-head`

- Red Hat: `./autogen.sh` and wait while it compiles

- Debian: `./autogen.sh --prefix=/usr --with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gconf/schemas`

- `make`

- Optional: $root `make install`

- If you find that this didn't work, try `make clean` and then repeat from the autogen step. For example, sometimes I've had it not create the python-loader.

OK, you should now have gnumeric! Test it! If you installed the Debianized version via apt-get, or did "make install", it should be installed to /usr/bin (or /usr/local/bin on Red Hat?) and you can just type `gnumeric`. Otherwise you will find it in `gnumeric-head/src/` and you will have to run it from there.

#### The Python Console

There is an interactive Python console available from inside Gnumeric. This is a good place to explore things, and if the console is expanded, will be a nice place for scripting. In the meantime, what I have called "Spellbooks" below are much more useful, but are fixed plugins as of Gnumeric startup. So right now I putter in the console as I develop plugin literal in the form of spellbooks. After 1.2.0, Gnumeric will be working on its scripting API, so the two approaches may merge. Or not.

##### Enabling the Python Console

You can run a Python interpreter from inside Gnumeric, but you have to turn it on. To do this you simply uncomment a line in python-loader/plugins.xml. Normally, that file lives in /usr/lib/gnumeric/$version/plugins/python-loader/, or perhaps /usr/local/lib... on Red Hat. I used to suggest making a local but you should probably make a local copy, but that was pain for little gain. So:

- `gnumeric --version` to make sure you get the right version name for the following. (You'll have to do this for every new version of Gnumeric!)

- `cd ~/.gnumeric/` $version `/plugins/`

- Edit `python-loader/plugin.xml`.

- Uncomment the five lines starting with `ui-console-menu service` near the bottom (remove the "<!--" and "-->" tags around the <service...> and </service> tags.

- Spara filen.

- Start gnumeric (same version).

- Select from the Tools the Python console.

- Enjoy!

##### Playing with the Python console

At the top there is a drop-down menu Execute in. Right now your only choice will be Default. After you evaluate functions from other plugins, those environments will become available too (JK says this is called lazy loading). But I'll assume you are using Default. (The only real difference is that you have to import Gnumeric first, and you can't see your plugin functions.)

(Note: older releases required you to type `print dir()` instead of just `dir()`. Fixed in cvs 16 June 2003, and certainly in 1.1.20 and higher.

Let's start by taking a look at the environment.

    >>> import Gnumeric
    >>> dir()
    ['Gnumeric', '__builtins__', '__doc__', '__name__']
    >>> dir(Gnumeric)
    ['Boolean', 'CellPos', 'FALSE', 'GnumericError', 'GnumericErrorDIV0',
    'GnumericErrorNA', 'GnumericErrorNAME', 'GnumericErrorNULL',
    'GnumericErrorNUM', 'GnumericErrorRECALC', 'GnumericErrorREF',
    'GnumericErrorVALUE', 'MStyle', 'Range', 'TRUE', '__doc__',
    '__name__', 'functions', 'plugin_info', 'workbook_new', 'workbooks']

'Gnumeric' is a module that exists only within Gnumeric, and which defines the Gnumeric Python API.

Gnumeric.functions is the list of all the Gnumeric functions you would see in the function browser. You cannot yet do `dir(Gnumeric.functions)` but maybe someone will bind that soon.

RangeRef is not listed. That seems to limit us, though later in the tutorial we'll see how to use regular functions to get inside RangeRefs.

So do some exploring. First, let's poke around to figure out how to use CellPos.

    # I wonder how to use CellPos (I've glanced at the source, but...)

    >>> dir(Gnumeric.CellPos)                 # shows nothing useful

    >>> Gnumeric.CellPos()
    TypeError: CellPos() takes exactly 2 arguments (0 given)

    >>> Gnumeric.CellPos("a1","a2")
    TypeError: an integer is required.        # Right.

    >>> a=Gnumeric.CellPos(1,2)               # It worked!
    >>> a
    <CellPos object at 0x106b6eb8>      # Yeah, I know...

    >>> dir(a)
    ['get_tuple']

    >>> a.get_tuple()
    (1,2)                                     # Cool. That's (col,row)

    >>> str(a)                                # Super cool.
    'B3'                                      # JK hasn't implemented this for tuples yet

Similarly, we can explore Gnumeric.Range:

    >>> r = Gnumeric.Range((1,2),(3,4))
    TypeError: Range() argument 1 must be CellPos, not tuple

    >>> r = Gnumeric.Range(a,a)
    >>> r
    <Range object at 0x1071d888>

    >>> dir(r)
    ['get_tuple']

    >>> r.get_tuple()
    (3, 7, 3, 7)

If you evaluate in the context of a plugin (rather than in Default), then `dir(Gnumeric.plugin_info)` will reveal some simple informational functions you can call for the local plugin(s).

Note: obviously I don't really know what I'm doing, or I wouldn't be poking around like this.

##### More fun with the Python console

Jon K. Hellan writes, "Here are some more things you can do from the console:"

    # Get a workbook
    >>> wb=Gnumeric.workbooks()[0]
    >>> wb
    <Workbook object at 0x862a490>
    >>> dir(wb)
    >>> ['gui_add', 'sheet_add', 'sheets']

    # Get a sheet
    >>> s=wb.sheets()[0]
    >>> s
    <Sheet object at 0x863e8d0>
    >>> dir(s)
    ['cell_fetch', 'get_extent', 'get_name_unquoted', 'rename',
    'style_apply_range', 'style_get', 'style_set_pos', 'style_set_range']

    # Get a cell. s.cell_fetch(0,0) and s[0,0] are synonyms. First
    # coordinate is columns, i.e. s[1,0] is B1.
    >>> c=s[0,0]
    >>> c
    <Cell object at 0x863d810>
    >>> dir(c)
    ['get_entered_text', 'get_mstyle', 'get_rendered_text', 'get_value',
    'get_value_as_string', 'set_text']

    # Change the cell - it changes in the grid
    >>> c.set_text('foo')

    # Retrieve the cell - both ways.
    >>> c.get_value()
    foo
    >>> s.cell_fetch(0,0).get_value()
    foo

Very, very nice. Note, after setting a value, it won't show up until that cell is redrawn. That will happen automatically with plugin functions, but in the console, you may have to click on the cell.

#### Using the built-in Python functions

To enable the Python-loader and Python plugins:

- Select the Tools menu and the Plugins menuitem.

- Select "Python plugin loader" and "Python functions". Restart Gnumeric.

The quickest way to test whether you now have Python functions is to type `=py_capwords("fred flintstone")` in the first cell. After you hit <Enter>, you should see "Fred Flintstone".

You can also click on the functions button, and scroll down to the "Python" category. Select that. You should see at least two functions defined: PY_CAPWORDS and PY_PRINTF. They're not very useful, but they prove you've got the plugins. Test them either via the GUI or by typing into the cell.

I'll presume they worked.

#### Writing your own Python functions

To scribe new magic you must write your spells in places where Gnumeric will find them. That place is in folders under: `~/.gnumeric/<version>/plugins/` Each folder under here is one "spellbook" of new plugin functions. You may put all your spells in one spellbook, or group them neatly depending on your tastes. Each spellbook must have two files. We'll create a spellbook called "myfuncs". A pedestrian name for pedestrian spells. When I have more skill, perhaps I'll make some with better names. Several suggest themselves:

- Transformations: of obvious value for a spreadsheet

- Illusions: statistical functions, clearly

- Charms: presentation graphics

- Necromancy: file repair and missing values?

- Divination: data mining!

##### Prepare the spellbook

In many ways it would be easier to start by copying the py_func spellbook to your local .gnumeric folder, and just adding a function to that. But in general it will be more useful to be able to write your own separate spellbooks, so here we go.

- Make the folder: First we make the folders and get into the right one. As noted above, we'll call our folder (spellbook) myfuncs.

  1. If they don't already exist:

     1. `mkdir ~/.gnumeric`

     2. `mkdir ~/.gnumeric/<version>`

  2. `mkdir ~/.gnumeric/<version>/plugins/myfuncs/`

  3. `cd ~/.gnumeric/<version>/plugins/myfuncs/`

- Make the files: A spellbook has two files. The first is the python file with the functions. The second is the XML file "plugin.xml". The XML file holds that master spells that tell Gnumeric what functions we've defined, and what the name of the python file is, and one other important item. We'll create these as blank files.

  1. `touch my-func.py`

  2. `touch plugin.xml`

- Write the master spells The good news is that you only need to do this once per spellbook. After that you just add spells to it.

  Your XML file must tell Gnumeric about your plugin. Here is a simple template. (If you want to learn about internationalization, see the example in the system's py-func spellbook.) Open up plugin.xml and insert the following lines:

      <?xml version="1.0"?>
      <plugin id="Gnumeric_MyFuncPlugin">
      	<information>
      		<name>Other Python functions from HOWTO</name>
      		<description>A few extra python functions demonstrating the API.</description>
      	</information>
      	<loader type="Gnumeric_PythonLoader:python">
      		<attribute name="module_name" value="my-func"/>
      	</loader>
      	<services>
      		<service type="function_group" id="example">
      			<category>Local Python</category>
      			<functions>
      			</functions>
      		</service>
      	</services>
      </plugin>

  The value of "name" determines the name of your python script (file). In this case, it must be "my-func.py"

  The value of "id" here determines the name of the function dictionary in your python script. In this case, it must be "example_functions" because here the value is "example".

- Prepare to write the spells: Next we'll create a minimal python file. As noted above, we must name the file my-func.py and it must have a dictionary called example_functions. So open up my-func.py and insert the following lines.

      # my-func.py
      #

      from Gnumeric import GnumericError, GnumericErrorVALUE
      import Gnumeric
      import string

      example_functions = {
      }

##### Writing new spells

To add new functions to Python, you now must do five things (three sir!):

- Write the python function in your copy of `my-func.py`.

- Insert the function info into the `example_functions` dictionary at the end of `my_func.py`

- Insert the function name into the functions list at the end of `plugin.xml`.

Writing a simple script: Let's do something very simple: add two numbers together. First, edit my-func.py.

    	# Add two numbers together
        def func_add(num1, num2):
            return num1 + num2

        # Translate the func_add python function to a gnumeric function and register it
        example_functions = {
            'py_add': func_add
        }

Then let the plugin-loader(?) know about your function. Add the following line near the end of plugin.xml (between <functions> and </functions>).

                     <function name="py_add"/>

Now start Gnumeric and type `py_add(2,3)` into a cell. You should get "5". You can also use cell references. If that was in cell A1, go to cell A2 and type `py_add(A1,3)` and you will get "8". But your function won't show up in the GUI list yet.

Tell the GUI: To make your function show up in the GUI, you have to tell Gnumeric some things about it via a standard header, like this:

    	# Add two numbers together
    	def func_add(num1, num2):
            '@FUNCTION=PY_ADD\n'\
            '@SYNTAX=py_add(num1, num2)\n'\
            '@DESCRIPTION=Adds two numbers together.\n'\
            'Look, the description can go onto other lines.\n\n'\
            '@EXAMPLES=To add two constants, just type them in: py_add(2,3)\n'\
            'To add two cells, use the cell addresses: py_add(A1,A2)\n\n'\
            '@SEEALSO='

            return num1 + num2

The text after '@DESCRIPTION=' is the description that shows up in the function GUI. You can make it as simple or detailed as you want. I'm not sure how many other fields get used right now, as I haven't seen the EXAMPLES show up anywhere.

But this still isn't quite right. Gnumeric doesn't know how many arguments the function can handle, nor of what type. So the function GUI will prompt for the two values it knows about (as type "Any") and then keep prompting for more. But py_add cannot accept all types, nor can it handle more than two arguments, so unless you give it precisely 2 numbers, you will get an error when you click "OK".

Know your limits... We got away last time just because Gnumeric was forgiving. Now we need to say that we can accept only 2 values, of type floating-point (which will also handle ints).

Where before we had: `'py_add': func_add`, we should now put: `'py_add': ('ff','num1,num2',func_add)` This says that Gnumeric should expect two floating-point numbers ('ff') with names 'num1' and 'num2', and pass them to func_add.

...and surpass them Of course, there is no reason an add function shouldn't be able to handle a range. The simplest way to do that is to accept a range, and then call Gnumeric's own SUM function on it! All of Gnumeric's functions are available to you in the dictionary Gnumeric.functions, keyed by name. So here is how to write py_sum.

- First, define func_sum (in my-func.py):

      def func_sum(gRange):
      	'@FUNCTION=PY_SUM\n'\
      	'@SYNTAX=PY_SUM(range)\n'\
      	'@DESCRIPTION=Adds a range of numbers together.'\
      	'Just like built-in SUM.\n\n'\
      	'@EXAMPLES=To add values in A1 to A5, just type them in:\n'\
      	'    py_sum(a1:a5)\n'\
      	'@SEEALSO='
      	try:
      		sum = Gnumeric.functions['sum']
      		val = sum(gRange)
      		#  val = reduce(lambda a,b: a+b, vals)
      	except TypeError:
      		raise GnumericError, GnumericErrorVALUE
      	else:
      		return val

- Then insert it into your functions dictionary. That dictionary now looks like this (with 'r' denoting a range type):

      example_functions = {
      	'py_add': ('ff','num1,num2',func_add),
      	'py_sum': ('r', 'values', func_sum)
      }

- Finally, make an entry in the XML list, so that it now looks like:

      			<functions>
      				<function name="py_add"/>
      				<function name="py_sum"/>
      			</functions>

I told you this was the easy way to do it. Obviously it's not very useful to just duplicate Gnumeric functions. But that's as far as I've made it. From what can tell, range objects are packaged as opaque pointers of type RangeRefObject. There seems to be no way to work with them from within Python, so we must rely on the Gnumeric functions.

##### Do it yourself (mostly)

All is not lost, despite the opaque pointers. For in Gnumeric we can read about all the functions that have been defined. Some of those take references (including RangeRefs) and return useful information. For example, under "Lookup" we find "Column" and "Row" which return arrays of all the column (or row) indices in the range. So we can redo the sum function.

Presume we can convert our RangeRef to a start tuple and end tuple. Then we can write sum2:

    def func_sum2(gRange):
    	'@FUNCTION=PY_SUM2\n'\
    	'@SYNTAX=PY_SUM2(range)\n'\
    	'@DESCRIPTION=Adds a range of numbers together,'\
    	'without calling built-in SUM.\n\n'\
    	'@EXAMPLES=To add values in A1 to A5, just type them in:\n'\
    	'    py_sum(a1:a5)\n'\
    	'@SEEALSO='
    	try:
    		[r_begin, r_end] = range_ref_to_tuples(gRange)
    		wb=Gnumeric.Workbooks()[0]   # Careful! This is WRONG! It doesn't
    		s=wb.sheets()[0]             # use the ACTUAL workbook or sheet.

    		val = 0
    		for col in range(r_begin[0], r_end[0]):
    			for row in range(r_begin[1], r_end[1]):
    				cell = s[col, row]
    				val = val + cell.get_value()
    				# Note: this doesn't skip blank cells etc.

    	except TypeError:
    		raise GnumericError,GnumericErrorVALUE
    	else:
    		return val

That's fine as far as it goes, but we need to define the helper function "range_ref_to_tuples". Although I'm rather ashamed to show this ugly literal, here's how I did it (someone suggest a better way, please!):

    def range_ref_to_tuples(range_ref):
    	'''I need a function to find the bounds of a RangeRef. This one
    	extracts them from the Gnumeric "column" and "row" commands, and
    	returns them as a pair of tuples. Surely there is a better way?
    	For example, return a list of cells??'''

    	col  = Gnumeric.functions['column']
    	row  = Gnumeric.functions['row']

    	# "column" and "row" take references and return an array of col or row
    	# nums for each cell in the reference. For example, [[1, 1, 1], [2, 2, 2]]
    	# for columns and [[2, 3, 4], [2, 3, 4]] for rows.

    	try:
    		columns = col(range_ref)
    		rows    = row(range_ref)

    		begin_col = columns[0][0] - 1
    		begin_row = rows[0][0] - 1

    		end_col = columns[-1][-1]
    		end_row = rows[-1][-1]

    		# We subtracted 1 from the begin values because in the API,
    		# indexing begins at 0, while "column" and "row" begin at 1.
    		# We did NOT subtract 1 from the end values, in order to make
    		# them suitable for Python's range(begin, end) paradigm.

    	except TypeError:
    		raise GnumericError,GnumericErrorVALUE
    	except NameError:                     # right name?
    		raise GnumericError,Gnumeric.GnumericErrorNAME
    	except RefError:                     # right name?
    		raise GnumericError,Gnumeric.GnumericErrorREF
    	except NumError:                     # right name?
    		raise GnumericError,Gnumeric.GnumericErrorNUM

    	return [ (begin_col, begin_row), (end_col, end_row) ]

From there, insert the function into the dictionary, and insert its name into `plugin.xml`. I leave these as exercises to the reader (answers in the sample files -- no peeking!). Restart Gnumeric and you should be able to use py_sum2!

There are a couple of glitches:

- It fails the first time with "could not import gobject". Just run again, I don't know what that's about.

- It will only work for Workbook 1 and Sheet 1. JK thinks that there may be no way to get the current Workbook/Sheet in the Python API. Hrm....

- As noted, it should do some simple trapping to skip blank or text-filled cells. That can be done! I just didn't. It's late.

##### Mer hjälp

Relative to the source tree:

- The Python interface is defined in: `plugins/python-loader/py-gnumeric.c` That file also has good notes at the beginning.

- There are interesting things about the way it used to be in: `doc/developer/python-gnumeric.txt`.

##### Program Listings

You can see my examples in full, with more comments:

- `my-func.py`

- `plugin.xml`

#### Upgrading

To upgrade, first choose any method from the installation section above. But note: when you upgrade your Gnumeric version, it will look for your Python scripts in the corresponding version-named subdirectories. For example, if your scripts are in "~/.gnumeric/1.1.17/plugins", but you just upgraded to 1.1.18, you may need to rename that to "~/.gnumeric/1.1.18/plugins". If you want to keep and run several versions of Gnumeric, you'll have to copy or symlink them.

If you want the Python console, you'll also have to re-enable it, following the directions above. If you had made a local copy of the old one, make sure you don't copy or link that to the new directory. It won't work.

Find the new version with `gnumeric --version`, making sure to invoke the proper gnumeric.

#### Fancy tricks

To be written....

- Swapping ranges (not a normal cell function, but I wrote one) that did this. But now I can rewrite it using the GUI, which will make a lot more sense.

- JK's python-only transpose function

- A Gnumeric interface to the Snob clustering algorithm. Coming soon to a spreadsheet near you!

#### Features wanted, and Questions

- Is it really impossible to determine the current workbook/sheet from Python? That's a bummer. [JK writes: "Not yet fixed, but now fixable."]

- Several previous items are no longer on this list, due to the diligence of the Gnumeric hackers.

### Writing New Plugins

## Funktionsreferens

Detta appendix tillhandahåller en lista över alla funktioner som för närvarande definierats i Gnumeric.

### Bitvisa operationer

`BITAND`
`BITAND` bitvist och

    BITAND(values,…)

##### Argument

values: non-negative integers

##### Beskrivning

`BITAND` returnerar det bitvisa ”och” av de binära representationerna av dess argument.

##### Se även

`BITOR`, `BITXOR`.

`BITLSHIFT`
`BITLSHIFT` bitskifta till vänster

    BITLSHIFT(a;n)

##### Argument

a: icke-negativt heltal

n: heltal

##### Beskrivning

`BITLSHIFT` returnerar den binära representationen för a skiftad n positioner till vänster.

##### Observera

Om n är negativ, skiftar `BITLSHIFT` bitarna till höger ABS(n) positioner.

##### Se även

`BITRSHIFT`.

`BITOR`
`BITOR` bitvist eller

    BITOR(values,…)

##### Argument

values: non-negative integers

##### Beskrivning

`BITOR` returnerar det bitvisa ”eller” av de binära representationerna av dess argument.

##### Se även

`BITXOR`, `BITAND`.

`BITRSHIFT`
`BITRSHIFT` bitskifta till höger

    BITRSHIFT(a;n)

##### Argument

a: icke-negativt heltal

n: heltal

##### Beskrivning

`BITRSHIFT` returnerar den binära representationen för a skiftad n positioner till höger.

##### Observera

Om n är negativ, skiftar `BITRSHIFT` bitarna till vänster ABS(n) positioner.

##### Se även

`BITLSHIFT`.

`BITXOR`
`BITXOR` bitvist exklusivt eller

    BITXOR(values,…)

##### Argument

values: non-negative integers

##### Beskrivning

`BITXOR` returnerar det bitvisa ”exklusiva eller” av de binära representationerna av dess argument.

##### Se även

`BITOR`, `BITAND`.

### Komplexa tal

`COMPLEX`
`COMPLEX` ett komplext tal på formen x + y i

    COMPLEX(x;y;i)

##### Argument

x: realdel

y: imaginärdel

i: ändelsen för det komplexa talet, antingen ”i” eller ”j”; standardvärde ”i”

##### Observera

Om i varken är ”i” eller ”j” returnerar `COMPLEX` #VÄRDE!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`IMABS`
`IMABS` absolutbeloppet av det komplexa talet z

    IMABS(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMAGINARY`, `IMREAL`.

`IMAGINARY`
`IMAGINARY` imaginärdelen av det komplexa talet z

    IMAGINARY(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMREAL`.

`IMARCCOS`
`IMARCCOS` komplex arcus cosinus för det komplexa talet

    IMARCCOS(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMARCCOS` returnerar komplex arcus cosinus för det komplexa talet z. Grensnitten är på reella axeln, mindre än -1 och större än 1.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSIN`, `IMARCTAN`.

`IMARCCOSH`
`IMARCCOSH` komplex hyperbolisk arcus cosinus för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCCOSH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMARCCOSH` returnerar komplex hyperbolisk arcus cosinus för det komplexa talet z. Grensnittet är på reella axeln, mindre än 1.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSINH`, `IMARCTANH`.

`IMARCCOT`
`IMARCCOT` komplex arcus cotangens för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCCOT(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSEC`, `IMARCCSC`.

`IMARCCOTH`
`IMARCCOTH` komplex hyperbolisk arcus cotangens för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCCOTH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSECH`, `IMARCCSCH`.

`IMARCCSC`
`IMARCCSC` komplex arcus cosekant för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCCSC(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSEC`, `IMARCCOT`.

`IMARCCSCH`
`IMARCCSCH` komplex hyperbolisk arcus cosekant för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCCSCH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSECH`, `IMARCCOTH`.

`IMARCSEC`
`IMARCSEC` komplex arcus sekant för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCSEC(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCCSC`, `IMARCCOT`.

`IMARCSECH`
`IMARCSECH` komplex hyperbolisk arcus sekant för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCSECH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCCSCH`, `IMARCCOTH`.

`IMARCSIN`
`IMARCSIN` komplex arcus sinus för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCSIN(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMARCSIN` returnerar komplex arcus sinus för det komplexa talet z. Grensnitt sker på reella axeln, mindre än -1 och större än 1.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCCOS`, `IMARCTAN`.

`IMARCSINH`
`IMARCSINH` komplex hyperbolisk arcus sinus för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCSINH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMARCSINH` returnerar komplex hyperbolisk arcus sinus för det komplexa talet z. Grensnitten är på imaginära axeln, under -i och över i.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCCOSH`, `IMARCTANH`.

`IMARCTAN`
`IMARCTAN` komplex arcus tangens för det komplexa talet

    IMARCTAN(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMARCTAN` returnerar komplex arcus tangens för det komplexa talet z. Grensnitten är på imaginära axeln, under -i och ovanför i.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSIN`, `IMARCCOS`.

`IMARCTANH`
`IMARCTANH` komplex hyperbolisk arcus tangens för det komplexa talet z

    IMARCTANH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMARCTANH` returnerar komplex hyperbolisk arcus tangens för det komplexa talet z. Grensnitten är på reella axeln, mindre än -1 och större än 1.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMARCSINH`, `IMARCCOSH`.

`IMARGUMENT`
`IMARGUMENT` argumentet (theta) för det komplexa talet z

    IMARGUMENT(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

Argumentet för ett komplext tal är dess vinkel i radianer från den reella axeln.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!. Om z är 0 returneras 0. Detta skiljer sig från Excel som returnerar ett fel.

`IMCONJUGATE`
`IMCONJUGATE` komplexkonjugatet av det komplexa talet z

    IMCONJUGATE(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMAGINARY`, `IMREAL`.

`IMCOS`
`IMCOS` cosinus av det komplexa talet z

    IMCOS(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMSIN`, `IMTAN`.

`IMCOSH`
`IMCOSH` cosinus hyperbolicus för det komplexa talet z

    IMCOSH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMSINH`, `IMTANH`.

`IMCOT`
`IMCOT` cotangens av det komplexa talet z

    IMCOT(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMCOT`(z) = IMCOS(z)/IMSIN(z).

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMSEC`, `IMCSC`.

`IMCOTH`
`IMCOTH` hyperbolisk cotangens för det komplexa talet z

    IMCOTH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMSECH`, `IMCSCH`.

`IMCSC`
`IMCSC` cosekanten av det komplexa talet z

    IMCSC(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMCSC`(z) = 1/IMSIN(z).

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMSEC`, `IMCOT`.

`IMCSCH`
`IMCSCH` hyperbolisk cosekant för det komplexa talet z

    IMCSCH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMSECH`, `IMCOTH`.

`IMDIV`
`IMDIV` kvoten av två komplexa tal z1/z2

    IMDIV(z1;z2)

##### Argument

z1: ett komplext tal

z2: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z1 eller z2 inte är giltiga komplexa tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMPRODUCT`.

`IMEXP`
`IMEXP` exponentialfunktionen av det komplexa talet z

    IMEXP(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMLN`.

`IMFACT`
`IMFACT` fakulteten för det komplexa talet z

    IMFACT(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMGAMMA`.

`IMGAMMA`
`IMGAMMA` gammafunktionen för det komplexa talet z

    IMGAMMA(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMGAMMA`.

`IMIGAMMA`
`IMIGAMMA` den ofullständiga Gammafunktionen

    IMIGAMMA(a;z;lägre;regularisera)

##### Argument

a: ett komplext tal

z: ett komplext tal

lägre: om sant (standardvärde), är detta den lägre ofullständiga gammafunktionen, annars den övre ofullständiga gammafunktionen

regularisera: om sant (standardvärde), är detta den regulariserade versionen av den ofullständiga gammafunktionen

##### Observera

Den regulariserade ofullständiga gammafunktionen är den oregulariserade ofullständiga gammafunktionen dividerat med GAMMA(a).

##### Se även

`GAMMA`, `IMIGAMMA`.

`IMINV`
`IMINV` inversen av det komplexa talet z

    IMINV(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

`IMLN`
`IMLN` den naturliga logaritmen av det komplexa talet z

    IMLN(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

Resultatet kommer ha en imaginär del mellan -π och +π.

Den naturliga logaritmen är inte unikt definierad för komplexa tal. Du kan behöva addera eller subtrahera en multipel av π från imaginärdelen.

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMEXP`, `IMLOG2`, `IMLOG10`.

`IMLOG10`
`IMLOG10` bas-10-logaritmen av det komplexa talet z

    IMLOG10(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMLN`, `IMLOG2`.

`IMLOG2`
`IMLOG2` bas-2-logaritmen av det komplexa talet z

    IMLOG2(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMLN`, `IMLOG10`.

`IMNEG`
`IMNEG` negativet av det komplexa talet z

    IMNEG(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

`IMPOWER`
`IMPOWER` det komplexa talet z1 upphöjt till z2

    IMPOWER(z1;z2)

##### Argument

z1: ett komplext tal

z2: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z1 eller z2 inte är giltiga komplexa tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMSQRT`.

`IMPRODUCT`
`IMPRODUCT` produkten av de angivna komplexa talen

    IMPRODUCT(z1;z2;…)

##### Argument

z1: ett komplext tal

z2: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om något av z1, z2,… inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMDIV`.

`IMREAL`
`IMREAL` realdelen av det komplexa talet z

    IMREAL(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMAGINARY`.

`IMSEC`
`IMSEC` sekanten av det komplexa talet z

    IMSEC(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Beskrivning

`IMSEC`(z) = 1/IMCOS(z).

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMCSC`, `IMCOT`.

`IMSECH`
`IMSECH` hyperbolisk sekant för det komplexa talet z

    IMSECH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMCSCH`, `IMCOTH`.

`IMSIN`
`IMSIN` sinus för det komplexa talet z

    IMSIN(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMCOS`, `IMTAN`.

`IMSINH`
`IMSINH` sinus hyperbolicus för det komplexa talet z

    IMSINH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMCOSH`, `IMTANH`.

`IMSQRT`
`IMSQRT` kvadratroten för det komplexa talet z

    IMSQRT(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMPOWER`.

`IMSUB`
`IMSUB` differensen av två komplexa tal

    IMSUB(z1;z2)

##### Argument

z1: ett komplext tal

z2: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z1 eller z2 inte är giltiga komplexa tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMSUM`.

`IMSUM`
`IMSUM` summan av de angivna komplexa talen

    IMSUM(z1;z2;…)

##### Argument

z1: ett komplext tal

z2: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om något av z1, z2,… inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMSUB`.

`IMTAN`
`IMTAN` tangens av det komplexa talet z

    IMTAN(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`IMSIN`, `IMCOS`.

`IMTANH`
`IMTANH` tangens hyperbolicus för det komplexa talet z

    IMTANH(z)

##### Argument

z: ett komplext tal

##### Observera

Om z inte är ett giltigt komplext tal returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IMSINH`, `IMCOSH`.

### Databas

`DAVERAGE`
`DAVERAGE` medelvärde av värdena i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DAVERAGE(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DCOUNT`.

`DCOUNT`
`DCOUNT` antal tal i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DCOUNT(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DAVERAGE`, `DCOUNTA`.

`DCOUNTA`
`DCOUNTA` antal celler med data i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DCOUNTA(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DCOUNT`.

`DGET`
`DGET` ett värde från fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DGET(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Observera

Om ingen av posterna matchar villkoren returnerar `DGET` #VÄRDE! Om mer än en post matchar villkoren returnerar `DGET` #NUM!

##### Se även

`DCOUNT`.

`DMAX`
`DMAX` största tal i fält i databas som tillhör en post som matchar kriterier

    DMAX(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DMIN`.

`DMIN`
`DMIN` minsta tal i fält i databas som tillhör en post som matchar kriterier

    DMIN(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DCOUNT`.

`DPRODUCT`
`DPRODUCT` produkt av alla värden i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DPRODUCT(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DSUM`.

`DSTDEV`
`DSTDEV` stickprovsstandardavvikelse av värdena i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DSTDEV(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DSTDEVP`.

`DSTDEVP`
`DSTDEVP` standardavvikelse för populationen av värden i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DSTDEVP(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DSTDEV`.

`DSUM`
`DSUM` summan av värdena i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DSUM(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DPRODUCT`.

`DVAR`
`DVAR` stickprovsvarians för värdena i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DVAR(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DVARP`.

`DVARP`
`DVARP` varians för populationen av värden i fält i databas som tillhör poster som matchar kriterier

    DVARP(databas;fält;kriterier)

##### Argument

databas: ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält

fält: en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas

kriterier: ett intervall som innehåller villkor

##### Beskrivning

databas är ett intervall i vilket rader av relaterad information är poster och datakolumner är fält. Den första raden i en databas innehåller etiketter för varje kolumn.

fält är en sträng eller ett heltal som anger vilket fält som ska användas. Om fält är ett heltal n så kommer den n:e kolumnen att användas. Om fält är en sträng kommer kolumnen med matchande etikett att användas.

kriterier är ett intervall som innehåller villkor. Den första raden för kriterier ska innehålla etiketter. Varje etikett anger för vilka fält som villkoren som anges i den kolumnen gäller. Varje cell under etiketten anger ett villkor som ">3" eller "<9". Ett likhetsvillkor kan anges genom att helt enkelt ange ett värde, t.ex. "3" eller "Jody". För att en post ska användas måste den uppfylla alla villkor i minst en av raderna av kriterier.

##### Se även

`DVAR`.

`GETPIVOTDATA`
`GETPIVOTDATA` sammanfattningsdata från en pivottabell

    GETPIVOTDATA(pivottabell;fältnamn)

##### Argument

pivottabell: cellintervall som innehåller pivottabellen

fältnamn: namn på fältet för vilket sammanfattningsdata begärs

##### Observera

Om sammanfattningsdata är otillgängliga returnerar `GETPIVOTDATA` #REF!

### Datum/Tid

`ASCENSIONTHURSDAY`
`ASCENSIONTHURSDAY` Kristi himmelsfärdsdag i den gregorianska kalendern enligt romersk rit i kristendomen

    ASCENSIONTHURSDAY(år)

##### Argument

år: år mellan 1582 och 9956, standardvärde är året som nästa Kristi himmelsfärdsdag infaller på

##### Observera

Tvåsiffriga år justeras som på övriga ställen i Gnumeric. Datum före 1904 kan också vara förbjudna.

##### Se även

`EASTERSUNDAY`.

`ASHWEDNESDAY`
`ASHWEDNESDAY` Askonsdagen i den gregorianska kalendern enligt romersk rit i kristendomen

    ASHWEDNESDAY(år)

##### Argument

år: år mellan 1582 och 9956, standardvärde är året som nästa askonsdag infaller på

##### Observera

Tvåsiffriga år justeras som på övriga ställen i Gnumeric. Datum före 1904 kan också vara förbjudna.

##### Se även

`EASTERSUNDAY`.

`DATE`
`DATE` skapa ett serienummer för datum

    DATE(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: år för datum

månad: månad i året

dag: dag i månaden

##### Beskrivning

`DATE`-funktionen skapar serienummer för datum. 1-Jan-1900 är serienummer 1, 2-Jan-1900 är serienummer 2 o.s.v. Av kompatibilitetsskäl finns ett serienummer reserverat för det ej existerande datumet 29-Feb-1900.

##### Observera

Om månad eller dag är mindre än 1 eller för stort kommer året och/eller månaden att justeras. För kalkylblad som skapats med Mac-versionen av Excel är serienummer 1 1-Jan-1904.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TODAY`, `YEAR`, `MONTH`, `DAY`.

`DATE2HDATE`
`DATE2HDATE` Hebreiskt datum

    DATE2HDATE(datum)

##### Argument

datum:Gregorianskt datum, standardvärde är idag

##### Se även

`HDATE`, `DATE2HDATE_HEB`.

`DATE2HDATE_HEB`
`DATE2HDATE_HEB` Hebreiskt datum på hebreiska

    DATE2HDATE_HEB(datum)

##### Argument

datum:Gregorianskt datum, standardvärde är idag

##### Se även

`DATE2HDATE`, `HDATE_HEB`.

`DATE2JULIAN`
`DATE2JULIAN` Julianskt dagnummer för angivet gregorianskt datum

    DATE2JULIAN(datum)

##### Argument

datum:Gregorianskt datum, standardvärde är idag

##### Se även

`HDATE_JULIAN`.

`DATE2UNIX`
`DATE2UNIX` Unix-tidsstämpeln som motsvarar ett datum d

    DATE2UNIX(d)

##### Argument

d: datum

##### Beskrivning

`DATE2UNIX` -funktionen översätter ett datum till en Unix-tidsstämpel. En Unix-tidsstämpel är antalet sekunder sedan midnatt (00:00) 1 januari 1970 GMT.

##### Se även

`UNIX2DATE`, `DATE`.

`DATEDIF`
`DATEDIF` differens mellan datum

    DATEDIF(startdatum;slutdatum;intervall)

##### Argument

startdatum: serienummer för startdatum

slutdatum: serienummer för slutdatum

intervall: räkneenhet

##### Beskrivning

`DATEDIF` returns the distance from start_date to end_date according to the unit specified by interval. This function exists primarly for compatibility reasons and the semantics is somewhat peculiar. In particular, the concept of "whole month" is based on whether the ending day is larger than or equal to the beginning day and not on whether a whole calendar month in contained in the interval. A similar treatment is given to "whole year".

##### Observera

If interval is "y", "m", or "d" then the distance is measured in whole years, months, or days respectively. If interval is "ym" or "yd" then the distance is measured in whole months or days, respectively, but excluding any difference covered by whole years. If interval is "md" then the distance is measured in days but excluding any difference covered by whole months.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DAYS360`.

`DATEVALUE`
`DATEVALUE` datumdelen av ett serienummer för datum och tid

    DATEVALUE(serienummer)

##### Argument

serienummer: serienummer för datum och tid

##### Beskrivning

`DATEVALUE` returnerar datumdelen av ett serienummer för datum och tid.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TIMEVALUE`, `DATE`.

`DAY`
`DAY` dag-i-månadsdelen av ett serienummer för ett datum

    DAY(datum)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

##### Beskrivning

`DAY`-funktionen returnerar dag-i-månadsdelen av datum.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`, `YEAR`, `MONTH`.

`DAYS`
`DAYS` skillnad mellan datum i dagar

    DAYS(slutdatum;startdatum)

##### Argument

slutdatum: serienummer för slutdatum

startdatum: serienummer för startdatum

##### Beskrivning

`DAYS` returnerar det positiva eller negativa antalet dagar från startdatum till slutdatum.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`DATEDIF`.

`DAYS360`
`DAYS360` dagar mellan datum

    DAYS360(startdatum;slutdatum;metod)

##### Argument

startdatum: serienummer för startdatum

slutdatum: serienummer för slutdatum

metod: räknemetod

##### Beskrivning

`DAYS360` returnerar antalet dagar från startdatum till slutdatum.

##### Observera

Om metod är 0, standardvärdet, används USA-metoden för MS Excel (tm). Detta är en något komplicerad industristandard där den sista dagen i februari anses vara månadens 30:e dag, men endast för startdatum. Om metod är 1 används den europeiska metoden. I detta fall kommer dag 31 i månaden att anses vara dag 30. Om metod är 2 används en vettigare version av USA-metoden, där båda datumen får samma behandling för februari.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATEDIF`.

`EASTERSUNDAY`
`EASTERSUNDAY` Påskdagen i den gregorianska kalendern enligt romersk rit i kristendomen

    EASTERSUNDAY(år)

##### Argument

år: år mellan 1582 och 9956, standardvärde är året som nästa påskdag infaller på

##### Observera

Tvåsiffriga år justeras som på övriga ställen i Gnumeric. Datum före 1904 kan också vara förbjudna.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

1-argumentsversionen av `EASTERSUNDAY` är kompatibel med OpenOffice för år efter 1904. Denna funktion är inte specificerad i ODF/OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`ASHWEDNESDAY`.

`EDATE`
`EDATE` justera ett datum med ett antal månader

    EDATE(datum;månader)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

månader: antal månader (med tecken)

##### Beskrivning

`EDATE` returnerar datum flyttat framåt eller bakåt det antal månader som anges av månader.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`.

`EOMONTH`
`EOMONTH` månadsslut

    EOMONTH(datum;månader)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

månader: antal månader (med tecken)

##### Beskrivning

`EOMONTH` returnerar serienumret för datumet i slutet på månaden angivet av datum justerat framåt eller bakåt antalet månader som anges av månader.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EDATE`.

`GOODFRIDAY`
`GOODFRIDAY` Långfredag i den gregorianska kalendern enligt romersk rit i kristendomen

    GOODFRIDAY(år)

##### Argument

år: år mellan 1582 och 9956, standardvärde är året som nästa långfredag infaller på

##### Observera

Tvåsiffriga år justeras som på övriga ställen i Gnumeric. Datum före 1904 kan också vara förbjudna.

##### Se även

`EASTERSUNDAY`.

`HDATE`
`HDATE` Hebreiskt datum

    HDATE(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: Gregorianskt år för datum, standardvärde är aktuellt år

månad: Gregoriansk månad i året, standardvärde är aktuell månad

dag: Gregoriansk dag i månaden, standardvärde är aktuell dag

##### Se även

`HDATE_HEB`, `DATE`.

`HDATE_DAY`
`HDATE_DAY` Hebreisk dag för gregorianskt datum

    HDATE_DAY(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: Gregorianskt år för datum, standardvärde är aktuellt år

månad: Gregoriansk månad i året, standardvärde är aktuell månad

dag: Gregoriansk dag i månaden, standardvärde är aktuell dag

##### Se även

`HDATE_JULIAN`.

`HDATE_HEB`
`HDATE_HEB` Hebreiskt datum på hebreiska

    HDATE_HEB(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: Gregorianskt år för datum, standardvärde är aktuellt år

månad: Gregoriansk månad i året, standardvärde är aktuell månad

dag: Gregoriansk dag i månaden, standardvärde är aktuell dag

##### Se även

`HDATE`, `DATE`.

`HDATE_JULIAN`
`HDATE_JULIAN` Julianskt dagnummer för angivet gregorianskt datum

    HDATE_JULIAN(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: Gregorianskt år för datum, standardvärde är aktuellt år

månad: Gregoriansk månad i året, standardvärde är aktuell månad

dag: Gregoriansk dag i månaden, standardvärde är aktuell dag

##### Se även

`HDATE`.

`HDATE_MONTH`
`HDATE_MONTH` Hebreisk månad för gregorianskt datum

    HDATE_MONTH(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: Gregorianskt år för datum, standardvärde är aktuellt år

månad: Gregoriansk månad i året, standardvärde är aktuell månad

dag: Gregoriansk dag i månaden, standardvärde är aktuell dag

##### Se även

`HDATE_JULIAN`.

`HDATE_YEAR`
`HDATE_YEAR` Hebreiskt år för gregorianskt datum

    HDATE_YEAR(år;månad;dag)

##### Argument

år: Gregorianskt år för datum, standardvärde är aktuellt år

månad: Gregoriansk månad i året, standardvärde är aktuell månad

dag: Gregoriansk dag i månaden, standardvärde är aktuell dag

##### Se även

`HDATE_JULIAN`.

`HOUR`
`HOUR` beräkna timdel av decimaltidsdag

    HOUR(tid)

##### Argument

tid: tid på dagen som decimaltidsdag

##### Beskrivning

`HOUR`-funktionen beräknar timdelen av decimaltidsdagen given av tid.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TIME`, `MINUTE`, `SECOND`.

`ISOWEEKNUM`
`ISOWEEKNUM` Veckonummer enligt ISO

    ISOWEEKNUM(datum)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

##### Beskrivning

`ISOWEEKNUM` beräknar veckonumret enligt standarden ISO 8601. Veckor börjar på måndag och vecka 1 innehåller årets första torsdag.

##### Observera

1 januari för ett år hör ibland till vecka 52 eller 53 i föregående år. På samma sätt hör 31 december ibland till vecka 1 på nästkommande år.

##### Se även

`ISOYEAR`, `WEEKNUM`.

`ISOYEAR`
`ISOYEAR` år som motsvarar veckonummer enligt ISO

    ISOYEAR(datum)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

##### Beskrivning

`ISOYEAR` beräknar året som hör till veckonumret enligt standarden ISO 8601.

##### Observera

1 januari för ett år hör ibland till vecka 52 eller 53 i föregående år. På samma sätt hör 31 december ibland till vecka 1 på nästkommande år.

##### Se även

`ISOWEEKNUM`, `YEAR`.

`MINUTE`
`MINUTE` beräkna minutdel av decimaltidsdag

    MINUTE(tid)

##### Argument

tid: tid på dagen som decimaltidsdag

##### Beskrivning

`MINUTE`-funktionen beräknar minutdelen av decimaltidsdagen given av tid.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TIME`, `HOUR`, `SECOND`.

`MONTH`
`MONTH` månadsdelen av ett serienummer för ett datum

    MONTH(datum)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

##### Beskrivning

`MONTH`-funktionen returnerar månadsdelen av datum.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`, `YEAR`, `DAY`.

`NETWORKDAYS`
`NETWORKDAYS` antal arbetsdagar i intervall

    NETWORKDAYS(startdatum;slutdatum;röda_dagar;veckoslut)

##### Argument

startdatum: serienummer för startdatum

slutdatum: serienummer för slutdatum

röda_dagar: vektor av röda dagar

veckoslut: vektor av 0 och 1, indikerar huruvida en veckodag (S, M, T, O, T, F, L) infaller under veckoslutet, standard är {1,0,0,0,0,0,1}

##### Beskrivning

`NETWORKDAYS` beräknar antalet dagar från startdatum till slutdatum efter att veckoslut och röda_dagar hoppats över.

##### Observera

Om en post i veckoslut inte är 0 så är motsvarande veckodag inte en arbetsdag.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om det sista argumentet utelämnas.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`WORKDAY`.

`NOW`
`NOW` serienummer för aktuellt datum och tid

    NOW()

##### Beskrivning

`NOW`-funktionen returnerar serienummer för datum och tid som den beräknas. Att beräkna den på nytt senare ger ett annat värde.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`.

`ODF.TIME`
`ODF.TIME` skapa ett serienummer för en tid

    ODF.TIME(timme;minut;sekund)

##### Argument

timme: timme

minut: minut

sekund: sekund

##### Beskrivning

The `ODF.TIME` function computes the time given by hour, minute, and second as a fraction of a day.

##### Observera

Medan returvärdet automatiskt formateras att se ut som en tid mellan 00:00 och 24:00 så kan det underliggande serienumret för tid vara vilket tal som helst.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`TIME`, `HOUR`, `MINUTE`, `SECOND`.

`PENTECOSTSUNDAY`
`PENTECOSTSUNDAY` Pingstdagen i den gregorianska kalendern enligt romersk rit i kristendomen

    PENTECOSTSUNDAY(år)

##### Argument

år: år mellan 1582 och 9956, standardvärde är året som nästa pingstdag infaller på

##### Observera

Tvåsiffriga år justeras som på övriga ställen i Gnumeric. Datum före 1904 kan också vara förbjudna.

##### Se även

`EASTERSUNDAY`.

`SECOND`
`SECOND` beräkna sekunddel av decimaltidsdag

    SECOND(tid)

##### Argument

tid: tid på dagen som decimaltidsdag

##### Beskrivning

`SECOND`-funktionen beräknar sekunddelen av decimaltidsdag given av tid.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TIME`, `HOUR`, `MINUTE`.

`TIME`
`TIME` skapa ett serienummer för en tid

    TIME(timme;minut;sekund)

##### Argument

timme: timme under dagen

minut: minut i timmen

sekund: sekund i minuten

##### Beskrivning

`TIME`-funktionen beräknar decimaltidsdagen efter midnatt på tiden som anges av timme, minut och sekund.

##### Observera

Medan returvärdet automatiskt formateras att se ut som en tid mellan 00:00 och 24:00 så är det underliggande serienumret ett värde mellan 0 och 1. Om någon av timme, minut eller sekund är negativ returneras #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ODF.TIME`, `HOUR`, `MINUTE`, `SECOND`.

`TIMEVALUE`
`TIMEVALUE` tidsdelen av ett serienummer för datum och tid

    TIMEVALUE(serienummer)

##### Argument

serienummer: serienummer för datum och tid

##### Beskrivning

`TIMEVALUE` returnerar tid-på-dagen-delen av ett serienummer för datum och tid.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATEVALUE`, `TIME`.

`TODAY`
`TODAY` serienummer för dagens datum

    TODAY()

##### Beskrivning

`TODAY`-funktionen returnerar serienummer för det datum som den beräknas. Att beräkna den på nytt på ett senare datum ger ett annat värde.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`.

`UNIX2DATE`
`UNIX2DATE` datumvärde motsvarande Unix-tidsstämpeln t

    UNIX2DATE(t)

##### Argument

t: Unix-tidsstämpel

##### Beskrivning

Funktionen `UNIX2DATE` översätter Unix-tidsstämplar till motsvarande datum. En Unix-tidsstämpel är antalet sekunder sedan midnatt (00:00) 1 januari 1970 GMT.

##### Se även

`DATE2UNIX`, `DATE`.

`WEEKDAY`
`WEEKDAY` veckodag

    WEEKDAY(datum;metod)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

metod: numreringssystem, standard är 1

##### Beskrivning

Funktionen `WEEKDAY` returnerar dag-i-veckan för datum. Värdet på metod avgör hur dagar numreras, standard är 1.

##### Observera

Om metod är 1 så är söndag 1, måndag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 2 så är måndag 1, tisdag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 3 så är måndag 0, tisdag är 1 och så vidare. Om metod är 11 så är måndag 1, tisdag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 12 så är tisdag 1, onsdag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 13 så är onsdag 1, torsdag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 14 så är torsdag 1, fredag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 15 så är fredag 1, lördag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 16 så är lördag 1, söndag är 2 och så vidare. Om metod är 17 så är söndag 1, måndag är 2 och så vidare.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`, `ISOWEEKNUM`.

`WEEKNUM`
`WEEKNUM` veckonummer

    WEEKNUM(datum;metod)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

metod: numreringssystem, standard är 1

##### Beskrivning

`WEEKNUM` beräknar veckonumret enligt metod vilket har standardvärdet 1.

##### Observera

Om method är 1 startar veckor på söndagar och 1 januari hör till vecka 1. Om method är 2 startar veckor på måndagar och 1 januari hör till vecka 1. Om method är 150 används ISO 8601-numrering.

##### Se även

`ISOWEEKNUM`.

`WORKDAY`
`WORKDAY` lägg till arbetsdagar

    WORKDAY(datum;dagar;röda_dagar;veckoslut)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

dagar: antal dagar att lägga till

röda_dagar: vektor av röda dagar

veckoslut: vektor av 0 och 1, indikerar huruvida en veckodag (S, M, T, O, T, F, L) infaller under veckoslutet, standard är {1,0,0,0,0,0,1}

##### Beskrivning

`WORKDAY` justerar datum med dagar, samt hoppar över veckoslut och röda_dagar under tiden.

##### Observera

dagar kan vara negativt. Om en post i veckoslut inte är 0 så är motsvarande veckodag inte en arbetsdag.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om det sista argumentet utelämnas.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`NETWORKDAYS`.

`YEAR`
`YEAR` årsdelen av ett serienummer för ett datum

    YEAR(datum)

##### Argument

datum: serienummer för datum

##### Beskrivning

`YEAR`-funktionen returnerar årsdelen av datum.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DATE`, `MONTH`, `DAY`.

`YEARFRAC`
`YEARFRAC` bråkdel av år mellan datum

    YEARFRAC(startdatum;slutdatum;bas)

##### Argument

startdatum: serienummer för startdatum

slutdatum: serienummer för slutdatum

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`YEARFRAC` calculates the number of days from start_date to end_date according to the calendar specified by basis, which defaults to 0, and expresses the result as a fractional number of years.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`DATE`.

### Ingenjörsfunktioner

`BASE`
`BASE` sträng av siffror som representerar talet n i basen b

    BASE(n;b;längd)

##### Argument

n: heltal

b: bas (2 ≤ b ≤ 36)

längd: minsta längd på resulterande sträng

##### Beskrivning

`BASE` konverterar n till dess strängrepresentation i basen b. Inledande nollor kommer läggas till för att nå den minsta längden som anges av längd.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`DECIMAL`.

`BESSELI`
`BESSELI` Modifierad Besselfunktion av första slaget av ordning α vid x

    BESSELI(x,α)

##### Argument

x: tal

α: ordning (ett icke-negativt tal)

##### Observera

Om x eller α inte är numeriska returneras #VÄRDE!. Om α < 0, returneras #NUM!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om endast heltalsordningar α används.

##### Se även

`BESSELJ`, `BESSELK`, `BESSELY`.

`BESSELJ`
`BESSELJ` Besselfunktion av första slaget av ordning α vid x

    BESSELJ(x,α)

##### Argument

x: tal

α: ordning (ett icke-negativt heltal)

##### Observera

Om x eller α inte är numeriska returneras #VÄRDE!. Om α < 0, returneras #NUM!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om endast heltalsordningar α används.

##### Se även

`BESSELI`, `BESSELK`, `BESSELY`.

`BESSELK`
`BESSELK` BESSELK:Modifierad Besselfunktion av andra slaget av ordning α vid x

    BESSELK(x,α)

##### Argument

x: tal

α: ordning (ett icke-negativt tal)

##### Observera

Om x eller α inte är numeriska returneras #VÄRDE!. Om α < 0, returneras #NUM!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om endast heltalsordningar α används.

##### Se även

`BESSELI`, `BESSELJ`, `BESSELY`.

`BESSELY`
`BESSELY` Besselfunktion av andra slaget av ordning α vid x

    BESSELY(x,α)

##### Argument

x: tal

α: ordning (ett icke-negativt heltal)

##### Observera

Om x eller α inte är numeriska returneras #VÄRDE!. Om α < 0, returneras #NUM!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om endast heltalsordningar α används.

##### Se även

`BESSELI`, `BESSELJ`, `BESSELK`.

`BIN2DEC`
`BIN2DEC` bas 10-representation av det binära talet x

    BIN2DEC(x)

##### Argument

x: ett binärt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal som bara innehåller siffrorna 0 och 1

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DEC2BIN`, `BIN2OCT`, `BIN2HEX`, `BASE`.

`BIN2HEX`
`BIN2HEX` hexadecimal representation av det binära talet x

    BIN2HEX(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: ett binärt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal som bara innehåller siffrorna 0 och 1

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `BIN2HEX` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `BIN2HEX` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`HEX2BIN`, `BIN2OCT`, `BIN2DEC`, `BASE`.

`BIN2OCT`
`BIN2OCT` oktal representation av det binära talet x

    BIN2OCT(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: ett binärt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal som bara innehåller siffrorna 0 och 1

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `BIN2OCT` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `BIN2OCT` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`OCT2BIN`, `BIN2DEC`, `BIN2HEX`, `BASE`.

`CONVERT`
`CONVERT` ett konverterat mätvärde

    CONVERT(x;från;till)

##### Argument

x: tal

från: enhet (sträng)

till: enhet (sträng)

##### Beskrivning

`CONVERT` returnerar en konvertering från ett mätsystem till ett annat. x är ett värde i från-enheter som ska konverteras till till-enheter.

från och till kan vara något av följande:

Vikt och massa:

"brton" Imperial ton

"cwt" U.S. (short) hundredweight

"g" Gram

"grain" Grain

"hweight" Imperial (long) hundredweight

"LTON" Imperial ton

"sg" Slug

"shweight" U.S. (short) hundredweight

"lbm" Pund

"lcwt" Imperial (long) hundredweight

"u" U (atommassa)

"uk_cwt" Imperial (long) hundredweight

"uk_ton" Imperial ton

"ozm" Ounce

"stone" Stone

"ton" Ton

Avstånd:

"m" Meter

"mi" Statute mile

"survey_mi" U.S. survey mile

"Nmi" Sjömil

"in" Tum

"ft" Fot

"yd" Yard

"ell" English Ell

"ang" Ångström

"ly" Ljusår

"pc" Parsec

"parsec" Parsec

"Pica" Pica-punkter

"Picapt" Pica-punkter

"picapt" Pica-punkter

"pica" Pica

Tid:

"yr" År

"day" Dag

"hr" Timme

"mn" Minut

"sec" Sekund

Tryck:

"Pa" Pascal

"psi" PSI

"atm" Atmosfär

"Pa" Pascal

"mmHg" mm kvicksilver

"Torr" Torr

Kraft:

"N" Newton

"dyn" Dyn

"pond" Pond

"lbf" Pound force

Energi:

"J" Joule

"e" Erg

"c" Termodynamiska kalorier

"cal" IT-kalorier

"eV" Elektronvolt

"HPh" Hästkraft-timme

"Wh" Watt-timme

"flb" Fot-pund

"BTU" BTU

Effekt:

'HP' Hästkraft

"PS" Pferdestärke

"W" Watt

Magnetism:

"T" Tesla

"ga" Gauss

Temperatur:

"C" Grader Celsius

"F" Grader Fahrenheit

"K" Kelvin

"Rank" Grader Rankine

"Reau" Grader Réaumur

Volym (flytande):

"tsp" Tesked

"tspm" Tesked (modern, metrisk)

"tbs" Matsked

"oz" Fluid ounce

"cup" Kopp

"pt" Pint

"us_pt" U.S. pint

"uk_pt" Imperial pint (U.K.)

"qt" Quart

"uk_qt"' Imperial quart

"gal" Gallon

"uk_gal" Imperial gallon

"GRT" Registered ton

"regton" Registered ton

"MTON" Measurement ton (freight ton)

"l" Liter

"L" Liter

"lt" Liter

"ang3" Kubik-Ångström

"ang^3" Kubik-Ångström

"barrel" U.S. oil barrel (bbl)

"bushel" U.S. bushel

"ft3" Kubikfot

"ft^3" Kubikfot

"in3" Kubiktum

"in^3" Kubiktum

"ly3" Kubiskt ljusår

"ly^3" Kubiskt ljusår

"m3" Kubikmeter

"m^3" Kubikmeter

"mi3" Kubik-mile

"mi^3" Kubik-mile

"yd3" Kubik-yard

"yd^3" Kubik-yard

"Nmi3" Kubiksjömil

"Nmi^3" Kubiksjömil

"Picapt3" Kubik-Pica

"Picapt^3" Kubik-Pica

"Pica3" Kubik-Pica

"Pica^3" Kubik-Pica

Area:

"uk_acre" Internationell acre

"us_acre" U.S. survey/statute acre

"ang2" Kvadrat-Ångström

"ang^2" Kvadrat-Ångström

"ar" Ar

"ha" Hektar

"in2" Kvadrattum

"in^2" Kvadrattum

"ly2" Kvadratljusår

"ly^2" Kvadratljusår

"m2" Kvadratmeter

"m^2" Kvadratmeter

"Morgen" Morgen (Nordtyska förbundet)

"mi2" Kvadrat-mile

"mi^2" Kvadrat-mile

"Nmi2" Kvadratsjömil

"Nmi^2" Kvadratsjömil

"Picapt2" Kvadrat-Pica

"Picapt^2" Kvadrat-Pica

"Pica2" Kvadrat-Pica

"Pica^2" Kvadrat-Pica

"yd2" Kvadrat-yard

"yd^2" Kvadrat-yard

Bitar och byte:

"bit" Bit

"byte" Byte

Hastighet:

"admkn" Admiralty knot

"kn" knop

"m/h" Meter i timmen

"m/hr" Meter i timmen

"m/s" Meter i sekunden

"m/sec" Meter i sekunden

"mph" Miles i timmen

För enheter i det metriska systemet kan följande prefix användas:

"Y" yotta 1E+24

"Z" zetta 1E+21

"E" exa 1E+18

"P" peta 1E+15

"T" tera 1E+12

"G" giga 1E+09

"M" mega 1E+06

"k" kilo 1E+03

"h" hekto 1E+02

"e" deka 1E+01

"d" deci 1E-01

"c" centi 1E-02

"m" milli 1E-03

"u" mikro 1E-06

"n" nano 1E-09

"p" piko 1E-12

"f" femto 1E-15

"a" atto 1E-18

"z" zepto 1E-21

"y" yokto 1E-24

För bitar och byte kan också följande prefix användas:

"Yi" yobi 2^80

"Zi" zebi 2^70

"Ei" exbi 2^60

"Pi" pebi 2^50

"Ti" tebi 2^40

"Gi" gibi 2^30

"Mi" mebi 2^20

"ki" kibi 2^10

##### Observera

Om från och till är av olika typ returnerar `CONVERT` #-!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel (förutom ”picapt”).

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

`DEC2BIN`
`DEC2BIN` binär representation av talet bas 10-talet x

    DEC2BIN(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: heltal (− 513 < x < 512)

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges och x är icke-negativ fyller `DEC2BIN` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `DEC2BIN` #NUM!

Om utrymme anges och x är negativ ignoreras utrymme.

##### Observera

Om x < − 512 eller x > 511 returnerar `DEC2BIN` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`BIN2DEC`, `DEC2OCT`, `DEC2HEX`, `BASE`.

`DEC2HEX`
`DEC2HEX` hexadecimal representation av bas 10-talet x

    DEC2HEX(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: heltal

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `DEC2HEX` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `DEC2HEX` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`HEX2DEC`, `DEC2BIN`, `DEC2OCT`, `BASE`.

`DEC2OCT`
`DEC2OCT` oktal representation av bas 10-talet x

    DEC2OCT(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: heltal

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `DEC2OCT` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `DEC2OCT` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`OCT2DEC`, `DEC2BIN`, `DEC2HEX`, `BASE`.

`DECIMAL`
`DECIMAL` bas 10-representation av x

    DECIMAL(x;bas)

##### Argument

x: tal i basen bas

bas: basen för x, (2 ≤ bas ≤ 36)

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`BASE`.

`DELTA`
`DELTA` Kroneckers deltafunktion

    DELTA(x0;x1)

##### Argument

x0: tal

x1: tal, standardvärdet är 0

##### Beskrivning

`DELTA` returnerar 1 om x1 = x0 och 0 i andra fall.

##### Observera

Om någotdera argument är icke-numeriskt returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EXACT`, `GESTEP`.

`ERF`
`ERF` Gauss-felfunktion

    ERF(nedre;övre)

##### Argument

nedre: nedre gränsvärde för integralen, standardvärde 0

övre: övre gränsvärde för integralen

##### Beskrivning

`ERF` returnerar 2/sqrt(π)* integral från nedre till övre av exp(-t*t) dt

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel om två argument tillhandahålls och ingetdera är negativt.

##### Se även

`ERFC`.

`ERFC`
`ERFC` Kompletterande Gauss-felfunktion

    ERFC(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`ERFC` returnerar 2/sqrt(π)* integral från x till ∞ av exp(-t*t) dt

##### Se även

`ERF`.

`GESTEP`
`GESTEP` stegfunktion med steg vid x1 evaluerat vid x0

    GESTEP(x0;x1)

##### Argument

x0: tal

x1: tal, standardvärdet är 0

##### Beskrivning

`GESTEP` returnerar 1 om x1 ≤ x0 och 0 i andra fall.

##### Observera

Om någotdera argument är icke-numeriskt returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DELTA`.

`HEX2BIN`
`HEX2BIN` binär representation av det hexadecimala talet x

    HEX2BIN(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: ett hexadecimalt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal om inget A till F behövs

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `HEX2BIN` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `HEX2BIN` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BIN2HEX`, `HEX2OCT`, `HEX2DEC`.

`HEX2DEC`
`HEX2DEC` bas 10-representation av det hexadecimala talet x

    HEX2DEC(x)

##### Argument

x: ett hexadecimalt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal om inget A till F behövs

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DEC2HEX`, `HEX2BIN`, `HEX2OCT`.

`HEX2OCT`
`HEX2OCT` oktal representation av det hexadecimala talet x

    HEX2OCT(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: ett hexadecimalt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal om inget A till F behövs

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `HEX2OCT` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `HEX2OCT` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`OCT2HEX`, `HEX2BIN`, `HEX2DEC`.

`HEXREP`
`HEXREP` hexadecimal representation av numeriskt värde

    HEXREP(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`HEXREP` returnerar en hexadecimal strängrepresentation av x.

##### Observera

Detta är en funktion avsedd för felsökning. Resultatets layout kan ändras samt till och med bero på hur Gnumeric kompilerades.

`INVSUMINV`
`INVSUMINV` inversen av summan av inverserna av argumenten

    INVSUMINV(x0;x1;…)

##### Argument

x0: icke-negativt tal

x1: icke-negativt tal

##### Beskrivning

`INVSUMINV` beräknar inversen av summorna av inverserna av alla dess argument.

##### Observera

Om något av argumenten är negativt returneras #VÄRDE!.

Om något argument är noll är resultatet noll.

##### Se även

`HARMEAN`.

`OCT2BIN`
`OCT2BIN` binär representation av det oktala talet x

    OCT2BIN(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: ett oktalt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `OCT2BIN` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `OCT2BIN` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BIN2OCT`, `OCT2DEC`, `OCT2HEX`.

`OCT2DEC`
`OCT2DEC` bas 10-representation av det oktala talet x

    OCT2DEC(x)

##### Argument

x: ett oktalt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DEC2OCT`, `OCT2BIN`, `OCT2HEX`.

`OCT2HEX`
`OCT2HEX` hexadecimal representation av det oktala talet x

    OCT2HEX(x;utrymme)

##### Argument

x: ett oktalt tal, antingen som en sträng eller som ett tal

utrymme: antal siffror

##### Beskrivning

Om utrymme anges fyller `OCT2HEX` ut resultatet med nollor för att få precis utrymme siffror. Om detta inte är möjligt returnerar `OCT2HEX` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`HEX2OCT`, `OCT2BIN`, `OCT2DEC`.

### Erlang

`DIMCIRC`
`DIMCIRC` antal kretsar som krävs

    DIMCIRC(trafik;sk)

##### Argument

trafik: antal samtal

sk: servicekvalitet

##### Beskrivning

`DIMCIRC` anger ett antal kretsar som behövs för trafik samtal med servicekvalitet sk.

##### Se även

`OFFCAP`, `OFFTRAF`, `PROBBLOCK`.

`OFFCAP`
`OFFCAP` trafikkapacitet

    OFFCAP(kretsar;sk)

##### Argument

kretsar: antal kretsar

sk: servicekvalitet

##### Beskrivning

`OFFCAP` anger trafikkapaciteten given av antalet kretsar med servicekvalitet sk.

##### Se även

`DIMCIRC`, `OFFTRAF`, `PROBBLOCK`.

`OFFTRAF`
`OFFTRAF` förutsett antal erbjudna samtal

    OFFTRAF(trafik;kretsar)

##### Argument

trafik: antal passerande samtal

kretsar: antal kretsar

##### Beskrivning

`OFFTRAF` returnerar det förväntade antalet erbjudna samtal givet trafik passerande samtal (taget från mätningar) på kretsar kretsar.

##### Observera

trafik kan inte överstiga kretsar.

##### Se även

`PROBBLOCK`, `DIMCIRC`, `OFFCAP`.

`PROBBLOCK`
`PROBBLOCK` sannolikhet för blockering

    PROBBLOCK(trafik;kretsar)

##### Argument

trafik: antal samtal

kretsar: antal kretsar

##### Beskrivning

`PROBBLOCK` returnerar sannolikheten för blockering då trafik samtal läses in i kretsar kretsar.

##### Observera

trafik kan inte överstiga kretsar.

##### Se även

`OFFTRAF`, `DIMCIRC`, `OFFCAP`.

### Finans

`ACCRINT`
`ACCRINT` upplupen ränta

    ACCRINT(start;första_ränta;avräkning;ränta;par;frekvens;bas;beräknmetod)

##### Argument

start: datum för start

första_ränta: datum för betalning för första räntan

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

par: parvärde, standard är $1000

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas, standard är 0

beräknmetod: beräkningsmetod, standard är SANT

##### Beskrivning

Om första_ränta < avräkning och beräknmetod är SANT, returnerar `ACCRINT` summan för den upplupna räntan i alla kupongperioder från datumet för start till datumet för avräkning.

Om första_ränta < avräkning och beräknmetod är FALSKT, returnerar `ACCRINT` summan för den upplupna räntan i alla kupongperioder från datumet för första_ränta till datumet för avräkning.

Annars returnerar `ACCRINT` summan av den upplupna räntan i alla kupongperioder från datumet för start till datumet för avräkning.

##### Observera

frekvens måste vara en av 1, 2 eller 4, men det exakta värdet påverkar inte resultatet. start måste komma före både första_ränta och avräkning. frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`ACCRINTM`.

`ACCRINTM`
`ACCRINTM` upplupen ränta

    ACCRINTM(start;maturity;ränta;par;bas)

##### Argument

start: datum för start

maturity: förfallodatum

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

par: parvärde

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`ACCRINTM` beräknar den upplupna räntan för en säkerhet från start till maturity.

##### Observera

par är som standard $1000. Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`ACCRINT`.

`AMORDEGRC`
`AMORDEGRC` avskrivningen för en tillgång enligt franska redovisningsregler

    AMORDEGRC(kostnad;köpdatum;första_period;salvage;period;ränta;bas)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

köpdatum: köpdatum

första_period: slutet på första perioden

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

period: ämnesperiod

ränta: avskrivningsränta

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`AMORDEGRC` calculates the depreciation of an asset using French accounting conventions. Assets purchased in the middle of a period take prorated depreciation into account. This is similar to AMORLINC, except that a depreciation coefficient is applied in the calculation depending on the life of the assets.

Koefficienten för värdeminskningen är:

1,0 för en förväntad livstid mindre än 3 år,

1,5 för en förväntad livstid på minst 3 år men mindre än 5 år,

2,0 för en förväntad livstid på minst 5 år men som mest 6 år,

2,5 för en förväntad livstid på mer än 6 år.

##### Observera

Speciella avskrivningsregler tillämpas för de sista två perioderna resulterande i en möjlig total avskrivning överskridande skillnaden mellan kostnad - salvage. Namngiven efter AMORtissement DEGRessif Comptabilite. Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`AMORLINC`.

`AMORLINC`
`AMORLINC` avskrivningen för en tillgång enligt franska redovisningsregler

    AMORLINC(kostnad;köpdatum;första_period;salvage;period;ränta;bas)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

köpdatum: köpdatum

första_period: slutet på första perioden

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

period: ämnesperiod

ränta: avskrivningsränta

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`AMORLINC` calculates the depreciation of an asset using French accounting conventions. Assets purchased in the middle of a period take prorated depreciation into account.

##### Observera

Namngiven efter AMORtissement DEGRessif Comptabilite. Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`AMORDEGRC`.

`COUPDAYBS`
`COUPDAYBS` antalet dagar från början på kupongperioden till avräkningsdatumet

    COUPDAYBS(avräkning;maturity;frekvens;bas;eom)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

eom: flagga för förfallodagsdatum i slutet på månad

##### Beskrivning

`COUPDAYBS` beräknar antalet dagar från början på kupongperioden till avräkningsdatumet.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`COUPDAYS`.

`COUPDAYS`
`COUPDAYS` antalet dagar i kupongperioden för avräkningsdatumet

    COUPDAYS(avräkning;maturity;frekvens;bas;eom)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

eom: flagga för förfallodagsdatum i slutet på månad

##### Beskrivning

`COUPDAYS` beräknar antalet dagar i kupongperioden för avräkningsdatumet.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`COUPDAYBS`, `COUPDAYSNC`.

`COUPDAYSNC`
`COUPDAYSNC` antalet dagar från avräkningsdatumet till nästa kupongperiod

    COUPDAYNS(avräkning;maturity;frekvens;bas;eom)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

eom: flagga för förfallodagsdatum i slutet på månad

##### Beskrivning

`COUPDAYSNC` beräknar antalet dagar från avräkningsdatumet till nästa kupongperiod.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`COUPDAYS`, `COUPDAYBS`.

`COUPNCD`
`COUPNCD` kupongdatumet som följer avräkningen

    COUPNCD(avräkning;maturity;frekvens;bas;eom)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

eom: flagga för förfallodagsdatum i slutet på månad

##### Beskrivning

`COUPNCD` beräknar kupongdatumet som följer avräkningen.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`COUPPCD`, `COUPDAYS`, `COUPDAYBS`.

`COUPNUM`
`COUPNUM` antal kuponger

    COUPNUM(avräkning;maturity;frekvens;bas;eom)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

eom: flagga för förfallodagsdatum i slutet på månad

##### Beskrivning

`COUPNUM` beräknar antalet kuponger som ska betalas mellan avräkning och förfallodagsdatumet, avrundade uppåt.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`COUPNCD`, `COUPPCD`.

`COUPPCD`
`COUPPCD` sista kupongdatumet innan avräkningen

    COUPPCD(avräkning;maturity;frekvens;bas;eom)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

eom: flagga för förfallodagsdatum i slutet på månad

##### Beskrivning

`COUPPCD` beräknar kupongdatumet innan avräkningen.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`COUPNCD`, `COUPDAYS`, `COUPDAYBS`.

`CUM_BIV_NORM_DIST`
`CUM_BIV_NORM_DIST` kumulativ bivariat normalfördelning

    CUM_BIV_NORM_DIST(a;b;rho)

##### Argument

a: gräns för första slumpvariabel

b: gräns för andra slumpvariabel

rho: korrelation mellan de två slumpvariablerna

##### Beskrivning

`CUM_BIV_NORM_DIST` beräknar sannolikheten att två standard-normalfördelade slumpvariabler med korrelation rho är mindre än a respektive b.

`CUMIPMT`
`CUMIPMT` kumulativ räntebetalning

    CUMIPMT(ränta;nper;nv;startperiod;slutperiod;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: räntesats per period

nper: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

startperiod: första period att ackumulera för

slutperiod: sista perioden att ackumulera för

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`CUMIPMT` beräknar den kumulativa räntan betalad på ett lån från startperiod till slutperiod.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`IPMT`.

`CUMPRINC`
`CUMPRINC` kumulativa kapitalet

    CUMPRINC(ränta;nper;nv;startperiod;slutperiod;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: räntesats per period

nper: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

startperiod: första period att ackumulera för

slutperiod: sista perioden att ackumulera för

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`CUMPRINC` returnerar det kumulativa kapitalet betalat på ett lån från startperiod till slutperiod.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`PPMT`.

`DB`
`DB` avskrivningen för en tillgång

    DB(kostnad;salvage;livstid;period;månad)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

livstid: antal perioder

period: ämnesperiod

månad: antal månader i avskrivningens första år

##### Beskrivning

`DB` beräknar avskrivningen för en tillgång för en given period med fast degressiv avskrivningsmetod.

##### Se även

`DDB`, `SLN`, `SYD`.

`DDB`
`DDB` avskrivningen för en tillgång

    DDB(kostnad;salvage;livstid;period;faktor)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

livstid: antal perioder

period: ämnesperiod

faktor: faktor för degressiv avskrivning

##### Beskrivning

`DDB` beräknar avskrivningen för en tillgång för en given period med dubbel-degressiv avskrivningsmetod.

##### Se även

`DB`, `SLN`, `SYD`.

`DISC`
`DISC` diskonteringsränta

    DISC(avräkning;maturity;par;inlösen;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

par: pris per $100 värde

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`DISC` beräknar diskonteringsräntan för en säkerhet.

##### Observera

inlösen är inlösningsvärdet vid värde $100. Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`PRICEMAT`.

`DOLLARDE`
`DOLLARDE` konverterar till dollarsumma i decimaltal

    DOLLARDE(bråkdelsdollar;bråkdel)

##### Argument

bråkdelsdollar: summa att konvertera

bråkdel: nämnare

##### Beskrivning

`DOLLARDE` konverterar en bråkdel av dollar till ett decimaltal. Detta är inversen av funktionen DOLLARFR.

##### Se även

`DOLLARFR`.

`DOLLARFR`
`DOLLARFR` konvertera till dollar-bråkdel

    DOLLARFR(decimaldollar;bråkdel)

##### Argument

decimaldollar: summa att konvertera

bråkdel: nämnare

##### Beskrivning

`DOLLARFR` converts a decimal dollar amount into a fractional amount which is represented as the digits after the decimal point. For example, 2/8 would be represented as .2 while 3/16 would be represented as .03. This is the inverse of the DOLLARDE function.

##### Se även

`DOLLARDE`.

`DURATION`
`DURATION` (Macaulay)-livslängden på en säkerhet

    DURATION(avräkning;maturity;kupong;avkastning;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

kupong: den årliga kupongräntan

avkastning: årlig avkastning för en säkerhet

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`DURATION` beräknar (Macaulay)-livslängden på en säkerhet.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`MDURATION`, `G_DURATION`.

`EFFECT`
`EFFECT` effektiv räntesats

    EFFECT(ränta;nper)

##### Argument

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

nper: antal perioder använda för sammanräkning

##### Beskrivning

`EFFECT` beräknar den effektiva räntesatsen med formeln (1+ränta/nper)^nper-1.

##### Se även

`NOMINAL`.

`EURO`
`EURO` motsvarande 1 EUR

    EURO(valuta)

##### Argument

valuta: valutakod med tre bokstäver

##### Beskrivning

`EURO` beräknar den nationella växelkursen motsvarande 1 EUR för de nationella valutor som ersattes av Euro vid dess introduktion.

##### Observera

valuta måste vara en av ATS (Österrike), BEF (Belgien), CYP (Cypern), DEM (Tyskland), EEK (Estland), ESP (Spanien), EUR (Euro), FIM (Finland), FRF (Frankrike), GRD (Grekland), IEP (Irland), ITL (Italien), LUF (Luxemburg), MTL (Malta), NLG (Nederländerna), PTE (Portugal), SIT (Slovenien) eller SKK (Slovakien). Denna funktion kommer troligtvis inte att vara användbar något mera.

##### Se även

`EUROCONVERT`.

`EUROCONVERT`
`EUROCONVERT` summa innan Euro från en valuta till en annan

    EUROCONVERT(n;källa;mål;hel_precision;trianguleringsprecision)

##### Argument

n: mängd

källa: valutakod med tre bokstäver för källvaluta

mål: valutakod med tre bokstäver för målvaluta

hel_precision: huruvida hel precision ska tillhandahållas; standard är falskt

trianguleringsprecision: antal siffror (minst 3) att rundas av till efter konvertering av källvalutan till euro; standard är ingen avrundning

##### Beskrivning

`EUROCONVERT` konverterar n enheter av valutan källa till valutan mål. Kurserna som används är de officiella som användes vid introduktion av Euron.

##### Observera

Om hel_precision är sant, kommer resultatet inte att avrundas; om falskt avrundas det till 0 eller 2 decimaler beroende på målvaluta, standardvärde är falskt. källa och mål måste vara en av valutorna som listas för EURO-funktionen. Denna funktion kommer troligtvis inte att vara användbar något mera.

##### Se även

`EURO`.

`FV`
`FV` framtida värde

    FV(ränta;nper;bet;nv;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiv räntesats per period

nper: antal perioder

bet: betalning för en period

nv: nuvarande värde

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`FV` beräknar det framtida värdet av pv flyttad nper perioder till framtiden, antagande en periodisk betalning av bet och en räntesats ränta per period.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`PV`.

`FVSCHEDULE`
`FVSCHEDULE` framtida värde

    FVSCHEDULE(kapital;schedule)

##### Argument

kapital: ursprungligt värde

schedule: intervall för ränta

##### Beskrivning

`FVSCHEDULE` beräknar det framtida värdet för kapital efter att ha tillämpat ett ränteintervall för sammanräkning.

##### Se även

`FV`.

`G_DURATION`
`G_DURATION` livslängden på en investering

    G_DURATION(ränta;nv;fv)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

##### Beskrivning

`G_DURATION` beräknar antalet perioder som behövs för att en investering ska nå ett önskat värde.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`G_DURATION` är OpenFormula-funktionen PDURATION.

##### Se även

`FV`, `PV`, `DURATION`, `MDURATION`.

`INTRATE`
`INTRATE` räntesats

    INTRATE(avräkning;maturity;investering;inlösen;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

investering: betald summa vid avräkning

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`INTRATE` beräknar räntesats för en helt betald säkerhet.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`RECEIVED`.

`IPMT`
`IPMT` räntesats för en period

    IPMT(ränta;per;nper;nv;fv;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

per: periodnummer

nper: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`IPMT` (interest payment for period) beräknar räntesatsdelen för en annuitetsbetalning för period nummer per.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`PPMT`.

`IRR`
`IRR` intern ränta för återbetalning

    IRR(värden;gissning)

##### Argument

värden: kassaflöde

gissning: en uppskattning av vad resultatet borde bli

##### Beskrivning

`IRR` beräknar den interna återbetalningsräntan för ett kassaflöde med periodisk avbetalning. värden listar betalningar (negativa värden) och mottagna summor (positiva värden) för varje period.

##### Observera

Frivillig gissning behövs eftersom det kan finnas mer än ett giltigt resultat. Standardvärdet är 10%.

##### Se även

`XIRR`.

`ISPMT`
`ISPMT` räntesats för en period

    ISPMT(ränta;per;nper;nv)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

per: periodnummer

nper: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

##### Beskrivning

`ISPMT` beräknar räntebetalningen för periodnummer per.

##### Se även

`PV`.

`MDURATION`
`MDURATION` modifierade (Macaulay)-livslängden på en säkerhet

    MDURATION(avräkning;maturity;kupong;avkastning;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

kupong: den årliga kupongräntan

avkastning: årlig avkastning för en säkerhet

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`MDURATION` beräknar den modifierade (Macaulay)-livslängden på en säkerhet.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`DURATION`, `G_DURATION`.

`MIRR`
`MIRR` modifierad intern ränta för återbetalning

    MIRR(värden;finansränta;återinvränta)

##### Argument

värden: kassaflöde

finansränta: räntesats för finanskostnad

återinvränta: räntesats för återinvestering

##### Beskrivning

`MIRR` beräknar den modifierade interna räntan för återbetalning av ett periodiskt kassaflöde.

##### Se även

`IRR`, `XIRR`.

`NOMINAL`
`NOMINAL` nominella räntesatsen

    NOMINAL(ränta;nper)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

nper: antal perioder använda för sammanräkning

##### Beskrivning

`NOMINAL` beräknar nominella räntesatsen från den effektiva räntesatsen.

##### Se även

`EFFECT`.

`NPER`
`NPER` antal perioder

    NPER(ränta;bet;nv;fv;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

bet: betalning för en period

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`NPER` (number of periods) beräknar antalet perioder för en investering baserad på periodiska, konstanta betalningar och konstant ränta.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`PV`, `FV`.

`NPV`
`NPV` aktuellt nettovärde

    NPV(ränta;värde1;värde2,…)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiv räntesats per period

värde1: kassaflöde för period 1

värde2: kassaflöde för period 2

##### Beskrivning

`NPV` beräknar nettovärdet för ett kassaflöde.

##### Se även

`PV`.

`ODDFPRICE`
`ODDFPRICE` priset för en säkerhet som har en udda första period

    ODDFPRICE(avräkning;maturity;start;första_ränta;ränta;avkastning;inlösen;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

start: datum för start

första_ränta: datum för första ränta

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

avkastning: årlig avkastning för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`ODDFPRICE` beräknar priset per $100 värde av en säkerhet som betalar periodisk ränta men har en udda första period.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`ODDLPRICE`, `ODDFYIELD`.

`ODDFYIELD`
`ODDFYIELD` avkastning för en säkerhet som har en udda första period

    ODDFYIELD(avräkning;maturity;start;första_ränta;ränta;pris;inlösen;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

start: datum för start

första_ränta: datum för första ränta

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

pris: priset för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`ODDFYIELD` beräknar avkastningen för en säkerhet som betalar periodisk ränta men har en udda första period.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`ODDFPRICE`, `ODDLYIELD`.

`ODDLPRICE`
`ODDLPRICE` priset för en säkerhet som har en udda sista period

    ODDLPRICE(avräkning;maturity;sista_ränta;ränta;avkastning;inlösen;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

sista_ränta: sista räntedatum

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

avkastning: årlig avkastning för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`ODDLPRICE` beräknar priset per $100 värde av en säkerhet som betalar periodisk ränta men som har en udda sista period.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`YIELD`, `DURATION`.

`ODDLYIELD`
`ODDLYIELD` avkastning för en säkerhet som har en udda sista period

    ODDLYIELD(avräkning;maturity;sista_ränta;ränta;pris;inlösen;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

sista_ränta: sista räntedatum

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

pris: priset för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`ODDLYIELD` beräknar avkastningen för en säkerhet som betalar periodisk ränta men som har en udda sista period.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`YIELD`, `DURATION`.

`OPT_2_ASSET_CORRELATION`
`OPT_2_ASSET_CORRELATION` det teoretiska priset på optioner med två tillgångar med korrelation rho

    OPT_2_ASSET_CORRELATION(call_put_flag;spot1;spot2;strike1;strike2;tid;cost_of_carry1;cost_of_carry2;ränta;volatilitet1;volatilitet2;rho)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot1: spotpris för den underliggande tillgången för den första optionen

spot2: spotpriset för den underliggande tillgången för den andra optionen

strike1: lösenpriserna för den första optionen

strike2: lösenpriserna för den andra optionen

tid: löptid i år

cost_of_carry1: nettokostnaden för att hålla den underliggande tillgången för den första optionen (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen)

cost_of_carry2: nettokostnaden för att hålla den underliggande tillgången för den andra optionen (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen)

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

volatilitet1: årlig volatilitet i priset för den underliggande tillgången för den första optionen

volatilitet2: årlig volatilitet i priset för den underliggande tillgången för den andra optionen

rho: korrelation mellan de två underliggande tillgångarna

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_2_ASSET_CORRELATION` modellerar det teoretiska priset på optioner med två tillgångar med korrelation rho. Utbetalningen för ett köp är max(spot2 - strike2,0) om spot1 > strike1, annars 0. Utbetalningen för sälj är max(strike2 - spot2, 0) om spot1 < strike1, annars 0.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_AMER_EXCHANGE`
`OPT_AMER_EXCHANGE` det teoretiska priset på en amerikansk option för att växla tillgångar

    OPT_AMER_EXCHANGE(spot1;spot2;kvnt1;kvnt2;tid;ränta;cost_of_carry1;cost_of_carry2;volatilitet1;volatilitet2;rho)

##### Argument

spot1: spotpris för tillgång 1

spot2: spotpris för tillgång 2

kvnt1: kvantitet av tillgång 1

kvnt2: kvantitet av tillgång 2

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry1: nettokostnaden för att hålla tillgång 1 (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen)

cost_of_carry2: nettokostnaden för att hålla tillgång 2 (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen)

volatilitet1: årlig volatilitet i priset för tillgång 1

volatilitet2: årlig volatilitet i priset för tillgång 2

rho: korrelation mellan priserna för de två tillgångarna

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_AMER_EXCHANGE` modellerar det teoretiska priset på en amerikansk option för att växla en tillgång med kvantitet kvnt2 och spotpris spot2 för en annan med kvantitet kvnt1 och spotpris spot1.

##### Se även

`OPT_EURO_EXCHANGE`, `OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BAW_AMER`
`OPT_BAW_AMER` teoretiska priset för en option enligt Barone Adesie & Whaley-approximationen

    OPT_BAW_AMER(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i dagar

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BINOMIAL`
`OPT_BINOMIAL` det teoretiska priset på antingen en amerikansk eller europeisk option med hjälp av ett binomialträd

    OPT_BINOMIAL(amer_euro_flag;call_put_flag;antal_tidssteg;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

amer_euro_flag: är antingen "a" eller "e" för att indikera om optionen är amerikansk eller europeisk

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

antal_tidssteg: antal tidssteg som används i värderingen

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

##### Observera

Ett större antal_tidssteg ger större noggrannhet men `OPT_BINOMIAL` tar längre tid att beräkna.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BJER_STENS`
`OPT_BJER_STENS` teoretiska priset för en amerikansk option enligt Bjerksund & Stensland-approximationsteknik

    OPT_BJER_STENS(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i dagar

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BS`
`OPT_BS` pris för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna priset på en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot.

##### Observera

Det returnerade värdet kommer att uttryckas i samma enhet som strike och spot.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_VEGA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BS_CARRYCOST`
`OPT_BS_CARRYCOST` elasticitet för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS_CARRYCOST(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS_CARRYCOST` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna ”elasticitet” för en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot. Elasticitet för en option är förändringstakten av dess pris med avseende på dess cost_of_carry.

##### Observera

Elasticitet uttrycks som ändringshastigheten för optionsvärdet, per 100% volatilitet.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BS_DELTA`
`OPT_BS_DELTA` delta för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS_DELTA(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS_DELTA` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna ”delta” på en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot.

##### Observera

Det returnerade värdet kommer att uttryckas i samma enhet som strike och spot.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_VEGA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BS_GAMMA`
`OPT_BS_GAMMA` gamma för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS_GAMMA(spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS_GAMMA` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna ”gamma” på en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot. Gamma för en option är andraderivatan av dess pris med avseende på priset på underliggande tillgång.

##### Observera

Gamma uttrycks som hastigheten för förändring för delta per enhetsändring i spot. Gamma är densamma för köp och sälj.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_VEGA`.

`OPT_BS_RHO`
`OPT_BS_RHO` rho för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS_RHO(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS_RHO` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna ”rho” för en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot. rho för en option är förändringstakten av dess pris med avseende på dess riskfria ränta.

##### Observera

Rho uttrycks som ändringshastigheten för optionsvärdet, per 100% ändring i ränta.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_VEGA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BS_THETA`
`OPT_BS_THETA` theta för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS_THETA(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS_THETA` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna ”theta” för en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot. Theta för en option är förändringstakten av dess pris med avseende på dess utgångsdatum.

##### Observera

Theta är uttryckt som negativet av ändringshastigheten för optionsvärdet per 365,25 dagar.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_VEGA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_BS_VEGA`
`OPT_BS_VEGA` vega för en europeisk option

    OPT_BS_VEGA(spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_BS_VEGA` använder Black-Scholes-modellen för att beräkna ”vega” för en europeisk option med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot. Vega för en option är förändringstakten av dess pris med avseende på dess volatilitet.

##### Observera

Vega är densamma för köp och sälj. Vega uttrycks som ändringshastigheten för optionsvärdet, per 100% volatilitet.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_COMPLEX_CHOOSER`
`OPT_COMPLEX_CHOOSER` teoretiska priset på en komplex väljaroption

    OPT_COMPLEX_CHOOSER(spot;strike_call;strike_put;tid;time_call;time_put;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

spot: spotpris

strike_call: lösenpris om inlöst som en köpoption

strike_put: lösenpris om inlöst som en säljoption

tid: tiden tills ägaren väljer en köp- eller säljoption, angivet i år

time_call: tiden i år tills förfallodatum för en köpoption om den väljs

time_put: tiden i år tills förfallodatum för en säljoption om den väljs

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_EURO_EXCHANGE`
`OPT_EURO_EXCHANGE` det teoretiska priset på en europeisk option för att växla tillgångar

    OPT_EURO_EXCHANGE(spot1;spot2;kvnt1;kvnt2;tid;ränta;cost_of_carry1;cost_of_carry2;volatilitet1;volatilitet2;rho)

##### Argument

spot1: spotpris för tillgång 1

spot2: spotpris för tillgång 2

kvnt1: kvantitet av tillgång 1

kvnt2: kvantitet av tillgång 2

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry1: nettokostnaden för att hålla tillgång 1 (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen)

cost_of_carry2: nettokostnaden för att hålla tillgång 2 (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen)

volatilitet1: årlig volatilitet i priset för tillgång 1

volatilitet2: årlig volatilitet i priset för tillgång 2

rho: korrelation mellan priserna för de två tillgångarna

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_EURO_EXCHANGE` modellerar det teoretiska priset på en europeisk option för att växla en tillgång med kvantitet kvnt2 och spot2 för en annan, med kvantitet kvnt1 och spotpris spot1.

##### Se även

`OPT_AMER_EXCHANGE`, `OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_EXEC`
`OPT_EXEC` teoretiskt pris för ledningsoptioner

    OPT_EXEC(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry;lambda)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i dagar

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

lambda: avhoppsfrekvensen för ledningen

##### Observera

Modellen antar att ledningen släpper sina optioner om de lämnar företaget.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_EXTENDIBLE_WRITER`
`OPT_EXTENDIBLE_WRITER` det teoretiska priset på utökningsbara utgivaroptioner

    OPT_EXTENDIBLE_WRITER(call_put_flag;spot;strike1;strike2;tid1;tid2;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike1: lösenpriset som satts för optionen

strike2: lösenpriset som sätts på nytt för optionen om den är ”out of the money” vid tid1

tid1: tiden till förfallodatumet i år på första inlösentiden

tid2: tiden till förfallodatumet i år på den utökade inlösentiden om vald

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_EXTENDIBLE_WRITER` modellerar det teoretiska priset på utökningsbara utgivaroptioner. Detta är optioner som kan utöka inlösentiden till tid2 om optionen är ”out of the money” vid tid1.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_FIXED_STRK_LKBK`
`OPT_FIXED_STRK_LKBK` teoretiskt pris på en lookback-option med fast lösenpris

    OPT_FIXED_STRK_LKBK(call_put_flag;spot;spot_min;spot_max;strike;tid;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

spot_min: är minsta spotpris så här långt för den underliggande tillgången

spot_max: är högsta spotpris så här långt för den underliggande tillgången

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_FIXED_STRK_LKBK` modellerar det teoretiska priset på en option med fast lösenpris där optionens ägare kan nyttja den vid förfallodatumet till det mest fördelaktiga priset på den underliggande tillgången som observerats under optionens livstid.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_FLOAT_STRK_LKBK`
`OPT_FLOAT_STRK_LKBK` teoretiskt pris på en lookback-option med flytande lösenpris

    OPT_FLOAT_STRK_LKBK(call_put_flag;spot;spot_min;spot_max;tid;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

spot_min: är minsta spotpris så här långt för den underliggande tillgången

spot_max: är högsta spotpris så här långt för den underliggande tillgången

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_FLOAT_STRK_LKBK` modellerar det teoretiska priset på en option med flytande lösenpris där optionens ägare kan nyttja den vid förfallodatumet till det mest fördelaktiga priset på den underliggande tillgången som observerats under optionens livstid.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_FORWARD_START`
`OPT_FORWARD_START` teoretiska priset på optioner med start i framtiden

    OPT_FORWARD_START(call_put_flag;spot;alfa;starttid;tid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

alfa: andelen som sätter lösenpriset till det framtida datumet starttid

starttid: tid till optionen startar i dagar

tid: löptid i dagar

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_FRENCH`
`OPT_FRENCH` teoretiskt pris för en europeisk option justerad för handelsdagsvolatilitet

    OPT_FRENCH(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ttid;ränta;volatilitet;cost_of_carry)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: förhållandet för antalet kalenderdagar till förfallodatum och antalet kalenderdagar på året

ttid: förhållandet för antalet handelsdagar till förfallodatum och antalet handelsdagar på året

räntesats: riskfri räntesats fram till lösendatumet i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången (för vanliga aktier, den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen), standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_FRENCH` värderar det teoretiska priset för en europeisk option justerad för handelsdagsvolatilitet, med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_GARMAN_KOHLHAGEN`
`OPT_GARMAN_KOHLHAGEN` teoretiskt pris för en europeisk valutaoption

    OPT_GARMAN_KOHLHAGEN(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;nationell_räntesats;utländsk_räntesats;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: dagar till lösendatum

nationell_räntesats: nationell riskfri räntesats till förfallodatum i procent

utländsk_räntesats: utländsk riskfri ränta till förfallodatum i procent

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_GARMAN_KOHLHAGEN` värderar det teoretiska priset för europeisk valutaoption med lösenpris satt till strike på en tillgång med spotpris spot.

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_JUMP_DIFF`
`OPT_JUMP_DIFF` teoretiskt pris för en option enligt processen ”Jump Diffusion”

    OPT_JUMP_DIFF(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet;lambda;gamma)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig räntesats

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

lambda: förväntat antal ”hopp” per år

gamma: proportion för volatilitet förklarad av ”hoppen”

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_JUMP_DIFF` modellerar det teoretiska priset för en option enligt processen ”Jump Diffusion” (Merton).

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_MILTERSEN_SCHWARTZ`
`OPT_MILTERSEN_SCHWARTZ` teoretiskt pris för en option på råvaruterminer enligt Miltersen & Schwartz

    OPT_MILTERSEN_SCHWARTZ(call_put_flag;p_t;f_t;strike;t1;t2;v_s;v_e;v_f;rho_se;rho_sf;rho_ef;kappa_e;kappa_f)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

p_t: nollkupongare med lösen vid optionsförfallodag

f_t: terminspris

strike: lösenpris

t1: löptiden för optionen

t2: löptiden för terminskontrakt avseende råvaror

v_s: volatilitet för råvaruspotpriset

v_e: volatilitet för terminsavkastning

v_f: volatilitet för terminsräntan

rho_se: korrelation mellan spotråvarupriset och avkastningen

rho_sf: korrelationen mellan spotråvarupriset och terminsräntan

rho_ef: korrelationen mellan terminsräntan och avkastningen

kappa_e: hastigheten på återgång till medelvärdet för avkastningen

kappa_f: hastigheten på återgång till medelvärdet för terminsräntan

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_ON_OPTIONS`
`OPT_ON_OPTIONS` teoretiska priset för optioner av optioner

    OPT_ON_OPTIONS(typflagga;spot;strike1;strike2;tid1;tid2;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

typflagga: ”cc” (calls on calls) för köp på köp, ”cp” (calls on puts) för köp på sälj och så vidare för ”pc” och ”pp”

spot: spotpris

strike1: lösenpriset som satts för optionen som värderas

strike2: lösenpriset som satts för den underliggande optionen

tid1: löptid för optionen i år

tid2: löptiden i år för den underliggande optionen

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången för den underliggande optionen

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet i priset för den underliggande tillgången för den underliggande optionen

##### Observera

För vanliga aktier är cost_of_carry den riskfria räntan minus direktavkastningen. tid2 ≥ tid1

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_RGW`
`OPT_RGW` teoretiska priset för en amerikansk option enligt Roll-Geske-Whaley-approximationen

    OPT_RGW(spot;strike;tid_utdelning;tid_utg;räntesats;d;volatilitet)

##### Argument

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid_utdelning: tid till utdelning

tid_utg: tid till tidsgräns överskridits

räntesats: årlig räntesats

d: summa av utbetalningen som ska utbetalas uttryckt i valuta

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången i procent för perioden fram till lösendatumet

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_SIMPLE_CHOOSER`
`OPT_SIMPLE_CHOOSER` teoretiska priset på en enkel väljaroption

    OPT_SIMPLE_CHOOSER(call_put_flag;spot;strike;tid1;tid2;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

tid1: tiden tills ägaren väljer en köp- eller säljoption angivet i år

tid2: tiden till den valda optionens förfallodatum angivet i år

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_SPREAD_APPROX`
`OPT_SPREAD_APPROX` det teoretiska priset på en europeisk option på spridningen mellan två terminskontrakt

    OPT_SPREAD_APPROX(call_put_flag;termpris1;termpris2;strike;tid;ränta;volatilitet1;volatilitet2;rho)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

termpris1: priset på det första terminskontraktet

termpris2: priset på det andra terminskontraktet

strike: lösenpris

tid: löptid i år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

volatilitet1: årlig volatilitet i priset för det underliggande terminskontraktet

volatilitet2: årlig volatilitet i priset för det andra underliggande terminskontraktet

rho: korrelation mellan de två terminskontrakten

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`OPT_TIME_SWITCH`
`OPT_TIME_SWITCH` teoretiska priset på tidsbytesoptioner

    OPT_TIME_SWITCH(call_put_flag;spot;strike;a;tid;m;dt;ränta;cost_of_carry;volatilitet)

##### Argument

köp_sälj-flagga: "c" för köp (call) och "p" för sälj (put)

spot: spotpris

strike: lösenpris

a: summa mottagen för varje tidsperiod

tid: löptid i år

m: antal tidsenheter för då optionen redan har uppfyllt villkoret

dt: överenskomna tidsperioden uttryckt som andel av ett år

räntesats: årlig riskfri räntesats

cost_of_carry: nettokostnaden för att inneha den underliggande tillgången

volatilitet: årlig volatilitet för tillgången

##### Beskrivning

`OPT_TIME_SWITCH` modellerar det teoretiska priset på tidsbytesoptioner (Pechtl 1995). Ägaren får a * dt för varje period som tillgångens pris var högre än strike (för köp) eller lägre än det (för sälj).

##### Se även

`OPT_BS`, `OPT_BS_DELTA`, `OPT_BS_RHO`, `OPT_BS_THETA`, `OPT_BS_GAMMA`.

`PMT`
`PMT` betalning för en annuitet

    PMT(ränta;nper;nv;fv;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

nper: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`PMT` (payment) beräknar betalningssumma för en annuitet.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`PV`, `FV`, `RATE`, `ISPMT`.

`PPMT`
`PPMT` räntesats för en period

    PPMT(ränta;per;nper;nv;fv;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

per: periodnummer

nper: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`PPMT` calculates the principal part of an annuity's payment for period number per.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`IPMT`.

`PRICE`
`PRICE` pris för en säkerhet

    PRICE(avräkning;maturity;ränta;avkastning;inlösen;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

avkastning: årlig avkastning för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`PRICE` beräknar priset per $100 nominellt värde för säkerhet som betalar periodisk ränta.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`YIELD`, `DURATION`.

`PRICEDISC`
`PRICEDISC` diskonterat pris

    PRICEDISC(avräkning;maturity;diskontering;inlösen;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

diskontering: årlig diskonteringsränta

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`PRICEDISC` beräknar priset per $100 värde av en obligation som inte betalar ränta vid förfallodatum.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`PRICEMAT`.

`PRICEMAT`
`PRICEMAT` pris vid förfallodatum

    PRICEMAT(avräkning;maturity;start;diskontering;avkastning;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

start: datum för start

diskontering: årlig diskonteringsränta

avkastning: årlig avkastning för en säkerhet

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`PRICEMAT` beräknar priset per $100 värde av en obligation som betalar ränta vid förfallodatum.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`PRICEDISC`.

`PV`
`PV` nuvarande värde

    PV(ränta;nper;bet;fv;typ)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiv räntesats per period

nper: antal perioder

bet: betalning för en period

fv: framtida värde

typ: betalningstyp

##### Beskrivning

`PV` beräknar aktuellt värde för fv vilka är nper perioder in i framtiden antagande periodisk betalning för bet och en räntesats på ränta per period.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`FV`.

`RATE`
`RATE` ränta för investering

    RATE(nper;bet;nv;fv;typ;gissning)

##### Argument

nper: antal perioder

bet: betalning för en period

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

typ: betalningstyp

gissning: en uppskattning av vad resultatet borde bli

##### Beskrivning

`RATE` beräknar återbetalningsräntan.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period. Frivillig gissning behövs eftersom det kan finnas mer än ett giltigt resultat. Standardvärdet är 10%.

##### Se även

`PV`, `FV`.

`RECEIVED`
`RECEIVED` summan som ska fås vid förfallodag

    RECEIVED(avräkning;maturity;investering;ränta;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

investering: betald summa vid avräkning

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`RECEIVED` beräknar summan som ska erhållas vid förfallodag för en given säkerhet.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`INTRATE`.

`RRI`
`RRI` ekvivalent räntesats för en investering som ökar i värde

    RRI(p;nv;fv)

##### Argument

p: antal perioder

nv: nuvarande värde

fv: framtida värde

##### Beskrivning

`RRI` avgör en ekvivalent räntesats för en investering som ökar i värde. Räntan sammanräknas efter varje komplett period.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period. Observera att p inte behöver vara ett heltal men för bråktalsvärden är den beräknade räntan endast approximativ.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`PV`, `FV`, `RATE`.

`SLN`
`SLN` avskrivningen för en tillgång

    SLN(kostnad;salvage;livstid)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

livstid: antal perioder

##### Beskrivning

`SLN` beräknar avskrivningen för en tillgång genom en linjärmetod.

##### Se även

`DB`, `DDB`, `SYD`.

`SYD`
`SYD` årssumma för avskrivning

    SYD(kostnad;salvage;livstid;period)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

livstid: antal perioder

period: ämnesperiod

##### Beskrivning

`SYD` beräknar avskrivningen för en tillgång med metoden summan-av-år.

##### Se även

`DB`, `DDB`, `SLN`.

`TBILLEQ`
`TBILLEQ` obligationsekvivalent avkastning för en statsskuldväxel

    TBILLEQ(avräkning;maturity;diskontering)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

diskontering: årlig diskonteringsränta

##### Beskrivning

`TBILLEQ` beräknar obligationsekvivalent avkastning för en statsskuldväxel.

##### Se även

`TBILLPRICE`, `TBILLYIELD`.

`TBILLPRICE`
`TBILLPRICE` priset för en statsskuldväxel

    TBILLPRICE(avräkning;maturity;diskontering)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

diskontering: årlig diskonteringsränta

##### Beskrivning

`TBILLPRICE` beräknar priset per $100 värde för en statsskuldväxel.

##### Se även

`TBILLEQ`, `TBILLYIELD`.

`TBILLYIELD`
`TBILLYIELD` avkastning för en statsskuldväxel

    TBILLYIELD(avräkning;maturity;pris)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

pris: pris

##### Beskrivning

`TBILLYIELD` beräknar avkastning för en statsskuldväxel.

##### Se även

`TBILLEQ`, `TBILLPRICE`.

`VDB`
`VDB` avskrivningen för en tillgång

    VDB(kostnad;salvage;livstid;startperiod;slutperiod;faktor;växla_ej)

##### Argument

kostnad: ursprunglig kostnad för en tillgång

salvage: värde efter avskrivning

livstid: antal perioder

startperiod: första period att ackumulera för

slutperiod: sista perioden att ackumulera för

faktor: faktor för degressiv avskrivning

växla_ej: växla ej till linjär avskrivning

##### Beskrivning

`VDB` beräknar avskrivningen av en tillgång för en given period genom att använda den variabla degressiva avskrivningsmetoden.

##### Observera

Om växla_ej är FALSKT växlar beräkningen till linjär avskrivning när avskrivningen är större än den degressiva avskrivningsmetoden.

##### Se även

`DB`, `DDB`.

`XIRR`
`XIRR` intern ränta för återbetalning

    XIRR(värden;datum;gissning)

##### Argument

värden: kassaflöde

datum: datum för kassaflöde

gissning: en uppskattning av vad resultatet borde bli

##### Beskrivning

`XIRR` calculates the annualized internal rate of return of a cash flow at arbitrary points in time. values lists the payments (negative values) and receipts (positive values) with one value for each entry in dates.

##### Observera

Frivillig gissning behövs eftersom det kan finnas mer än ett giltigt resultat. Standardvärdet är 10%.

##### Se även

`IRR`.

`XNPV`
`XNPV` aktuellt nettovärde

    XNPV(ränta;värden;datum)

##### Argument

ränta: effektiva årliga räntesatsen

värden: kassaflöde

datum: datum för kassaflöde

##### Beskrivning

`XNPV` beräknar aktuella nettovärdet för ett kassaflöde vid oregelbundna tidpunkter.

##### Observera

Om typ är 0, standardvärdet, sker betalning i slutet på varje period. Om typ är 1 sker betalning i början på varje period.

##### Se även

`NPV`.

`YIELD`
`YIELD` avkastning för en säkerhet

    YIELD(avräkning;maturity;ränta;pris;inlösen;frekvens;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

pris: priset för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

frekvens: antal räntebetalningar per år

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`YIELD` beräknar avkastningen för en säkerhet som betalar periodisk ränta.

##### Observera

frekvens kan vara 1 (årsvis), 2 (halvårsvis) eller 4 (kvartalsvis). Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`PRICE`, `DURATION`.

`YIELDDISC`
`YIELDDISC` avkastningen på en diskonterad säkerhet

    YIELDDISC(avräkning;maturity;pris;inlösen;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

pris: priset för en säkerhet

inlösen: summa mottagen vid förfallodatum

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`YIELDDISC` beräknar avkastningen på en diskonterad säkerhet.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`PRICE`, `DURATION`.

`YIELDMAT`
`YIELDMAT` avkastning för en säkerhet

    YIELDMAT(avräkning;maturity;start;ränta;pris;bas)

##### Argument

avräkning: avräkningsdatum

maturity: förfallodatum

start: datum för start

ränta: årliga nominella räntesatsen

pris: priset för en säkerhet

bas: kalenderbas

##### Beskrivning

`YIELDMAT` beräknar avkastningen på en säkerhet för vilken räntan betalas vid förfallodatum.

##### Observera

Om bas är 0 används det amerikanska 30/360-systemet. Om bas är 1 används det faktiska antalet dagar. Om bas är 2 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses ha bara 360 dagar. Om bas är 3 används det faktiska antalet dagar i en månad, men år anses alltid ha 365 dagar. Om bas är 4 används den europeiska 30/360-metoden.

##### Se även

`YIELDDISC`, `YIELD`.

### Floating Point

`FLT.MAX`
`FLT.MAX` return the largest positive floating point number

    FLT.MAX()

##### Beskrivning

The `FLT.MAX` function returns the largest positive floating point number that can be represented.

##### Se även

`FLT.MIN`, `FLT.RADIX`.

`FLT.MIN`
`FLT.MIN` return the smallest positive floating point number

    FLT.MIN()

##### Beskrivning

The `FLT.MIN` function returns the smallest positive normal floating point number that can be represented.

##### Se även

`FLT.MAX`, `FLT.RADIX`.

`FLT.NEXTAFTER`
`FLT.NEXTAFTER` next representable value

    FLT.NEXTAFTER(x,y)

##### Argument

x: floating point value

y: direction

##### Beskrivning

The `FLT.NEXTAFTER` function returns the next floating point value after x in the direction of y. "+" and "-" are special values for y that represent positive and negative infinity.

##### Se även

`FLT.RADIX`.

`FLT.RADIX`
`FLT.RADIX` return the floating point system's base

    FLT.RADIX()

##### Beskrivning

The `FLT.RADIX` function returns the base of the floating point number system in use.

##### Se även

`FLT.MIN`, `FLT.MAX`.

### Gnumeric

`GNUMERIC_VERSION`
`GNUMERIC_VERSION` aktuell version av Gnumeric

    GNUMERIC_VERSION()

##### Beskrivning

`GNUMERIC_VERSION` returnerar Gnumerics version som en sträng.

### Information

`CELL`
`CELL` information av typ om cell

    CELL(typ;cell)

##### Argument

typ: sträng som anger den begärda informationstypen

cell: cellreferens

##### Beskrivning

typ anger informationstypen du vill ha:

address Returnerar given cellreferens som text.

col Returnerar kolumnens nummer i cell.

color Returnerar 0.

contents Returnerar cellens innehåll i cell.

column Returnerar kolumnens nummer i cell.

columnwidth Returnerar kolumnbredden.

coord Returnerar den absoluta adressen för cell.

datatype samma som type

filename Returnerar namnet på filen för cell.

format Returnerar koden för cellens format.

formulatype samma som type

locked Returnerar 1 om cell är låst.

parentheses Returnerar 1 om cell innehåller ett negativt värde

och dess format visar det med parenteser.

prefix Returnerar ett tecken som indikerar horisontell

justering för cell.

prefixcharacter samma som prefix

protect Returnerar 1 om cell är låst.

row Returnerar numret för raden i cell.

sheetname Returnerar namnet på kalkylbladet för cell.

type Returnerar "l" om cell innehåller en sträng,

"v" om den innehåller något annat värde, och

"b" om cell är blank.

value Returnerar innehållet i cellen i cell.

width Returnerar kolumnbredden.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`INDIRECT`.

`COUNTBLANK`
`COUNTBLANK` antalet blanka celler i intervall

    COUNTBLANK(intervall)

##### Argument

intervall: ett cellintervall

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COUNT`.

`ERROR`
`ERROR` felet med angivet namn

    ERROR(namn)

##### Argument

namn: sträng

##### Se även

`ISERROR`.

`ERROR.TYPE`
`ERROR.TYPE` typen av fel

    ERROR.TYPE(fel)

##### Argument

fel: ett fel

##### Beskrivning

`ERROR.TYPE` returnerar ett felnummer som motsvarar det angivna felvärdet. Felnumren för felvärden är:

#DIV/0! 2

#VÄRDE! 3

#REF! 4

#NAMN? 5

#NUM! 6

#N/A 7

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISERROR`.

`EXPRESSION`
`EXPRESSION` uttryck i cell som en sträng

    EXPRESSION(cell)

##### Argument

cell: en cellreferens

##### Observera

Om cell inte innehåller något uttryck returnerar `EXPRESSION` tomt.

##### Se även

`TEXT`.

`GET.FORMULA`
`GET.FORMULA` formeln i cell som en sträng

    GET.FORMULA(cell)

##### Argument

cell: den refererade cellen

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`GET.FORMULA` är OpenFormula-funktionen FORMULA.

##### Se även

`EXPRESSION`, `ISFORMULA`.

`GET.LINK`
`GET.LINK` målet för hyperlänken bifogad till cell som en sträng

    GET.LINK(cell)

##### Argument

cell: den refererade cellen

##### Observera

Värdet uppdateras inte automatiskt då länken bifogad till cell ändras men behöver en omberäkning.

##### Se även

`HYPERLINK`.

`GETENV`
`GETENV` värdet för exekveringsmiljöns miljövariabel namn

    GETENV(namn)

##### Argument

namn:namnet på miljövariabeln

##### Observera

Om ingen variabel med namnet namn finns så returneras #-. Variabelnamn är skiftlägeskänsliga.

`INFO`
`INFO` information om den aktuella operativsystemsmiljön enligt typ

    INFO(typ)

##### Argument

typ: sträng som anger den begärda informationstypen

##### Beskrivning

`INFO` returnerar information om den aktuella operativsystemsmiljön enligt typ:

memavail Returnerar mängden tillgängligt minne (byte).

memused Returnerar mängden använt minne (byte).

numfile Returnerar antalet aktiva arbetsblad.

osversion Returnerar operativsystemsversionen.

recalc Returnerar omkalkyleringsläget (automatiskt).

release Returnerar Gnumerics versionsnummer som text.

system Returnerar namnet på miljön.

totmem Returnerar totala mängden tillgängligt minne.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CELL`.

`ISBLANK`
`ISBLANK` SANT om värde är blankt

    ISBLANK(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion kontrollerar om ett värde är blankt. Tomma celler är blanka, men tomma strängar är inte det.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`ISERR`
`ISERR` SANT om värde är ett felvärde skilt från #-

    ISERR(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISERROR`.

`ISERROR`
`ISERROR` SANT om värde är ett felvärde

    ISERROR(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISERR`, `ISNA`.

`ISEVEN`
`ISEVEN` SANT om n är jämn

    ISEVEN(n)

##### Argument

n: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISODD`.

`ISFORMULA`
`ISFORMULA` SANT om cell innehåller en formel

    ISFORMULA(cell)

##### Argument

cell: den refererade cellen

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`ISFORMULA` är OpenFormula-kompatibelt.

##### Se även

`GET.FORMULA`.

`ISLOGICAL`
`ISLOGICAL` SANT om värde är ett logiskt värde

    ISLOGICAL(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion kontrollerar om ett värde är SANT eller FALSKT.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`ISNA`
`ISNA` SANT om value är felvärdet #-

    ISNA(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`NA`.

`ISNONTEXT`
`ISNONTEXT` SANT om värde inte är text

    ISNONTEXT(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISTEXT`.

`ISNUMBER`
`ISNUMBER` SANT om värde är ett tal

    ISNUMBER(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion kontrollerar om ett värde är ett tal. Varken SANT eller FALSKT räknas som tal i detta fall.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`ISODD`
`ISODD` SANT om n är udda

    ISODD(n)

##### Argument

n: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISEVEN`.

`ISREF`
`ISREF` SANT om värde är en referens

    ISREF(värde;…)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion kontrollerar om ett värde är en cellreferens.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`ISTEXT`
`ISTEXT` SANT om värde är text

    ISTEXT(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISNONTEXT`.

`N`
`N` text konverterad till ett tal

    N(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Observera

Om text innehåller icke-numerisk text returneras 0.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`NA`
`NA` felvärdet #-

    NA()

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ISNA`.

`TYPE`
`TYPE` ett tal som indikerar datatypen för värde

    TYPE(värde)

##### Argument

värde: ett värde

##### Beskrivning

`TYPE` returnerar ett tal som indikerar datatypen för värde:

1 = tal

2 = text

4 = boolesk

16 = fel

64 = vektor

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

### Logik

`AND`
`AND` logisk konjunktion

    AND(b0;b1;…)

##### Argument

b0: logiskt värde

b1: logiskt värde

##### Beskrivning

`AND` beräknar logisk konjunktion av sina argument b0,b1,…

##### Observera

Om ett argument är numeriskt anses noll vara FALSKT och allt annat anses vara SANT. Strängar och tomma värden ignoreras. Om inga logiska värden tillhandahålls returneras felet #VÄRDE!. Denna funktion är strikt, om något argument är ett fel kommer resultatet att vara det första sådana felet.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`OR`, `NOT`, `IF`.

`FALSE`
`FALSE` värdet `FALSKT`

    FALSE()

##### Beskrivning

`FALSE` returnerar värdet `FALSKT`.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TRUE`, `IF`.

`IF`
`IF` villkorligt uttryck

    IF(cond,trueval,falseval)

##### Argument

villkor: villkor

trueval: value to use if condition is true

falseval: value to use if condition is false

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion evaluerar först villkoret. Om resultatet är sant kommer den evaluera och returnera det andra argumentet. Annars kommer den att evaluera och returnera det sista argumentet.

##### Se även

`AND`, `OR`, `XOR`, `NOT`, `IFERROR`.

`IFERROR`
`IFERROR` testa efter fel

    IFERROR(x;y)

##### Argument

x: värde att testa efter fel

y: alternativt värde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar det första värdet, ifall inte det är ett fel, i vilket fall det andra returneras.

##### Se även

`IF`, `ISERROR`.

`IFNA`
`IFNA` testa efter felet #-

    IFNA(x;y)

##### Argument

x: värde att testa efter felet #-

y: alternativt värde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar det första värdet, om det inte är #- i vilket fall det andra returneras.

##### Se även

`IF`, `ISERROR`.

`IFS`
`IFS` flergrenat villkor

    IFS(villkor1;värde1;villkor2;värde2;…)

##### Argument

villkor1: villkor

värde1: värde om villkor1 är sant

villkor2: villkor

värde2: värde om villkor2 är sant

##### Beskrivning

Detta värde returnerar värdet efter det första sanna villkoret. Om inget villkor är sant returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`IF`.

`NOT`
`NOT` logisk negation

    NOT(b)

##### Argument

b: logiskt värde

##### Beskrivning

`NOT` beräknar den logiska negationen av sitt argument.

##### Observera

Om argumentet är numeriskt anses noll vara FALSKT och allt annat anses vara SANT. Strängar och tomma värden ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AND`, `OR`, `IF`.

`OR`
`OR` logisk disjunktion

    OR(b0;b1;…)

##### Argument

b0: logiskt värde

b1: logiskt värde

##### Beskrivning

`OR` beräknar logisk disjunktion av sina argument b0,b1,…

##### Observera

Om ett argument är numeriskt anses noll vara FALSKT och allt annat anses vara SANT. Strängar och tomma värden ignoreras. Om inga logiska värden tillhandahålls returneras felet #VÄRDE!. Denna funktion är strikt, om något argument är ett fel kommer resultatet att vara det första sådana felet.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AND`, `XOR`, `NOT`, `IF`.

`SWITCH`
`SWITCH` flergrenad väljare

    SWITCH(ref;val1;värde1;val2;värde2;…)

##### Argument

ref: värde

val1: första valvärde

värde1: första resultatvärde

val2: andra valvärde

värde2: andra resultatvärde

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion jämför referensvärdet ref mot valvärdena choice1 o.s.v. och returnerar motsvarande resultatvärde då det hittar en matchning. Valen kan följas av ett standardvärde att använda. Om det inte finns några val som matchar och inget standardvärde returneras #-.

##### Se även

`IF`, `IFS`.

`TRUE`
`TRUE` värdet `SANT`

    TRUE()

##### Beskrivning

`TRUE` returnerar värdet `SANT`.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FALSE`, `IF`.

`XOR`
`XOR` logisk exklusiv disjunktion

    XOR(b0;b1;…)

##### Argument

b0: logiskt värde

b1: logiskt värde

##### Beskrivning

`XOR` beräknar logisk exklusiv disjunktion av sina argument b0,b1,…

##### Observera

Om ett argument är numeriskt anses noll vara FALSKT och allt annat anses vara SANT. Strängar och tomma värden ignoreras. Om inga logiska värden tillhandahålls returneras felet #VÄRDE!. Denna funktion är strikt, om något argument är ett fel kommer resultatet att vara det första sådana felet.

##### Se även

`OR`, `AND`, `NOT`, `IF`.

### Uppslagning

`ADDRESS`
`ADDRESS` celladress som text

    ADDRESS(radnum;kolnum;absnum;a1;text)

##### Argument

radnum: radnummer

kolnum: kolumnnummer

absnum: 1 för en absolut, 2 för en radabsolut/kolumnrelativ, 3 för en radrelativ/kolumnabsolut och 4 för en relativ referens. Standardvärde 1

a1: om SANT tillhandahålls en referens med A1-stil, annars en referens med R1C1-stil. Standardvärde är SANT

text: namnet på arbetsbladet, standardvärde är inget blad

##### Observera

Om radnum eller kolnum är mindre än ett, returnerar `ADDRESS` #VÄRDE! Om absnum är större än 4 returnerar `ADDRESS` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMNNUMBER`.

`AREAS`
`AREAS` antal areor i referens

    AREAS(referens;…)

##### Argument

referens: intervall

##### Se även

`ADDRESS`, `INDEX`, `INDIRECT`, `OFFSET`.

`ARRAY`
`ARRAY` vertikal vektor av argumenten

    ARRAY(v;…)

##### Argument

v: värde

##### Se även

`TRANSPOSE`.

`CHOOSE`
`CHOOSE` (index+1):e argumentet

    CHOOSE(index;värde1;värde2;…)

##### Argument

index: positivt tal

värde1: första värde

värde2: andra värde

##### Beskrivning

`CHOOSE` returnerar sitt (index+1):e argument.

##### Observera

index trunkeras till ett heltal. Om index < 1 eller det trunkerade index > antal värden så returnerar `CHOOSE` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`IF`.

`COLUMN`
`COLUMN` vektor av kolumnsiffror

    COLUMN(x)

##### Argument

x: referens, standardvärde är positionen för aktuellt uttryck

##### Beskrivning

`COLUMN`-funktion returnerar en Nx1-vektor innehållande sekvensen för heltal från den första kolumnen till den sista kolumnen för x.

##### Observera

Om x inte är en vektor eller en referens eller ett intervall returneras #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMNS`, `ROW`, `ROWS`.

`COLUMNNUMBER`
`COLUMNNUMBER` kolumnnummer för den givna kolumnen kallad namn

    COLUMNNUMBER(namn)

##### Argument

namn: kolumnnamn som ”IV”

##### Observera

Om namn är ogiltigt returnerar `COLUMNNUMBER` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`ADDRESS`.

`COLUMNS`
`COLUMNS` antalet kolumner i referens

    COLUMNS(referens)

##### Argument

referens: vektor eller område

##### Observera

Om referens varken är en vektor eller en referens eller ett intervall returnerar `COLUMNS` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMN`, `ROW`, `ROWS`.

`FLIP`
`FLIP` matris speglad

    FLIP(matris;vertikal)

##### Argument

matris: intervall

vertikal: om sant matris vertikalt, annars horisontellt; standardvärde SANT

##### Se även

`TRANSPOSE`.

`HLOOKUP`
`HLOOKUP` sök efter värde i den första raden av intervall

    HLOOKUP(value,range,row,approximate,as_index)

##### Argument

värde: sökvärde

intervall: intervall att söka i

rad: 1-baserad radförskjutning indikerandes returvärdena

approximativ: om falskt så måste en precis matchning av värde hittas; standard är SANT

as_index: if true, the 0-based column offset is returned; defaults to FALSE

##### Beskrivning

`HLOOKUP` function finds the row in range that has a first cell similar to value. If approximate is not true it finds the column with an exact equality. If approximate is true, it finds the last column with first value less than or equal to value. If as_index is true the 0-based column offset is returned.

##### Observera

Om approximativ är sant så måste värdena sorteras i stigande ordning. `HLOOKUP` returnerar #REF! om rad faller utanför intervall.

##### Se även

`VLOOKUP`.

`HYPERLINK`
`HYPERLINK` andra eller första argumentet

    HYPERLINK(link_location,label)

##### Argument

link_location: string

etikett: sträng, valfri

##### Beskrivning

`HYPERLINK`-funktionen returnerar för närvarande dess andra argument, eller om det uteblir, dess första argument.

`INDEX`
`INDEX` refererar till en cell i given vektor

    INDEX(vektor;rad;kol;area;…)

##### Argument

vektor: cell eller infogad vektor

rad: önskad rad, standardvärde 1

kol: önskad kolumn, standardvärde 1

area: från vilken area en cell ska väljas, standard är 1

##### Beskrivning

`INDEX` ger en referens till en cell i given vektor. Cellen markeras av rad och kol, vilka räknar raderna och kolumnerna i vektorn.

##### Observera

Om referensen hamnar utanför intervallet för vektor returnerar `INDEX` #REF!

`INDIRECT`
`INDIRECT` innehållet för cellen pekad på av strängen reftext

    INDIRECT(reftext;format)

##### Argument

reftext: textreferens

format: om sant ges reftext i A1-stil annars ges det i R1C1-stil; standardvärde är sant

##### Observera

Om reftext inte är en giltig referens i stilen bestämd av format, returnerar `INDIRECT` #REF!

##### Se även

`AREAS`, `INDEX`, `CELL`.

`LOOKUP`
`LOOKUP` innehåll i vektor2 på platsen motsvarande värde i vektor1

    LOOKUP(värde;vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

värde: värde att slå upp

vektor1: intervall att söka i:

vektor2: intervall för returvärden

##### Beskrivning

Om vektor1 har fler rader än kolumner söker `LOOKUP` den första raden i vektor1 annars den första kolumnen. Om vektor2 utelämnas tas returvärdet från den sista raden eller kolumnen i vektor1.

##### Observera

Om `LOOKUP` inte kan hitta värde använder den det största värdet mindre än värde. Data måste vara sorterade. Om värde är mindre än det första värdet returnerar det #-. Om motsvarande plats inte existerar i vektor2 returnerar den #-.

##### Se även

`VLOOKUP`, `HLOOKUP`.

`MATCH`
`MATCH` index för sök i vektor

    MATCH(sök;vektor;typ)

##### Argument

sök: värde att hitta

vektor: n×1- eller 1×n-intervall att genomsöka

typ: +1 (standard) för att hitta det största värdet ≤ sök, 0 för att hitta första värdet = sök, eller -1 för att hitta det minsta värdet ≥ sök

##### Beskrivning

`MATCH` söker vektor efter sök och returnerar det 1-baserade indexet.

##### Observera

För typ = -1 måste data vara sorterat i fallande ordning, för typ = +1 måste data sorteras i stigande ordning. Om sök inte kunde hittas returneras #-. Om vektor är varken n×1 eller 1×n returneras #-.

##### Se även

`LOOKUP`.

`OFFSET`
`OFFSET` förskjutning för cellintevall

    OFFSET(intervall;rad;kol;höjd;bredd)

##### Argument

intervall: referens eller intervall

rad: antal rader att förskjuta intervall

kol: antal kolumner att förskjuta intervall

höjd: höjd på förskjutningsintervall, standard är höjd av intervall

bredd: bredd på förskjutningsintervall, standard är bredd av intervall

##### Beskrivning

`OFFSET` returns the cell range starting at offset (row,col) from range of height height and width width.

##### Observera

Om intervall varken är en referens eller ett intervall returnerar `OFFSET` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMN`, `COLUMNS`, `ROWS`, `INDEX`, `INDIRECT`, `ADDRESS`.

`ROW`
`ROW` vektor av radnummer

    ROW(x)

##### Argument

x: referens, standardvärde är positionen för aktuellt uttryck

##### Beskrivning

`ROW`-funktionen returnerar en 1xN-vektor innehållande heltalssekvenser från den första raden till den sista raden av x.

##### Observera

Om x inte är en vektor eller en referens eller ett intervall returneras #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMN`, `COLUMNS`, `ROWS`.

`ROWS`
`ROWS` antal rader i referens

    ROWS(referens)

##### Argument

referens: vektor, referens eller intervall

##### Observera

Om referens varken är en vektor eller en referens eller ett intervall returnerar `ROWS` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMN`, `COLUMNS`, `ROW`.

`SHEET`
`SHEET` bladnummer för referens

    SHEET(referens)

##### Argument

referens: referens eller faktiskt bladnamn, standardvärde är aktuellt blad

##### Observera

Om referens varken är en referens eller ett faktiskt bladnamn returnerar `SHEET` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`SHEETS`, `ROW`, `COLUMNNUMBER`.

`SHEETS`
`SHEETS` antal blad i referens

    SHEETS(referens)

##### Argument

referens: vektor, referens eller intervall, standard är högsta intervall

##### Observera

Om referens varken är en vektor eller en referens eller ett intervall returnerar `SHEETS` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`COLUMNS`, `ROWS`.

`SORT`
`SORT` sorterad tallista som vertikal vektor

    SORT(ref;ordning)

##### Argument

ref: tallista

ordning: 0 (fallande ordning) eller 1 (stigande ordning); standardvärde 0

##### Observera

Strängar, booleska värden och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Se även

`ARRAY`.

`TRANSPOSE`
`TRANSPOSE` transponatet av matris

    TRANSPOSE(matris)

##### Argument

matris: intervall

##### Se även

`FLIP`, `MMULT`.

`UNIQUE`
`UNIQUE` unique values in a range or array

    UNIQUE(data,by_col,exactly_once)

##### Argument

data: range or array

by_col: by column if TRUE, by row otherwise; defaults to FALSE

exactly_once: suppress values present multiple times; defaults to FALSE

##### Se även

`SORT`.

`VLOOKUP`
`VLOOKUP` sök efter värde i den första kolumnen av intervall

    VLOOKUP(value,range,column,approximate,as_index)

##### Argument

värde: sökvärde

intervall: intervall att söka i

kolumn: 1-baserad kolumnförskjutning indikerande returvärdena

approximativ: om falskt så måste en precis matchning av värde hittas; standard är SANT

as_index: om sant returneras den 0-baserade radförskjutningen; standard är FALSKT

##### Beskrivning

`VLOOKUP` function finds the row in range that has a first cell similar to value. If approximate is not true it finds the row with an exact equality. If approximate is true, it finds the last row with first value less than or equal to value. If as_index is true the 0-based row offset is returned.

##### Observera

Om approximativ är sant så måste värdena sorteras i stigande ordning. `VLOOKUP` returnerar #REF! om kolumn faller utanför intervall.

##### Se även

`HLOOKUP`.

### Matematik

`ABS`
`ABS` absolutbelopp

    ABS(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`ABS` ger absolutbeloppet av x, d.v.s. det icke-negativa talet av samma magnitud som x.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CEIL`, `CEILING`, `FLOOR`, `INT`, `MOD`.

`ACOS`
`ACOS` arcus cosinus för x

    ACOS(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COS`, `SIN`, `DEGREES`, `RADIANS`.

`ACOSH`
`ACOSH` hyperbolisk arcus cosinus för x

    ACOSH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ACOS`, `ASINH`.

`ACOT`
`ACOT` invers cotangens av x

    ACOT(x)

##### Argument

x: värde

##### Se även

`COT`, `TAN`.

`ACOTH`
`ACOTH` invers hyperbolisk cotangens för x

    ACOTH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Se även

`COTH`, `TANH`.

`AGM`
`AGM` det aritmetisk-geometriska medelvärdet

    AGM(a;b)

##### Argument

a: värde

b: värde

##### Beskrivning

`AGM` beräknar det aritmetisk-geometriska medelvärdet av de två värdena.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `GEOMEAN`.

`ARABIC`
`ARABIC` den romerska siffran romersk som ett tal

    ARABIC(romersk)

##### Argument

romersk: romersk siffra

##### Beskrivning

Varje romersk symbol till vänster om en större symbol (direkt eller indirekt) minskar det slutliga värdet med symbolens värde. I andra fall ökar den det slutliga värdet med symbolens värde.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`ROMAN`.

`ASIN`
`ASIN` arcus sinus för x

    ASIN(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`ASIN` beräknar arcus sinus för x; det vill säga värdet vars sinus är x.

##### Observera

Om x är utanför intervallet -1 till 1 returnerar `ASIN` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SIN`, `COS`, `ASINH`, `DEGREES`, `RADIANS`.

`ASINH`
`ASINH` invers hyperbolisk sinus för x

    ASINH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`ASINH` beräknar invers hyperbolisk sinus för x; det vill säga värdet vars hyperboliska sinus är x.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ASIN`, `ACOSH`, `SIN`, `COS`.

`ATAN`
`ATAN` arcus tangens för x

    ATAN(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`ATAN` beräknar arcus tangens för x; det vill säga värdet vars tangens är x.

##### Observera

Resultatet kommer vara mellan −π/2 och +π/2.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TAN`, `COS`, `SIN`, `DEGREES`, `RADIANS`.

`ATAN2`
`ATAN2` arcus tangens för förhållandet y/x

    ATAN2(x;y)

##### Argument

x: x-koordinat

y: y-koordinat

##### Beskrivning

`ATAN2` beräknar riktningen från origo till punkten (x,y) som en vinkel från x-axeln i radianer.

##### Observera

Resultaten kommer vara mellan −π och +π. Ordningen av argumenten kan vara oväntad.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`ATAN`, `ATANH`, `COS`, `SIN`.

`ATANH`
`ATANH` invers hyperbolisk tangens för x

    ATANH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`ATANH` beräknar invers hyperbolisk tangens för x; det vill säga värdet vars hyperboliska tangens är x.

##### Observera

Om absolutbeloppet av x är större än 1,0 returnerar `ATANH` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ATAN`, `COS`, `SIN`.

`AVERAGEIF`
`AVERAGEIF` average of the cells in actual_range for which the corresponding cells in the range meet the given criteria

    AVERAGEIF(intervall;kriterier;verkligt_område)

##### Argument

intervall: cellområde

kriterier: villkor för att en cell ska inkluderas

verkligt_område: cellområde, standard är intervall

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUMIF`, `COUNTIF`.

`AVERAGEIFS`
`AVERAGEIFS` medel för cellerna i verkligt_område för vilka motsvarande celler i området uppfyller givna kriterier

    AVERAGEIFS(verkligt_område;intervall1;kriterier1;…)

##### Argument

verkligt_område: cellområde

intervall1: cellområde

kriterier1: villkor för att en cell ska inkluderas

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `AVERAGEIF`.

`BETA`
`BETA` Euler-betafunktion

    BETA(x;y)

##### Argument

x: tal

y: tal

##### Beskrivning

`BETA`-funktionen returnerar värdet för Eulers betafunktion utökad till alla reella tal förutom 0 och negativa heltal.

##### Observera

Om x, y eller (x + y) är icke-positiva heltal returnerar `BETA` #NUM!

##### Se även

`BETALN`, `GAMMALN`.

`BETALN`
`BETALN` naturlig logaritm för absolutbeloppet av Eulers betafunktion

    BETALN(x;y)

##### Argument

x: tal

y: tal

##### Beskrivning

`BETALN`-funktionen returnerar den naturliga logaritmen för absolutbeloppet av Eulers betafunktion utökad till alla reella tal förutom 0 och negativa heltal.

##### Observera

Om x, y eller (x + y) är icke-positiva heltal returnerar `BETALN` #NUM!

##### Se även

`BETA`, `GAMMALN`.

`CEIL`
`CEIL` minsta heltal större än eller lika med x

    CEIL(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`CEIL`(x) är det minsta heltal som är minst lika stort som x.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är OpenFormula-funktionen CEILING(x).

##### Se även

`CEILING`, `FLOOR`, `ABS`, `INT`, `MOD`.

`CEILING`
`CEILING` närmsta multipel för signifikans vars absolutbelopp är minst ABS(x)

    CEILING(x;signifikans)

##### Argument

x: tal

signifikans: basmultipel (standard är 1 för x > 0 och -1 för x < 0)

##### Beskrivning

`CEILING`(x,signifikans) är närmsta multipel för signifikans vars absolutbelopp är minst ABS(x).

##### Observera

If x or significance is non-numeric, `CEILING` returns a #VALUE! error. If x is positive and significance is negative, `CEILING` returns a #NUM! error.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`CEILING`(x) is exported to ODF as `CEILING`(x,SIGN(x),1). `CEILING`(x,significance) is the OpenFormula function `CEILING`(x,significance,1).

##### Se även

`CEIL`, `FLOOR`, `ABS`, `INT`, `MOD`.

`CHOLESKY`
`CHOLESKY` Cholesky-dekompositionen för en symmetrisk positivt definit matris

    CHOLESKY(matris)

##### Argument

matris: en symmetrisk positivt definit matris

##### Observera

Om Cholesky-Banachiewicz-algoritmen tillämpad på matris misslyckas returnerar Cholesky #NUM! Om matris inte innehåller lika många kolumner som rader returnerar `CHOLESKY` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`MINVERSE`, `MMULT`, `MDETERM`.

`COMBIN`
`COMBIN` binomialkoefficient

    COMBIN(n;k)

##### Argument

n: icke-negativt heltal

k: icke-negativt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`COMBIN` returnerar binomialkoefficienten ”n välj k”, antal k-kombinationer för en n-elementmängd utan repetition.

##### Observera

Om n är mindre än k returnerar `COMBIN` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

`COMBINA`
`COMBINA` antal k-kombinationer för en n-elementmängd med repetition

    COMBINA(n;k)

##### Argument

n: icke-negativt heltal

k: icke-negativt heltal

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`COMBIN`.

`COS`
`COS` cosinus av x

    COS(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i radianer

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SIN`, `TAN`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`, `RADIANS`, `DEGREES`.

`COSH`
`COSH` hyperbolisk cosinus för x

    COSH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SIN`, `TAN`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`.

`COSPI`
`COSPI` cosinus av pi*x

    COSPI(x)

##### Argument

x: antalet halva varv

##### Se även

`COS`.

`COT`
`COT` cotangens av x

    COT(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Se även

`TAN`, `ACOT`.

`COTH`
`COTH` hyperbolisk cotangens för x

    COTH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Se även

`TANH`, `ACOTH`.

`COTPI`
`COTPI` cotangens av pi*x

    COTPI(x)

##### Argument

x: antalet halva varv

##### Se även

`COT`.

`COUNTIF`
`COUNTIF` antal celler som uppfyller angivna kriterier

    COUNTIF(intervall;kriterier)

##### Argument

intervall: cellområde

kriterier: villkor för att en cell ska räknas

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COUNT`, `SUMIF`.

`COUNTIFS`
`COUNTIFS` antal celler som uppfyller angivna kriterier

    COUNTIFS(intervall;kriterier;…)

##### Argument

intervall: cellområde

kriterier: villkor för att en cell ska räknas

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COUNT`, `SUMIF`.

`CSC`
`CSC` cosekanten av x

    CSC(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i radianer

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är inte Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`SIN`, `COS`, `TAN`, `SEC`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`, `RADIANS`, `DEGREES`.

`CSCH`
`CSCH` hyperbolisk cosekant för x

    CSCH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är inte Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`SIN`, `COS`, `TAN`, `CSC`, `SEC`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`.

`DEGREES`
`DEGREES` motsvarande antal grader för x radianer

    DEGREES(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i radianer

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`RADIANS`, `PI`.

`DIGAMMA`
`DIGAMMA` the Digamma function

    DIGAMMA(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Se även

`GAMMA`.

`EIGEN`
`EIGEN` eigenvärden och eigenvektorer för en symmetrisk matris

    EIGEN(matris)

##### Argument

matris: en symmetrisk matris

##### Observera

Om matris inte är symmetrisk, kommer matchande celler utanför diagonalen att medelviktas med antagandet att icke-symmetrin orsakats av avrundningsfel. Om matris inte innehåller lika många kolumner som rader returnerar `EIGEN` #VÄRDE!

`EVEN`
`EVEN` x avrundat bort från 0 till nästa jämna heltal

    EVEN(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ODD`.

`EXP`
`EXP` e upphöjt till x

    EXP(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Observera

e är basen för den naturliga logaritmen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LOG`, `LOG2`, `LOG10`.

`EXPM1`
`EXPM1` EXP(x)-1

    EXPM1(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Observera

Denna funktion har större resulterande precision än att evaluera EXP(x)-1.

##### Se även

`EXP`, `LN1P`.

`FACT`
`FACT` fakultet för x, d.v.s. x!

    FACT(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Observera

Denna funktions domän har utökats med funktionen GAMMA.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`FACTDOUBLE`
`FACTDOUBLE` dubbelfakultet

    FACTDOUBLE(x)

##### Argument

x: icke-negativt heltal

##### Beskrivning

Funktionen `FACTDOUBLE` returnerar dubbelfakulteten x!!

##### Observera

Om x inte är ett heltal trunkeras det. Om x är negativt returnerar `FACTDOUBLE` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FACT`.

`FIB`
`FIB` Fibonaccital

    FIB(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`FIB`(n) är det n:e Fibonaccitalet.

##### Observera

Om n inte är ett heltal trunkeras det. Om det är negativt eller noll returnerar `FIB` #NUM!

`FLOOR`
`FLOOR` närmsta multipel för signifikans vars absolutbelopp är högst ABS(x)

    FLOOR(x,signifikans)

##### Argument

x: tal

signifikans: basmultipel (standard är 1 för x > 0 och -1 för x < 0)

##### Beskrivning

`FLOOR`(x,signifikans) är närmsta multipel för signifikans vars absolutbelopp är som mest ABS(x)

##### Observera

If x is positive and significance is negative, `FLOOR` returns a #NUM! error.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`FLOOR`(x) is exported to ODF as `FLOOR`(x,SIGN(x),1). `FLOOR`(x,significance) is the OpenFormula function `FLOOR`(x,significance,1).

##### Se även

`CEIL`, `CEILING`, `ABS`, `INT`, `MOD`.

`G_PRODUCT`
`G_PRODUCT` produkten av alla värden och refererade celler

    G_PRODUCT(x1;x2;…)

##### Argument

x1: tal

x2: tal

##### Observera

Tomma celler ignoreras och den tomma produkten är 1.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `COUNT`.

`GAMMA`
`GAMMA` Gamma-funktionen

    GAMMA(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Se även

`GAMMALN`.

`GAMMALN`
`GAMMALN` naturlig logaritm av Gamma-funktionen

    GAMMALN(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`GAMMA`.

`GCD`
`GCD` största gemensamma delare

    GCD(n0;n1;…)

##### Argument

n0: positivt heltal

n1: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`GCD` beräknar största gemensamma delare för de givna talen n0,n1,…, det största heltalet som är en delare till varje argument.

##### Observera

Om något av argumenten inte är ett heltal trunkeras det.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LCM`.

`GD`
`GD` Gudermanns funktion

    GD(x)

##### Argument

x: värde

##### Se även

`TAN`, `TANH`.

`HYPOT`
`HYPOT` kvadratroten av summan av kvadraterna av argumenten

    HYPOT(n0;n1;…)

##### Argument

n0: tal

n1: tal

##### Se även

`MIN`, `MAX`.

`IGAMMA`
`IGAMMA` den ofullständiga Gammafunktionen

    IGAMMA(a;x;lägre;regularisera;reell)

##### Argument

a: tal

x: tal

lägre: om sant (standardvärde), är detta den lägre ofullständiga gammafunktionen, annars den övre ofullständiga gammafunktionen

regularisera: om sant (standardvärde), är detta den regulariserade versionen av den ofullständiga gammafunktionen

reell: om sant (standard), den reella delen av resultatet, annars den imaginära delen

##### Observera

Den regulariserade ofullständiga gammafunktionen är den oregulariserade ofullständiga gammafunktionen dividerat med GAMMA(a). Detta är en reellvärd funktion så länge som varken a eller z är negativa.

##### Se även

`GAMMA`, `IMIGAMMA`.

`ILOG`
`ILOG` integer logarithm of x with base base

    ILOG(x,base)

##### Argument

x: positivt tal

bas: basen på logaritmen, standardvärde 10

##### Observera

base must be positive and not equal to 1. If x ≤ 0, LOG returns #NUM! error. This function returns the logarithm of x using base rounded down to nearest integer. Unlike FLOOR(LOG(x,base)), this function is not subject error of representation of the intermediate result. This function is not implemented for all possible value. #VALUE! will be returned for such arguments.

##### Se även

`LOG`.

`INT`
`INT` största heltal inte större än x

    INT(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CEIL`, `CEILING`, `FLOOR`, `ABS`, `MOD`.

`LAMBERTW`
`LAMBERTW` Lamberts W-funktion

    LAMBERTW(x;k)

##### Argument

x: tal

k: gren

##### Beskrivning

The Lambert W function is the inverse function of x=W*exp(W). There are two (real-valued) branches: k=0 which maps [-1/e;inf) onto [-1,inf); and k=-1 which maps [-1/e;0) unto (-inf;-1].

##### Observera

k är som standard 0, huvudgrenen. k måste vara antingen 0 eller -1.

##### Se även

`EXP`.

`LCM`
`LCM` minsta gemensamma multipel

    LCM(n0;n1;…)

##### Argument

n0: positivt heltal

n1: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`LCM` beräknar den minsta gemensamma multipeln för de angivna talen n0,n1,…, det minsta heltalet som är en multipel av varje argument.

##### Observera

Om något av argumenten inte är ett heltal trunkeras det.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`GCD`.

`LINSOLVE`
`LINSOLVE` lös linjär ekvation

    LINSOLVE(A;B)

##### Argument

A: en matris

B: en matris

##### Beskrivning

Löser ekvationen A*X=B och returnerar X.

##### Observera

Om matris A är singulär returneras #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`MINVERSE`.

`LN`
`LN` naturliga logaritmen för x

    LN(x)

##### Argument

x: positivt tal

##### Observera

Om x ≤ 0 returnerar `LN` felet #NUM!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EXP`, `LOG2`, `LOG10`.

`LN1P`
`LN1P` LN(1+x)

    LN1P(x)

##### Argument

x: positivt tal

##### Beskrivning

`LN1P` beräknar LN(1+x) men ger större precision än att evaluera LN(1+x).

##### Observera

If x ≤ -1, `LN1P` returns #NUM! error.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EXP`, `LN`, `EXPM1`.

`LOG`
`LOG` logaritm av x med basen bas

    LOG(x;bas)

##### Argument

x: positivt tal

bas: basen på logaritmen, standardvärde 10

##### Observera

bas måste vara positiv och inte lika med 1. Om x ≤ 0 returnerar `LOG` felet #NUM!.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LN`, `LOG2`, `LOG10`.

`LOG10`
`LOG10` bas-10-logaritmen av x

    LOG10(x)

##### Argument

x: positivt tal

##### Observera

Om x ≤ 0 returnerar `LOG10` #NUM!

##### Se även

`EXP`, `LOG2`, `LOG`.

`LOG2`
`LOG2` bas-2-logaritmen av x

    LOG2(x)

##### Argument

x: positivt tal

##### Observera

Om x ≤ 0 returnerar `LOG2` #NUM!

##### Se även

`EXP`, `LOG10`, `LOG`.

`MAXIFS`
`MAXIFS` maximum för cellerna i verkligt_område för vilka de motsvarande cellerna i området uppfyller givna kriterier

    MAXIFS(verkligt_område;intervall1;kriterier1;…)

##### Argument

verkligt_område: cellområde

intervall1: cellområde

kriterier1: villkor för att en cell ska inkluderas

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MIN`, `MINIFS`.

`MDETERM`
`MDETERM` determinanten av matrisen matris

    MDETERM(matris)

##### Argument

matris: en kvadratisk matris

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MMULT`, `MINVERSE`.

`MINIFS`
`MINIFS` minimum för cellerna i verkligt_område för vilka de motsvarande cellerna i området uppfyller givna kriterier

    MINIFS(verkligt_område;intervall1;kriterier1;…)

##### Argument

verkligt_område: cellområde

intervall1: cellområde

kriterier1: villkor för att en cell ska inkluderas

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MIN`, `MAXIFS`.

`MINVERSE`
`MINVERSE` matrisinversen av matris

    MINVERSE(matris)

##### Argument

matris: en kvadratisk matris

##### Observera

Om matris inte är inverterbar returnerar `MINVERSE` #NUM! Om matris inte innehåller lika många kolumner som rader returnerar `MINVERSE` #VÄRDE!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MMULT`, `MDETERM`, `LINSOLVE`.

`MMULT`
`MMULT` matrisprodukten av mat1 och mat2

    MMULT(mat1;mat2)

##### Argument

mat1: en matris

mat2: en matris

##### Observera

The number of columns in mat1 must equal the number of rows in mat2; otherwise #VALUE! is returned. The result of `MMULT` is an array, in which the number of rows is the same as in mat1, and the number of columns is the same as in mat2.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TRANSPOSE`, `MINVERSE`.

`MOD`
`MOD` resten till x vid division med n

    MOD(x;n)

##### Argument

x: värde

n: value

##### Beskrivning

Funktionen `MOD` returnerar resten då x delas med n.

##### Observera

Om n är 0 returnerar `MOD` #DIV/0!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CEIL`, `CEILING`, `FLOOR`, `ABS`, `INT`, `ABS`.

`MPSEUDOINVERSE`
`MPSEUDOINVERSE` den pseudoinversa matrisen för matris

    MPSEUDOINVERSE(matris;tröskelvärde)

##### Argument

matris: en matris

tröskelvärde: ett relativt tröskelvärde för att förkasta eigenvärden

##### Se även

`MINVERSE`.

`MROUND`
`MROUND` x avrundat till en multipel av m

    MROUND(x;m)

##### Argument

x: tal

m: tal

##### Observera

Om x och m har olika tecken returnerar `MROUND` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ROUNDDOWN`, `ROUND`, `ROUNDUP`.

`MULTINOMIAL`
`MULTINOMIAL` multinomialkoefficienten (x1+⋯+xn) välj (x1,…,xn)

    MULTINOMIAL(x1;x2;xn;…)

##### Argument

x1: första tal

x2: andra tal

xn: n:e tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COMBIN`, `SUM`.

`MUNIT`
`MUNIT` en n×n-identitetsmatris

    MUNIT(n)

##### Argument

n: storleken på matrisen

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`MMULT`, `MDETERM`, `MINVERSE`.

`ODD`
`ODD` x avrundat bort från 0 till nästa udda heltal

    ODD(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EVEN`.

`ODF.SUMPRODUCT`
`ODF.SUMPRODUCT` multiplicerar komponenter och lägger ihop resultaten

    ODF.SUMPRODUCT(;…)

##### Beskrivning

Multiplicerar motsvarande dataposter i de givna vektorerna eller intervallen och returnerar summan av dessa produkter.

##### Observera

Om en post inte är numerisk eller logisk används nollvärdet istället. Om vektorer eller intervallargument inte har samma dimensioner returneras felet #VÄRDE!. Denna funktion skiljer sig från SUMPRODUCT genom att även titta på booleska värden.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är inte Excel-kompatibel. Använd SUMPRODUCT istället.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`SUMPRODUCT`, `SUM`, `PRODUCT`, `G_PRODUCT`.

`PI`
`PI` the constant π

    PI()

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

This function is Excel compatible, but it returns π with a better precision.

##### Se även

`SQRTPI`.

`POCHHAMMER`
`POCHHAMMER` värdet av GAMMA(x+n)/GAMMA(x)

    POCHHAMMER(x;n)

##### Argument

x: tal

n: tal

##### Se även

`GAMMA`.

`POWER`
`POWER` värdet av x upphöjt till y upphöjt till 1/z

    POWER(x;y;z)

##### Argument

x: tal

y: tal

z: tal

##### Observera

Om både x och y är lika med 0 returnerar `POWER` #NUM! Om x = 0 och y < 0 returnerar `POWER` #DIV/0! Om x < 0 och y inte är ett heltal returnerar `POWER` #NUM! z har standardvärdet 1. Om z inte är ett positivt heltal returnerar `POWER` #NUM! Om x < 0, y är udda, och z är jämn returnerar `POWER` #NUM!

##### Se även

`EXP`.

`PRODUCT`
`PRODUCT` produkt för de givna värdena

    PRODUCT(värden;…)

##### Argument

värden: en lista av värden att multiplicera

##### Beskrivning

`PRODUCT` beräknar produkten av alla värden och celler refererade i argumentslistan.

##### Observera

Om alla celler är tomma kommer resultatet att bli 0.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `COUNT`, `G_PRODUCT`.

`QUOTIENT`
`QUOTIENT` heltalsdel av en division

    QUOTIENT(täljare;nämnare)

##### Argument

täljare: heltal

nämnare: nollskilt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`QUOTIENT` ger heltalsdelen av divisionen täljare/nämnare.

`QUOTIENT` (numerator,denominator)⨉denominator+MOD(numerator,denominator)=numerator

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MOD`.

`RADIANS`
`RADIANS` motsvarande antal radianer för x grader

    RADIANS(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i grader

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PI`, `DEGREES`.

`REDUCEPI`
`REDUCEPI` minska modulo Pi delat med en potens av 2

    REDUCEPI(x;e;q)

##### Argument

x: tal

e: skala

q: hämta lägre bitar för täljare, standard är FALSKT

##### Observera

This function returns a value, xr, such that x=xr+j*Pi/2^e where j is an integer and the absolute value of xr does not exceed Pi/2^(e+1). If optional argument q is TRUE, returns instead the e+1 lower bits of j. The reduction is performed as-if using an exact value of Pi. The lowest valid e is -1 representing reduction modulo 2*Pi; the highest is 7 representing reduction modulo Pi/256.

##### Se även

`PI`.

`ROMAN`
`ROMAN` n som en romersk numerisk text

    ROMAN(n;typ)

##### Argument

n: icke-negativt heltal

typ: 0,1,2,3 eller 4, standardvärde 0

##### Beskrivning

`ROMAN` returnerar n som en romersk numerisk text.

Om typ är 0 eller utelämnas returnerar `ROMAN` klassiska romerska siffror.

Typ 1 är mer koncis än klassiska typen, typ 2 är mer koncis än typ 1 och typ 3 är mer koncis än typ 2. Typ 4 är en förenklad typ.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`ROUND`
`ROUND` avrundad x

    ROUND(x;d)

##### Argument

x: tal

d: heltal, standardvärde 0

##### Beskrivning

Om d är större än noll, avrundas x till det givna antalet siffror.

Om d är noll, avrundas x till nästa heltal.

Om d är mindre än noll, avrundas x till vänster om decimalpunkten

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`INT`, `CEIL`, `TRUNC`, `ROUNDDOWN`, `ROUNDUP`, `FLOOR`, `CEILING`.

`ROUNDDOWN`
`ROUNDDOWN` x avrundat mot 0

    ROUNDDOWN(x;d)

##### Argument

x: tal

d: heltal, standardvärde 0

##### Beskrivning

Om d är större än noll, avrundas x mot 0 till det givna antalet siffror.

Om d är noll, avrundas x mot 0 till nästa heltal.

Om d är mindre än noll, avrundas x mot 0 till vänster om decimalpunkten

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ROUND`, `ROUNDUP`.

`ROUNDUP`
`ROUNDUP` x avrundat bort från 0

    ROUNDUP(x;d)

##### Argument

x: tal

d: heltal, standardvärde 0

##### Beskrivning

Om d är större än noll, avrundas x bort från 0 till det givna antalet siffror.

Om d är noll, avrundas x bort från 0 till nästa heltal.

Om d är mindre än noll, avrundas x bort från 0 till vänster om decimalpunkten

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`INT`, `CEIL`, `TRUNC`, `ROUNDDOWN`, `ROUND`, `FLOOR`, `CEILING`.

`SEC`
`SEC` Sekant

    SEC(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i radianer

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är inte Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`SEC`(x) exporteras till OpenFormula som 1/COS(x).

##### Se även

`SIN`, `COS`, `TAN`, `CSC`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`, `RADIANS`, `DEGREES`.

`SECH`
`SECH` hyperbolisk sekant för x

    SECH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är inte Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`SECH`(x) exporteras till OpenFormula som 1/COSH(x).

##### Se även

`SIN`, `COS`, `TAN`, `CSC`, `SEC`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`.

`SERIESSUM`
`SERIESSUM` summan av potensserien vid x

    SERIESSUM(x;n;m;koeff)

##### Argument

x: siffra för var potensserien ska utvärderas

n: icke-negativt heltal, exponenten för den lägsta termen i serien

m: ökning på varje exponent

koeff: koefficienterna för potensserien

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COUNT`, `SUM`.

`SIGN`
`SIGN` tecknet för x

    SIGN(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Beskrivning

`SIGN` returnerar 1 om x är positivt och returnerar -1 om x är negativt.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`ABS`.

`SIN`
`SIN` sinus av x

    SIN(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i radianer

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COS`, `TAN`, `CSC`, `SEC`, `SINH`, `COSH`, `TANH`, `RADIANS`, `DEGREES`.

`SINH`
`SINH` hyperbolisk sinus för x

    SINH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SIN`, `COSH`, `ASINH`.

`SINPI`
`SINPI` sinus av pi*x

    SINPI(x)

##### Argument

x: antalet halva varv

##### Se även

`SIN`.

`SQRT`
`SQRT` kvadratrot av x

    SQRT(x)

##### Argument

x: icke-negativt tal

##### Observera

Om x är negativ returnerar `SQRT` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`POWER`.

`SQRTPI`
`SQRTPI` the square root of x times π

    SQRTPI(x)

##### Argument

x: icke-negativt tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PI`.

`SUM`
`SUM` summa för de givna värdena

    SUM(värden;…)

##### Argument

värden: en lista av värden att lägga till

##### Beskrivning

`SUM` beräknar summan av alla värden och celler refererade i argumentlistan.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `COUNT`.

`SUMA`
`SUMA` summan av alla värden och refererade celler

    SUMA(område0;område1;…)

##### Argument

område0: första cellområdet

område1: andra cellområdet

##### Beskrivning

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas det som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1).

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `SUM`, `COUNT`.

`SUMIF`
`SUMIF` summan av de celler i verkligt_område för vilka motsvarande celler i området uppfyller givna kriterier

    SUMIF(intervall;kriterier;verkligt_område)

##### Argument

intervall: cellområde

kriterier: villkor för att en cell ska summeras

verkligt_område: cellområde, standard är intervall

##### Observera

Om storlek för verkligt_område skiljer sig från storleken för intervall, ändrar verkligt_område storlek (behåller det övre vänstra hörnet) för att matcha storleken hos intervall.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `SUMIFS`, `COUNTIF`.

`SUMIFS`
`SUMIFS` summan av de celler i verkligt_område för vilka motsvarande celler i området uppfyller givna kriterier

    SUMIFS(verkligt_område;intervall1;kriterier1;…)

##### Argument

verkligt_område: cellområde

intervall1: cellområde

kriterier1: villkor för att en cell ska inkluderas

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `SUMIF`.

`SUMPRODUCT`
`SUMPRODUCT` multiplicerar komponenter och lägger ihop resultaten

    SUMPRODUCT(,…)

##### Beskrivning

Multiplicerar motsvarande dataposter i de givna vektorerna eller intervallen och returnerar summan av dessa produkter.

##### Observera

Om en post inte är numerisk används nollvärdet istället. Om vektorer eller intervallargument inte har samma dimensioner returneras felet #VÄRDE!. Denna funktion ignorerar logik, så att använda `SUMPRODUCT`(A1:A5>0) kommer inte att fungera. Använd istället `SUMPRODUCT`(--(A1:A5>0))

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är inte OpenFormula-kompatibel. Använd ODF.`SUMPRODUCT` istället.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `PRODUCT`, `G_PRODUCT`, `ODF.SUMPRODUCT`.

`SUMSQ`
`SUMSQ` summan av kvadraterna av alla värden och refererade celler

    SUMSQ(område0;område1;…)

##### Argument

område0: första cellområdet

område1: andra cellområdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `COUNT`.

`SUMX2MY2`
`SUMX2MY2` summan av skillnaderna av tal i kvadrat

    SUMX2MY2(vektor0;vektor1)

##### Argument

vektor0: första cellarean

vektor1: andra cellarean

##### Beskrivning

`SUMX2MY2`-funktionen returnerar summan av skillnaderna av tal i kvadrat motsvarande värden i två vektorer. Ekvationen av `SUMX2MY2` är SUM(x^2-y^2).

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUMSQ`, `SUMX2PY2`.

`SUMX2PY2`
`SUMX2PY2` summan av summan av talen i kvadrat

    SUMX2PY2(vektor0;array1)

##### Argument

vektor0: första cellarean

vektor1: andra cellarean

##### Beskrivning

`SUMX2PY2`-funktionen returnerar summan av kvadratsumman av motsvarande värden i två vektorer. Ekvationen för `SUMX2PY2` är SUM(x^2+y^2).

##### Observera

Om vektor0 och vektor1 har olika antal datapunkter returnerar `SUMX2PY2` #-.

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUMSQ`, `SUMX2MY2`.

`SUMXMY2`
`SUMXMY2` summan av kvadrater av skillnader

    SUMXMY2(vektor0;array1)

##### Argument

vektor0: första cellarean

vektor1: andra cellarean

##### Beskrivning

`SUMXMY2`-funktionen returnerar summan av kvadratskillnaderna för motsvarande värden i två vektorer. Ekvationen för `SUMXMY2` är SUM((x-y)^2).

##### Observera

Om vektor0 och vektor1 har olika antal datapunkter returnerar `SUMXMY2` #-.

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUMSQ`, `SUMX2MY2`, `SUMX2PY2`.

`TAN`
`TAN` tangens av x

    TAN(x)

##### Argument

x: vinkel i radianer

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TANH`, `COS`, `COSH`, `SIN`, `SINH`, `DEGREES`, `RADIANS`.

`TANH`
`TANH` hyperbolisk tangens för x

    TANH(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TAN`, `SIN`, `SINH`, `COS`, `COSH`.

`TANPI`
`TANPI` tangens av pi*x

    TANPI(x)

##### Argument

x: antalet halva varv

##### Se även

`TAN`.

`TRUNC`
`TRUNC` x trunkerad till d siffror

    TRUNC(x;d)

##### Argument

x: tal

d: heltal, standardvärde 0

##### Observera

If d is omitted then it defaults to zero. If it is not an integer then it is truncated to an integer. If d is negative, it refers to number of digits before the decimal point.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`INT`, `CEIL`, `ROUNDDOWN`, `ROUNDUP`, `ROUND`, `FLOOR`, `CEILING`.

### Talteori

`ISPRIME`
`ISPRIME` huruvida n är ett primtal

    ISPRIME(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`ISPRIME` returnerar SANT om n är ett primtal och FALSKT annars.

##### Se även

`NT_D`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`ITHPRIME`
`ITHPRIME` i:e primtalet

    ITHPRIME(i)

##### Argument

i: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`ITHPRIME` hittar det i:e primtalet.

##### Se även

`NT_D`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`NT_D`
`NT_D` antal delare

    NT_D(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`NT_D` beräknar antalet delare till n.

##### Se även

`ITHPRIME`, `NT_PHI`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`NT_MU`
`NT_MU` Möbius mu-funktion

    NT_MU(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

Funktionen `NT_MU` (Möbius µ-funktion) returnerar 0 om n är delbart med kvadraten av ett primtal. Annars returnerar `NT_MU` -1 om n har ett udda antal olika primfaktorer, och returnerar 1 om n har ett jämnt antal olika primfaktorer. Om n = 1 returnerar `NT_MU` 1.

##### Se även

`ITHPRIME`, `NT_PHI`, `NT_SIGMA`, `NT_D`.

`NT_OMEGA`
`NT_OMEGA` Antal olika primtalsfaktorer

    NT_OMEGA(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Observera

Returnerar antalet olika primtalsfaktorer utan antal upprepningar.

##### Se även

`NT_D`, `ITHPRIME`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`NT_PHI`
`NT_PHI` Eulers fi-funktion

    NT_PHI(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Observera

Eulers fi-funktion ger antalet heltal mindre än eller lika med n som är relativt prima (coprime) till n.

##### Se även

`NT_D`, `ITHPRIME`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`NT_PI`
`NT_PI` antal primtal upp till n

    NT_PI(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`NT_PI` returnerar antalet primtal mindre än eller lika med n.

##### Se även

`ITHPRIME`, `NT_PHI`, `NT_D`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`NT_RADICAL`
`NT_RADICAL` Radikalfunktion

    NT_RADICAL(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Observera

Funktionen beräknar produkten av dess olika primtalsfaktorer

##### Se även

`NT_D`, `ITHPRIME`, `NT_SIGMA`.

`NT_SIGMA`
`NT_SIGMA` sigmafunktion

    NT_SIGMA(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`NT_SIGMA` beräknar summan av delarna till n.

##### Se även

`NT_D`, `ITHPRIME`, `NT_PHI`.

`PFACTOR`
`PFACTOR` minsta primtalsfaktor

    PFACTOR(n)

##### Argument

n: positivt heltal

##### Beskrivning

`PFACTOR` hittar den minsta primtalsfaktorn för sitt argument.

##### Observera

Argumentet n måste vara åtminstone 2. Annars returneras felet #VÄRDE!.

##### Se även

`ITHPRIME`.

### Slumptal

`RAND`
`RAND` en slumpmässig siffra mellan 0 och 1

    RAND()

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`RANDBETWEEN`.

`RANDBERNOULLI`
`RANDBERNOULLI` slumpvariabel från en Bernoullifördelning

    RANDBERNOULLI(p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet att lyckas

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar `RANDBERNOULLI` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDBETWEEN`.

`RANDBETA`
`RANDBETA` slumpvariabel från en Betafördelning

    RANDBETA(a;b)

##### Argument

a: parameter för Betafördelningen

b: parameter för Betafördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDGAMMA`.

`RANDBETWEEN`
`RANDBETWEEN` ett slumpmässigt heltal mellan och inkluderande minsta och högsta

    RANDBETWEEN(minsta;högsta)

##### Argument

minsta: nedre gräns

högsta: övre gräns

##### Observera

Om minsta > högsta returnerar `RANDBETWEEN` #NUM!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDUNIFORM`.

`RANDBINOM`
`RANDBINOM` slumpvariabel från en binomialfördelning

    RANDBINOM(p;n)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet att lyckas i ett enstaka försök

n: antalet försök

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar `RANDBINOM` #NUM! Om n < 0 returnerar `RANDBINOM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDBETWEEN`.

`RANDCAUCHY`
`RANDCAUCHY` slumpvariabel från en Cauchy- eller Lorentz-distribution

    RANDCAUCHY(a)

##### Argument

a: skalparametern för fördelningen

##### Observera

Om a < 0 returnerar `RANDCAUCHY` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDCHISQ`
`RANDCHISQ` slumpvariabel från en chitvåfördelning

    RANDCHISQ(fri)

##### Argument

fri: frihetsgrader

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDGAMMA`.

`RANDDISCRETE`
`RANDDISCRETE` slumpvariabel från en finit diskret fördelning

    RANDDISCRETE(val_range,prob_range)

##### Argument

val_range: possible values of the random variable

prob_range: probabilities of the corresponding values in val_range, defaults to equal probabilities

##### Beskrivning

`RANDDISCRETE` returns one of the values in the val_range. The probabilities for each value are given in the prob_range.

##### Observera

If the sum of all values in prob_range is not one, `RANDDISCRETE` returns #NUM! If val_range and prob_range are not the same size, `RANDDISCRETE` returns #NUM! If val_range or prob_range is not a range, `RANDDISCRETE` returns #VALUE!

##### Se även

`RANDBETWEEN`, `RAND`.

`RANDEXP`
`RANDEXP` slumpvariabel från en exponentialfördelning

    RANDEXP(b)

##### Argument

b: parameter för exponentialfördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDBETWEEN`.

`RANDEXPPOW`
`RANDEXPPOW` slumpvariabel från exponentialpotensfördelningen

    RANDEXPPOW(a;b)

##### Argument

a: skalparameter för exponentialpotensfördelningen

b: exponent för exponentialpotensfördelningen

##### Beskrivning

För b = 1 reduceras exponentialpotensfördelningen till Laplace-fördelningen.

För b = 2 reduceras exponentialpotensfördelningen till normalfördelningen med σ = a/sqrt(2)

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDFDIST`
`RANDFDIST` slumpvariabel från en F-fördelning

    RANDFDIST(fri1;fri2)

##### Argument

fri1: antal frihetsgrader för täljare

fri2: antal frihetsgrader för nämnare

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDGAMMA`.

`RANDGAMMA`
`RANDGAMMA` slumpvariabel från en Gammafördelning

    RANDGAMMA(a;b)

##### Argument

a: formparameter för Gammafördelningen

b: skalparameter för Gammafördelningen

##### Observera

Om a ≤ 0, returnerar `RANDGAMMA` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDGEOM`
`RANDGEOM` slumpvariabel från en geometrisk fördelning

    RANDGEOM(p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet att lyckas i ett enstaka försök

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar `RANDGEOM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDGUMBEL`
`RANDGUMBEL` slumpvariabel från en Gumbel-fördelning

    RANDGUMBEL(a;b;typ)

##### Argument

a: parameter för Gumbel-fördelningen

b: parameter för Gumbel-fördelningen

typ: typ av Gumbel-fördelningen, standard är 1

##### Observera

Om typ är varken 1 eller 2, returnerar `RANDGUMBEL` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDHYPERG`
`RANDHYPERG` slumpvariabel från en hypergeometrisk fördelning

    RANDHYPERG(n1;n2;t)

##### Argument

n1: antal objekt av typ 1

n2: antal objekt av typ 2

t: totalt antal valda objekt

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDLANDAU`
`RANDLANDAU` slumpvariabel från Landau-fördelningen

    RANDLANDAU()

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDLAPLACE`
`RANDLAPLACE` slumpvariabel från en Laplace-fördelning

    RANDLAPLACE(a)

##### Argument

a: parameter för Laplace-fördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDLEVY`
`RANDLEVY` slumpvariabel från en Lévy-fördelning

    RANDLEVY(c;α;β)

##### Argument

c: parameter för Lévy-fördelningen

α: parameter för Lévy-fördelningen

β: parameter för Lévy-fördelningen, standard är 0

##### Beskrivning

Om α = 1, β=0, reduceras Lévy-fördelningen till Cauchy- eller Lorentzian-fördelningen.

För α = 2, β=0, reduceras Lévy-fördelningen till normalfördelningen.

##### Observera

Om α ≤ 0 eller α > 2, returnerar `RANDLEVY` #NUM! Om β < -1 eller β > 1, returnerar `RANDLEVY` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDLOG`
`RANDLOG` slumpvariabel från en logaritmisk fördelning

    RANDLOG(p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar `RANDLOG` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDLOGISTIC`
`RANDLOGISTIC` slumpvariabel från en logistisk fördelning

    RANDLOGISTIC(a)

##### Argument

a: parameter för den logistiska fördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDLOGNORM`
`RANDLOGNORM` slumpvariabel från en lognormalfördelning

    RANDLOGNORM(ζ;σ)

##### Argument

ζ: parameter för lognormalfördelningen

σ: standardavvikelse för fördelningen

##### Observera

Om σ < 0 returnerar `RANDLOGNORM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDNEGBINOM`
`RANDNEGBINOM` slumpvariabel från en negativ binomialfördelning

    RANDNEGBINOM(p;n)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet att lyckas i ett enstaka försök

n: antalet misslyckanden

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar `RANDNEGBINOM` #NUM! Om n < 1 returnerar `RANDNEGBINOM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDBETWEEN`.

`RANDNORM`
`RANDNORM` slumpvariabel från en normalfördelning

    RANDNORM(μ;σ)

##### Argument

μ: fördelningens medelvärde

σ: standardavvikelse för fördelningen

##### Observera

Om σ < 0 returnerar `RANDNORM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDNORMTAIL`
`RANDNORMTAIL` slumpvariabel från den övre svansen av en normalfördelning med medel 0

    RANDNORMTAIL(a;σ)

##### Argument

a: nedre gränsen för svansen

σ: standardavvikelsen för normalfördelningen

##### Observera

Metoden är baserad på Marsaglias berömda rectangle-wedge-tail-algoritm (Ann Math Stat 32, 894-899 (1961)), med denna aspekt förklarad i Knuth, v2, 3rd ed, p139, 586 (exercise 11).

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDPARETO`
`RANDPARETO` slumpvariabel från en Pareto-fördelning

    RANDPARETO(a;b)

##### Argument

a: parameter för Pareto-fördelningen

b: parameter för Pareto-fördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDPOISSON`
`RANDPOISSON` slumpvariabel från en Poisson-fördelning

    RANDPOISSON(λ)

##### Argument

λ: parameter för Poisson-fördelningen

##### Observera

Om λ < 0 returnerar `RANDPOISSON` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDBETWEEN`.

`RANDRAYLEIGH`
`RANDRAYLEIGH` slumpvariabel från en Rayleigh-fördelning

    RANDRAYLEIGH(σ)

##### Argument

σ: skalparameter för Rayleigh-fördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDRAYLEIGHTAIL`
`RANDRAYLEIGHTAIL` slumpvariabel från svansen av en Rayleigh-fördelning

    RANDRAYLEIGHTAIL(a;σ)

##### Argument

a: nedre gränsen för svansen

σ: skalparameter för Rayleigh-fördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`, `RANDRAYLEIGH`.

`RANDSNORM`
`RANDSNORM` slumpvariabel från en skev-normal-fördelning

    RANDSNORM(𝛼;𝜉;𝜔)

##### Argument

𝛼: formparameter för skev-normal-fördelningen, standard är 0

𝜉: platsparameter för skev-normalfördelningen, standard är 0

𝜔: skalparameter för skev-normal-fördelningen, standard är 1

##### Beskrivning

Slumpvariablerna dras från skev-normal-fördelningen med formparametern 𝛼. När 𝛼=0 försvinner skevheten och vi återfår standardnormaltätheten; då 𝛼 ökar (i absolutbeloppet), ökar skevheten för fördelningen; när 𝛼 närmar sig oändlighet konvergerar tätheten mot den så kallade halv-normala (eller hopfällt normala) täthetsfunktionen; om tecknet för 𝛼 ändras, reflekteras tätheten på motsatta sidan av den vertikala axeln.

##### Observera

Medel för en skev-normalfördelning med platsparametern 𝜉=0 är inte 0. Standardavvikelsen för en skev-normal-fördelning med skalparametern 𝜔=1 är inte 1. Skevhet för en skev-normal-fördelning är oftast inte 𝛼. Om 𝜔 < 0, returnerar `RANDSNORM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RANDNORM`, `RANDSTDIST`.

`RANDSTDIST`
`RANDSTDIST` slumpvariabel från en skev-t-fördelning

    RANDSTDIST(fri;𝛼)

##### Argument

fri: frihetsgrader

𝛼: formparameter för skev-t-fördelningen, standard är 0

##### Observera

Medel för en skev-t-fördelning är inte 0. Standardavvikelsen för en skev-t-fördelning är inte 1. Skevhet för en skev-t-fördelning är oftast inte 𝛼.

##### Se även

`RANDTDIST`, `RANDSNORM`.

`RANDTDIST`
`RANDTDIST` slumpvariabel från en Students t-fördelning

    RANDTDIST(fri)

##### Argument

fri: frihetsgrader

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`RANDUNIFORM`
`RANDUNIFORM` slumpvariabel från likformiga fördelningen från a till b

    RANDUNIFORM(a;b)

##### Argument

a: nedre gränsen av likformiga fördelningen

b: övre gränsen för likformiga fördelningen

##### Observera

Om a > b returnerar `RANDUNIFORM` #NUM!

##### Se även

`RANDBETWEEN`, `RAND`.

`RANDWEIBULL`
`RANDWEIBULL` slumpvariabel från en Weibull-fördelning

    RANDWEIBULL(a;b)

##### Argument

a: skalparameter för Weibull-fördelningen

b: formparametern för Weibull-fördelningen

##### Se även

`RAND`.

`SIMTABLE`
`SIMTABLE` en av värdena i den givna argumentlistan beroende på avrundningssiffran för simuleringsverktyget

    SIMTABLE(d1;d2,…)

##### Argument

d1: första värdet

d2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

`SIMTABLE` returnerar ett av värdena i argumentlistan beroende på den nuvarande rundan i simulationsverktyget. Om simulationsverktyget inte är aktiverat returnerar `SIMTABLE` d1.

Med simulationsverktyget och `SIMTABLE`-funktionen kan du testa givna beslutsvariabler. Varje `SIMTABLE`-funktion innehåller de möjliga värdena för en simulationsvariabel. I de flesta korrekta simulationsmodeller bör du ha samma antal värden dN för alla beslutsvariabler. Om simulationen körs i fler rundor än det finns definierade variabler returnerar `SIMTABLE` felet #- (t.ex. om A1 innehåller ”=`SIMTABLE`(1)” och A2 innehåller ”=`SIMTABLE`(1,2)” så ger A1 felet #- på andra rundan).

Ett iterativt användande av simulationsverktyget kräver också att du ger det åtminstone en indatavariabel med RAND() eller annan RAND<fördelning>()-funktion. För varje runda itererar simulationsverktyget ett givet antal gånger över alla indatavariabler för att evaluera dem. Under varje iteration sparas värdena på utdatavariablerna, och när rundan är klar skapas deskriptiv statistisk information beroende på dessa värden.

### Statistik

`ADTEST`
`ADTEST` Anderson-Darling-testet för normalitet

    ADTEST(x)

##### Argument

x: vektor av stickprovsvärden

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar en vektor där första raden ger ett p-värde för Anderson-Darling-testet, den andra raden teststatistiken för testet, och den tredje raden antalet observationer i samplingen.

##### Observera

Om det finns mindre är 8 stickprovsvärden returnerar `ADTEST` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`CHITEST`, `CVMTEST`, `LKSTEST`, `SFTEST`.

`AVEDEV`
`AVEDEV` medel för den absoluta avvikelsen för en datamängd

    AVEDEV(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`STDEV`.

`AVERAGE`
`AVERAGE` medel för alla talvärden och celler

    AVERAGE(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`SUM`, `COUNT`.

`AVERAGEA`
`AVERAGEA` medel för alla värden och celler

    AVERAGEA(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`.

`BERNOULLI`
`BERNOULLI` sannolikhetsfunktionen för en Bernoulli-fördelning

    BERNOULLI(k;p)

##### Argument

k: heltal

p: sannolikhet att lyckas

##### Observera

Om k != 0 och k != 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Se även

`RANDBERNOULLI`.

`BETA.DIST`
`BETA.DIST` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för betafördelningen

    BETA.DIST(x;alfa;beta;kumulativ;a;b)

##### Argument

x: tal

alfa: skalparameter

beta: skalparameter

kumulativ: huruvida täthetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

a: frivillig lägre gräns, standardvärde 0

b: frivillig övre gräns, standardvärde är 1

##### Observera

Om x < a eller x > b returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om alfa <= 0 eller beta <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om a >= b returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BETAINV`, `BETADIST`.

`BETADIST`
`BETADIST` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för betafördelningen

    BETADIST(x;alfa;beta;a;b)

##### Argument

x: tal

alfa: skalparameter

beta: skalparameter

a: frivillig lägre gräns, standardvärde 0

b: frivillig övre gräns, standardvärde är 1

##### Observera

Om x < a eller x > b returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om alfa <= 0 eller beta <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om a >= b returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BETAINV`, `BETA.DIST`.

`BETAINV`
`BETAINV` inversen för kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för betafördelningen

    BETAINV(p;alfa;beta;a;b)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

alfa: skalparameter

beta: skalparameter

a: frivillig lägre gräns, standardvärde 0

b: frivillig övre gräns, standardvärde är 1

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om alfa <= 0 eller beta <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om a >= b returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BETADIST`, `BETA.DIST`.

`BINOM.DIST.RANGE`
`BINOM.DIST.RANGE` sannolikheten för binomialfördelningen över ett intervall

    BINOM.DIST.RANGE(försök;p;start;slut)

##### Argument

försök: antal försök

p: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

start: början på intervallet

slut: slutet på intervallet, standardvärde är start

##### Observera

Om start, slut eller försök är icke-heltal trunkeras de. Om försök < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om start > slut returnerar denna funktion 0.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`BINOMDIST`, `R.PBINOM`.

`BINOMDIST`
`BINOMDIST` sannolikhetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för binomialfördelningen

    BINOMDIST(n;försök;p;kumulativ)

##### Argument

n: antal lyckade

försök: antal försök

p: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

kumulativ: huruvida sannolikhetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om n eller försök är icke-heltal trunkeras de. Om n < 0 eller försök < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om n > försök returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`POISSON`.

`CAUCHY`
`CAUCHY` täthetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Cauchy, Lorentz eller Breit-Wigner-fördelningen

    CAUCHY(x;a;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: tal

a: skalparameter

kumulativ: huruvida täthetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om a < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om kumulativ är varken SANT eller FALSKT returnerar denna funktion ett #VÄRDE!-fel.

##### Se även

`RANDCAUCHY`.

`CHIDIST`
`CHIDIST` överlevnadsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen

    CHIDIST(x;fri)

##### Argument

x: tal

fri: antalet frihetsgrader

##### Beskrivning

Denna överlevnadsfunktion är 1 minus den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen.

##### Observera

Om fri är ett icke-heltal trunkeras det. Om fri < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`CHIDIST`(x,dof) is the OpenFormula function LEGACY.`CHIDIST`(x,dof).

##### Se även

`CHIINV`, `CHITEST`.

`CHIINV`
`CHIINV` inversen på överlevnadsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen

    CHIINV(p;fri)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

fri: antalet frihetsgrader

##### Beskrivning

Denna överlevnadsfunktion är 1 minus den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen.

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 eller fri < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`CHIINV`(p,dof) is the OpenFormula function LEGACY.CHIDIST(p,dof).

##### Se även

`CHIDIST`, `CHITEST`.

`CHITEST`
`CHITEST` p-värde för Goodness of Fit-test

    CHITEST(verkligt_område;teoretiskt_område)

##### Argument

aktuellt_område: observerade data

teoretiskt_område: förväntade värden

##### Observera

Om det aktuella området inte är ett n×1- eller 1×n-intervall, utan ett n×m-intervall, så använder `CHITEST` (n-1) gånger (m-1) som antalet frihetsgrader. Detta är användbart om de förväntade värdena beräknades från det observerade värdet i ett oberoendetest eller ett homogenitetstest.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`CHITEST` är OpenFormula-funktionen LEGACY.`CHITEST`.

##### Se även

`CHIDIST`, `CHIINV`.

`CONFIDENCE`
`CONFIDENCE` felmarginal för ett konfidensintervall för populationsmedlet

    CONFIDENCE(alfa;stdavv;storlek)

##### Argument

alfa: signifikansnivå

stdavv: standardavvikelsen för populationen

storlek: stickprovsstorlek

##### Observera

Denna funktion kräver den vanligtvis okända standardavvikelsen för populationen. Om storlek är ett icke-heltal trunkeras det. Om storlek < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om storlek är 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `CONFIDENCE.T`.

`CONFIDENCE.T`
`CONFIDENCE.T` felmarginal för ett konfidensintervall för populationsmedlet med Students t-fördelning

    CONFIDENCE.T(alfa;stdavv;storlek)

##### Argument

alfa: signifikansnivå

stdavv: standardavvikelse för stickprov

storlek: stickprovsstorlek

##### Observera

Om stdavv < 0 eller = 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om storlek är ett icke-heltal trunkeras det. Om storlek < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om storlek är 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `CONFIDENCE`.

`CORREL`
`CORREL` Pearsons korrelationskoefficient för två datamängder

    CORREL(vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

vektor1: första datamängd

vektor2: andra datamängd

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COVAR`, `FISHER`, `FISHERINV`.

`COUNT`
`COUNT` totala antalet hel- eller flyttalsargument som skickats in

    COUNT(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`.

`COUNTA`
`COUNTA` antal argument som skickats in, ej inkluderat tomma celler

    COUNTA(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `COUNT`, `DCOUNT`, `DCOUNTA`, `PRODUCT`, `SUM`.

`COVAR`
`COVAR` kovarians för två datamängder

    COVAR(vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

vektor1: första datamängd

vektor2: andra datamängd

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CORREL`, `FISHER`, `FISHERINV`.

`COVARIANCE.S`
`COVARIANCE.S` stickprovskovarians för två datamängder

    COVARIANCE.S(vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

vektor1: första datamängd

vektor2: andra datamängd

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COVAR`, `CORREL`.

`CRITBINOM`
`CRITBINOM` högersvansat kritiskt värde för binomialfördelningen

    CRITBINOM(försök;p;alfa)

##### Argument

försök: antal försök

p: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

alfa: signifikansnivå (område för svansen)

##### Observera

Om försök är icke-heltal trunkeras det. Om försök < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.Om alfa < 0 eller alfa > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BINOMDIST`.

`CRONBACH`
`CRONBACH` Cronbachs alfa

    CRONBACH(ref1;ref2;…)

##### Argument

ref1: första datamängd

ref2: andra datamängd

##### Se även

`VAR`.

`CVMTEST`
`CVMTEST` Cramér-von Mises-testet för normalitet

    CVMTEST(x)

##### Argument

x: vektor av stickprovsvärden

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar en vektor där första raden ger ett p-värde för Cramér-von Mises-testet, den andra raden teststatistiken för testet, och den tredje raden antalet observationer i samplingen.

##### Observera

Om det finns mindre är 8 stickprovsvärden returnerar `CVMTEST` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`CHITEST`, `ADTEST`, `LKSTEST`, `SFTEST`.

`DEVSQ`
`DEVSQ` kvadratsumma för avvikelser för en datamängd

    DEVSQ(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`STDEV`.

`EXPONDIST`
`EXPONDIST` täthetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen

    EXPONDIST(x;y;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: tal

y: skalparameter

kumulativ: huruvida täthetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Beskrivning

Om kumulativ är falskt returneras: y * exp (-y*x), annars returneras 1 - exp (-y*x).

##### Observera

Om x < 0 eller y <= 0 kommer detta att returnera ett fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`POISSON`.

`EXPPOWDIST`
`EXPPOWDIST` täthetsfunktionen för exponentialpotensfördelningen

    EXPPOWDIST(x;a;b)

##### Argument

x: tal

a: skalparameter

b: skalparameter

##### Beskrivning

Denna fördelning har rekommenderats för livstidsanalys när en U-formad hasardfunktion önskas. Detta motsvarar ökat misslyckande när väl produkten börjar att bli utsliten efter en period av stabil, eller till och med ökad pålitlighet.

##### Se även

`RANDEXPPOW`.

`FDIST`
`FDIST` överlevnadsfunktionen för F-fördelningen

    FDIST(x;fri_för_täl;fri_för_näm)

##### Argument

x: tal

fri_för_täl: antal frihetsgrader för täljare

fri_för_näm: antal frihetsgrader för nämnare

##### Beskrivning

Denna överlevnadsfunktion är 1 minus den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen.

##### Observera

Om x < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om fri_för_täl < 1 eller fri_för_näm < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`FDIST` är OpenFormula-funktionen LEGACY.`FDIST`.

##### Se även

`FINV`.

`FINV`
`FINV` inversen för överlevnadsfunktionen för F-fördelningen

    FINV(p;fri_för_täl;fri_för_näm)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

fri_för_täl: antal frihetsgrader för täljare

fri_för_näm: antal frihetsgrader för nämnare

##### Beskrivning

Denna överlevnadsfunktion är 1 minus den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen.

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om fri_för_täl < 1 eller fri_för_näm < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`FINV` är OpenFormula-funktionen LEGACY.`FINV`.

##### Se även

`FDIST`.

`FISHER`
`FISHER` Fisher-transformation

    FISHER(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Observera

Om x inte är ett tal returnerar denna funktion ett #VÄRDE!-fel. Om x <= -1 eller x >= 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FISHERINV`, `ATANH`.

`FISHERINV`
`FISHERINV` inversen för Fisher-transformationen

    FISHERINV(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Observera

Om x är ett icketal returnerar denna funktion ett #VÄRDE!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FISHER`, `TANH`.

`FORECAST`
`FORECAST` estimerar ett framtida värde efter existerande värden med användning av enkel linjär regression

    FORECAST(x;kända_y;kända_x)

##### Argument

x: x-värde vars matchande y-värde ska förutsägas

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar ett framtida värde efter befintliga värden med användning av enkel linjär regression.

##### Observera

Om kända_x eller kända_y inte innehåller dataposter eller annorlunda antal dataposter returnerar denna funktion felet #-. Om variansen för kända_x är 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`INTERCEPT`, `TREND`.

`FREQUENCY`
`FREQUENCY` frekvenstabell

    FREQUENCY(datavektor;intervallvektor)

##### Argument

datavektor: datavärden

intervallvektor: en vektor med avgränsningsvärden

##### Beskrivning

Resultaten ges som en vektor.

Om intervallvektor är tom returnerar denna funktion antalet datapunkter i datavektor.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`FTEST`
`FTEST` p-värdet för tvåsvansade hypotestestet jämförande variansen för två populationer

    FTEST(vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

vektor1: sampling från den första populationen

vektor2: sampling från den andra populationen

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FDIST`, `FINV`.

`GAMMADIST`
`GAMMADIST` täthetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för gammafördelningen

    GAMMADIST(x;alfa;beta;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: tal

alfa: skalparameter

beta: skalparameter

kumulativ: huruvida täthetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om x < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om alfa <= 0 eller beta <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`GAMMAINV`.

`GAMMAINV`
`GAMMAINV` inversen av den kumulativa gammafördelningen

    GAMMAINV(p;alfa;beta)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

alfa: skalparameter

beta: skalparameter

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om alfa <= 0 eller beta <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`GAMMADIST`.

`GEOMDIST`
`GEOMDIST` sannolikhetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för den geometriska fördelningen

    GEOMDIST(k;p;kumulativ)

##### Argument

k: antal försök

p: sannolikheten för ett lyckat försök

kumulativ: huruvida sannolikhetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om k < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om kumulativ är varken SANT eller FALSKT returnerar denna funktion ett #VÄRDE!-fel.

##### Se även

`RANDGEOM`.

`GEOMEAN`
`GEOMEAN` geometriskt medel

    GEOMEAN(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Geometriska medlet är lika med N:e roten för N-värdenas produkter.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `HARMEAN`, `MEDIAN`, `MODE`, `TRIMMEAN`.

`GROWTH`
`GROWTH` exponentiell förutsägelse av ökning

    GROWTH(kända_y;kända_x;nya_x;affin)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden; standardvärdet är vektorn {1, 2, 3, …}

nya_x: x-värden för vilka y-estimat ska ske; standardvärdet är kända_x

affin: om sant innehåller modellen en konstant term, standardvärdet är sant

##### Beskrivning

`GROWTH`-funktionen tillämpas på ”minsta kvadrat”-metoden för att passa in en exponentialkurva till dina data och förutse den exponentiella ökningen använd av denna kurva.

`GROWTH` returnerar en vektor bestående av en kolumn och rad för varje datapunkt i nya_x.

##### Observera

Om kända_y och kända_x har ett ojämnt antal datapunkter returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Se även

`LOGEST`, `GROWTH`, `TREND`.

`HARMEAN`
`HARMEAN` harmoniskt medel

    HARMEAN(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Harmoniskt medel för N datapunkter är N delat med summan av inversen för datapunkterna).

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `GEOMEAN`, `MEDIAN`, `MODE`, `TRIMMEAN`.

`HYPGEOMDIST`
`HYPGEOMDIST` sannolikhetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för hypergeometriska fördelningen

    HYPGEOMDIST(x;n;M;N;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: antal lyckade

n: stickprovsstorlek

M: antal lyckade försök i populationen

N: populationsstorlek

kumulativ: huruvida sannolikhetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om x,n,M eller N är icke-heltal trunkeras de. Om x,n,M eller N < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om x > M eller n > N returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BINOMDIST`, `POISSON`.

`INTERCEPT`
`INTERCEPT` skärningspunktsvärde för en linjär regressionslinje

    INTERCEPT(kända_y;kända_x)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden

##### Observera

Om kända_x eller kända_y inte innehåller dataposter eller annorlunda antal dataposter returnerar denna funktion felet #-. Om variansen för kända_x är 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FORECAST`, `TREND`.

`KURT`
`KURT` väntevärdesriktigt estimat för kurtosis för en datamängd

    KURT(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Observera

Detta är endast meningsfullt om den underliggande fördelningen verkligen har ett fjärde moment. Kurtosis är förskjutet med tre så att en normalfördelning kommer att ha 0 kurtosis. Om mindre än fyra tal anges, eller om alla är samma returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `VAR`, `SKEW`, `KURTP`.

`KURTP`
`KURTP` populationskurtosis för en datamängd

    KURTP(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Observera

Om mindre än två tal anges, eller om alla av dem är lika returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `VARP`, `SKEWP`, `KURT`.

`LANDAU`
`LANDAU` approximativa täthetsfunktionen för Landau-fördelningen

    LANDAU(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Se även

`RANDLANDAU`.

`LAPLACE`
`LAPLACE` täthetsfunktionen för Laplace-fördelningen

    LAPLACE(x;a)

##### Argument

x: tal

a: medel

##### Se även

`RANDLAPLACE`.

`LARGE`
`LARGE` k:e största värdet i en datamängd

    LARGE(data;k)

##### Argument

data: datamängd

k: vilket värde att finna

##### Observera

Om datamängd är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om k <= 0 eller k är större än antalet dataposter givna returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PERCENTILE`, `PERCENTRANK`, `QUARTILE`, `SMALL`.

`LEVERAGE`
`LEVERAGE` beräkna regressionsbetydelse

    LEVERAGE(A)

##### Argument

A: en matris

##### Beskrivning

Returnerar diagonalen för A (A^T A)^-1 A^T som en kolumnvektor.

##### Observera

Om matrisen är singulär returneras #VÄRDE!.

`LINEST`
`LINEST` multipla linjärregressionskoefficienter och statistik

    LINEST(kända_y;kända_x;affin;statistik)

##### Argument

kända_y: vektor av värden för beroende variabler

kända_x: vektor av värden för oberoende variabler, standardvärdet är en vektor {1,…,n}

affin: om sant innehåller modellen en konstant term, standardvärdet är sant

statistik: om sant ges ytterligare statistik, standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar en vektor med den första raden givande regressionskoefficienterna för de oberoende variablerna x_m, x_(m-1),…,x_2, x_1 följt av y-intercept om affin är sant.

Om statistik är sant innehåller den andra raden de motsvarande standardfelen för regressionskoefficienterna. I detta fall innehåller tredje raden R^2-värdet och standardfelet för det förutsedda värdet. Fjärde raden innehåller det observerade F-värdet och dess frihetsgrader. Slutligen innehåller den femte raden regressionskvadratsumman och residualkvadratsumman.

Om affin är falskt är R^2 den ocentrerade versionen av determinationskoefficienten; det vill säga proportionen på kvadratsumman förklarad av modellen.

##### Observera

Om längden för kända_y inte matchar motsvarande längd för kända_x returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Se även

`LOGEST`, `TREND`.

`LKSTEST`
`LKSTEST` Lilliefors-testet för normalitet (Kolmogorov-Smirnov)

    LKSTEST(x)

##### Argument

x: vektor av stickprovsvärden

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar en vektor där första raden ger ett p-värde för Lilliefors-testet (Kolmogorov-Smirnov), den andra raden teststatistiken för testet, och den tredje raden antalet observationer i samplingen.

##### Observera

Om det finns mindre är 5 stickprovsvärden returnerar `LKSTEST` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`CHITEST`, `ADTEST`, `SFTEST`, `CVMTEST`.

`LOGEST`
`LOGEST` exponentiell minsta kvadratanpassning

    LOGEST(kända_y;kända_x;affin;stat)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden; standardvärden är en vektor {1, 2, 3, …}

affin: om sant innehåller modellen en konstant term, standardvärdet är sant

stat: om sant returneras extra statistikinformation; standardvärdet är FALSKT

##### Beskrivning

`LOGEST` function applies the “least squares” method to fit an exponential curve of the form y = b * m{1}^x{1} * m{2}^x{2}... to your data.

`LOGEST` returnerar en vektor { m{n},m{n-1}, ...,m{1},b }.

##### Observera

Extra statistikinformation skrivs nedanför regressionslinjens koefficienter i resultatvektorn. Informationen består av fyra rader data. I den första raden representeras felvärden för koefficienterna m1, (m2, ...), b. I den andra raden visas kvadraten för R och standardfelet för y-estimatet. Den tredje raden består av det F-observerade värdet och frihetsgraderna. Den sista raden innehåller regressionssumman av kvadrater och residualsumman av kvadraterna. Om kända_y och kända_x har ett ojämnt antal datapunkter returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Se även

`GROWTH`, `TREND`.

`LOGFIT`
`LOGFIT` logaritmisk minsta kvadratpassning (genom återupprepade försök)

    LOGFIT(kända_y;kända_x)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden

##### Beskrivning

`LOGFIT` function applies the “least squares” method to fit the logarithmic equation y = a + b * ln(sign * (x - c)) , sign = +1 or -1 to your data. The graph of the equation is a logarithmic curve moved horizontally by c and possibly mirrored across the y-axis (if sign = -1).

`LOGFIT` returnerar en vektor med fem kolumner och en rad. ”Tecken” ges i den första kolumnen, ”a”, ”b” och ”c” ges i kolumnerna 2 till 4. Kolumn 5 innehåller summan av kvadraterna för residualerna.

##### Observera

Ett fel returneras när det finns mindre än tre olika x eller y, eller när punktens punktmoln är för annorlunda från en ”logaritmisk” sådan. Du kan använda formeln ovan = a + b * ln(tecken * (x - c)) eller arrangera om den till = (exp((y - a) / b)) / tecken + c för att beräkna okända y respektive x. Detta är en icke linjär anpassning genom återupprepade försök. Noggrannheten för ”c” är bredden på x-intervallet -> avrundad till nästa mindre tiopotens gånger 0,000001. Det kan finnas fall där anpassningen inte är den bästa möjliga.

##### Se även

`LOGREG`, `LINEST`, `LOGEST`.

`LOGINV`
`LOGINV` inversen på kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för lognormal-fördelningen

    LOGINV(p;medel;stdavv)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

medel: medel

stdavv: standardavvikelse

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 eller stdavv <= 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EXP`, `LN`, `LOG`, `LOG10`, `LOGNORMDIST`.

`LOGISTIC`
`LOGISTIC` täthetsfunktionen för logistiska fördelningen

    LOGISTIC(x;a)

##### Argument

x: tal

a: skalparameter

##### Se även

`RANDLOGISTIC`.

`LOGNORMDIST`
`LOGNORMDIST` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för log-normal-fördelningen

    LOGNORMDIST(x;medel;stdavv)

##### Argument

x: tal

medel: medel

stdavv: standardavvikelse

##### Observera

Om stdavv = 0 returnerar `LOGNORMDIST` ett #DIV/0!-fel. Om x <= 0, medel < 0 eller stdavv <= 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`NORMDIST`.

`LOGREG`
`LOGREG` den logaritmiska regressionen

    LOGREG(kända_y;kända_x;affin;stat)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden; standardvärdet är vektorn {1, 2, 3, …}

affin: om sant innehåller modellen en konstant term, standardvärdet är sant

stat: om sant returneras extra statistikinformation; standardvärdet är FALSKT

##### Beskrivning

`LOGREG` function transforms your x's to z=ln(x) and applies the “least squares” method to fit the linear equation y = m * z + b to your y's and z's --- equivalent to fitting the equation y = m * ln(x) + b to y's and x's. `LOGREG` returns an array having two columns and one row. m is given in the first column and b in the second.

Extra statistisk information skrivs nedanför m och b i resultatvektorn. Denna extra statistikinformation består av fyra rader av data: I den första raden ges standardfelvärden för koefficienterna m och b. Den andra raden innehåller kvadraten för R och standardfel för y-estimatet. Den tredje raden består av det F-observerade värdet och frihetsgraderna. Den sista raden innehåller regressionssumman för kvadrater och residualsumman för kvadrater. Standardvärdet för stat är FALSKT.

##### Observera

Om kända_y och kända_x har ett ojämnt antal datapunkter returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Se även

`LOGFIT`, `LINEST`, `LOGEST`.

`MAX`
`MAX` största värde, negativa tal anses mindre än positiva tal

    MAX(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MIN`, `ABS`.

`MAXA`
`MAXA` största värde, negativa tal anses mindre än positiva tal

    MAXA(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MAX`, `MINA`.

`MEDIAN`
`MEDIAN` median för en datamängd

    MEDIAN(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Observera

Om ett jämnt antal tal anges till `MEDIAN` returneras medelvärdet för de två talen i centrum.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `COUNT`, `COUNTA`, `DAVERAGE`, `MODE`, `SSMEDIAN`, `SUM`.

`MIN`
`MIN` minsta värde, negativa tal anses mindre än positiva tal

    MIN(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MAX`, `ABS`.

`MINA`
`MINA` minsta värde, negativa tal anses mindre än positiva tal

    MINA(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MIN`, `MAXA`.

`MODE`
`MODE` första mest vanliga talet i datamängden

    MODE(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

Om datasamlingen inte innehåller några duplikat returnerar denna funktion felet #-.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `MEDIAN`, `MODE.MULT`.

`MODE.MULT`
`MODE.MULT` vanligaste talen i datamängden

    MODE.MULT(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

Om datasamlingen inte innehåller några duplikat returnerar denna funktion felet #-.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `MEDIAN`, `MODE`.

`NEGBINOMDIST`
`NEGBINOMDIST` sannolikhetsfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen

    NEGBINOMDIST(f;t;p)

##### Argument

f: antalet misslyckanden

t: tröskelvärde för antalet lyckade

p: sannolikheten för att lyckas

##### Observera

Om f eller t är ett icke-heltal trunkeras det. Om (f + t -1) <= 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BINOMDIST`, `COMBIN`, `FACT`, `HYPGEOMDIST`, `PERMUT`.

`NORMDIST`
`NORMDIST` täthetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för normalfördelningen

    NORMDIST(x;medel;stdavv;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: tal

medel: medelvärdet för fördelningen

stdavv: standardavvikelsen för fördelningen

kumulativ: huruvida täthetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om stdavv är 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`POISSON`.

`NORMINV`
`NORMINV` inversen för kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för en normalfördelning

    NORMINV(p;medel;stdavv)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet

medel: medelvärdet för fördelningen

stdavv: standardavvikelsen för fördelningen

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 eller stdavv <= 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`NORMDIST`, `NORMSDIST`, `NORMSINV`, `STANDARDIZE`, `ZTEST`.

`NORMSDIST`
`NORMSDIST` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för standard-normalfördelningen

    NORMSDIST(x)

##### Argument

x: tal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`NORMSDIST` är OpenFormula-funktionen LEGACY.`NORMSDIST`.

##### Se även

`NORMDIST`.

`NORMSINV`
`NORMSINV` inversen för kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för standard-normalfördelningen

    NORMSINV(p)

##### Argument

p: given sannolikhet

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

`NORMSINV` är OpenFormula-funktionen LEGACY.`NORMSINV`.

##### Se även

`NORMDIST`, `NORMINV`, `NORMSDIST`, `STANDARDIZE`, `ZTEST`.

`OWENT`
`OWENT` Owens T-funktion

    OWENT(h;a)

##### Argument

h: tal

a: tal

##### Se även

`R.PSNORM`, `R.PST`.

`PARETO`
`PARETO` täthetsfunktionen för Pareto-fördelningen

    PARETO(x;a;b)

##### Argument

x: tal

a: exponent

b: skalparameter

##### Se även

`RANDPARETO`.

`PEARSON`
`PEARSON` Pearsons korrelationskoefficient för parade data

    PEARSON(vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

vektor1: första komponentvärdena

vektor2: andra komponentvärdena

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`INTERCEPT`, `LINEST`, `RSQ`, `SLOPE`, `STEYX`.

`PERCENTILE`
`PERCENTILE` bestäm 100*k-percentilen för de givna datapunkterna (Hyndman-Fan-metod 7: N-1 bas)

    PERCENTILE(vektor;k)

##### Argument

vektor: datapunkter

k: percentil att beräkna

##### Observera

Om vektor är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om k < 0 eller k > 1, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`QUARTILE`.

`PERCENTILE.EXC`
`PERCENTILE.EXC` bestäm 100*k-percentilen för de givna datapunkterna (Hyndman-Fan-metod 6: N+1 bas)

    PERCENTILE.EXC(vektor;k)

##### Argument

vektor: datapunkter

k: percentil att beräkna

##### Observera

Om vektor är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om k < 0 eller k > 1, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PERCENTILE`, `QUARTILE`, `QUARTILE.EXC`.

`PERCENTRANK`
`PERCENTRANK` rang för en datapunkt i en datamängd (Hyndman-Fan-metod 7: N-1 bas)

    PERCENTRANK(vektor;x;signifikans)

##### Argument

vektor: intervall av numeriska värden

x: datapunkt att rangordna

signifikans: antal signifikanta siffror, standard är 3

##### Observera

Om vektor inte innehåller datapunkter returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om signifikans är mindre än ett returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM-fel. Om x överstiger det största värdet eller är mindre än det minsta värdet i vektor returnerar denna funktion felet #-. Om x inte stämmer med något av värdena i vektor eller x matchar mer än en gång, interpolerar denna funktion det returnerade värdet.

##### Se även

`LARGE`, `MAX`, `MEDIAN`, `MIN`, `PERCENTILE`, `QUARTILE`, `SMALL`.

`PERCENTRANK.EXC`
`PERCENTRANK.EXC` rang för en datapunkt i en datamängd (Hyndman-Fan-metod 6: N+1 bas)

    PERCENTRANK.EXC(vektor;x;signifikans)

##### Argument

vektor: intervall av numeriska värden

x: datapunkt att rangordna

signifikans: antal signifikanta siffror, standard är 3

##### Observera

Om vektor inte innehåller datapunkter returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om signifikans är mindre än ett returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM-fel. Om x överstiger det största värdet eller är mindre än det minsta värdet i vektor returnerar denna funktion felet #-. Om x inte stämmer med något av värdena i vektor eller x matchar mer än en gång, interpolerar denna funktion det returnerade värdet.

##### Se även

`LARGE`, `MAX`, `MEDIAN`, `MIN`, `PERCENTILE`, `PERCENTILE.EXC`, `QUARTILE`, `QUARTILE.EXC`, `SMALL`.

`PERMUT`
`PERMUT` antal k-permutationer för en n-elementmängd

    PERMUT(n;k)

##### Argument

n: storlek på basmängden

k: antal element för varje permutation

##### Observera

Om n = 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om n < k returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COMBIN`.

`PERMUTATIONA`
`PERMUTATIONA` antalet permutationer för y objekt valda från x objekt med tillåten upprepning

    PERMUTATIONA(x;y)

##### Argument

x: totala antalet objekt

y: antal valda objekt

##### Observera

Om både x och y är lika med 0 returnerar `PERMUTATIONA` 1. Om x < 0 eller y < 0 returnerar `PERMUTATIONA` #NUM! Om x eller y inte är heltal trunkeras de.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`POWER`.

`POISSON`
`POISSON` sannolikhetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen

    POISSON(x;medel;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: antal händelser

medel: medelvärdet för fördelningen

kumulativ: huruvida sannolikhetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Observera

Om x är ett icke-heltal trunkeras det. Om x < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om medel <= 0 returnerar `POISSON` ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`NORMDIST`, `WEIBULL`.

`PROB`
`PROB` sannolikheten för ett intervall för en diskret (och ändlig) sannolikhetsfördelning

    PROB(x_intervall;sann_intervall;nedre_gräns;övre_gräns)

##### Argument

x_intervall: möjliga värden

sann_intervall: sannolikheterna för de motsvarande värdena

nedre_gräns: nedre intervallgräns

övre_gräns: övre intervallgräns, standard är nedre_gräns

##### Observera

Om summan av sannolikheterna i sann_intervall inte är lika med 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om något värde i sann_intervall är <=0 eller > 1 returnerar denna funktion #NUM!-fel. Om x_intervall och sann_intervall innehåller olika antal dataposter returnerar denna funktion felet #-.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`BINOMDIST`, `CRITBINOM`.

`QUARTILE`
`QUARTILE` the quart-th quartile of the data points (Hyndman-Fan method 7: N-1 basis)

    QUARTILE(vektor;kvart)

##### Argument

vektor: datapunkter

kvart: ett tal från 0 till 4, indikerande vilken kvartil att beräkna

##### Observera

Om vektor är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om kvart < 0 eller kvart > 4 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om kvart = 0 returneras det minsta värdet i vektor. Om kvart inte är ett heltal trunkeras det.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LARGE`, `MAX`, `MEDIAN`, `MIN`, `PERCENTILE`, `QUARTILE.EXC`, `SMALL`.

`QUARTILE.EXC`
`QUARTILE.EXC` the quart-th quartile of the data points (Hyndman-Fan method 6: N+1 basis)

    QUARTILE.EXC(vektor;kvart)

##### Argument

vektor: datapunkter

kvart: ett tal från 1 till 3 som indikerar vilken kvartil att beräkna

##### Observera

Om vektor är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om kvart < 0 eller kvart > 4 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om kvart = 0 returneras det minsta värdet i vektor. Om kvart inte är ett heltal trunkeras det.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LARGE`, `MAX`, `MEDIAN`, `MIN`, `PERCENTILE`, `PERCENTILE.EXC`, `QUARTILE`, `SMALL`.

`R.DBETA`
`R.DBETA` täthetsfunktionen för betafördelningen

    R.DBETA(x;a;b;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

a: den första formparametern för fördelningen

b: den andra skalparametern för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för betafördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PBETA`, `R.QBETA`.

`R.DBINOM`
`R.DBINOM` täthetsfunktionen för binomialfördelningen

    R.DBINOM(x;n;psuc;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

n: antalet försök

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för binomialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PBINOM`, `R.QBINOM`.

`R.DCAUCHY`
`R.DCAUCHY` täthetsfunktionen för Cauchy-fördelningen

    R.DCAUCHY(x;läge;skala;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

läge: center för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för Cauchy-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PCAUCHY`, `R.QCAUCHY`.

`R.DCHISQ`
`R.DCHISQ` täthetsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen

    R.DCHISQ(x;fri;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

fri: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

A two argument invocation `R.DCHISQ`(x,df) is exported to OpenFormula as CHISQDIST(x,df,FALSE()).

##### Se även

`R.PCHISQ`, `R.QCHISQ`.

`R.DEXP`
`R.DEXP` täthetsfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen

    R.DEXP(x;skala;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PEXP`, `R.QEXP`.

`R.DF`
`R.DF` täthetsfunktionen för F-fördelningen

    R.DF(x;n1;n2;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

n1: det första antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

n2: det andra antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för F-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PF`, `R.QF`.

`R.DGAMMA`
`R.DGAMMA` täthetsfunktionen för gammafördelningen

    R.DGAMMA(x;form;skala;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

form: formparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för gammafördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PGAMMA`, `R.QGAMMA`.

`R.DGEOM`
`R.DGEOM` täthetsfunktionen för geometriska fördelningen

    R.DGEOM(x;psuc;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för geometriska fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PGEOM`, `R.QGEOM`.

`R.DGUMBEL`
`R.DGUMBEL` täthetsfunktionen för Gumbel-fördelningen

    R.DGUMBEL(x;mu;beta;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

mu: platsparametern för fördelningens frihet

beta: skalparameter för fördelningens frihet

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för Gumbel-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PGUMBEL`, `R.QGUMBEL`.

`R.DHYPER`
`R.DHYPER` täthetsfunktionen för hypergeometriska fördelningen

    R.DHYPER(x;r;b;n;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

r: antalet röda bollar

b: antalet svarta bollar

n: antal bollar som dras

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för den hypergeometriska fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PHYPER`, `R.QHYPER`.

`R.DLNORM`
`R.DLNORM` täthetsfunktionen för log-normal-fördelningen

    R.DLNORM(x;logmedel;logsd;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

logmedel: medelvärdet för underliggande normaldistribution

logsd: standardavvikelse för den underliggande normalfördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för log-normal-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PLNORM`, `R.QLNORM`.

`R.DNBINOM`
`R.DNBINOM` täthetsfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen

    R.DNBINOM(x;n;psuc;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation (antalet misslyckanden)

n: begärt antal lyckade

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PNBINOM`, `R.QNBINOM`.

`R.DNORM`
`R.DNORM` täthetsfunktionen för normalfördelningen

    R.DNORM(x;mu;sigma;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

mu: fördelningens medelvärde

sigma: standardavvikelse för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PNORM`, `R.QNORM`.

`R.DPOIS`
`R.DPOIS` täthetsfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen

    R.DPOIS(x;lambda;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

lambda: medelvärde för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PPOIS`, `R.QPOIS`.

`R.DRAYLEIGH`
`R.DRAYLEIGH` täthetsfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen

    R.DRAYLEIGH(x;skala;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PRAYLEIGH`, `R.QRAYLEIGH`.

`R.DSNORM`
`R.DSNORM` täthetsfunktionen för skev-normalfördelningen

    R.DSNORM(x;form;läge;skala;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

form: formparametern för fördelningen

läge: lägesparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för skev-normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PSNORM`, `R.QSNORM`.

`R.DST`
`R.DST` täthetsfunktionen för skev-t-fördelningen

    R.DST(x;n;form;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

n: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

form: formparametern för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för skev-t-funktionen.

##### Se även

`R.PST`, `R.QST`.

`R.DT`
`R.DT` täthetsfunktionen för Students t-fördelning

    R.DT(x;n;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

n: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för Students t-fördelning.

##### Se även

`R.PT`, `R.QT`.

`R.DWEIBULL`
`R.DWEIBULL` täthetsfunktionen för Weibull-fördelningen

    R.DWEIBULL(x;form;skala;ge_log)

##### Argument

x: observation

form: formparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

ge_log: om sant returneras logaritm för resultatet istället

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar täthetsfunktionen för Weibull-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PWEIBULL`, `R.QWEIBULL`.

`R.PBETA`
`R.PBETA` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för betafördelningen

    R.PBETA(x;a;b;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

a: den första formparametern för fördelningen

b: den andra skalparametern för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för betafördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DBETA`, `R.QBETA`.

`R.PBINOM`
`R.PBINOM` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för binomialfördelningen

    R.PBINOM(x;n;psuc;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

n: antalet försök

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för binomialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DBINOM`, `R.QBINOM`.

`R.PCAUCHY`
`R.PCAUCHY` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Cauchy-fördelningen

    R.QCAUCHY(x;läge;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

läge: center för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Cauchy-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DCAUCHY`, `R.QCAUCHY`.

`R.PCHISQ`
`R.PCHISQ` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen

    R.PCHISQ(x;fri;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

fri: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

A two argument invocation `R.PCHISQ`(x,df) is exported to OpenFormula as CHISQDIST(x,df).

##### Se även

`R.DCHISQ`, `R.QCHISQ`.

`R.PEXP`
`R.PEXP` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen

    R.PEXP(x;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DEXP`, `R.QEXP`.

`R.PF`
`R.PF` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för F-fördelningen

    R.PF(x;n1;n2;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

n1: det första antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

n2: det andra antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för F-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DF`, `R.QF`.

`R.PGAMMA`
`R.PGAMMA` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för gammafördelningen

    R.PGAMMA(x;form;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

form: formparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för gammafördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DGAMMA`, `R.QGAMMA`.

`R.PGEOM`
`R.PGEOM` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för geometriska fördelningen

    R.PGEOM(x;psuc;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för geometriska fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DGEOM`, `R.QGEOM`.

`R.PGUMBEL`
`R.PGUMBEL` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Gumbel-fördelningen

    R.PGUMBEL(x;mu;beta;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

mu: platsparametern för fördelningens frihet

beta: skalparameter för fördelningens frihet

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Gumbel-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DGUMBEL`, `R.QGUMBEL`.

`R.PHYPER`
`R.PHYPER` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för hypergeometriska fördelningen

    R.PHYPER(x;r;b;n;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

r: antalet röda bollar

b: antalet svarta bollar

n: antal bollar som dras

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för den hypergeometriska fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DHYPER`, `R.QHYPER`.

`R.PLNORM`
`R.PLNORM` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för log-normal-fördelningen

    R.PLNORM(x;logmedel;logsd;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

logmedel: medelvärdet för underliggande normaldistribution

logsd: standardavvikelse för den underliggande normalfördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för log-normal-funktionen.

##### Se även

`R.DLNORM`, `R.QLNORM`.

`R.PNBINOM`
`R.PNBINOM` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen

    R.PNBINOM(x;n;psuc;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation (antalet misslyckanden)

n: begärt antal lyckade

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DNBINOM`, `R.QNBINOM`.

`R.PNORM`
`R.PNORM` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för normalfördelningen

    R.PNORM(x;mu;sigma;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

mu: fördelningens medelvärde

sigma: standardavvikelse för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DNORM`, `R.QNORM`.

`R.PPOIS`
`R.PPOIS` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen

    R.PPOIS(x;lambda;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

lambda: medelvärde för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DPOIS`, `R.QPOIS`.

`R.PRAYLEIGH`
`R.PRAYLEIGH` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen

    R.PRAYLEIGH(x;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DRAYLEIGH`, `R.QRAYLEIGH`.

`R.PSNORM`
`R.PSNORM` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för skev-normalfördelningen

    R.PSNORM(x;form;läge;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

form: formparametern för fördelningen

läge: lägesparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för skev-normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DSNORM`, `R.QSNORM`.

`R.PST`
`R.PST` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för skev-t-fördelningen

    R.PST(x;n;form;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

n: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

form: formparametern för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för skev-t-funktionen.

##### Se även

`R.DST`, `R.QST`.

`R.PT`
`R.PT` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Students t-fördelning

    R.PT(x;n;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

n: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Students t-fördelning.

##### Se även

`R.DT`, `R.QT`.

`R.PTUKEY`
`R.PTUKEY` kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Studentized range-fördelningen

    R.PTUKEY(x;nmedel;fri;nintervall;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

nmedel: antal medel

fri: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nintervall: antal intervall; standard är 1

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Studentized range-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.QTUKEY`.

`R.PWEIBULL`
`R.PWEIBULL` kumulativa fördelningsfunktion för Weibull-fördelningen

    R.PWEIBULL(x;form;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

x: observation

form: formparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Weibull-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DWEIBULL`, `R.QWEIBULL`.

`R.QBETA`
`R.QBETA` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för betafördelningen

    R.QBETA(p;a;b;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

a: den första formparametern för fördelningen

b: den andra skalparametern för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för betafördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DBETA`, `R.PBETA`.

`R.QBINOM`
`R.QBINOM` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för binomialfördelningen

    R.QBINOM(p;n;psuc;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

n: antalet försök

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för binomialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DBINOM`, `R.PBINOM`.

`R.QCAUCHY`
`R.QCAUCHY` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för Cauchy-fördelningen

    R.QCAUCHY(p;läge;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

läge: center för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Cauchy-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DCAUCHY`, `R.PCAUCHY`.

`R.QCHISQ`
`R.QCHISQ` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen

    R.QCHISQ(p;fri;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

fri: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för chitvåfördelningen.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

A two argument invocation `R.QCHISQ`(p,df) is exported to OpenFormula as CHISQINV(p,df).

##### Se även

`R.DCHISQ`, `R.PCHISQ`.

`R.QEXP`
`R.QEXP` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen

    R.QEXP(p;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för exponentialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DEXP`, `R.PEXP`.

`R.QF`
`R.QF` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för F-fördelningen

    R.QF(p;n1;n2;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

n1: det första antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

n2: det andra antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för F-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DF`, `R.PF`.

`R.QGAMMA`
`R.QGAMMA` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för gammafördelningen

    R.QGAMMA(p;form;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

form: formparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för gammafördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DGAMMA`, `R.PGAMMA`.

`R.QGEOM`
`R.QGEOM` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för geometriska fördelningen

    R.QGEOM(p;psuc;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för geometriska fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DGEOM`, `R.PGEOM`.

`R.QGUMBEL`
`R.QGUMBEL` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för Gumbel-fördelningen

    R.QGUMBEL(p;mu;beta;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

mu: platsparametern för fördelningens frihet

beta: skalparameter för fördelningens frihet

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Gumbel-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DGUMBEL`, `R.PGUMBEL`.

`R.QHYPER`
`R.QHYPER` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för hypergeometriska fördelningen

    R.QHYPER(p;r;b;n;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

r: antalet röda bollar

b: antalet svarta bollar

n: antal bollar som dras

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för hypergeometriska fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DHYPER`, `R.PHYPER`.

`R.QLNORM`
`R.QLNORM` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för log-normal-fördelningen

    R.QLNORM(p;logmedel;logsd;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

logmedel: medelvärdet för underliggande normaldistribution

logsd: standardavvikelse för den underliggande normalfördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för log-normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DLNORM`, `R.PLNORM`.

`R.QNBINOM`
`R.QNBINOM` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen

    R.QNBINOM(p;n;psuc;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

n: begärt antal lyckade

psuc: sannolikheten för att lyckas vid varje försök

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för negativa binomialfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DNBINOM`, `R.PNBINOM`.

`R.QNORM`
`R.QNORM` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för normalfördelningen

    R.QNORM(p;mu;sigma;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

mu: fördelningens medelvärde

sigma: standardavvikelse för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DNORM`, `R.PNORM`.

`R.QPOIS`
`R.QPOIS` sannolikhetkvantilfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen

    R.QPOIS(p;lambda;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

lambda: medelvärde för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Poisson-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DPOIS`, `R.PPOIS`.

`R.QRAYLEIGH`
`R.QRAYLEIGH` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen

    R.QRAYLEIGH(p;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DRAYLEIGH`, `R.PRAYLEIGH`.

`R.QSNORM`
`R.QSNORM` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för skev-normalfördelningen

    R.QSNORM(p;form;läge;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

form: formparametern för fördelningen

läge: lägesparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för skev-normalfördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DSNORM`, `R.PSNORM`.

`R.QST`
`R.QST` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för skev-t-fördelningen

    R.QST(p;n;form;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

n: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

form: formparametern för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för skev-t-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DST`, `R.PST`.

`R.QT`
`R.QT` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för Students t-fördelning

    R.QT(p;n;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

n: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Students t-fördelning.

##### Se även

`R.DT`, `R.PT`.

`R.QTUKEY`
`R.QTUKEY` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för Studentized range-fördelningen

    R.QTUKEY(p;nmedel;fri;nintervall;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

nmedel: antal medel

fri: antalet frihetsgrader för fördelningen

nintervall: antal intervall; standard är 1

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Studentized range-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.PTUKEY`.

`R.QWEIBULL`
`R.QWEIBULL` sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen för Weibull-fördelningen

    R.QWEIBULL(p;form;skala;nedre_svans;log_p)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet eller naturlig logaritm för sannolikheten

form: formparametern för fördelningen

skala: fördelningens skalparameter

nedre_svans: om sant (standard) beaktas den lägre svansen för fördelningen

log_p: om sant returneras den naturliga logaritmen för sannolikheten;standardvärdet är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar sannolikhetskvantilfunktionen, det vill säga inversen för den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Weibull-fördelningen.

##### Se även

`R.DWEIBULL`, `R.PWEIBULL`.

`RANK`
`RANK` rang för ett tal i en tallista

    RANK(x;ref;ordning)

##### Argument

x: tal vars rang du vill finna

ref: tallista

ordning: 0 (sjunkande ordning) eller ej noll (stigande ordning): standard är 0

##### Observera

Om det är jämnt returnerar `RANK` den största möjliga rankningen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PERCENTRANK`, `RANK.AVG`.

`RANK.AVG`
`RANK.AVG` rang för ett tal i en tallista

    RANK.AVG(x;ref;ordning)

##### Argument

x: tal vars rang du vill finna

ref: tallista

ordning: 0 (sjunkande ordning) eller ej noll (stigande ordning): standard är 0

##### Observera

Om det blir jämnt returnerar `RANK.AVG` medelrankningen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Funktionen är Excel 2010-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PERCENTRANK`, `RANK`.

`RAYLEIGH`
`RAYLEIGH` täthetsfunktionen för Rayleigh-fördelningen

    RAYLEIGH(x;sigma)

##### Argument

x: tal

sigma: skalparameter

##### Se även

`RANDRAYLEIGH`.

`RAYLEIGHTAIL`
`RAYLEIGHTAIL` täthetsfunktionen för Rayleigh-svansfördelningen

    RAYLEIGHTAIL(x;a;sigma)

##### Argument

x: tal

a: nedre gräns

sigma: skalparameter

##### Se även

`RANDRAYLEIGHTAIL`.

`RSQ`
`RSQ` kvadraten på Pearsons korrelationskoefficient för parade data

    RSQ(vektor1;vektor2)

##### Argument

vektor1: första komponentvärdena

vektor2: andra komponentvärdena

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CORREL`, `COVAR`, `INTERCEPT`, `LINEST`, `LOGEST`, `PEARSON`, `SLOPE`, `STEYX`, `TREND`.

`SFTEST`
`SFTEST` Shapiro-Francia-testet för normalitet

    SFTEST(x)

##### Argument

x: vektor av stickprovsvärden

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar en vektor där första raden ger ett p-värde för Shapiro-Francia-testet, den andra raden teststatistiken för testet, och den tredje raden antalet observationer i samplingen.

##### Observera

Om det finns mindre 5 eller fler än 5000 stickprovsvärden returnerar `SFTEST` #VÄRDE!

##### Se även

`CHITEST`, `ADTEST`, `LKSTEST`, `CVMTEST`.

`SKEW`
`SKEW` väntevärdesriktigt estimat för en fördelnings skevhet

    SKEW(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Observera

Detta är endast meningsfullt om den underliggande fördelningen verkligen har ett tredje moment. Skevhet för en symmetrisk fördelning (t.ex. normalfördelningen) är noll. Om mindre än tre tal ges returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `VAR`, `SKEWP`, `KURT`.

`SKEWP`
`SKEWP` populationsskevhet för en datamängd

    SKEWP(tal1;tal2;…)

##### Argument

tal1: första värdet

tal2: andra värdet

##### Beskrivning

Strängar och tomma celler ignoreras.

##### Observera

Om mindre än två tal ges returnerar `SKEWP` ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `VARP`, `SKEW`, `KURTP`.

`SLOPE`
`SLOPE` lutningen för en linjär regressionslinje

    SLOPE(kända_y;kända_x)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden

##### Observera

Om kända_x eller kända_y inte innehåller dataposter eller annorlunda antal dataposter returnerar denna funktion felet #-. Om variansen för kända_x är 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`STDEV`, `STDEVPA`.

`SMALL`
`SMALL` k:e minsta värdet i en datamängd

    SMALL(data;k)

##### Argument

data: datamängd

k: vilket värde att finna

##### Observera

Om datamängd är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om k <= 0 eller k är större än antalet dataposter givna returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PERCENTILE`, `PERCENTRANK`, `QUARTILE`, `LARGE`.

`SNORM.DIST.RANGE`
`SNORM.DIST.RANGE` sannolikheten för standard-normalfördelningen över ett intervall

    SNORM.DIST.RANGE(x1;x2)

##### Argument

x1: början på intervallet

x2: slutet på intervallet

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar den kumulativa sannolikheten över ett intervall av standard-normalfördelningen; det vill säga integralen över täthetsfunktionen från x1 till x2.

##### Observera

Om x1>x2 returnerar funktionen ett negativt värde.

##### Se även

`NORMSDIST`, `R.PNORM`, `R.QNORM`, `R.DNORM`.

`SSMEDIAN`
`SSMEDIAN` median för grupperad data

    SSMEDIAN(vektor;intervall)

##### Argument

vektor: datamängd

intervall: längden för varje grupperingsintervall, standard är 1

##### Beskrivning

Data antas vara grupperad i intervall av bredd intervall. Varje datapunkt i vektor är mittpunkten för intervallet innehållande det sanna värdet. Median beräknas genom interpolation inom medianintervallet (intervallet innehållande medianvärdet) antagande att de sanna värdena inom det intervallet fördelas uniformt:

median = L + intervall*(N/2 - CF)/F

där:

L = den lägre gränsen för medianintervallet

N = totala antalet datapunkter

CF = antalet datapunkter under medianintervallet

F =antalet datapunkter i medianintervallet

##### Observera

Om vektor är tom returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om intervall <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. `SSMEDIAN` kontrollerar inte huruvida datapunkterna är minst intervall isär.

##### Se även

`MEDIAN`.

`STANDARDIZE`
`STANDARDIZE` z-poäng för ett värde

    STANDARDIZE(x;medel;stdavv)

##### Argument

x: värde

medel: medelvärdet för originalfördelningen

stdavv: standardavvikelsen för originalfördelningen

##### Observera

Om stdavv är 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`.

`STDEV`
`STDEV` stickprovsstandardavvikelse för det givna stickprovet

    STDEV(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

`STDEV` är också känd som N-1-standardavvikelsen.

För att erhålla populationsstandardavvikelsen för en hel population, använd STDEVP.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `DSTDEV`, `DSTDEVP`, `STDEVA`, `STDEVPA`, `VAR`.

`STDEVA`
`STDEVA` stickprovsstandardavvikelse för det givna stickprovet

    STDEVA(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

`STDEVA` är också känd som N-1-standardavvikelsen.

För att erhålla populationens standardavvikelse för en hel population, använd STDEVPA.

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`STDEV`, `STDEVPA`.

`STDEVP`
`STDEVP` populationsstandardavvikelse för den givna populationen

    STDEVP(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

Detta är också känt som N-standardavvikelsen

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`STDEV`, `STDEVA`, `STDEVPA`.

`STDEVPA`
`STDEVPA` populationens standardavvikelse för en hel population

    STDEVPA(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

Detta är också känt som N-standardavvikelsen

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`STDEVA`, `STDEVP`.

`STEYX`
`STEYX` standardfel för det förutsedda y-värdet i regressionen

    STEYX(kända_y;kända_x)

##### Argument

kända_y: kända y-värden

kända_x: kända x-värden

##### Observera

Om kända_y och kända_x är tomma eller har olika antal argument så returnerar denna funktion felet #-.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`PEARSON`, `RSQ`, `SLOPE`.

`SUBTOTAL`
`SUBTOTAL` delsumman för argumentlistan

    SUBTOTAL(function_nbr,ref1,ref2,…)

##### Argument

function_nbr: determines which function to use according to the following table:

1 AVERAGE

2 COUNT

3 COUNTA

4 MAX

5 MIN

6 PRODUCT

7 STDEV

8 STDEVP

9 SUM

10 VAR

11 VARP

ref1: första värdet

ref2: andra värdet

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`COUNT`, `SUM`.

`TDIST`
`TDIST` överlevnadsfunktionen för Students t-fördelning

    TDIST(x;fri;svans)

##### Argument

x: tal

fri: antalet frihetsgrader

svans: 1 eller 2

##### Beskrivning

Denna överlevnadsfunktion är 1 minus den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen.

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel för icke-negativa x.

##### Observera

Om fri < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om svans är varken 1 eller 2 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Parametriseringen för denna funktion är annorlunda från vad den används för, exempelvis NORMSDIST. Detta är en vanlig källa till misstag, men är nödvändigt för kompatibilitet.

##### Se även

`TINV`, `TTEST`.

`TINV`
`TINV` tvåsvansad invers för Students t-fördelning

    TINV(p;fri)

##### Argument

p: sannolikhet i båda svansar

fri: antalet frihetsgrader

##### Beskrivning

Denna funktion returnerar det icke-negativa värdet x så att området under Students t-täthet med fri frihetsgrader till höger om x är p/2.

##### Observera

Om p < 0 eller p > 1 eller fri < 1 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Parametriseringen för denna funktion är annorlunda från vad den används för, exempelvis NORMSINV. Detta är en vanlig källa till misstag, men är nödvändigt för kompatibilitet.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TDIST`, `TTEST`.

`TREND`
`TREND` beräknar framtida värden för en given datamängd med minsta kvadratapproximation

    TREND(kända_y;kända_x;nya_x;affin)

##### Argument

kända_y: vektor av värden för beroende variabler

kända_x: vektor av värden för oberoende variabler, standardvärdet är en vektor {1,…,n}

nya_x: vektor för x-värden för vilka beräkning av y-värden ska estimera; standardvärdet är kända_x

affin: om sant innehåller modellen en konstant term, standardvärdet är sant

##### Observera

Om längden för kända_y inte matchar motsvarande längd för kända_x returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Se även

`LINEST`.

`TRIMMEAN`
`TRIMMEAN` medel för innehållet i en datamängd

    TRIMMEAN(ref;bråkdel)

##### Argument

ref: tallista vars medel du vill beräkna

bråkdel: bråkdel av datamängd att utesluta från medelvärdet

##### Beskrivning

Om bråkdel=0,2 och datamängden innehåller 40 tal, trimmas 8 tal från datamängden (40 x 0,2): de 4 största och de fyra minsta. För att undvika bias är antalet punkter att utesluta alltid avrundade ner till närmsta jämna tal.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `GEOMEAN`, `HARMEAN`, `MEDIAN`, `MODE`.

`TTEST`
`TTEST` p-värdet för tvåsvansade hypotestestet jämförande variansen för två populationer med Students t-fördelning

    TTEST(vektor1;vektor2;svansar;typ)

##### Argument

vektor1: sampling från den första populationen

vektor2: sampling från den andra populationen

svansar: antal svansar att ta med

typ: Testtyp att utföra. 1 är ett test för oparade variabler, 2 ett test för oparade variabler med lika varianser och 3 ett test för oparade variabler med olika varianser

##### Observera

Om datamängderna innehåller olika antal datapunkter och testet är parat (typ ett), returnerar `TTEST` felet #-. svansar och typ trunkeras till heltal. Om svansar inte är ett eller två returneras ett #NUM!-fel. Om typ är annat än ett, två eller tre returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FDIST`, `FINV`.

`VAR`
`VAR` stickprovsvarians för det givna stickprovet

    VAR(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

`VAR` är också känd som N-1-variansen.

##### Observera

Eftersom N-1-variansen omfattar Bessels korrektion, medan N-variansen uträknad av VARPA eller VARP inte gör det, så är N-1-variansen ett väntevärdesriktigt estimat för variansen av population från vilken sampling tas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`VARP`, `STDEV`, `VARA`.

`VARA`
`VARA` stickprovsvarians för det givna stickprovet

    VARA(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

`VARA` är också känd som N-1-variansen.

För att få den sanna variansen för en hel population, använd VARPA.

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Observera

Eftersom N-1-variansen omfattar Bessels korrektion, medan N-variansen uträknad av VARPA eller VARP inte gör det, så är N-1-variansen ett väntevärdesriktigt estimat för variansen av population från vilken sampling tas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`VAR`, `VARPA`.

`VARP`
`VARP` variansen för en hel population

    VARP(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

`VARP` är också känd som N-variansen.

##### Se även

`AVERAGE`, `DVAR`, `DVARP`, `STDEV`, `VAR`.

`VARPA`
`VARPA` variansen för en hel population

    VARPA(område1;område2;…)

##### Argument

område1: första cellens område

område2: andra cellens område

##### Beskrivning

`VARPA` är också känd som N-variansen.

Tal, text och logiska värden inkluderas även de i beräkningen. Om cellen innehåller text eller om argumentet evalueras till FALSKT, räknas de som noll (0). Om ett argument evalueras till SANT, räknas det som ett (1). Observera att tomma celler inte räknas.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`VARA`, `VARP`.

`WEIBULL`
`WEIBULL` täthetsfunktionen eller kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen för Weibull-fördelningen

    WEIBULL(x;alfa;beta;kumulativ)

##### Argument

x: tal

alfa: skalparameter

beta: skalparameter

kumulativ: huruvida täthetsfunktionen ska utvärderas eller den kumulativa fördelningsfunktionen

##### Beskrivning

Om det booleska värdet kumulativ är sant returnerar den: 1 - exp (-(x/beta)^alfa), annars returnerar den (alfa/beta^alfa) * x^(alfa-1) * exp(-(x/beta^alfa)).

##### Observera

Om x < 0 returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel. Om alfa <= 0 eller beta <= 0, returnerar denna funktion ett #NUM!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`POISSON`.

`ZTEST`
`ZTEST` sannolikheten för att observera ett stickprovsmedel lika stort som eller större än medelvärdet för det givna stickprovet

    ZTEST(ref;x;stdavv)

##### Argument

ref: datamängd (sampling)

x: populationsmedel

stdavv: standardavvikelsen för population, standardvärde är standardavvikelsen för stickprovet

##### Beskrivning

`ZTEST` beräknar sannolikheten för att observera ett stickprovsmedel så stort som eller större än medelvärdet för det givna stickprovet för stickprov dragna från en normalfördelning med medelvärdet x och standardavvikelsen stdavv.

##### Observera

Om ref innehåller mindre än två dataobjekt returnerar `ZTEST` #DIV/0!-fel.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`CONFIDENCE`, `NORMDIST`, `NORMINV`, `NORMSDIST`, `NORMSINV`, `STANDARDIZE`.

### Sträng

`ASC`
`ASC` text med fullbredds-katakana och ASCII-tecken konverterade till halvbredd

    ASC(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Beskrivning

`ASC` konverterar helbreddskatakana och ASCII-tecken till motsvarande halvbreddstecken och kopierar alla andra.

Skillnaden mellan halvbredd och helbreddstecken beskrivs i http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11/.

##### Observera

Även om `ASC` i föråldrade kodningar används för att översätta mellan 2-byte och 1-byte-tecken är det inte så för UTF-8.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

För de flesta strängar har denna funktion samma effekt som i Excel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`JIS`.

`CHAR`
`CHAR` tecknet i CP1252 (Windows-1252) för kodpunkten x

    CHAR(x)

##### Argument

x: kodpunkt

##### Beskrivning

`CHAR`(x) returnerar tecken i CP1252 (Windows-1252) med kod x.

x måste vara i intervallet 1 till 255.

CP1252 (Windows-1252) är också känt som ”ANSI code page”, men är inte en ANSI-standard.

CP1252 (Windows-1252) baseras på ett tidigt utkast av ISO-8859-1 och innehåller alla dess utskrivbara tecken. Det innehåller också alla utskrivbara tecken från ISO-8859-15 (men delvis på andra positioner.)

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Observera

I CP1252 (Windows-1252) har 129, 141, 143, 144, och 157 inga matchande tecken. För x från 1 till 255 förutom 129, 141, 143, 144, och 157 har vi CODE(`CHAR`(x))=x.

##### Se även

`CODE`.

`CLEAN`
`CLEAN` text med varje icke utskrivbart tecken borttaget

    CLEAN(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Beskrivning

`CLEAN` tar bort icke utskrivbara tecken från dess argument och lämnar endast vanliga tecken och blanktecken.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`CODE`
`CODE` kodpunkt i CP1252 (Windows-1252) för tecknet c

    CODE(t)

##### Argument

t: tecken

##### Beskrivning

t måste vara ett giltigt CP1252 (Windows-1252)-tecken.

CP1252 (Windows-1252) är också känt som ”ANSI code page”, men är inte en ANSI-standard.

CP1252 (Windows-1252) baseras på ett tidigt utkast av ISO-8859-1 och innehåller att dess utskrivbara tecken (men delvis på andra positioner).

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Observera

I CP1252 (Windows-1252) har 129, 141, 143, 144, och 157 inga matchande tecken. För x från 1 till 255 förutom 129, 141, 143, 144, och 157 har vi `CODE`(CHAR(x))=x.

##### Se även

`CHAR`.

`CONCAT`
`CONCAT` konkateneringen av strängarna s1, s2,…

    CONCAT(s1;s2;…)

##### Argument

s1: första sträng

s2: andra sträng

##### Observera

Denna funktion är identisk med CONCATENATE

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LEFT`, `MID`, `RIGHT`.

`CONCATENATE`
`CONCATENATE` konkateneringen av strängarna s1, s2,…

    CONCATENATE(s1;s2;…)

##### Argument

s1: första sträng

s2: andra sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LEFT`, `MID`, `RIGHT`.

`DOLLAR`
`DOLLAR` ant formaterad som valuta

    DOLLAR(ant;decimaler)

##### Argument

ant: tal

decimaler: decimaler

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FIXED`, `TEXT`, `VALUE`.

`ENCODEURL`
`ENCODEURL` encode a string for use in a URL

    ENCODEURL(string)

##### Argument

string: string to encode

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

`EXACT`
`EXACT` SANT om sträng1 är lika med sträng2

    EXACT(sträng1;sträng2)

##### Argument

sträng1: första sträng

sträng2: andra sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LEN`, `SEARCH`, `DELTA`.

`FIND`
`FIND` första positionen för sträng1 i sträng2 efter position start

    FIND(string1,string2,start)

##### Argument

sträng1: söksträng

sträng2: sökfält

start: startposition, standard är 1

##### Observera

Denna sökning är skiftlägeskänslig.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`EXACT`, `LEN`, `MID`, `SEARCH`.

`FINDB`
`FINDB` första byteposition av sträng1 i sträng2 följande byteposition start

    FINDB(sträng1;sträng2;start)

##### Argument

sträng1: söksträng

sträng2: sökfält

start: startbyteposition, standard 1

##### Observera

Denna sökning är skiftlägeskänslig.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Medan denna funktion är syntaktiskt Excel-kompatibel så kommer skillnaderna i den underliggande textkodningen vanligtvis att ge olika resultat.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Medan denna funktion är OpenFormula-kompatibel så är det mesta av dess beteende just nu implementationsspecifikt.

##### Se även

`FIND`, `LEFTB`, `RIGHTB`, `LENB`, `LEFT`, `MID`, `RIGHT`, `LEN`.

`FIXED`
`FIXED` formaterad strängrepresentation av ant

    FIXED(ant;decimaler;inga_komman)

##### Argument

ant: tal

decimaler: antal decimaler

inga_komman: SANT om inte tusentalsseparatorer ska användas, standard är FALSKT

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`TEXT`, `VALUE`, `DOLLAR`.

`JIS`
`JIS` text med halvbredds-katakana och ASCII-tecken konverterade till fullbredd

    JIS(text)

##### Argument

text: originaltext

##### Beskrivning

`JIS` konverterar halvbredds-katakana och ASCII-tecken till motsvarande fullbreddstecken och kopierar alla andra.

Skillnaden mellan halvbredd och helbreddstecken beskrivs i http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11/.

##### Observera

Även om `JIS` i föråldrade kodningar används för att översätta mellan 1-byte och 2-byte-tecken är det inte så för UTF-8.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

För de flesta strängar har denna funktion samma effekt som i Excel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`ASC`.

`LEFT`
`LEFT` de första ant_teck tecknen i strängen s

    LEFT(s;ant_teck)

##### Argument

s: strängen

ant_teck: antal tecken att returnera (standardvärdet är 1)

##### Observera

Om strängen s är i ett höger-till-vänster-skriftspråk, är de returnerade första tecken från den högra sidan av strängen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`MID`, `RIGHT`, `LEN`, `MIDB`, `RIGHTB`, `LENB`.

`LEFTB`
`LEFTB` de första tecknen för strängen s bestående av som mest ant_byte byte

    LEFTB(s;ant_byte)

##### Argument

s: strängen

ant_byte: högsta antal byte att returnera (standardvärdet är 1)

##### Observera

Semantiken för denna funktion ändras allteftersom olika program implementerar den. Om strängen är i ett höger-till-vänster-skriftspråk, är de returnerade första tecken från den högra sidan av strängen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Medan denna funktion är syntaktiskt Excel-kompatibel så kommer skillnaderna i den underliggande textkodningen vanligtvis att ge olika resultat.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Medan denna funktion är OpenFormula-kompatibel så är det mesta av dess beteende just nu implementationsspecifikt.

##### Se även

`MIDB`, `RIGHTB`, `LENB`, `LEFT`, `MID`, `RIGHT`, `LEN`.

`LEN`
`LEN` antal tecken för strängen s

    LEN(s)

##### Argument

s: strängen

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CHAR`, `CODE`, `LENB`.

`LENB`
`LENB` antal byte i strängen s

    LENB(s)

##### Argument

s: strängen

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CHAR`, `CODE`, `LEN`.

`LOWER`
`LOWER` en gemen version av strängen text

    LOWER(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`UPPER`.

`MID`
`MID` delsträngen för strängen s med början på position position bestående av längd tecken

    MID(s;position;längd)

##### Argument

s: strängen

position: startpositionen

längd: antal tecken att returnera

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`LEFT`, `RIGHT`, `LEN`, `LEFTB`, `MIDB`, `RIGHTB`, `LENB`.

`MIDB`
`MIDB` tecknen följande första startpos byte, omfattande som mest ant_byte byte

    MIDB(s;startpos;ant_byte)

##### Argument

s: strängen

startpos: siffran för byte att starta med (standard är 1)

ant_byte: högsta antal byte att returnera (standardvärdet är 1)

##### Observera

Semantiken för denna funktion ändras allteftersom olika program implementerar den.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Medan denna funktion är syntaktiskt Excel-kompatibel så kommer skillnaderna i den underliggande textkodningen vanligtvis att ge olika resultat.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Medan denna funktion är OpenFormula-kompatibel så är det mesta av dess beteende just nu implementationsspecifikt.

##### Se även

`LEFTB`, `RIGHTB`, `LENB`, `LEFT`, `MID`, `RIGHT`, `LEN`.

`NUMBERVALUE`
`NUMBERVALUE` numeriskt värde av text

    NUMBERVALUE(text;separator)

##### Argument

text: sträng

separator: decimalseparator

##### Observera

Om text inte ser ut som ett decimaltal, returnerar `NUMBERVALUE` värdet som VALUE skulle returnera (ignorerar given separator).

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`VALUE`.

`PROPER`
`PROPER` text med början av varje ord versaliserat

    PROPER(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LOWER`, `UPPER`.

`REPLACE`
`REPLACE` string old with num characters starting at start replaced by new

    REPLACE(gammal;start;antal;ny)

##### Argument

gammal: originaltext

start: startposition

antal: antal tecken att ersätta

ny: ersättningssträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`MID`, `SEARCH`, `SUBSTITUTE`, `TRIM`.

`REPLACEB`
`REPLACEB` string old with up to num bytes starting at start replaced by new

    REPLACEB(gammal;start;antal;ny)

##### Argument

gammal: originaltext

start: byteposition för start

antal: antal byte att ersätta

ny: ersättningssträng

##### Beskrivning

`REPLACEB` ersätter strängen av giltiga unicode-tecken med början vid byte start och med slut vid start+ant-1 med strängen ny.

##### Observera

Semantiken för denna funktion ändras allteftersom olika program implementerar den.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Medan denna funktion är syntaktiskt Excel-kompatibel så kommer skillnaderna i den underliggande textkodningen vanligtvis att ge olika resultat.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Medan denna funktion är OpenFormula-kompatibel så är det mesta av dess beteende just nu implementationsspecifikt.

##### Se även

`MID`, `SEARCH`, `SUBSTITUTE`, `TRIM`.

`REPT`
`REPT` ant strängupprepningar av text

    REPT(text;ant)

##### Argument

text: sträng

ant: icke-negativt heltal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CONCATENATE`.

`RIGHT`
`RIGHT` de sista ant_teck tecknen i sträng s

    RIGHT(s;ant_teck)

##### Argument

s: strängen

ant_teck: antal tecken att returnera (standardvärdet är 1)

##### Observera

Om strängen s är i ett höger-till-vänster-skriftspråk är de returnerade sista tecken från vänster av strängen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Denna funktion är kompatibel med OpenFormula.

##### Se även

`LEFT`, `MID`, `LEN`, `LEFTB`, `MIDB`, `RIGHTB`, `LENB`.

`RIGHTB`
`RIGHTB` de sista tecknen för strängen s, omfattande som mest ant_byte byte

    RIGHTB(s;ant_byte)

##### Argument

s: strängen

ant_byte: högsta antal byte att returnera (standardvärdet är 1)

##### Observera

Semantiken för denna funktion ändras allteftersom olika program implementerar den. Om strängen s är i ett höger-till-vänster-skriftspråk är de returnerade sista tecken från vänster av strängen.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Medan denna funktion är syntaktiskt Excel-kompatibel så kommer skillnaderna i den underliggande textkodningen vanligtvis att ge olika resultat.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Medan denna funktion är OpenFormula-kompatibel så är det mesta av dess beteende just nu implementationsspecifikt.

##### Se även

`LEFTB`, `MIDB`, `LENB`, `LEFT`, `MID`, `RIGHT`, `LEN`.

`SEARCH`
`SEARCH` platsen för strängen sök i text efter positionen start

    SEARCH(sök;text;start)

##### Argument

sök: söksträng

text: sökfält

start: startposition, standard är 1

##### Beskrivning

sök kan innehålla jokertecken (*) och frågetecken (?). Ett frågetecken matchar varje enskilt tecken och ett jokertecken matchar varje sträng inklusive den tomma strängen. För att söka efter * och ?, föregå symbolen med ~.

##### Observera

Denna sökning är inte skiftlägeskänslig. Om sök inte hittas returnerar `SEARCH` #VÄRDE! Om start är mindre än ett eller är större än längden av text, returnerar `SEARCH` #VÄRDE!

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`FIND`, `SEARCHB`.

`SEARCHB`
`SEARCHB` platsen för strängen sök inom text efter bytepositionen start

    SEARCHB(sök;text;start)

##### Argument

sök: söksträng

text: sökfält

start: startbyteposition, standard 1

##### Beskrivning

sök kan innehålla jokertecken (*) och frågetecken (?). Ett frågetecken matchar varje enskilt tecken och ett jokertecken matchar varje sträng inklusive den tomma strängen. För att söka efter * och ?, föregå symbolen med ~.

##### Observera

Denna sökning är inte skiftlägeskänslig. Om sök inte hittas returnerar `SEARCHB` #VÄRDE! Om start är mindre än ett eller är större än bytelängden av text, returnerar `SEARCHB` #VÄRDE! Semantiken för denna funktion ändras allteftersom olika program implementerar den.

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Medan denna funktion är syntaktiskt Excel-kompatibel så kommer skillnaderna i den underliggande textkodningen vanligtvis att ge olika resultat.

##### Kompatibilitet med OpenDocument Format (ODF)

Medan denna funktion är OpenFormula-kompatibel så är det mesta av dess beteende just nu implementationsspecifikt.

##### Se även

`FINDB`, `SEARCH`.

`SUBSTITUTE`
`SUBSTITUTE` text med alla förekomster av gammal ersatt av ny

    SUBSTITUTE(text;gammal;ny;ant)

##### Argument

text: originaltext

gammal: strängen att ersätta

ny: ersättningssträng

ant: om ant är specificerat och är en siffra ersätts endast ant:e förekomsten av gammal

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`REPLACE`, `TRIM`.

`T`
`T` värde om och endast om värde är text, annars tom

    T(värde)

##### Argument

värde: originalvärde

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CELL`, `N`, `VALUE`.

`TEXT`
`TEXT` värde som en sträng formaterad format

    TEXT(värde;format)

##### Argument

värde: värde att formatera

format: önskat format

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DOLLAR`, `FIXED`, `VALUE`.

`TEXTJOIN`
`TEXTJOIN` konkateneringen av strängarna s1, s2… avgränsad av avg

    TEXTJOIN(avg;tom;s1;s2;…)

##### Argument

avg: avgränsare

tom: ignorera tomma

s1: första sträng

s2: andra sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CONCATENATE`.

`TRIM`
`TRIM` text med endast ensamma tomrum mellan ord

    TRIM(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`CLEAN`, `MID`, `REPLACE`, `SUBSTITUTE`.

`UNICHAR`
`UNICHAR` Unicode-tecken representerat av Unicode-kodpunkten x

    UNICHAR(x)

##### Argument

x: Unicode-kodpunkt

##### Se även

`CHAR`, `UNICODE`, `CODE`.

`UNICODE`
`UNICODE` Unicode-kodpunkt för tecknet t

    UNICODE(t)

##### Argument

t: tecken

##### Se även

`UNICHAR`, `CODE`, `CHAR`.

`UPPER`
`UPPER` en versalversion av strängen text

    UPPER(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`LOWER`.

`VALUE`
`VALUE` numeriskt värde av text

    VALUE(text)

##### Argument

text: sträng

##### Microsoft Excel-kompatibilitet

Denna funktion är Excel-kompatibel.

##### Se även

`DOLLAR`, `FIXED`, `TEXT`.

### Tidsserieanalys

`FOURIER`
`FOURIER` Fouriertransformen eller inversen för fouriertransformen

    FOURIER(Sekvens;Invers;Separat)

##### Argument

Sekvens: datasekvensen att transformera

Invers: om sant, beräknas inversen för fouriertransformen, standardvärdet är falskt

Separat: om sant, lämnas de riktiga och imaginära delarna separat, standard är falskt

##### Beskrivning

Denna vektorfunktion returnerar fouriertransformen eller inversa fouriertransformen för den givna datasekvensen.

Utdata består av en kolumn av komplexa tal om Separat är falskt och av två kolumner av reella tal om Separat är sant.

Om Separat är sant kommer den första utdatakolumnen innehålla den reella delen och den andra delen de imaginära delarna.

##### Observera

Om Sekvens varken är en n×1- eller 1×n-vektor returnerar denna funktion #VÄRDE!

`HPFILTER`
`HPFILTER` Hodrick Prescott-filter

    HPFILTER(Sekvens;λ)

##### Argument

Sekvens: datasekvensen att transformera

λ: filterparameter λ, standardvärdet är 1600

##### Beskrivning

Denna vektorfunktion returnerar trend och cykliska komponenter erhållna genom att tillämpa filtret Hodrick Prescott Filter med parameter λ på den givna datasekvensen.

Utdata består av två kolumner av siffror, den första med trendkomponenten och den andra den cykliska komponenten.

##### Observera

Om Sekvens varken är en n×1- eller 1×n-vektor returnerar denna funktion #VÄRDE! Om Sekvens innehåller mindre än 6 numeriska värden returnerar denna funktion #VÄRDE!

`INTERPOLATION`
`INTERPOLATION` interpolerade värden motsvarande målen för given abskissa

    INTERPOLATION(abskissor;ordinator;mål;interpolation)

##### Argument

abskissor: abskissor för de givna datapunkterna

ordinator: ordinator för de givna datapunkterna

mål: abskissor för interpolerad data

interpolation: metod för interpolation, standardvärdet är 0 (”linjär”)

##### Beskrivning

Utdata består alltid av en kolumn av tal.

Möjliga interpolationsmetoder är:

0: linjär;

1: linjär med medelvärde;

2: trappsteg;

3: trappsteg med medelvärde;

4: naturlig kubisk spline;

5: naturlig kubisk spline med medelvärde.

##### Observera

abskissor borde vara given i ökande ordning. Om abskissor inte är i stigande ordning är funktionen `INTERPOLATION` signifikant långsammare. Om två abskissor-värden är lika returneras ett fel. Om några av interpolationsmetoderna 1 (”linjär med medelvärde”), 3 (”trappsteg med medelvärde”), och 5 (”naturlig kubisk spline med medelvärde”) används, är antalet returnerade värden ett mindre än antalet mål, och målvärdena måste anges i stigande ordning. Värdena som returneras är medelhöjderna för interpolationsfunktionen för intervallen bestämda av målvärden. Strängar och tomma celler i abskissor och ordinator ignoreras. Om flera måldata tillhandahålls måste de vara i samma kolumn i närliggande celler.

##### Se även

`PERIODOGRAM`.

`PERIODOGRAM`
`PERIODOGRAM` periodogram för de givna datapunkterna

    PERIODOGRAM(ordinator;filter;abskissor;interpolation;antal)

##### Argument

ordinator: ordinator för de givna datapunkterna

filter: fönsterfunktion att användas, standard är inga filter

abskissor: abskissor för givna data, standard är jämnt avstånd mellan abskissor

interpolation: metod för interpolation, standard är ingen

antal: antal interpolerade datapunkter

##### Beskrivning

Om en interpolationsmetod används, är antalet returnerade värden en mindre än antalet mål och målvärdena måste vara givna i ökande ordning.

Utdata består alltid av en kolumn av tal.

Möjliga interpolationsmetoder är:

0: linjär;

1: linjär med medelvärde;

2: trappsteg;

3: trappsteg med medelvärde;

4: naturlig kubisk spline;

5: naturlig kubisk spline med medelvärde.

Möjliga fönsterfunktioner:

0: inga filter (rektangulärt fönster)

1: Bartlett (triangulärt fönster)

2: Hahn (cosinus-fönster)

3: Welch (paraboliskt fönster)

##### Observera

Strängar och tomma celler i abskissor och ordinator ignoreras. Om flera måldata tillhandahålls måste de vara i samma kolumn i närliggande celler.

##### Se även

`INTERPOLATION`.

## Keybinding Reference

This appendix lists the keyboard shortcuts which are defined by default in Gnumeric.

Keybindings are combinations of keystrokes which tell an application to run a task. These can greatly speed-up the user's interactions with an application. Some of the most common ones are Ctrl s to save a file or Ctrl q to quit the application. Gnumeric also comes with keybindings to make your spreadsheet experience faster.

Normally, keybindings are next to a command in a menu. For example, if Save has Ctrl s next to it, that means that Ctrl s can be typed at the same time to save your file. However, some keystrokes aren't listed in the menus. They are as follows:

- F2 sets the current cell for editing. The cursor is inserted at the end of the current text.

- Ctrl-O opens the Load file dialog window.

- Ctrl-F3 opens the Define Name dialog window.

- F4 repeat the last action.

- Ctrl-G opens the Go to dialog window which allows you to jump to a specified cell.

- Ctrl-H opens the Search and Replace dialog where you can search through your spreadsheets for text strings and replace them with something else.

- Ctrl-F opens the Search Center. The Search Center allows you to search through your spreadsheets for text strings.

- Ctrl-~ Formats the current selection as a 'General'.

- Ctrl-$ Formats the current selection as the default currency

- Ctrl-# Formats the current selection with default date style

- Ctrl-^ Formats the current selection as superscript

- Ctrl-@ Formats the current selection with the default time format

- Ctrl-! Formats the current selection as an integer (a number with no decimal places).

- Ctrl-& Adds a thin border around the current selection

- Ctrl-_ Formats the current selection as subscript

- Ctrl-B or Ctrl-2 Toggles the boldness of the font in the current selection.

- Ctrl-I or Ctrl-3 Toggles the italics of the font in the current selection.

- Ctrl-U or Ctrl-4 Toggles single underlining of the current selection.

- Ctrl-5 Toggles strikethrough of the current selection.

- Shift-Ctrl-G Changes the keyboard focus to the current cell indicator described in .

- Ctrl-a Select all cells on the currently focused sheet.